Electra Elite IPK Programming Manual - Southwestern Telephone ...
Electra Elite IPK Programming Manual - Southwestern Telephone ...
Electra Elite IPK Programming Manual - Southwestern Telephone ...
You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles
YUMPU automatically turns print PDFs into web optimized ePapers that Google loves.
NOTICE<br />
Note that when converting this document from its original format to a .pdf file,<br />
some minor font and format changes may occur causing slight variations. When<br />
viewing and printing this document, we cannot guarantee that your specific PC or<br />
printer will support all of the fonts or graphics. Therefore, when you view the<br />
document fonts may be substituted and your individual printer may not have the<br />
capability to print the document correctly.
PROGRAMMING MANUAL<br />
INT-1026 (<strong>IPK</strong>)<br />
Document Revision 4<br />
(Release 4000/4500)
NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. reserves the right to change the specifications, functions, or<br />
features at any time without notice.<br />
NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. has prepared this document for use by its employees and<br />
customers. The information contained herein is the property of NEC Unified Solutions, Inc.<br />
and shall not be reproduced without prior written approval of NEC Unified Solutions, Inc.<br />
D term is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation and <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> is a registered<br />
trademark of NEC America, Inc. Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.<br />
AT&T is a registered trademark of American <strong>Telephone</strong> and Telegraph Company. Lucent<br />
Technologies is a trademark or service mark of Lucent Technologies Inc. Nortel Networks<br />
and the Nortel Networks logo are trademarks of Nortel Networks.<br />
Copyright 2005<br />
NEC Infrontia, Inc.<br />
6535 N. State Highway 161<br />
Irving, TX 75039-2402<br />
Technology Development
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
SECTION 1 ABOUT THIS MANUAL<br />
PREFACE<br />
The <strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> provides the technician with all of the necessary<br />
information for programming the <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> system.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> can be accomplished using a PC or a Multiline Terminal.<br />
SECTION 2 MANUAL ORGANIZATION<br />
This manual provides instructions for programming the <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> system.<br />
Chapter 1 – Multiline Terminal <strong>Programming</strong><br />
This chapter includes the basic information for programming the system.<br />
Chapter 2 – Memory Blocks<br />
This chapter includes all of the Memory Blocks used to program the system. Detailed<br />
programming instructions are provided for each Memory Block.<br />
Chapter 3 – Advanced Applications<br />
This chapter includes information for code restrictions, Automatic Route Selection<br />
(ARS) and ISDN-PRI Call-by-Call.<br />
Appendices<br />
The appendices include the function time chart, character codes and the display<br />
abbreviations.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 1
Document ___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
SECTION 3 SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS<br />
A set of manuals for the <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> system provides all the information necessary to<br />
install and support the system. Other manuals included in the set are described<br />
below.<br />
This manual provides detailed information related to every feature available in the<br />
system.<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> General Description <strong>Manual</strong><br />
This manual provides general information about the system features, configuration,<br />
and standards. An overview of the <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> system that is useful when<br />
presenting information to potential customers is provided.<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> System Hardware <strong>Manual</strong><br />
The System Hardware <strong>Manual</strong> is intended for the system installer and provides<br />
detailed instructions for installing the <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> KSU, ETUs, Multiline<br />
Terminals, and optional equipment.<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Least Cost Routing <strong>Manual</strong><br />
This manual provides instructions to the service technician for programming the<br />
customer site for least cost routing.<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Automatic Call Distribution <strong>Manual</strong><br />
This manual provides the service technician with instructions for programming the<br />
ACD. This manual can also be used by the ACD supervisor at the customer site to<br />
become familiar with the ACD/MIS feature.<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Job Specifications <strong>Manual</strong><br />
This manual is intended to help the technician install and maintain the <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong><br />
system. Job specification worksheets are provided. When these worksheets are<br />
completed, they provide all of the system programming values and configuration<br />
information necessary to help technicians maintain the system.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 Preface
<strong>Electra</strong> ___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> ACD Plus Installation <strong>Manual</strong><br />
This manual provides general information about the <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> ACD<br />
Plus features, installation procedures and feature programming. The NEC <strong>Electra</strong><br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> ACD Plus is an Automatic Call Distribution card that supports up to<br />
40 Agents and 12 supervisors at one time.<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Wireless System <strong>Manual</strong><br />
This manual describes the system and provides hardware installation and<br />
programming procedures for the <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Wireless Communication<br />
System (WCS).<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 3
Document ___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4 Preface
TABLE OF CONTENTS<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Chapter 1 Multiline Terminal <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Section 1 General Information ............................................................................ 1-1<br />
Section 2 <strong>Programming</strong> the System ................................................................... 1-1<br />
2.1 Features of <strong>Programming</strong> ................................................................ 1-2<br />
2.2 System <strong>Programming</strong> Modes ........................................................... 1-3<br />
2.3 Before <strong>Programming</strong> ........................................................................ 1-4<br />
2.3.1 Check Points ........................................................................................ 1-4<br />
2.3.2 Preliminary Points ................................................................................ 1-4<br />
2.4 Writing System Data ........................................................................ 1-5<br />
2.5 <strong>Programming</strong> Methods .................................................................... 1-6<br />
2.5.1 Initializing the System .......................................................................... 1-6<br />
2.5.2 Using the Multiline Terminal for <strong>Programming</strong> ..................................... 1-6<br />
2.5.3 Entering <strong>Programming</strong> Mode ............................................................... 1-8<br />
2.5.4 Page Switching .................................................................................... 1-9<br />
2.5.5 Station Port Numbering Plan ............................................................. 1-12<br />
Section 3 System Data List ................................................................................ 1-13<br />
Chapter 2 Memory Blocks<br />
Section 1 <strong>Programming</strong> System Data Using the Memory Block ...................... 2-1<br />
1-1-00 Pause Time Selection .................................................................................2-2<br />
1-1-01 DP Interdigit Time Selection ........................................................................2-3<br />
1-1-02 Hookflash Time Selection ............................................................................2-4<br />
1-1-03 Hold Recall Time Selection (Non-Exclusive Hold) ......................................2-6<br />
1-1-04 Automatic Redial Time Selection ................................................................2-8<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> i
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-1-05 Start Time Selection ....................................................................................2-9<br />
1-1-06 CO/PBX Incoming Ringing Alarm Time Selection .....................................2-11<br />
1-1-07 Tie Line Delay Ringing Time Selection .....................................................2-13<br />
1-1-09 <strong>Manual</strong> Pause Selection ...........................................................................2-16<br />
1-1-11 System Transfer/Camp-On Selection .......................................................2-18<br />
1-1-12 Station Transfer/Camp-On Recall Time Selection ....................................2-19<br />
1-1-13 CO Transfer Ring Pattern Selection ..........................................................2-21<br />
1-1-14 CO Transfer Ring Tone Selection .............................................................2-23<br />
1-1-18 System Speed Dial Restriction by Tenant .................................................2-24<br />
1-1-20 DID Digit Length Selection ........................................................................2-27<br />
1-1-21 DID Digit Conversion Assignment .............................................................2-28<br />
1-1-22 DID Digit Conversion Table .......................................................................2-29<br />
1-1-23 DID Forward Station Number for Busy Station or Undefined Digit ............2-31<br />
1-1-24 PBX/CTX Access Code Assignment I .......................................................2-33<br />
1-1-25 PBX/CTX Access Code Assignment II ......................................................2-35<br />
1-1-27 Automatic Day/Night Mode Switching Time Assignment ..........................2-37<br />
1-1-28 Distinctive Ringing by <strong>Telephone</strong> or CO Selection ...................................2-39<br />
1-1-29 Private Line Assignment ...........................................................................2-40<br />
1-1-30 Route Advance Block Assignment ............................................................2-41<br />
1-1-32 Automatic Day/Night Mode by Day of Week Selection .............................2-43<br />
1-1-33 Speed Dial Number/Name Display Selection ............................................2-45<br />
1-1-34 Tie Line First Ring Pattern Selection .........................................................2-46<br />
1-1-35 Speed Dial Buffer Allocation .....................................................................2-48<br />
1-1-37 Trunk Queuing Timeout Selection .............................................................2-49<br />
1-1-46 Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment ...........................................................2-51<br />
1-1-47 Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment ...........................................................2-58<br />
1-1-48 Access Code (3-Digit) Assignment ...........................................................2-60<br />
1-1-49 Networking Trunk Group/Route Advance Assignment ..............................2-64<br />
1-1-50 CO/PBX Outgoing Digit Add Assignment ..................................................2-65<br />
1-1-51 CO Line Ringing Pattern Selection ...........................................................2-67<br />
1-1-52 PBX Line Ringing Pattern Selection ..........................................................2-69<br />
1-1-53 Tie Line Delay Ring Pattern Selection ......................................................2-71<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
ii Table of Contents
<strong>Electra</strong> ___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-1-54 Automated Attendant Transfer Ring Pattern .............................................2-73<br />
1-1-55 DID Line Ringing Pattern Selection ...........................................................2-75<br />
1-1-57 CO/PBX Prepause Time Selection ............................................................2-76<br />
1-1-59 Synchronous Ringing Selection ................................................................2-77<br />
1-1-60 8-Digit Matching Table Assignment ...........................................................2-78<br />
1-1-61 8-Digit Matching Table to Class Assignment .............................................2-80<br />
1-1-62 System Speed Dial Override by Class Selection ......................................2-82<br />
1-1-63 Hold Recall Time Selection (Exclusive) .....................................................2-83<br />
1-1-65 Code Restriction Class Allow/Deny Selection ...........................................2-85<br />
1-1-66 8-Digit Matching Table to Normal Dial Assignment ...................................2-86<br />
1-1-67 OCC Table Assignment .............................................................................2-87<br />
1-1-68 8-Digit Matching Table to OCC Table Assignment ....................................2-88<br />
1-1-69 Tie Line Code Restriction Assignment ......................................................2-89<br />
1-1-70 Code Restriction Class Assignment When Lockout is Set ........................2-90<br />
1-1-71 First Delay Announcement Start Time Selection .......................................2-91<br />
1-1-72 First Delay Announcement Repeat Selection ............................................2-92<br />
1-1-73 First to Second Delay Announcement Interval Time Selection .................2-93<br />
1-1-74 Second Delay Announcement Repeat Selection ......................................2-94<br />
1-1-75 Second Delay Announcement Repeat Interval Time Selection .................2-95<br />
1-1-76 Barge-In Alert Tone Assignment ...............................................................2-96<br />
1-1-77 Delayed Ringing Time Assignment (CO) ..................................................2-97<br />
1-1-78 Caller ID Display Assignment for System Mode ........................................2-98<br />
1-1-79 BGM Port Assignment ...............................................................................2-99<br />
1-1-80 ISDN DTMF Duration/Interdigit Selection ................................................2-100<br />
1-1-81 ISDN Dial Interval Time Selection ...........................................................2-101<br />
1-1-82 CO Feature Code Service for Code Restriction ......................................2-103<br />
1-1-86 Call Monitoring Alert Tone Assignment ...................................................2-104<br />
1-2-00 Internal Paging Timeout Selection ..........................................................2-105<br />
1-2-01 Intercom Call Voice/Tone Signal Selection .............................................2-107<br />
1-2-02 Automatic Callback Release Time Selection ...........................................2-108<br />
1-2-03 2~7-Digit Station Number Selection ........................................................2-110<br />
1-2-04 Call Arrival Key Block Assignment ..........................................................2-112<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> iii
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-2-08 Specified Station Access Code Assignment ...........................................2-114<br />
1-2-09~18 Customized Message 1~10 Assignment .................................................2-116<br />
1-2-19 Intercom Ring Pattern Selection .............................................................2-117<br />
1-2-20 Intercom Ring Tone Selection .................................................................2-119<br />
1-2-21 PS <strong>Telephone</strong> Block Assignment ............................................................2-120<br />
1-2-22 Call Forward - No Answer Time Selection ..............................................2-122<br />
1-2-23 System Call Park Recall Time Selection .................................................2-124<br />
1-2-24 Intercom Feature Access Code Assignment ...........................................2-126<br />
1-2-25 Internal Paging Alert Tone Selection .......................................................2-128<br />
1-2-26 Delayed Ringing Time Assignment (ICM) ...............................................2-129<br />
1-2-30 PS Out of Area Time Assignment ...........................................................2-130<br />
1-2-32 IP <strong>Telephone</strong> Block Assignment .............................................................2-131<br />
1-2-33 IP <strong>Telephone</strong> Block Assignment Allow/Deny Selection ..........................2-133<br />
1-2-34 Expanded Station Number Assignment ..................................................2-135<br />
1-3-01 Bounce Protect Time Selection ...............................................................2-137<br />
1-3-02 SLT Hookflash Signal Selection ..............................................................2-138<br />
1-3-03 First Digit PBR Release Time Selection ..................................................2-139<br />
1-3-04 Dial 1 (DP) Hookflash Selection ..............................................................2-141<br />
1-3-05 Hookflash Start Time Selection ...............................................................2-142<br />
1-3-06 Hookflash End Time Selection ................................................................2-143<br />
1-3-07 Voice Mail Digit Add Assignment ............................................................2-144<br />
1-3-08 Voice Mail DTMF Delay Time Selection ..................................................2-145<br />
1-3-09 Voice Mail Disconnect Time Selection ....................................................2-146<br />
1-3-10 Voice Mail DTMF Duration/Interdigit Time Selection ..............................2-147<br />
1-3-11 SLT/PS II Talk Start Timer ......................................................................2-148<br />
1-3-12 SLT/ISDN TELCO Account Codes Allow/Deny Selection .......................2-150<br />
1-4-00 Tandem Transfer Automatic Disconnect Time Selection ........................2-151<br />
1-4-01 Automated Attendant First Digit PBR Release Time Selection ...............2-152<br />
1-4-02 Automated Attendant Transfer Delayed Ringing Time Selections ..........2-154<br />
1-4-03 Automated Attendant No Answer Disconnect Time Selection ................2-157<br />
1-4-04 Tandem Transfer SMDR Print Extension Assignment ............................2-159<br />
1-4-05 Automatic Tandem Trunk by Night Mode Selection ................................2-160<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
iv Table of Contents
<strong>Electra</strong> ___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-4-08 Automated Attendant PBR Timeout Response Selection .......................2-161<br />
1-4-09 Automated Attendant PBR Start Time Selection .....................................2-162<br />
1-4-11 Automated Attendant Message Day/Night Mode Selection ....................2-163<br />
1-4-12 Automated Attendant Message to Tenant Assignment ...........................2-164<br />
1-4-13 Automated Attendant Answer Delay Time Assignment ...........................2-165<br />
1-4-14 Automated Attendant Message Access Code<br />
(1-Digit) Assignment ................................................................................2-166<br />
1-4-15 Automated Attendant Message Access Code<br />
(2-Digit) Assignment ................................................................................2-169<br />
1-4-16 Automated Attendant Message Repeat Selection ...................................2-170<br />
1-4-17 Automated Attendant Delay Announcement Hold Tone Selection ..........2-171<br />
1-4-18 Automated Attendant Delay Announcement Assignment .......................2-172<br />
1-4-19 Automated Attendant 1st to 2nd Delay Announcement<br />
Interval Time Selection ............................................................................2-173<br />
1-4-20 Automated Attendant Delay Announcement<br />
Disconnect Time Selection ......................................................................2-174<br />
1-4-21 Automated Attendant Extension Number Assignment ............................2-175<br />
1-4-22 Automated Attendant Direct Extension Ring Assignment .......................2-176<br />
1-5-02 SMDR Print Format ................................................................................2-177<br />
1-5-13 Printer Connected Selection ...................................................................2-178<br />
1-5-14 Printer Line Feed Control Selection ........................................................2-179<br />
1-5-25 SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment .........................................................2-181<br />
1-5-26 SMDR Incoming/Outgoing Print Selection ..............................................2-182<br />
1-6-01 Attendant Add-On Console to <strong>Telephone</strong> Port Assignment ....................2-183<br />
1-6-03 DSS Call Voice/Tone Signal Selection ....................................................2-184<br />
1-6-05 Attendant Add-On Console Key Selection ..............................................2-185<br />
1-6-07 Message Board Lamp Assignment .........................................................2-188<br />
1-6-08 Attendant Transfer Selection During Live Record ...................................2-189<br />
1-7-00 Doorphone Assignment ...........................................................................2-191<br />
1-7-01 Doorphone Display Time Selection .........................................................2-192<br />
1-7-02 External Speaker Connection Selection ..................................................2-194<br />
1-7-03 External Paging Alert Tone Selection ......................................................2-195<br />
1-7-04 Doorphone Ring Pattern Selection ..........................................................2-196<br />
1-7-05 Doorphone Ringing Frequency Selection ................................................2-198<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> v
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-7-06 External Paging Timeout Selection .........................................................2-200<br />
1-7-07 External Ring Relay Pattern Selection ....................................................2-202<br />
1-7-08 External Speaker Chime Selection .........................................................2-204<br />
1-7-09 External Speaker Chime Start Time Selection ........................................2-205<br />
1-8-01 SLT or Automated Attendant/DISA to CPU PBR Selection ....................2-207<br />
1-8-02 PBR Receive Level Assignment for Automated Attendant/DISA ............2-208<br />
1-8-04 Time Display (12h/24h) Selection ...........................................................2-210<br />
1-8-07 Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection 1 ...................................2-211<br />
1-8-08 Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2 .......................................2-214<br />
1-8-09 Music on Hold Pattern Selection .............................................................2-220<br />
1-8-10 PBR Interdigit Release Time Selection ...................................................2-221<br />
1-8-11 System Refresh Time Assignment ..........................................................2-223<br />
1-8-12 VRS Message Recording Time Selection ...............................................2-224<br />
1-8-13 VRS Message Function Assignment .......................................................2-225<br />
1-8-15 Tone Assignment ....................................................................................2-227<br />
1-8-16 Voice Prompt to Tone Assignment ..........................................................2-230<br />
1-8-17 PC <strong>Programming</strong> Password Assignment ................................................2-231<br />
1-8-18 Site Name Assignment ............................................................................2-232<br />
1-8-25 ACD/UCD Group Agent Assignment .......................................................2-233<br />
1-8-26 Voice Mail Quick Transfer Master Hunt Number .....................................2-234<br />
1-8-27 Forced Account Code/Authorization Code Length Assignment ..............2-236<br />
1-8-29 SCD (Simplified Call Distribution) Pilot Number Assignment ..................2-238<br />
1-8-30 SCD Group Agent Assignment ...............................................................2-239<br />
1-8-31 Hold Tone Source Assignment ...............................................................2-240<br />
1-8-32 Hold Internal Tone Volume Selection ......................................................2-241<br />
1-8-33 Master Clock Selection ...........................................................................2-242<br />
1-8-35 COM Port Baud Rate Setting Assignment ..............................................2-244<br />
1-8-36 COM Port Parity/Stop Bit Setting Assignment ........................................2-245<br />
1-8-37 General Purpose Relay Assignment .......................................................2-246<br />
1-8-38 Modem Number For Remote <strong>Programming</strong> Assignment ........................2-247<br />
1-8-40 ACD Hunt Time .......................................................................................2-248<br />
1-8-43 Enhanced 911 Trunk Assignment ...........................................................2-249<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
vi Table of Contents
<strong>Electra</strong> ___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-8-44 Enhanced 911 Alternate Route Assignment ...........................................2-251<br />
1-8-45 Enhanced 911 Alternate Route Assignment (Maintenance Busy) ..........2-252<br />
1-8-46 Enhanced 911 Dialing Digit Assignment .................................................2-254<br />
1-8-47 Call Arrival Key Voice Mail Message Notification Assignment ................2-255<br />
1-8-48 Automatic Daylight Saving Time Selection ..............................................2-256<br />
1-8-49 New AA-Info Yes/No Selection ................................................................2-257<br />
1-8-51 Call Park Selection ..................................................................................2-260<br />
1-9-00 DISA ID Code Assignment ......................................................................2-261<br />
1-9-02 DISA Password Effect/Invalid Selection ..................................................2-262<br />
1-10-00 Call by Call Type of Network ID Assignment ...........................................2-263<br />
1-10-01 Call by Call ID Plan Assignment ..............................................................2-265<br />
1-10-02 Call by Call Type of Number Assignment ................................................2-267<br />
1-10-03 Call by Call Numbering Plan ID Assignment ...........................................2-269<br />
1-10-04 Call by Call Network ID Assignment ........................................................2-271<br />
1-10-05 Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Service) ........................2-273<br />
1-10-06 Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Feature) ........................2-275<br />
1-10-07 Call by Call Service Parameter Assignment ............................................2-277<br />
1-10-08 Call by Call Max Digit Assignment ..........................................................2-279<br />
1-10-09 Call by Call Simulated Facility Group Assignment ..................................2-281<br />
1-10-20 Call by Call Outgoing SFG Assignment ..................................................2-283<br />
1-10-21 Call by Call Outgoing/Incoming SFG Assignment ...................................2-285<br />
1-10-22 Call by Call Incoming Type Selection ......................................................2-287<br />
1-11-00 T1 Signal Format Selection .....................................................................2-289<br />
1-11-01 Clear Channel Selection .........................................................................2-290<br />
1-11-02 Line Length Selection ..............................................................................2-291<br />
1-11-03 IP K-CCIS Selection ................................................................................2-292<br />
1-11-05 T1 Channel Selection ..............................................................................2-294<br />
1-11-06 Signaling Selection ..................................................................................2-296<br />
1-11-07 DTI Trunk Type Assignment ....................................................................2-297<br />
1-11-08 Digits Delete for T1 ANI Assignment .......................................................2-299<br />
1-12-00 ACD/UCD Group Pilot Number Assignment ...........................................2-301<br />
1-12-01 ACD/UCD Group Overflow Destination Assignment ...............................2-303<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> vii
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-12-02 ACD/UCD Overflow Time Selection ........................................................2-305<br />
1-13-00 PRT Channel Assignment .......................................................................2-307<br />
1-13-01 PRT Signal Format Selection ..................................................................2-309<br />
1-13-02 Clear Channel Selection .........................................................................2-311<br />
1-13-03 Call by Call Service Selection .................................................................2-312<br />
1-13-04 PRT B Channel Outgoing Priority Selection ............................................2-313<br />
1-13-05 PRT B Channel-to-Trunk Group Assignment ..........................................2-314<br />
1-14-00 ARS Allow/Deny Selection ......................................................................2-317<br />
1-14-01 ARS Dialing Assignment .........................................................................2-318<br />
1-14-02 ARS Dial Allow/Deny Selection ...............................................................2-320<br />
1-14-03 ARS Route Table Number Assignment ...................................................2-322<br />
1-14-04 ARS Trunk Group to Route Number Assignment ...................................2-324<br />
1-14-05 ARS Digit Delete Assignment .................................................................2-326<br />
1-14-06 ARS Digit Add Assignment .....................................................................2-328<br />
1-14-07 ARS Max Digit Assignment .....................................................................2-330<br />
1-15-00 K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection ...................................................2-333<br />
1-15-01 Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignment ................................2-335<br />
1-15-02 Common Signal Channel Assignment ....................................................2-337<br />
1-15-03 Originating Point Code Assignment ........................................................2-339<br />
1-15-04 Destination Point Code Assignment ........................................................2-341<br />
1-15-05 Destination Point Code Transfer Assignment .........................................2-343<br />
1-15-06 Originating Office Code Number Assignment .........................................2-346<br />
1-15-07 K-CCIS Message Response Timeout Assignment .................................2-348<br />
1-15-08 Link Reconnect Allow/Deny Selection .....................................................2-350<br />
1-15-09 K-CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Assignment ..............................2-352<br />
1-15-10 Calling Name Display Allow/Deny Selection ...........................................2-354<br />
1-15-11 Centralized Billing Allow/Deny Selection .................................................2-356<br />
1-15-12 Centralized Billing – Point Code of Center Office Assignment ................2-358<br />
1-15-13 Centralized Day/Night Switching for Remote Office Assignment ............2-360<br />
1-15-14 Centralized Day/Night Switching for Main Office Assignment .................2-362<br />
1-15-15 Centralized BLF Send Point Code Assignment ......................................2-364<br />
1-15-16 Centralized BLF Send Extension Number Assignment ...........................2-366<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
viii Table of Contents
<strong>Electra</strong> ___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-15-17 Centralized BLF Send Time Assignment ................................................2-368<br />
1-15-18 Centralized BLF Receive Extension Number Assignment ......................2-370<br />
1-15-19 Centralized 911 Allow/Deny Selection ....................................................2-372<br />
1-15-20 Centralized 911/Calling Party (CPN) Originating Number Selection .......2-374<br />
1-15-21 Centralized 911 Look Ahead Routing Allow/ Deny Selection ..................2-376<br />
1-16-00 Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection .........................................................2-379<br />
1-16-01 Port Speed Selection – 10/100 Base-T ..................................................2-381<br />
1-16-02 Port Duplex Mode Selection ....................................................................2-383<br />
1-16-03 MDI/MDIX Mode Selection ......................................................................2-385<br />
1-16-04 VLAN Mode Selection .............................................................................2-387<br />
1-16-05 Default VLAN ID Tag Insertion Assignment ............................................2-389<br />
1-16-06 Port Based Priority Selection ...................................................................2-391<br />
1-16-07 High Priority RX Tag Threshold ...............................................................2-393<br />
1-16-08 High Priority TX Tag Assignment ............................................................2-395<br />
1-16-09 Low Priority TX Tag Assignment .............................................................2-397<br />
1-16-10 Port Mirroring Selection ...........................................................................2-399<br />
1-16-11 Mirroring Source Port Assignment ..........................................................2-401<br />
1-16-12 Mirroring Target Port Assignment ...........................................................2-403<br />
1-16-13 VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment .....................................................2-405<br />
1-16-14 Port VLAN Group Membership ................................................................2-407<br />
1-16-15 VLAN Tag Insertion Selection .................................................................2-409<br />
1-16-16 Flow Control for Full Duplex Selection ....................................................2-411<br />
1-16-17 Back Pressure for Half Duplex ................................................................2-413<br />
2-01 Trunk to Tenant Assignment ...................................................................2-415<br />
2-05 Line Key Selection ..................................................................................2-417<br />
2-06 Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode .......................................................2-418<br />
2-07 System Speed Dial Display Assignment .................................................2-421<br />
2-08 ECR Relay to Tenant Assignment ...........................................................2-423<br />
2-09 DID Limit to Tenant Assignment ..............................................................2-424<br />
3-00 Trunk Name/Number Assignment ...........................................................2-425<br />
3-02 Trunk Status Selection ............................................................................2-426<br />
3-03 Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment ..........................................................2-427<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> ix
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
3-04 Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Yes/No Selection .............................................2-428<br />
3-05 Trunk Incoming Answer Mode Selection .................................................2-430<br />
3-06 Automatic Tandem Trunk Assignment ....................................................2-432<br />
3-07 CO/PBX Ringing Variation Selection ......................................................2-433<br />
3-11 CO External Source Selection ................................................................2-434<br />
3-12 Trunk-to-MOH Trunk Assignment ...........................................................2-435<br />
3-14 Tie Line Type Assignment .......................................................................2-436<br />
3-15 Trunk DTMF Duration/Interdigit Selection ...............................................2-438<br />
3-16 Tie Line Prepause Time Selection ..........................................................2-440<br />
3-17 Tie Line Answer Detect Time Selection ..................................................2-441<br />
3-18 Tie Line Release Detect Time Selection .................................................2-442<br />
3-19 Tie Line/CO/PBX Incoming Signal Detect Time Selection ......................2-444<br />
3-20 Tie Line Loop Off-Guard Time Selection .................................................2-446<br />
3-21 Tie Line Length of Wink Signal Selection ................................................2-448<br />
3-22 Tie Line Length of Delay Signal Selection ..............................................2-450<br />
3-24 Tie Line Incoming Interdigit Timeout Selection .......................................2-452<br />
3-25 Tie Line Wink/Delay Signal Detect Timeout Selection ............................2-454<br />
3-27 Tie Line Dial Tone Selection ...................................................................2-456<br />
3-28 Tie Line Reorder Tone Selection ............................................................2-457<br />
3-29 Trunk Internal Transmit Pad Selection ....................................................2-459<br />
3-30 Trunk Internal Receive Pad Selection .....................................................2-461<br />
3-31 Trunk External Transmit Pad Selection ...................................................2-463<br />
3-32 Trunk External Receive Pad Selection ....................................................2-465<br />
3-33 Disconnect Recognition Time Selection ..................................................2-467<br />
3-38 Automated Attendant Message to Trunk Selection .................................2-468<br />
3-40 Automatic Release Signal Detection Selection .......................................2-469<br />
3-41 Delay Announcement Assignment ..........................................................2-470<br />
3-42 DIT Assignment .......................................................................................2-471<br />
3-43 ANA Assignment .....................................................................................2-473<br />
3-44 Caller ID Display Assignment for CO/PBX Line ......................................2-475<br />
3-45 Live Record Trunk Selection ...................................................................2-477<br />
3-50 ISDN Line SPID Assignment ...................................................................2-478<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
x Table of Contents
<strong>Electra</strong> ___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
3-52 ISDN Trunk Directory Number Assignment .............................................2-479<br />
3-53 Caller Name Indication Selection ............................................................2-480<br />
3-59 Automated Attendant Function Selection ................................................2-481<br />
3-61 DIT/ANA Delay Answer Time Selection ..................................................2-482<br />
3-62 DIT Tenant Assignment ..........................................................................2-484<br />
3-63 DIT Weekend Mode Selection .................................................................2-485<br />
3-64 DIT Night Mode Delay Answer Selection ................................................2-486<br />
3-65 Hold Tone Automated Attendant Selection .............................................2-487<br />
3-67 CO/PBX Ringing Pattern Selection .........................................................2-489<br />
3-69 911 – Cut Through Trunk Selection ........................................................2-491<br />
3-70 CIC Number Assignment .........................................................................2-493<br />
3-73 CO Message Waiting Yes/No Selection ..................................................2-495<br />
3-77 ISDN-BRI/PRI Directory Number Checking Selection .............................2-496<br />
3-90 Polarity Reverse Selection ......................................................................2-498<br />
3-91 Trunk Type Selection ..............................................................................2-499<br />
3-92 Trunk (Installed, DP/DTMF) Selection .....................................................2-500<br />
4-01 CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode) ...................................................2-501<br />
4-02 CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode) .................................................2-503<br />
4-03 Doorphone Chime Assignment (Day Mode) ............................................2-505<br />
4-04 Doorphone Chime Assignment (Night Mode) ..........................................2-507<br />
4-07 Code Restriction Class Assignment (Day Mode) ....................................2-509<br />
4-08 Code Restriction Class Assignment (Night Mode) ..................................2-510<br />
4-09 <strong>Telephone</strong> to Tenant Assignment ...........................................................2-511<br />
4-10 Station Number Assignment ....................................................................2-513<br />
4-11 Ringing Line Preference Selection ..........................................................2-515<br />
4-12 Line Key Selection for <strong>Telephone</strong> Mode .................................................2-517<br />
4-13 CO/PBX Busy Forward Station Assignment ............................................2-520<br />
4-14 Intercom Master Hunt Number Selection ................................................2-521<br />
4-15 Intercom Master Hunt Number Forward Assignment ..............................2-523<br />
4-17 Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment .....................................2-526<br />
4-18 Station Name Assignment .......................................................................2-528<br />
4-19 Trunk Outgoing Restriction ......................................................................2-530<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> xi
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
4-23 Prime Line/Hot Line Assignment .............................................................2-532<br />
4-24 SLT Hookflash Assignment .....................................................................2-534<br />
4-26 DISA ID Number Station Assignment .....................................................2-536<br />
4-28 Multilingual LCD Indication Selection ......................................................2-537<br />
4-29 HFU Selection .........................................................................................2-538<br />
4-30 Hold/Transfer Recall Display Selection ...................................................2-539<br />
4-31 Receiving Internal/All Call Page Selection ..............................................2-540<br />
4-32 Trunk Digit Restriction .............................................................................2-541<br />
4-35 Voice Mail/SLT Selection ........................................................................2-542<br />
4-36 Voice Prompt Selection ...........................................................................2-544<br />
4-37 Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Day Mode) .................................2-545<br />
4-38 Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Night Mode) ...............................2-547<br />
4-39 APR Ring Mode Assignment ...................................................................2-549<br />
4-40 LCR Class Selection ...............................................................................2-551<br />
4-41 SIE/CAR Ringing Line Preference Selection ..........................................2-553<br />
4-42 Call Forward-Busy Immediately/Delay Selection ....................................2-555<br />
4-43 Station to Call Appearance Block Assignment ........................................2-557<br />
4-44 Caller ID Preset Dial Outgoing CO Selection ..........................................2-558<br />
4-46 Live Record Auto Delete Selection .........................................................2-559<br />
4-47 ISDN Directory Number Selection ...........................................................2-560<br />
4-49 Caller ID Display for CAR Key Assignment .............................................2-562<br />
4-50 Multiline Terminal Type Selection ...........................................................2-563<br />
4-51 Off-Hook Ringing Selection .....................................................................2-565<br />
4-52 CO/PBX Answer Key Operation Without Ringing Assignment<br />
(Day Mode) .............................................................................................2-566<br />
4-53 CO/PBX Answer Key Operation Without Ringing Assignment<br />
(Night Mode) ...........................................................................................2-568<br />
4-54 Enhanced 911 CESID to Station Table Assignment ...............................2-570<br />
4-55 CO/PBX <strong>Telephone</strong> Ringing Pattern Selection .......................................2-572<br />
4-56 SMDR <strong>Telephone</strong> Print Selection ...........................................................2-574<br />
4-57 CO Line Ringing Pattern Priority Selection .............................................2-575<br />
4-58 Automated Attendant Selection for DID ..................................................2-577<br />
4-59 APR/APA Hookflash Selection ................................................................2-578<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
xii Table of Contents
<strong>Electra</strong> ___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
4-62 ISDN-PRI Directory Number Selection ....................................................2-580<br />
4-64 Code Restriction Class (without Authorization Code)<br />
Day Mode Assignment ............................................................................2-582<br />
4-65 Code Restriction Class (without Authorization Code)<br />
Night Mode Assignment ..........................................................................2-584<br />
4-66 MOH or Ring Back Tone Selection .........................................................2-586<br />
4-67 IP Station Number Assignment ...............................................................2-588<br />
4-68 LCD Line Key – Name Assignment .........................................................2-590<br />
4-69 CO Message Waiting Indication Assignment ..........................................2-592<br />
4-70 LCD Line Key – Name Assignment (Station Add-On Console) ...............2-594<br />
4-71 Station to Timer Class of Service ............................................................2-596<br />
4-90 SLT Data Line Security Assignment ........................................................2-598<br />
4-91 <strong>Telephone</strong> Ringing Variation Selection ...................................................2-600<br />
4-92 Receiving Volume Selection ....................................................................2-602<br />
4-93 Internal Zone Paging Selection ...............................................................2-603<br />
4-94 3-Minute Alarm Selection ........................................................................2-605<br />
4-95 DTMF/DP SLT Type Selection ................................................................2-606<br />
5-00 Digit Add/Del for Tie Line Networking Assignment ..................................2-607<br />
5-01 Tie Line Networking Tandem Connection Assignment ...........................2-609<br />
5-02 8-Digit Matching Table to Trunk Group Assignment ...............................2-611<br />
5-03 OCC Table to Trunk Group Assignment .................................................2-612<br />
5-04 LCR Class to Trunk Group Selection ......................................................2-613<br />
5-05 Common Signaling Channel Route Assignment .....................................2-615<br />
5-06 Trunk Group Outgoing Priority Selection .................................................2-617<br />
6-2 Tenant Mode Copy Assignment ..............................................................2-619<br />
6-3 CO Line Mode Copy Assignment ............................................................2-621<br />
6-4 <strong>Telephone</strong> Mode Copy Assignment ........................................................2-623<br />
6-5 Trunk Group Mode Copy Assignment .....................................................2-625<br />
7-1 Card Interface Slot Assignment ...............................................................2-627<br />
7-2 <strong>Telephone</strong> Type Assignment ..................................................................2-635<br />
7-3-00 MIF (ACD) Assignment ...........................................................................2-636<br />
7-3-01 MIF (LCR) Assignment ............................................................................2-637<br />
7-3-02 MIF (SMDR) Assignment ........................................................................2-638<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> xiii
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
7-3-03 MIF (UCD) Assignment ...........................................................................2-639<br />
7-3-04 MIF (Caller ID) Assignment .....................................................................2-640<br />
8-1 ROM Version Confirmation .....................................................................2-641<br />
8-2 System Speed Dial Memory Clear ..........................................................2-642<br />
8-3 Station Speed Dial Memory Clear ...........................................................2-643<br />
8-8 Second Initialization ................................................................................2-645<br />
Chapter 3 Advanced Applications<br />
Clock/Calendar Setting ...........................................................................2-646<br />
Section 1 Code Restriction .................................................................................. 3-1<br />
1.1 General ........................................................................................... 3-1<br />
1.2 Default Assignments ....................................................................... 3-1<br />
1.3 Memory Blocks ................................................................................ 3-2<br />
1.4 Memory Block Description .............................................................. 3-3<br />
1.4.1 General ................................................................................................ 3-3<br />
1.4.2 OCC Assignment/Operation ................................................................ 3-3<br />
1.4.3 8-Digit Matching Table Assignment/Operation .................................... 3-4<br />
1.4.4 System Speed Dial Override by Class Selection<br />
(Memory Block 1-1-62) ........................................................................ 3-5<br />
1.4.5 Tie Line Code Restriction Assignment<br />
(Memory Block 1-1-69) ........................................................................ 3-5<br />
1.4.6 Code Restriction Class Assignment when Lockout is Set<br />
(Memory Block 1-1-70) ........................................................................ 3-6<br />
1.4.7 CO Feature Code Service For Code Restriction<br />
(Memory Block 1-1-82) ........................................................................ 3-6<br />
1.4.8 Trunk Digit Restriction Assignment<br />
(Memory Block 4-32) ........................................................................... 3-6<br />
1.4.9 Code Restriction Class Assignment (Day Mode)<br />
(Memory Block 4-07) ........................................................................... 3-6<br />
1.4.10 Code Restriction Class Assignment (Night Mode)<br />
(Memory Block 4-08) ........................................................................... 3-6<br />
1.5 Code Restriction Tables (Default Values) ....................................... 3-6<br />
1.5.1 OCC Tables with Default Values ......................................................... 3-6<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
xiv Table of Contents
<strong>Electra</strong> ___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1.5.2 8-Digit Matching Tables with Default Values ....................................... 3-8<br />
1.6 Code Restriction Algorithm ............................................................ 3-12<br />
Section 2 Automatic Route Selection ............................................................... 3-15<br />
2.1 General .......................................................................................... 3-15<br />
2.2 Memory Blocks .............................................................................. 3-15<br />
2.3 Memory Block Description ............................................................. 3-16<br />
2.3.1 Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment<br />
(Memory Block 1-1-46) ...................................................................... 3-16<br />
2.3.2 Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2<br />
(Memory Block 1-8-08) ...................................................................... 3-16<br />
2.3.3 ARS Allow/Deny Selection (Memory Block 1-14-00) ......................... 3-16<br />
2.3.4 ARS Dialing Assignment (Memory Block 1-14-01) ............................ 3-16<br />
2.3.5 ARS Dial Allow/Deny Selection (Memory Block 1-14-02) .................. 3-16<br />
2.3.6 ARS Route Table Number Assignment<br />
(Memory Block 1-14-03) .................................................................... 3-16<br />
2.3.7 ARS Trunk Group to Route Number Assignment<br />
(Memory Block 1-14-04) .................................................................... 3-16<br />
2.3.8 ARS Digit Delete Assignment (Memory Block 1-14-05) .................... 3-17<br />
2.3.9 ARS Digit Add Assignment (Memory Block 1-14-06) ........................ 3-17<br />
2.3.10 ARS Max Digit Assignment (Memory Block 1-14-07) ....................... 3-17<br />
2.3.11 Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment (Memory Block 3-03) .................. 3-17<br />
2.3.12 Trunk Type Selection (Memory Block 3-91) ..................................... 3-17<br />
2.3.13 LCR Class Selection (Memory Block 4-40) ....................................... 3-17<br />
2.4 ARS Operation Example ................................................................ 3-18<br />
2.5 Service Conditions ......................................................................... 3-20<br />
2.6 ARS Flowcharts ............................................................................. 3-27<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> xv
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Section 3 ISDN-PRI Call by Call ........................................................................ 3-31<br />
3.1 General ......................................................................................... 3-31<br />
3.2 Memory Blocks .............................................................................. 3-31<br />
3.3 Memory Block Description ............................................................ 3-33<br />
3.3.1 DID Digit Length Selection (Memory Block 1-1-20) ........................... 3-33<br />
3.3.2 DID Digit Conversion Assignment (Memory Block 1-1-21) ................ 3-33<br />
3.3.3 DID Digit Conversion Table (Memory Block 1-1-22) .......................... 3-33<br />
3.3.4 DID Forward Station Number for Busy Station or<br />
Undefined Digit (Memory Block 1-1-23) ............................................. 3-33<br />
3.3.5 Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment<br />
(Memory Block 1-1-46~48) ................................................................ 3-33<br />
3.3.6 Route Advance Block Assignment (Memory Block 1-1-30) ............... 3-34<br />
3.3.7 ISDN DTMF Duration/Interdigit Selection<br />
(Memory Block 1-1-80) ...................................................................... 3-34<br />
3.3.8 ISDN / K-CCIS Interval Time Selection<br />
(Memory Block 1-1-81) ...................................................................... 3-34<br />
3.3.9 SLT or Automated Attendant/DISA to CPU PBR Selection<br />
(Memory Block 1-8-01) ...................................................................... 3-34<br />
3.3.10 PBR Receive Level Assignment for Automated Attendant/DISA<br />
(Memory Block 1-8-02) ...................................................................... 3-34<br />
3.3.11 Master Clock Selection (Memory Block 1-8-33) ................................ 3-34<br />
3.3.12 Trunk to Tenant Assignment (Memory Block 2-01) ........................... 3-34<br />
3.3.13 Line Key Selection (Memory Block 2-05) ........................................... 3-34<br />
3.3.14 Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode (Memory Block 2-06) ............... 3-35<br />
3.3.15 Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment (Memory Block 3-03) .................. 3-35<br />
3.3.16 Trunk Incoming Answer Mode Selection<br />
(Memory Block 3-05) ......................................................................... 3-35<br />
3.3.17 Automatic Release Signal Detection Selection<br />
(Memory Block 3-40) ......................................................................... 3-35<br />
3.3.18 DIT Assignment (Memory Block 3-42) ............................................... 3-35<br />
3.3.19 ANA Assignment (Memory Block 3-43) ............................................. 3-35<br />
3.3.20 ISDN Trunk Directory Number Assignment<br />
(Memory Block 3-52) ......................................................................... 3-35<br />
3.3.21 Line Key Selection (Memory Block 3-53) ........................................... 3-36<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
xvi Table of Contents
<strong>Electra</strong> ___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
3.3.22 Trunk Type Selection (Memory Block 3-91) ...................................... 3-36<br />
3.3.23 Trunk (Installed, DP/DTMF) Selection (Memory Block 3-92) ............. 3-36<br />
3.3.24 CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)<br />
(Memory Block 4-01) ......................................................................... 3-36<br />
3.3.25 CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)<br />
(Memory Block 4-02) ......................................................................... 3-36<br />
3.3.26 <strong>Telephone</strong> to Tenant Assignment<br />
(Memory Block 4-09) ......................................................................... 3-36<br />
3.3.27 Line Key Selection for <strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
(Memory Block 4-12) ......................................................................... 3-36<br />
3.3.28 Station to Call Appearance Block Assignment<br />
(Memory Block 4-43) ......................................................................... 3-37<br />
3.3.29 Multiline Terminal Type Selection (Memory Block 4-50) ................... 3-37<br />
3.3.30 PRT Channel Assignment (Memory Block 1-13-00) .......................... 3-37<br />
3.3.31 Call by Call Service Selection (Memory Block 1-13-03) .................... 3-37<br />
3.3.32 Call by Call Type of Number Assignment<br />
(Memory Block 1-10-02) .................................................................... 3-37<br />
3.3.33 Call by Call Numbering Plan ID Assignment<br />
(Memory Block 1-10-03) .................................................................... 3-37<br />
3.3.34 Call by call Type of Network ID Assignment<br />
(Memory Block 1-10-00) .................................................................... 3-37<br />
3.3.35 Call by Call ID Plan Assignment (Memory Block 1-10-01) ................ 3-38<br />
3.3.36 Call by Call Network ID Assignment (Memory Block 1-10-04) .......... 3-38<br />
3.3.37 Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Service)<br />
(Memory Block 1-10-05) .................................................................... 3-38<br />
3.3.38 Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Feature)<br />
(Memory Block 1-10-06) .................................................................... 3-38<br />
3.3.39 Call by Call Service Parameter Assignment<br />
(Memory Block1-10-07) ..................................................................... 3-38<br />
3.3.40 Call by Call Max Digit Assignment<br />
(Memory Block 1-10-08) .................................................................... 3-38<br />
3.3.41 Call by Call Simulated Facility Group Assignment<br />
(Memory Block 1-10-09) .................................................................... 3-39<br />
3.3.42 Call by Call Outgoing SFG Assignment<br />
(Memory Block 1-10-20) .................................................................... 3-39<br />
3.3.43 Call by Call Outgoing/Incoming SFG Assignment<br />
(Memory Block 1-10-21) .................................................................... 3-39<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> xvii
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
3.3.44 Call by Call Incoming Type Selection<br />
(Memory Block 1-10-22) .................................................................... 3-39<br />
3.4 Call by Call (CBC) <strong>Programming</strong><br />
(LCR PC Software V2.0 or Higher) ............................................... 3-40<br />
3.4.1 The International/Operator Table ....................................................... 3-40<br />
3.4.2 The OCC Table .................................................................................. 3-40<br />
3.4.3 Operator Call Time Out Table Example ............................................. 3-41<br />
3.5 Least Cost Routing (LCR) <strong>Programming</strong> ...................................... 3-42<br />
3.6 Operating Procedures Example .................................................... 3-42<br />
3.7 Dialing Examples .......................................................................... 3-44<br />
3.7.1 Dial 9 (Trunk access code) 1-212-752-5000 ..................................... 3-44<br />
3.7.2 Dial 9 (Trunk access code) 214-222-5000 ......................................... 3-45<br />
3.7.3 Dial 9-1-333-444-5000 ....................................................................... 3-46<br />
3.7.4 Dial 9-1-800-777-5000 ....................................................................... 3-46<br />
3.7.5 Dial 9-1-913-381-6000 ....................................................................... 3-47<br />
3.7.6 Dial 9-011-81 (Country Code)1-471-82-1111 .................................... 3-47<br />
3.7.7 Outgoing Tie Line Service – Detour to Analog Trunk when<br />
Simulated Facility Group (SFG) Busy................................................. 3-47<br />
3.7.8 Outgoing FX service – Dial 9-1 +500-222-3333 ................................ 3-47<br />
3.7.9 Local Operator Call – Dial 9 +0 ......................................................... 3-48<br />
3.8 Service Conditions ........................................................................ 3-48<br />
3.9 Call by Call (CBC) Termination Flowchart .................................... 3-51<br />
Section 4 HUB(8) VLAN and QoS Configuration ............................................. 3-52<br />
4.1 General ......................................................................................... 3-52<br />
4.2 Memory Block Descriptions ........................................................... 3-52<br />
4.3 Quality of Service Configuration with VLANs ................................ 3-55<br />
4.4 Port Based Priority Example ......................................................... 3-56<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
xviii Table of Contents
<strong>Electra</strong> ___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Appendix A Function Time Chart<br />
Section 1 Time Chart ........................................................................................... A-1<br />
Appendix B Character Codes<br />
Section 1 Character Assignment ....................................................................... B-1<br />
1.1 Character Code Tables ................................................................... B-1<br />
1.2 Dial Pad Character Assignment ...................................................... B-4<br />
Appendix C Display Abbreviations<br />
1.2.1 Trunk Name or Number Assignment Example ................................... B-4<br />
1.2.2 Enter Speed Dial Name ...................................................................... B-5<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> xix
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
xx Table of Contents
LIST OF FIGURES<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Figure 1-1 <strong>Programming</strong> Flowchart .....................................................................................1-2<br />
Figure 1-2 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Multiline Terminal ....................................................................1-6<br />
Figure 1-3 Page Display for 8-Key, and 16-Key Multiline Terminals .................................1-10<br />
Figure 1-4 Page Switching for Data Values ......................................................................1-11<br />
Figure 3-1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) System Data Flow .....................................3-20<br />
Figure 3-2 Quality of Service Configuration ......................................................................3-55<br />
Figure 3-3 Physical Layout and Default VLAN IDs ...........................................................3-58<br />
Figure 3-4 VLAN Settings .................................................................................................3-59<br />
Figure 3-5 Port Priority Settings ........................................................................................3-60<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> xxi
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
xxii List of Figures
LIST OF TABLES<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Table 1-1 <strong>Programming</strong> Modes ..................................................................................................1-3<br />
Table 1-2 Multiline Terminal Keys Used for <strong>Programming</strong> .........................................................1-7<br />
Table 2-1 Voice Mail AA-Info Settings ....................................................................................2-258<br />
Table 2-2 Card Interface Slot Assignment ..............................................................................2-631<br />
Table 3-1 Automatic Route Selection to Route Number Assignment .......................................3-21<br />
Table 3-2 Route Number to Trunk Group/RAB Selection and Digit Control .............................3-25<br />
Table 3-3 Memory Block Data ..................................................................................................3-44<br />
Table A-1 Function Time Chart .................................................................................................. A-1<br />
Table B-1 System Data Input ..................................................................................................... B-4<br />
Table B-2 Speed Dial Name Input ............................................................................................. B-5<br />
Table C-1 Abbreviations used in Multiline Terminal Displays .................................................... C-1<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> xxiii
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
xxiv List of Tables
Multiline Terminal<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Chapter 1<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
SECTION 1 GENERAL INFORMATION<br />
A stored program controls the <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> system. When the system is initially<br />
powered up, the CPUI( )-U( ) ETU scans all interface and AP slots to determine the<br />
hardware configuration. The system stores this information and the default values in<br />
the resident system program memory. After initially powering up the system, a trained<br />
technician can change the resident system program to meet the specific needs of an<br />
individual customer.<br />
SECTION 2 PROGRAMMING THE SYSTEM<br />
The battery on the CPU must be connected. When the battery is not<br />
connected before programming begins, data may be lost when a<br />
power outage occurs.<br />
System data programming may be necessary when:<br />
the system is installed for the first time.<br />
�<br />
components of an existing system are replaced.<br />
�<br />
� functions of an existing system are changed.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 1 - 1
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
New Installation<br />
Develop System<br />
Data Sheet<br />
Installation<br />
Test System with Default<br />
Values<br />
System Data<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> (Note 1)<br />
TEST<br />
2.1 Features of <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Component<br />
Replacement<br />
Rewrite System<br />
Data Sheet<br />
Installation<br />
System Data<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> (Note 2)<br />
Figure 1-1 <strong>Programming</strong> Flowchart<br />
The following features are provided with Multiline <strong>Programming</strong>:<br />
Function<br />
Change<br />
System Data<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> (Note 3)<br />
� The system operates from default after initial power-up. Only the<br />
parameters that change must be programmed.<br />
System programming characters are displayed on the LCD of the<br />
�<br />
Multiline Terminal.<br />
Several types of system programming can be entered at the same time.<br />
�<br />
Data programmed for one telephone (e.g., Tenant Mode, or <strong>Telephone</strong><br />
�<br />
Mode) can be copied to another telephone.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
1 - 2 Multiline Terminal <strong>Programming</strong><br />
TEST<br />
Existing System<br />
Rewrite System<br />
Data Sheet<br />
TEST<br />
Note 1: For new installation, system default values are assigned when power is<br />
turned on. Program the system data to be changed only.<br />
Note 2: For component replacement, program the relevant system data.<br />
Note 3: For function change, program the system data to be revised.
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Two Multiline Terminals, connected to ports 01 and 02, respectively, can<br />
�<br />
be used simultaneously for programming.<br />
2.2 System <strong>Programming</strong> Modes<br />
Modes and submodes are listed in Table 1-1 <strong>Programming</strong> Modes.<br />
Line<br />
Key<br />
Mode Name<br />
Table 1-1 <strong>Programming</strong> Modes<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 1 - 3<br />
Line<br />
Key<br />
Submode Name<br />
LK 1 CO Line<br />
LK 2 ICM<br />
LK 3 SLT<br />
LK 4 Transfer/Automated Attendant<br />
LK 5 SMDR/LCR<br />
LK 6 DSS<br />
LK 1 System Mode LK 7 ESP<br />
LK 8 PBR/Miscellaneous<br />
LK 9 DISA<br />
LK 10 Call by Call<br />
LK 11 DTI<br />
LK 12 ACD/UCD<br />
LK 13 PRI<br />
LK 14 ARS<br />
LK 15 K-CCIS<br />
LK 16 HUB<br />
LK 2 Tenant Mode N/A N/A<br />
LK 3 CO/PBX Line Mode N/A N/A<br />
LK 4 <strong>Telephone</strong> Mode N/A N/A<br />
LK 5 Trunk Group Mode N/A N/A<br />
LK 2 Tenant Mode Copy Assignment<br />
LK 6 Copy Mode<br />
LK 3<br />
LK 4<br />
CO Line Mode Copy Assignment<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Mode Copy Assignment<br />
LK 5 Trunk Group Mode Copy Assignment<br />
LK 1 Card Interface Slot Assignment<br />
LK 7 ETU Mode<br />
LK 2 <strong>Telephone</strong> Type Assignment<br />
LK 3 MIF Assignment<br />
LK 4 MIF (Caller ID) Assignment
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Line<br />
Key<br />
LK 8 Special Mode<br />
2.3 Before <strong>Programming</strong><br />
The technician should check the ROM version and the port numbers before<br />
programming the system.<br />
2.3.1 Check Points<br />
Confirm the ROM Version<br />
�<br />
The available features depend on the ROM version. Refer to<br />
Memory Block 8-1 (ROM Version Confirmation), or from any<br />
idle Display Terminal, press A andC.<br />
Confirm the Port Number<br />
�<br />
Port numbers are used for system programming. Refer to<br />
Memory Block 7-1 (Card Interface Slot Assignment).<br />
2.3.2 Preliminary Points<br />
Table 1-1 <strong>Programming</strong> Modes (Continued)<br />
Mode Name<br />
LK 1 ROM Version Confirmation<br />
LK 2 System Speed Dial Memory Clear<br />
LK 3 Station Speed Dial Memory Clear<br />
LK 8 Second Initialization<br />
To confirm station numbers press A andD. The display<br />
indicates the station number and the port number.<br />
Station<br />
Number<br />
Select System <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�<br />
Refer to Section 2 <strong>Programming</strong> the System on page 1-1.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
1 - 4 Multiline Terminal <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Line<br />
Key<br />
Port<br />
Number<br />
# # # = T E L X X<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Submode Name
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
2.4 Writing System Data<br />
After turning on power, the system data can be programmed using a Multiline<br />
Terminal connected to port 01 or port 02 (the Multiline Terminal must be idle).<br />
System programming can be performed while other Multiline Terminals in the<br />
system are in use. Some data is written into memory immediately after the<br />
programming process, but other data is not written until the stations or trunks<br />
are idle. When the data is not written until a station or trunk is idle, the station<br />
LCD displays DATA ENTRY, even after programming is complete, to indicate<br />
that system data entry is still in progress. When the in-use stations become<br />
idle, the data is written and the station LCD displays only the time.<br />
The data programmed for applicable Memory Blocks is not written for the<br />
following conditions:<br />
� When Multiline Terminals are in use:<br />
� Memory Block 2-01 (Trunk to Tenant Assignment)<br />
� Memory Block 2-05 (Line Key Selection)<br />
� Memory Block 2-07 (System Speed Dial Display Assignment)<br />
� Memory Block 4-09 (<strong>Telephone</strong> to Tenant Assignment)<br />
� When the PBR is in use:<br />
Memory Block 1-8-01 (SLT or Automated Attendant/DISA to CPU<br />
�<br />
PBR Selection)<br />
Memory Block 1-8-02 (PBR Receive Level Assignment for<br />
�<br />
Automated Attendant/DISA)<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 1 - 5
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2.5 <strong>Programming</strong> Methods<br />
Dial<br />
Keys<br />
2.5.1 Initializing the System<br />
Turn on the new Key Service Unit (KSU) power supply. After<br />
approximately 30 seconds, the system operates with the system<br />
default values.<br />
2.5.2 Using the Multiline Terminal for <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Hold<br />
Key<br />
System programming can be performed using a Display Multiline<br />
Terminal that is connected to station port 01 or 02.<br />
Figure 1-2 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Multiline Terminal shows the terminal in<br />
the offline mode.<br />
Transfer<br />
Key<br />
Speaker<br />
Key<br />
Figure 1-2 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Multiline Terminal<br />
Message<br />
Waiting LED<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
1 - 6 Multiline Terminal <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Exit<br />
Key<br />
Answer<br />
Key<br />
Display (LCD)<br />
Help<br />
Key<br />
Flexible Line<br />
Keys<br />
Feature<br />
Key<br />
Directory Key<br />
Recall<br />
Key<br />
Message Key<br />
Redial<br />
Key<br />
Softkeys<br />
MIC<br />
Key<br />
Conference<br />
Key
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Table 1-2 Multiline Terminal Keys Used for <strong>Programming</strong> provides a<br />
list and description of the keys used during Multiline Terminal<br />
<strong>Programming</strong>.<br />
Table 1-2 Multiline Terminal Keys Used for <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Key Description<br />
Used to enter data from the dial pad or to specify a Memory Block<br />
location. K~I<br />
Used to move the cursor to the left. The cursor moves one character<br />
space to the left each timeJis pressed.<br />
J<br />
Used to move the cursor to the right. The cursor moves one character<br />
space to the right each timeLis pressed.<br />
L<br />
F<br />
D<br />
Y<br />
A<br />
X<br />
H<br />
Flexible<br />
C<br />
W<br />
Used to select another mode. Press F to switch modes as follows:<br />
Mode or submode selection: Returns to Program Mode.<br />
�<br />
Data No. Mode: Return to a mode or submode selection, or<br />
�<br />
Program Mode (if no submode exists).<br />
Each time the conference key is pressed, Memory Block item changes<br />
are as follows:<br />
� Tenant Mode: The tenant number increments by one.<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode: The CO/PBX line number increments by one.<br />
�<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Mode: The telephone port number increments by one.<br />
�<br />
Trunk Group Mode: The Trunk group number increments by one.<br />
�<br />
Future use.<br />
Used to return to the previous page in system programming.<br />
Future use.<br />
Used to enter a pause in speed dial programming mode or to clear data<br />
in system programming mode.<br />
Line keys are used to specify a mode or submode when<br />
selecting a Memory Block or to select programming data for input.<br />
Used to proceed to the next page in system programming.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 1 - 7
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
B<br />
E<br />
G<br />
Table 1-2 Multiline Terminal Keys Used for <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Key Description<br />
This key is used to enter a pause, hyphen, asterisk or pound. To enter<br />
an asterisk or pound:<br />
B J + � =<br />
B L + = #<br />
B + A= A<br />
B + B= B<br />
B + C= C<br />
The Message Waiting LED turns on and off afterJorLis pressed.<br />
Used to exit the programming mode (go back on-line).<br />
Used to write (save) data. After entering data, press G ; the data is<br />
written into memory. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
2.5.3 Entering <strong>Programming</strong> Mode<br />
The following digital Multiline Terminals can be used to program the<br />
system. Station ports 01 and 02 are automatically assigned as<br />
programming stations.<br />
DTP or DTH/DTR-8D-1 TEL<br />
�<br />
DTU-8D-2 TEL<br />
�<br />
DTP or DTH/DTR-16D-1 TEL<br />
�<br />
DTU-16D-2 TEL<br />
�<br />
DTP or DTH/DTR-32D-1 TEL<br />
�<br />
DTU-32D-2 TEL<br />
�<br />
Using the DTH-16LD -1 TEL to program is not<br />
�<br />
recommended.<br />
To enter programming mode, the station must be idle (on-hook).<br />
Perform the following procedure to go off-line.<br />
1. Press A .<br />
2. Press H .<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
1 - 8 Multiline Terminal <strong>Programming</strong>
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
3. DialL, K, andJin sequence. The Multiline Terminal LCD<br />
indicates program mode is now active.<br />
2.5.4 Page Switching<br />
P R O G R A M M O D E<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
While off-line, the programming terminal cannot be signaled by<br />
any system station. Off-line mode does not timeout.<br />
In Memory Block 1-1-18 (System Speed Dial Restriction by Tenant)<br />
tenant numbers 00~07 are assigned to Flexible Line keys on the first<br />
page. Tenant number 08~15 are assigned to the Flexible Line keys<br />
on the second page. The tenant number corresponding to Flexible<br />
Line key 1 of the current page is displayed on the right side of the<br />
display.<br />
During system programming, a value (data) is assigned to each<br />
Flexible Line key. When the number of values exceeds the number<br />
of Flexible Line keys, value assignments are displayed on additional<br />
pages. The associated data can be entered on that page. The page<br />
number is displayed on the right side of the LCD.<br />
Figure 1-3 Page Display for 8-Key, and 16-Key Multiline Terminals<br />
shows an example of CO/PBX line keys on each page and their<br />
corresponding tenant numbers. In all cases, each page is<br />
represented by eight line keys.<br />
To navigate between pages, press C to access the next page,<br />
or press A to return to the previous page.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 1 - 9
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
16-Key Multiline Terminal<br />
DTU/DTP<br />
(Page 1)<br />
LCD Display:<br />
01 to indicate Page 1<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4<br />
01 02 03 04<br />
LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
05 06 07 08<br />
LK 9 LK 10 LK 11 LK 12<br />
09 10 11 12<br />
LK 13 LK 14 LK 15 LK 16<br />
13 14 15 16<br />
(Page 2)<br />
8-Key Multiline Terminal<br />
DTU/DTP<br />
Page 1<br />
LCD Display:<br />
01 to indicate Page 1<br />
09 to indicate page 2<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4<br />
01 02 03 04<br />
LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
05 06 07 08<br />
Page 2<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4<br />
09 10 11 12<br />
LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
13 14 15 16<br />
LCD Display:<br />
09 to indicate Page 2<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4<br />
09 10 11 12<br />
LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
13 14 15 16<br />
LK 9 LK 10 LK 11 LK 12<br />
17 18 19 20<br />
LK 13 LK 14 LK 15 LK 16<br />
21 22 23 24<br />
LCD Display:<br />
09 to indicate Page 2<br />
Page 1<br />
(Page 1)<br />
16-Key Multiline Terminal<br />
DTH/DTR<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK5 LK6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08<br />
LK 09 LK 10 LK 11 LK 12 LK 13 LK 14 LK 15 LK 16<br />
09 10 11 12 11 12 15 16<br />
(Page 2)<br />
8-Key Multiline Terminal<br />
DTH/DTR<br />
LCD Display:<br />
01 to indicate Page 1<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK5 LK6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08<br />
Page 2<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK5 LK6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16<br />
LCD Display:<br />
01 to indicate Page 1<br />
LCD Display:<br />
09 to indicate Page 2<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK5 LK6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16<br />
LK 9 LK 10 LK 11 LK 12 LK 13 LK 14 LK 15 LK 16<br />
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24<br />
Figure 1-3 Page Display for 8-Key, and 16-Key Multiline Terminals<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
1 - 10 Multiline Terminal <strong>Programming</strong>
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Figure 1-4 Page Switching for Data Values is an example of 10 data<br />
values. Values are displayed on two pages.<br />
(Page 1)<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4<br />
Data 01 Data 02 Data 03 Data 04<br />
LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
Data 05 Data 06 Data 07 Data 08<br />
(Page 2)<br />
16-Key Multiline Terminal<br />
DTU/DTP<br />
LCD Display:<br />
01 to indicate Page 1<br />
LK 9 LK 10 LK 11 LK 12<br />
Data 09 Data 10<br />
LK 13 LK 14 LK 15 LK 16<br />
LCD Display:<br />
09 to indicate Page 2<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK5 LK6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
Data<br />
01<br />
Figure 1-4 Page Switching for Data Values<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 1 - 11<br />
Data<br />
02<br />
Data<br />
03<br />
Data<br />
04<br />
Data<br />
05<br />
Data<br />
06<br />
Data<br />
07<br />
Data<br />
08<br />
LK 9 LK 10 LK 11 LK 12 LK 13 LK 14 LK 15 LK 16<br />
Data<br />
09<br />
Data<br />
10<br />
16-Key Multiline Terminal<br />
DTH/DTR
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2.5.5 Station Port Numbering Plan<br />
Some Memory Blocks require entering a 2-digit port number. The<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> system supports 48/120 ports, respectively.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> values for entry of Port Assignments are defined<br />
below:<br />
Port Assignments <strong>Programming</strong> Value<br />
01~99 01~99<br />
100~109 A0~A9<br />
110~119 B0~B9<br />
120 C0<br />
To enter an A, B, or C, press B and 1, 2, or 3.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
1 - 12 Multiline Terminal <strong>Programming</strong>
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
SECTION 3 SYSTEM DATA LIST<br />
LK 1 System Mode<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 1 CO Line<br />
The System Data List is a complete list of Memory Blocks that are available in the<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> system. The information is organized by mode, submode, and then<br />
numerically by Memory Block number. The Memory Block number and name, the<br />
default values, and programming values are provided for each Memory Block.<br />
Memory Block Name Default Value <strong>Programming</strong> Values<br />
00 Pause Time Selection 3.0s 1.0s, 3.0s<br />
01 DP Interdigit Time Selection B Pattern A or B<br />
02 Hookflash Time Selection 600ms 20ms, 40ms, 60ms, 80ms, 100ms,<br />
140ms,<br />
160ms, 200ms, 400ms, 600ms,<br />
800ms,<br />
1.0s, 1.5s, 2.0s, 3.0s, 5.0s<br />
03 Hold Recall Time Selection<br />
(Non-Exclusive Hold)<br />
25s (R2500 or lower)<br />
60s (R3000 or<br />
higher)<br />
04 Automatic Redial Time Selection Table 1: 030<br />
Table 2: 060<br />
Table 3: 002<br />
05 Start Time Selection 10s (R2500 or lower)<br />
02s (R3000 or<br />
higher)<br />
06 CO/PBX Incoming Ringing Alarm<br />
Time Selection<br />
07 Tie Line Delay Ringing Time<br />
Selection<br />
∞ (No Limit) (R2500<br />
or lower)<br />
000s (R3000 or<br />
higher)<br />
∞ (No Limit) (R2500<br />
or lower)<br />
000s (R3000 or<br />
higher)<br />
09 <strong>Manual</strong> Pause Selection NO NO, YS<br />
11 System Transfer/Camp-On<br />
Selection<br />
YS NO, YS<br />
25s, 45s, 60s, 90s, 120s, 180s, 240s,<br />
∞ (No Limit)(R2500 or lower)<br />
000s (No Limit), 001s~255s (R3000 or<br />
higher)<br />
Table 1: 001 ~ 050 sec.<br />
Table 2: 001 ~ 100 sec.<br />
Table 3: 001 ~ 015 times<br />
2s, 10s, 20s, 30s, 40s, 50s, 60s, 70s<br />
(R2500 or lower)<br />
00s (No Limit), 01s~99s (R3000 or<br />
higher)<br />
10s, 20s, 30s, ∞ (R2500 or lower)<br />
000s (No Limit), 001s~255s (R3000 or<br />
higher)<br />
10s, 20s, 30s, ∞ (R2500 or lower)<br />
000s (No Limit), 001s~255s (R3000 or<br />
higher)<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 1 - 13
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
LK 1 System Mode<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 1 CO Line (Continued)<br />
Memory Block Name Default Value <strong>Programming</strong> Values<br />
12 Station Transfer/Camp-On Recall<br />
Time Selection<br />
45s (R2500 or lower)<br />
060s (R3000 or<br />
higher)<br />
13 CO Transfer Ring Pattern Selection C OFF, ON, A ~ H<br />
14 CO Transfer Ring Tone Selection A A ~ H<br />
18 System Speed Dial Restriction by<br />
Tenant<br />
CO/PBX Line LED<br />
On<br />
20 DID Digit Length Selection 3 2, 3, or 4<br />
21 DID Digit Conversion Assignment NO NO, YS<br />
25s, 45s, 60s, 90s, 120s, 180s, 240s,<br />
∞ (No Limit) (R2500 or lower)<br />
000s (No Limit), 001s~999s (R3000 or<br />
higher)<br />
LED On: Not Restricted<br />
LED Off: Restricted<br />
22 DID Digit Conversion Table T T (Station or Closed Number)<br />
TN (Tenant)<br />
23 DID Forward Station Number for<br />
Busy Station or Undefined Digit<br />
24 PBX/CTX Access Code Assignment<br />
I<br />
25 PBX/CTX Access Code Assignment<br />
II<br />
27 Automatic Day/Night Mode<br />
Switching Time Assignment<br />
28 Distinctive Ringing by <strong>Telephone</strong> or<br />
CO Selection<br />
NON NON, T (TEL), TN (Tenant)<br />
9– Up to six digits (three numeric, three<br />
pauses)<br />
8– Up to six digits (three numeric, three<br />
pauses)<br />
Not Specified Day/Night Mode Time (24-hour clock)<br />
TEL TEL, CO<br />
29 Private Line Assignment Not Specified CO/PBX Line Number, Tel Port<br />
Number<br />
30 Route Advance Block Assignment All Blocks 00<br />
(Not Set)<br />
32 Automatic Day/Night Mode by Day<br />
of Week Selection<br />
33 Speed Dial Number/Name Display<br />
Selection<br />
CO/PBX Line LED<br />
Off Pattern 1<br />
(Sunday ~ Saturday)<br />
Priority of Trunk Group Number<br />
Pattern 1, Pattern 2<br />
DIAL DIAL, NAME<br />
34 Tie Line First Ring Pattern Selection PAT3 PAT1, PAT2, PAT3, PAT4, ICM,<br />
VOICE<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
1 - 14 Multiline Terminal <strong>Programming</strong>
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
LK 1 System Mode<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 1 CO Line (Continued)<br />
Memory Block Name Default Value <strong>Programming</strong> Values<br />
35 Speed Dial Buffer Allocation 100 100, 1,000 Memories<br />
37 Trunk Queuing Timeout Selection 10s (R2500 or lower)<br />
10s (R3000 or<br />
higher)<br />
10s, 20s, 30s, 60s (R2500 or lower)<br />
00s (No Limit), 01s~99s (R3000 or<br />
higher)<br />
46 Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment Refer to 1-1-46 Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment on page<br />
2-51.<br />
47 Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment Refer to 1-1-47 Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment on page<br />
2-58.<br />
48 Access Code (3-Digit) Assignment All Dial 000<br />
(Not Used)<br />
49 Networking Trunk Group/Route<br />
Advance Assignment<br />
50 CO/PBX Outgoing Digit Add<br />
Assignment<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 1 - 15<br />
N/A<br />
Not Specified 101~132 (Trunk Group 01 ~ 32) or<br />
201~216 (Route Advance Block<br />
01 ~ 16)<br />
Not Specified 10 digits max.<br />
51 CO Line Ringing Pattern Selection A26 A ~ H, NO<br />
52 PBX Line Ringing Pattern Selection B A ~ H, NO<br />
53 Tie Line Delay Ring Pattern<br />
Selection<br />
54 Automated Attendant Transfer Ring<br />
Pattern<br />
D A ~ H, NO<br />
C A ~ H, NO<br />
55 DID Line Ringing Pattern Selection A A ~ H, NO<br />
57 CO/PBX Prepause Time Selection 1s None, 1s~13s<br />
59 Synchronous Ringing Selection YS YS, NO<br />
60 8-Digit Matching Table Assignment Refer to 1-1-60 8-Digit Matching Table Assignment on page<br />
2-78.<br />
61 8-Digit Matching Table to Class<br />
Assignment<br />
62 System Speed Dial Override by<br />
Class Selection<br />
Refer to 1-1-61 8-Digit Matching Table to Class Assignment on<br />
page 2-80.<br />
YS NO = No Override<br />
YS = Override
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
LK 1 System Mode<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 1 CO Line (Continued)<br />
Memory Block Name Default Value <strong>Programming</strong> Values<br />
63 Hold Recall Time Selection<br />
(Exclusive)<br />
65 Code Restriction Class Allow/Deny<br />
Selection<br />
66 8-Digit Matching Table to Normal<br />
Dial Assignment<br />
1.0 (R2500 or lower)<br />
060s (R3000 or<br />
higher)<br />
Class 01 ~ 04 – YS<br />
Class 05 ~ 14 – NO<br />
Tables 00 ~ 14 =<br />
Used<br />
(All CO/PBX Line<br />
LEDs On)<br />
Table 15 = Unused<br />
(CO/PBX Line LED<br />
Off)<br />
67 OCC Table Assignment Tables 00 ~ 15 =<br />
Blank<br />
Table 16 =<br />
1010XXX<br />
68 8-Digit Matching Table to OCC<br />
Table Assignment<br />
69 Tie Line Code Restriction<br />
Assignment<br />
70 Code Restriction Class Assignment<br />
when Lockout is Set<br />
71 First Delay Announcement Start<br />
Time Selection<br />
72 First Delay Announcement Repeat<br />
Selection<br />
73 First to Second Delay<br />
Announcement Interval Time<br />
Selection<br />
74 Second Delay Announcement<br />
Repeat Selection<br />
75 Second Delay Announcement<br />
Repeat Interval Time Selection<br />
CO/PBX Line LED<br />
Off<br />
In minutes: 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 3.0,<br />
5.0, 8.0, ∞ (No Limit) (R2500 or lower)<br />
000s (No Limit), 001s~999s (R3000 or<br />
higher)<br />
YS (Allow)<br />
NO (Deny)<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
1 - 16 Multiline Terminal <strong>Programming</strong><br />
N/A<br />
N/A<br />
Refer to 1-1-68 8-Digit Matching Table<br />
to OCC Table Assignment on page<br />
2-88.<br />
YS NO = No Restriction<br />
YS = Restriction<br />
15 Class 00 ~ 15<br />
20 In seconds: 00, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60<br />
1 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8<br />
20 In seconds: 00, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60,<br />
∞ (No Limit)<br />
1 1~ 8<br />
20 In seconds: 00, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60,<br />
∞ (No Limit)<br />
76 Barge-In Alert Tone Assignment YS YS = Send Alert Tone<br />
NO = Do not send Alert Tone
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
LK 1 System Mode<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
77 Delayed Ringing Time Assignment<br />
(CO)<br />
78 Caller ID Display Assignment for<br />
System Mode<br />
15s 00 ~ 99 sec.<br />
Not Specified Up to 15 ports<br />
Tel Port No. = 01~ CO<br />
79 BGM Port Assignment 00 00 (Not Specified), 01~ 64<br />
80 ISDN DTMF Duration/Interdigit<br />
Selection<br />
81 ISDN / K-CCIS Interval Time<br />
Selection<br />
82 CO Feature Code Service for Code<br />
Restriction<br />
86 Call Monitoring Alert tone<br />
Assignment<br />
LK 1 System Mode<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 1 CO Line (Continued)<br />
LK 2 ICM<br />
Memory Block Name Default Value <strong>Programming</strong> Values<br />
100/70 In milliseconds: 70/60, 100/70, 400/<br />
100, 600/100, 900/200<br />
4s (R2500 or lower)<br />
04s (R3000 or<br />
higher)<br />
2s, 4s, 8s, 16s, 32s (R2500 or lower)<br />
01s~99s (R3000 or higher)<br />
Not Specified 10 tables each with up to 10 digits<br />
YS YS, NO<br />
Memory Block Name Default Value <strong>Programming</strong> Values<br />
00 Internal Paging Timeout Selection 90s (R2500 or lower)<br />
090s (R3000 or<br />
higher)<br />
01 Intercom Call Voice/Tone Signal<br />
Selection<br />
02 Automatic Callback Release Time<br />
Selection<br />
VOICE TONE<br />
VOICE<br />
30m (R2500 or<br />
lower)<br />
30m (R3000 or<br />
higher)<br />
90s, 120s, ∞ (No Limit) (R2500 or<br />
lower)<br />
000s (No Limit), 001s~255s (R3000 or<br />
higher)<br />
30s, 1m, 2m, 3m, 5m, 10m, 20m,<br />
30m(R2500 or lower)<br />
00m (No Limit), 01m~99m (R3000 or<br />
higher)<br />
03 2~7-Digit Station Number Selection 3DGT 2DGT, 3DGT, 4DGT, 5DGT, 6DGT,<br />
7DGT<br />
04 Call Arrival Key Block Assignment No CAR Blocks are<br />
Assigned<br />
CAR Blocks:<br />
Port 01~CO - 4 ports per block<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 1 - 17
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
LK 1 System Mode<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 2 ICM (Continued)<br />
Memory Block Name Default Value <strong>Programming</strong> Values<br />
08 Specified Station Access Code<br />
Assignment<br />
9~18 Customized Message 1~10<br />
Assignment<br />
00 = 01<br />
01 ~ 23 Not Set<br />
09 = DND<br />
10 = MEETING<br />
11 = BUSINESS<br />
TRIP<br />
12 = NOT IN<br />
13 = WITH GUEST<br />
14 = OUT OF<br />
OFFICE<br />
15~18 = Not<br />
Specified<br />
Tel. Port Number<br />
Maximum of 13 characters.<br />
19 Intercom Ring Pattern Selection B OFF, ON, A~H<br />
20 Intercom Ring Tone Selection A A~H<br />
21 PS <strong>Telephone</strong> Block Assignment No CAR Blocks are<br />
Assigned<br />
22 Call Forward – No Answer Time<br />
Selection<br />
23 System Call Park Recall Time<br />
Selection<br />
24 Intercom Feature Access Code<br />
Assignment<br />
25 Internal Paging Alert Tone<br />
Selection<br />
26 Delayed Ringing Time Assignment<br />
(ICM)<br />
8s (R2500 or lower)<br />
12s (R3000 or<br />
higher)<br />
1.0 (R2500 or lower)<br />
060s(R3000 or<br />
higher)<br />
Refer to Appendix B Character Codes,<br />
Section 1 Character Assignment on<br />
page B-1 for a list of characters.<br />
CAR Blocks:<br />
Port 01~C0 - 4 ports per block<br />
4s, 8s, 12s, 18s, 24s, 30s, 60s (R2500<br />
or lower)<br />
01s~99s (R3000 or higher)<br />
In minutes: 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 3.0, 5.0,<br />
8.0, 10.0 (R2500 or lower)<br />
001s~999s (R3000 or higher)<br />
Refer to 1-2-24 Intercom Feature Access Code Assignment on<br />
page 2-126.<br />
YS YS (Tone provided)<br />
NO (No Tone)<br />
10s 00~99 sec.<br />
30 PS Out of Area Time Assignment 08s 00~99 sec.<br />
32 IP <strong>Telephone</strong> Block Assignment Off (No IP Phone<br />
Blocks Assigned)<br />
33 IP <strong>Telephone</strong> Block Assignment<br />
Allow/Deny Selection<br />
Off<br />
ON (Green), IP Assigned<br />
On (Red), Block Not available<br />
YS (Allow) YS (Allow), NO (Deny)<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
1 - 18 Multiline Terminal <strong>Programming</strong>
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
LK 1 System Mode<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 2 ICM (Continued)<br />
34 Expanded Station Number<br />
Assignment<br />
LK 1 System Mode<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 3 SLT<br />
Memory Block Name Default Value <strong>Programming</strong> Values<br />
Blank (Not Specified) 2, 3, or 4 Digits Blank (Not Specified)<br />
5-Digit 1~8, one digit<br />
6-Digit 10~89, two digits<br />
7-Digit 100~899, three digits<br />
Memory Block Name Default Value <strong>Programming</strong> Values<br />
01 Bounce Protect Time Selection 300ms Page 1: 0ms, 100ms, 200ms, 300ms,<br />
400ms, 500ms, 600ms,<br />
700ms<br />
Page 2: 800ms, 900ms, 1000ms,<br />
1100ms, 1200ms, 1300ms,<br />
1400ms, 1500ms<br />
02 SLT Hookflash Signal Selection HOLD HOLD<br />
FLASH<br />
03 First Digit PBR Release Time<br />
Selection<br />
10s (R2500 or lower)<br />
10s (R3000 or<br />
higher)<br />
04 Dial 1 (DP) Hookflash Selection YS YS, NO<br />
10s, 20s, 30s, 40s, 50s, 60s (R2500 or<br />
lower).<br />
01s~99s (R3000 or higher)<br />
05 Hookflash Start Time Selection 290 In milliseconds: 40, 90, 140, 190, 240,<br />
290, 340, 390, 440, 490, 540, 590,<br />
640, 690, 740, 790<br />
06 Hookflash End Time Selection 07 (HST + 700 ms.) Refer to 1-3-06 Hookflash End Time<br />
Selection on page 2-143.<br />
07 Voice Mail Digit Add Assignment Blank Up to 4 digits<br />
08 Voice Mail DTMF Delay Time<br />
Selection<br />
09 Voice Mail Disconnect Time<br />
Selection<br />
1s 0s, 1s, 2s, 3s, 4s, 5s, 6s, 8s<br />
1.5s 0.5s, 1.0s, 1.5s, 2.0s, 3.0s, 3.5s<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 1 - 19
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
LK 1 System Mode<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 3 SLT (Continued)<br />
10 Voice Mail DTMF Duration/Interdigit<br />
Time Selection<br />
110/80 In milliseconds: 60/70, 110/80, 410/<br />
100,<br />
610/100, 810/190<br />
11 SLT/PSII Talk Start timer 10s 01~99 sec<br />
12 SLT/ISDN TELCO Account Codes<br />
Allow/Deny Selection<br />
LK 1 System Mode<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Memory Block Name Default Value <strong>Programming</strong> Values<br />
LK 4 Transfer/Automated Attendant (A.A.)<br />
NO NO, YES<br />
Memory Block Name Default Value <strong>Programming</strong> Values<br />
00 Tandem Transfer Automatic<br />
Disconnect Time Selection<br />
01 Automated Attendant First Digit<br />
PBR Release Time Selection<br />
02 Automated Attendant Transfer<br />
Delayed Ringing Time Selection<br />
03 Automated Attendant No Answer<br />
Disconnect Time Selection<br />
04 Tandem Transfer SMDR Print<br />
Extension Assignment<br />
05 Automatic Tandem Trunk by Night<br />
Mode Selection<br />
08 Automated Attendant PBR Timeout<br />
Response Selection<br />
09 Automated Attendant PBR Start<br />
Time Selection<br />
060 In minutes: 000~999<br />
20s (R2500 or lower)<br />
20s (R3000 or<br />
higher)<br />
∞ (R2500 or lower)<br />
00s (R3000 or<br />
higher)<br />
2m (R2500 or lower)<br />
120s (R3000 or<br />
higher)<br />
5s, 10s, 20s, 30s, 40s, 50s, 60s<br />
(R2500 or lower)<br />
01s~99s (R3000 or higher)<br />
In seconds: 10, 20, 30, ∞ (No Limit)<br />
(R2500 or lower)<br />
00s (No Limit), 01~99s (R3000 or<br />
higher)<br />
1m, 2m, 3m, 4m (R2500 or lower)<br />
001s~255s (R3000 or higher)<br />
999 2-digit = 00~99<br />
3-digit = 000~999<br />
4-digit = 0000~9999<br />
NO YS, NO<br />
NORMAL NORMAL, RELEAS<br />
FR FR = Same Time as Greeting<br />
AF = After Greeting<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
1 - 20 Multiline Terminal <strong>Programming</strong>
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
LK 1 System Mode<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 4 Transfer/Automated Attendant (A.A.) (Continued)<br />
Memory Block Name Default Value <strong>Programming</strong> Values<br />
11 Automated Attendant Message<br />
Day/Night Mode Selection<br />
12 Automated Attendant Message to<br />
Tenant Assignment<br />
13 Automated Attendant Answer Delay<br />
Time Assignment<br />
14 Automated Attendant Message<br />
Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment<br />
15 Automated Attendant Message<br />
Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment<br />
16 Automated Attendant Message<br />
Repeat Selection<br />
17 Automated Attendant Delay<br />
Announcement Hold Tone<br />
Selection<br />
18 Automated Attendant Delay<br />
Announcement Assignment<br />
19 Automated Attendant 1st to 2nd Delay Announcement Interval Time<br />
Selection<br />
20 Automated Attendant Delay<br />
Announcement Disconnect Time<br />
Selection<br />
21 Automated Attendant Extension<br />
Number Assignment<br />
22 Automated Attendant Direct<br />
Extension Ring Assignment<br />
NO YS, NO<br />
00 Tenant Number 00 to 47<br />
04s 00~99s, per MSG 1~8<br />
Refer to 1-4-14 Automated Attendant Message Access Code<br />
(1-Digit) Assignment on page 2-166.<br />
Refer to 1-4-14 Automated Attendant Message Access Code<br />
(1-Digit) Assignment on page 2-166.<br />
1<br />
All messages<br />
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8<br />
RBT RBT, MOH<br />
NONE (Not specified) None, MSG1, MSG2, MSG3, MSG4,<br />
MSG5, MSG6, MSG7, MSG8<br />
4m 0s, 10s, 20s, 30s, 1m, 2m, 3m, 4m,<br />
5m,<br />
10m, 20m.<br />
30s 0s, 10s, 20s, 30s, 1m, 2m, 3m, 4m,<br />
5m, 10m, 20m<br />
Not Specified 2-digit (10~89), 3-digit (100~899), or<br />
4-digit (1000~8999) extension<br />
numbers<br />
Messages 1~8<br />
Not Specified 2-digit (10~89), 3-digit (100~899), or<br />
4-digit (1000~8999) extension<br />
numbers<br />
Messages 1~8<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 1 - 21
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
LK 1 System Mode<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 5 SMDR/LCR<br />
Memory Block Name Default Value <strong>Programming</strong> Values<br />
02 SMDR Print Format ALL ALL, MSK<br />
13 Printer Connected Selection NO NO, PC(Future), YS<br />
14 Printer Line Feed Control Selection YS YS, NO<br />
25 SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment 040s 000~990s (in 10-second increments)<br />
26 SMDR Incoming/Outgoing Print<br />
Selection<br />
LK 1 System Mode<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 6 DSS<br />
OUT ALL, OUT, INC<br />
Memory Block Name Default Value <strong>Programming</strong> Values<br />
01 Attendant Add-On Console to<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Port Assignment<br />
03 DSS Call Voice/Tone Signal<br />
Selection<br />
05 Attendant Add-On Console Key<br />
Selection<br />
Refer to 1-6-01 Attendant Add-On Console to <strong>Telephone</strong> Port<br />
Assignment on page 2-183.<br />
VOICE TONE, VOICE<br />
Refer to 1-6-05 Attendant Add-On Console Key Selection on<br />
page 2-185.<br />
07 Message Board Lamp Assignment NON NON (Not assigned)<br />
MSG (message)<br />
08 Attendant Transfer Selection During<br />
Live Record<br />
YS NO, YS<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
1 - 22 Multiline Terminal <strong>Programming</strong>
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
LK 1 System Mode<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 7 ESP<br />
Memory Block Name Default Value <strong>Programming</strong> Values<br />
00 Doorphone Assignment No default LK1~LK4 Assigns DPH1~DPH4 Yes or<br />
No<br />
01 Doorphone Display Time Selection 10s (R2500 or lower)<br />
10s (R3000 or<br />
higher)<br />
02 External Speaker Connection<br />
Selection<br />
03 External Paging Alert Tone<br />
Selection<br />
All Speakers (A~C)<br />
On<br />
YS YS, NO<br />
10s, 30s, 60s, 90s (R2500 or lower)<br />
01s~99s (R3000 or higher)<br />
ESP A, ESP B, ESP C<br />
04 Doorphone Ring Pattern Selection DPH1~4 ON OFF, ON, A~H<br />
05 Doorphone Ringing Frequency<br />
Selection<br />
C A~H<br />
06 External Paging Timeout Selection 5.0 (R2500 or lower)<br />
300s (R3000 or<br />
higher)<br />
07 External Ring Relay Pattern<br />
Selection<br />
In minutes: 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 3.0, 5.0,<br />
8.0, ∞ (No Limit) (R2500 or lower)<br />
000s (No Limit), 001s~999s (R3000 or<br />
higher)<br />
PT3 Refer to 1-7-07 External Ring Relay<br />
Pattern Selection on page 2-202.<br />
08 External Speaker Chime Selection PRT PRT (Normal paging tone before Page)<br />
C-S (Chime Start Only)<br />
C-B (Chime Start/End)<br />
09 External Speaker Chime Start Time<br />
Selection<br />
700 In milliseconds: 000, 100, 200, 300,<br />
400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000,<br />
1100, 1200, 1300, 1400, 1500<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 1 - 23
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
LK 1 System Mode<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 8 PBR/Miscellaneous<br />
Memory Block Name Default Value <strong>Programming</strong> Values<br />
01 SLT or Automated Attendant/DISA<br />
to CPU PBR Selection<br />
02 PBR Receive Level Assignment for<br />
Automated Attendant/DISA<br />
LK1 and LK2 Off Off = Single Line <strong>Telephone</strong><br />
On = Automated Attendant/DISA<br />
04 Time Display (12h/24h) Selection 12 12, 24<br />
07 Class of Service (Attendant)<br />
Feature Selection 1<br />
08 Class of Service (Station) Feature<br />
Selection 2<br />
03 (–36.0 dBm) Refer to 1-8-02 PBR Receive Level<br />
Assignment for Automated Attendant/<br />
DISA on page 2-208.<br />
Refer to 1-8-07 Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection<br />
1 on page 2-211.<br />
Refer to 1-8-08 Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2<br />
on page 2-214.<br />
09 Music on Hold Pattern Selection A Medley A or B<br />
10 PBR Interdigit Release Time<br />
Selection<br />
7s 3s, 4s, 5s, 6s, 7s, 8s, 9s, 10s<br />
11 System Refresh Time Assignment 4H NON, 4H, 8H, 12H, 24H<br />
12 VRS Message Recording Time<br />
Selection<br />
13 VRS Message Function<br />
Assignment<br />
15s x16 Time and number of messages: 15s x<br />
16,<br />
30s x 8, 60s x 4, 120s x 2<br />
Refer to 1-8-13 VRS Message Function Assignment on page<br />
2-225.<br />
15 Tone Assignment A Refer to 1-8-15 Tone Assignment on<br />
page 2-227.<br />
16 Voice Prompt to Tone Assignment PR1 Refer to 1-8-16 Voice Prompt to Tone<br />
Assignment on page 2-230.<br />
17 PC <strong>Programming</strong> Password<br />
Assignment<br />
Class 1, 2 All Blank N/A<br />
18 Site Name Assignment Not Assigned N/A<br />
25 ACD/UCD Group Agent<br />
Assignment<br />
Not Specified Agent Station Number and ACD/UCD<br />
Group Number<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
1 - 24 Multiline Terminal <strong>Programming</strong>
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
LK 1 System Mode<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 8 PBR/Miscellaneous (Continued)<br />
Memory Block Name Default Value <strong>Programming</strong> Values<br />
26 Voice Mail Quick Transfer Master<br />
Hunt Number<br />
27 Forced Account Code Length<br />
Assignment<br />
29 SCD (Simplified Call Distribution)<br />
Pilot Number Assignment<br />
000 Station numbers:<br />
2-digit 10-89<br />
3-digit 100-899<br />
4-digit 1000-8999<br />
5-digit 10000-89999<br />
6-digit 100000-899999<br />
7-digit 1000000-8999999<br />
10DGT 1~13 Digits<br />
Not Assigned Pilot Number for up to four Groups<br />
30 SCD Group Agent Assignment Not Assigned 1~4 Digits<br />
31 Hold Tone Source Assignment INT INT, EXT<br />
32 Hold Internal Tone Volume<br />
Selection<br />
0dB 0dB, -6dB<br />
33 Master Clock Selection Cabinet 0 (Master<br />
System)<br />
35 COM Port Baud Rate Setting<br />
Assignment<br />
36 COM Port Parity/Stop Bit Setting<br />
Assignment<br />
COM 1 = 38.4<br />
COM 2 = 4.8<br />
COM 3 = 9.6<br />
Cabinet: 0,1~3<br />
Slot: 1~8<br />
4.8 Kbps, 9.6 Kbps, 19.2 Kbps, 38.4<br />
Kbps<br />
NON/1 NON/1, NON/2, EVEN/1, ODD/1<br />
37 General Purpose Relay Assignment NO NO, YS<br />
38 Modem Number for Remote<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Assignment<br />
Not Assigned Any Unused Extension Number<br />
(1~4 digits)<br />
40 ACD Hunt Time 10s 10s, 20s, 30s, 60s, 120s, 240s,<br />
∞ ( No Limit).<br />
43 Enhanced 911 Trunk Assignment LK1, CO/PBX No. CO/PBX trunks 01~64 / Trunk Group/<br />
Route Advance Block<br />
44 Enhanced 911 Alternate Route<br />
Assignment<br />
No Alternate Route No Alternate Route<br />
101~132 for Trunk Group 01~32<br />
201~216 for Route Advance Block<br />
01~16<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 1 - 25
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
LK 1 System Mode<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 8 PBR/Miscellaneous (Continued)<br />
45 Enhanced 911 Alternate Route<br />
Assignment (Maintenance Busy)<br />
46 Enhanced 911 Dialing Digit<br />
Assignment<br />
47 Call Arrival Key Voice Mail<br />
Message Notification Assignment<br />
48 Automatic Daylight Saving Time<br />
Selection<br />
101 No Alternate Route<br />
101~132 for Trunk Group 01~32<br />
201~216 for Route Advance Block<br />
01~16<br />
911 1, 11, 911, 9911<br />
Not Specified 2-digit (10~89), 3-digit (100~899), or<br />
4-digit (1000~8999) CARs<br />
YS YS, NO<br />
49 New AA-Info Yes/No Selection YS YS, NO<br />
LK 1 System Mode<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 9 DISA<br />
Memory Block Name Default Value <strong>Programming</strong> Values<br />
Memory Block Name Default Value <strong>Programming</strong> Values<br />
00 DISA ID Code Assignment Refer to 1-9-00 DISA ID Code Assignment on page 2-261.<br />
02 DISA Password Effect/Invalid<br />
Selection<br />
YS NO (Invalid), YS (Password effects)<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
1 - 26 Multiline Terminal <strong>Programming</strong>
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
LK 1 System Mode<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 10 Call by Call<br />
Memory Block Name Default Value <strong>Programming</strong> Values<br />
00 Call by Call Type of Network ID<br />
Assignment<br />
All RABs 2 0,1 Not Used)<br />
2 National Network Identification<br />
3~7 Not Used<br />
01 Call by Call ID Plan Assignment All RABs 01 00 Not Used)<br />
01 Interexchange Carrier Code<br />
02~15 Not Used<br />
02 Call by Call Type of Number<br />
Assignment<br />
03 Call by Call Numbering Plan ID<br />
Assignment<br />
All RABs 0 0 Unknown<br />
1 International<br />
2 National<br />
3 Network Specific<br />
4 Subscriber or Local<br />
5~7 Not Used<br />
All RABs 00 00 Unknown<br />
01 ISDN/Telephony Numbering<br />
Plan)<br />
02 Not Used<br />
3 Future Data Numbering Plan<br />
04~08 Not Used<br />
09 Private Numbering Plan<br />
10~15 Not Used<br />
04 Call by Call Network ID Assignment All RABs Unspecified Three or four-digit Call by Call Network<br />
ID<br />
05 Call by Call Facility Coding Value<br />
Assignment (Service)<br />
All RABs 00 00 Non-CBC RAB, None<br />
01 5ESS SDN<br />
02 5ESS MEGACOMBO800<br />
03 5ESS MEGACOM<br />
06 5ESS ACCUNE)<br />
08 5ESS International 800<br />
16 5ESS AT&T MultiQuest 900<br />
Service<br />
17 NI-2 INWATS<br />
18 NI-2 OUTWATS<br />
19 NI-2 FX<br />
20 NI-2 Tie Trunk<br />
01 DMS100 Private<br />
02 DMS100 INWATS<br />
03 DMS100 OUTWATS<br />
04 DMS100 FX<br />
05 DMS100 Tie Trunk<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 1 - 27
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
LK 1 System Mode<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 10 Call by Call (Continued)<br />
Memory Block Name Default Value <strong>Programming</strong> Values<br />
06 Call by Call Facility Coding Value<br />
Assignment (Feature)<br />
07 Call by Call Service Parameter<br />
Assignment<br />
All RABs 00 00 Non-CBC RAB, None<br />
05 5ESS Local Exchange<br />
06 5ESS default-Common Carrier<br />
All RABs 0 - 000 0 (0 or 1) - 000 (000~127)<br />
08 Call by Call Max Digit Assignment All RABs 00 00 (No Limit) ~ 24<br />
09 Call by Call Simulated Facility<br />
Group Assignment<br />
20 Call by Call Outgoing SFG<br />
Assignment<br />
21 Call by Call Outgoing/Incoming<br />
SFG Assignment<br />
22 Call by Call Incoming Type<br />
Selection<br />
All RABs 00 00 (None)~16<br />
99 01~16 For <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> 48 (Default<br />
16), 01~64For <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong>192 (Default<br />
64)<br />
99 Default for all SFGs<br />
99 01~16 For <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> 48 (Default<br />
16),<br />
01~64 For <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> 192 (Default<br />
64) 99 Default for all SFGs<br />
DID CO, DID<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
1 - 28 Multiline Terminal <strong>Programming</strong>
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
LK 1 System Mode<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 11 DTI<br />
Memory Block Name Default Value <strong>Programming</strong> Values<br />
00 T1 Signal Format Selection 24 12 (Superframe), 24 (Extended<br />
Superframe)<br />
01 Clear Channel Selection ZCS ZCS, B8ZS<br />
02 Line Length Selection 1 Refer to 1-11-02 Line Length Selection<br />
on page 2-291.<br />
03 IP K-CCIS Selection NO YS, NO<br />
05 T1 Channel Selection Refer to 1-11-05 T1 Channel Selection on page 2-294.<br />
06 Signaling Selection LS LS, GS<br />
07 DTI Trunk Type Assignment CO CO, E&M, DID, ANI<br />
08 Digits Delete for T1 ANI Assignment 2DGT 0 (No delete), 1~9<br />
LK 1 System Mode<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 12 ACD/UCD<br />
Memory Block Name Default Value <strong>Programming</strong> Values<br />
00 ACD/UCD Group Pilot Number<br />
Assignment<br />
01 ACD/UCD Group Overflow<br />
Destination Assignment<br />
Not Specified Any Unused Extension Number<br />
Not Specified Any Unused Extension Number<br />
02 ACD/UCD Overflow Time Selection 60s In seconds: ∞, 10s, 20s, 30s,<br />
60s,120s, 180s, 240s<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 1 - 29
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
LK 1 System Mode<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 13 PRT<br />
Memory Block Name Default Value <strong>Programming</strong> Values<br />
00 PRT Channel Assignment 24 0, 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24<br />
01 PRT Signal Format Selection 24 12 (SF), 24 (ESF)<br />
02 Clear Channel Selection B8ZS ZCS, B8ZS<br />
03 Call by Call Service Selection NO YS, NO<br />
04 PRT B Channel Outgoing Priority<br />
Selection<br />
05 PRT B Channel-to-Trunk Group<br />
Assignment<br />
LK 1 System Mode<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 14 ARS<br />
H → L H → L, L → H<br />
00 (Any Trunk Group) 00, 01~32 Trunk Groups<br />
Memory Block Name Default Value <strong>Programming</strong> Values<br />
00 ARS Allow/Deny Selection NO NO, YES<br />
01 ARS Dialing Assignment None Tables 1~4.<br />
02 ARS Dial Allow/Deny Selection YES YES, NO<br />
03 ARS Route Table Number<br />
Assignment<br />
04 ARS Trunk Group to Route Number<br />
Assignment<br />
00 Table 1~4, Dial No. 01~C8, Route<br />
01~32<br />
NORMAL NORMAL, TKGP 01~32, RAB<br />
01~16ARS, or ICM<br />
05 ARS Digit Delete Assignment 00 Route No. 01~32, No. of Digits 00~10<br />
06 ARS Add Assignment Not Specified Route No. 01~32, Additional dialing<br />
digits<br />
07 ARS Max Digit Assignment 24 01~99 Digits<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
1 - 30 Multiline Terminal <strong>Programming</strong>
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
LK 1 System Mode<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 15 K-CCIS<br />
Memory Block Name Default Value <strong>Programming</strong> Values<br />
00 K-CCIS Main/Remote Office<br />
Selection<br />
01 Common Signal Channel Data<br />
Speed Assignment<br />
02 Common Signal Channel<br />
Assignment<br />
NONE NONE, MAIN, REMOTE<br />
56k 64k, 56k, 48k(1), 48k(2)<br />
00 Any DTI Trunk<br />
03 Originating Point Code Assignment Blank Point Code Range: 00001~16367<br />
04 Destination Point Code Assignment Blank Point Code Range: 00001~16367<br />
05 Destination Point Code Transfer<br />
Assignment<br />
06 Originating Office code Number<br />
Assignment<br />
07 K-CCIS Message Response<br />
Timeout Assignment<br />
08 Link Reconnect Allow/Deny<br />
Selection<br />
09 K-CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding<br />
Hop Assignment<br />
10 Calling Name display Allow/Deny<br />
Selection<br />
11 Centralized Billing Allow/Deny<br />
Selection<br />
12 Centralized Billing – Point Code of<br />
Center Office Assignment<br />
13 Centralized Day/Night Switching for<br />
Remote Office Assignment<br />
14 Centralized Day/Night Switching for<br />
Main Office Assignment<br />
15 Centralized BLF Send Point Code<br />
Assignment<br />
Blank Point Code Range: 00001~16367<br />
T001~T255 can be assigned.<br />
Blank Valid Range: 0~99999<br />
30 sec Valid Times: 01~99 Seconds<br />
YS NO, YS<br />
5 1~7<br />
NO NO, YS<br />
NO (Deny) NO (Deny), YS (Allow)<br />
Blank Point Code Range: 00001~16367<br />
NO (Deny) NO (Deny), YS (Allow)<br />
All Tables Not<br />
Specified<br />
All Tables Not<br />
Specified<br />
Table Range: 01~16<br />
Point Code Range: 00001~16367<br />
Group No. 1~8<br />
Point Code Range: 00001~16367<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 1 - 31
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
LK 1 System Mode<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 15 K-CCIS (Continued)<br />
16 Centralized BLF Send Extension<br />
Number Assignment<br />
17 Centralized BLF Send Time<br />
Assignment<br />
18 Centralized BLF Receive Extension<br />
Number Assignment<br />
19 Centralized 911 Allow/Deny<br />
Selection<br />
20 Centralized 911 Originating Number<br />
Selection<br />
21 Centralized 911 Look Ahead<br />
Routing Allow/Deny Selection<br />
LK 1 System Mode<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 16 HUB<br />
Memory Block Name Default Value <strong>Programming</strong> Values<br />
All Tables Not<br />
Specified<br />
Table Range: 001~120<br />
3-digit Extension numbers 100~899<br />
4-digit Extension numbers<br />
1000~8999<br />
04s 04s, 08s, 12s, 16s<br />
All Tables Not<br />
Specified<br />
Table Range: 001~120<br />
3-digit Extension numbers 100~899<br />
4-digit Extension numbers<br />
1000~8999<br />
NO (Deny) NO (Deny), YS (Allow)<br />
STA. (Station No.) STA. (Station No.), CESID (CES-ID)<br />
NO (Deny) NO (Deny), YS (Allow)<br />
Memory Block Name Default Value <strong>Programming</strong> Values<br />
00 Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection YS (Enable) YS, NO<br />
01 Port Speed Selection – 10/100<br />
Base-T<br />
100 (100 Base-TX) 10 (10 Base-T), 100 (100 Base-TX)<br />
02 Port Duplex Mode Selection HALF HALF, FULL<br />
03 MDI/MDIX Mode Selection AUTO MDIX, MDI, AUTO<br />
04 VLAN Mode Selection NO (Disable) NO, YS (Enable)<br />
05 Default VLAN ID Assignment 0001 (0x001 Hex) 0001~4095 (0x001~0xfff Hex)<br />
06 Port Based Priority Selection NO (Not Assigned) NO, LO (Low), HI (High)<br />
07 High Priority RX Tag Assignment 7 (Lowest) 0~7 (Highest)<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
1 - 32 Multiline Terminal <strong>Programming</strong>
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
LK 1 System Mode<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 16 HUB (Continued)<br />
08 High Priority TX Tag Assignment 7 (Lowest) 0~7 (Highest)<br />
09 Low Priority TX Tag Assignment 0 (Lowest) 0~7 (Highest)<br />
10 Port Mirroring Selection NO (Normal) NO, YS (Mirror)<br />
11 Mirroring Source Port Assignment Port 1 Port range: 1~8<br />
12 Mirroring Target Port Assignment Port 1 Port range: 1~8<br />
13 VLAN Group to VLAN ID<br />
Assignment<br />
0000 ID Range: 0001~4095 (0x001~0xfff<br />
Hex)<br />
14 VLAN Group and Port Selection YS NO, YS<br />
15 VLAN Tag Insertion Selection NO NO, YS<br />
16 Flow Control for Full Duplex<br />
Selection<br />
NO NO, YS<br />
17 Back Pressure for Half Duplex NO NO, YS<br />
LK 2 Tenant Mode<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Memory Block Name Default Value <strong>Programming</strong> Values<br />
Memory Block Name Default Value <strong>Programming</strong> Values<br />
01 Trunk to Tenant Assignment Refer to 2-01 Trunk to Tenant Assignment on page 2-415.<br />
05 Line Key Selection TEL TEL (<strong>Telephone</strong> Mode)<br />
TNAT (Tenant-Wide Mode)<br />
06 Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode Refer to 2-06 Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode on page<br />
2-418.<br />
07 System Speed Dial Display<br />
Assignment<br />
CO/PBX Line LED<br />
On<br />
All Speed Dial<br />
Confirmation Allowed<br />
08 ECR Relay to Tenant Assignment All Tenants - No<br />
Assignment<br />
On (Assigned)<br />
Off (Not Assigned)<br />
09 DID Limit to Tenant Assignment 00 00 (no limit), 01~64 Incoming Calls<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 1 - 33<br />
N/A
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
LK 3 CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Memory Block Name Default Value <strong>Programming</strong> Values<br />
00 Trunk Name/Number Assignment Not Specified Maximum of 13 digits (numbers,<br />
hyphens, and spaces)<br />
02 Trunk Status Selection OUT&IN OUT&IN, IN<br />
03 Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment 01 Refer to 3-03 Trunk-to-Trunk Group<br />
Assignment on page 2-427.<br />
04 Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Yes/No<br />
Selection<br />
05 Trunk Incoming Answer Mode<br />
Selection<br />
06 Automatic Tandem Trunk<br />
Assignment<br />
NO NO, YES<br />
NO ASSIGN NO ASSIGN, TANDM TRF, AA<br />
Not Specified CO 01~64<br />
07 CO/PBX Ringing Variation Selection M M, L, H<br />
11 CO External Source Selection CO CO, EXT SOURCE<br />
12 Trunk-to-MOH Trunk Assignment 00 01~64 CO/PBX<br />
14 Tie Line Type Assignment 2ND DIAL 2ND DIAL, IMMEDIATE, DELAY,<br />
WINK<br />
15 Trunk DTMF Duration/Interdigit<br />
Selection<br />
110 /80 Duration / Interdigit Time in<br />
milliseconds:<br />
60/70, 60/80, 110/80, 160/80, 210/80,<br />
410/100, 610/100, 810/190<br />
16 Tie Line Prepause Time Selection 0 In seconds:<br />
0, 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0,<br />
7.0,<br />
8.0, 9.0, 10.0, 11.0, 12.0,13.0<br />
17 Tie Line Answer Detect Time<br />
Selection<br />
18 Tie Line Release Detect Time<br />
Selection<br />
520 In milliseconds:<br />
0, 130, 260, 390, 520, 650, 780, 910,<br />
1040, 1170, 1300, 1430, 1560, 1690,<br />
1820, 1950<br />
520 In milliseconds:<br />
0, 130, 260, 390, 520, 650, 780, 910,<br />
1040, 1170, 1300, 1430, 1560, 1690,<br />
1820, 1950<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
1 - 34 Multiline Terminal <strong>Programming</strong>
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
LK 3 CO/PBX Line Mode (Continued)<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Memory Block Name Default Value <strong>Programming</strong> Values<br />
19 Tie Line/CO/PBX Incoming Signal<br />
Detect Time Selection<br />
20 Tie Line Loop Off-Guard Time<br />
Selection<br />
21 Tie Line Length of Wink Signal<br />
Selection<br />
22 Tie Line Length of Delay Signal<br />
Selection<br />
24 Tie Line Incoming Interdigit Timeout<br />
Selection<br />
25 Tie Line Wink/Delay Signal Detect<br />
Timeout Selection<br />
03 Refer to 3-19 Tie Line/CO/PBX<br />
Incoming Signal Detect Time Selection<br />
on page 2-444.<br />
2.0 In seconds:<br />
0.0, 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0,<br />
7.0, 8.0, 9.0, 10.0, 11.0, 12.0, 13.0<br />
180 In milliseconds:<br />
30, 60, 90, 120, 150, 180, 210, 240,<br />
270,<br />
300, 330, 360, 390, 420, 450, 480<br />
300 In milliseconds:<br />
0, 300, 600, 900, 1200, 1500, 1800,<br />
2100, 2400, 2700, 3000, 3300, 3600,<br />
3900, 4200, 4500<br />
6s 1s, 2s, 3s, 4s, 5s, 6s, 7s, 8s, 9s, 10s,<br />
11s, 12s, 13s, 14s, 15s, ∞ (No Limit)<br />
7s 1s, 2s, 3s, 4s, 5s, 6s, 7s, 8s, 9s, 10s,<br />
11s, 12s, 13s, 14s, 15s, ∞ (No Limit)<br />
27 Tie Line Dial Tone Selection YS YS, NO<br />
28 Tie Line Reorder Tone Selection YS YS (Send)<br />
NO (Do Not Send)<br />
29 Trunk Internal Transmit Pad<br />
Selection<br />
30 Trunk Internal Receive Pad<br />
Selection<br />
31 Trunk External Transmit Pad<br />
Selection<br />
32 Trunk External Receive Pad<br />
Selection<br />
33 Disconnect Recognition Time<br />
Selection<br />
38 Automated Attendant Message to<br />
Trunk Selection<br />
8 In dB:<br />
2, 4, 6, 8, 12, 16, 3, -3, 0<br />
8 In dB:<br />
2, 4, 6, 8, 12, 16, 3, -3, 0<br />
0 In dB:<br />
2, 4, 6, 8, 12, 16, 3, -3, 0<br />
0 In dB:<br />
2, 4, 6, 8, 12, 16, 3, -3, 0<br />
0.3 In seconds:<br />
0, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8,<br />
0.9, 1.0, 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5<br />
1 Message 1~8 to CO 01~64<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 1 - 35
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
LK 3 CO/PBX Line Mode (Continued)<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Memory Block Name Default Value <strong>Programming</strong> Values<br />
40 Automatic Release Signal Detection<br />
Selection<br />
350 In milliseconds:<br />
0, 50, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350,<br />
400,<br />
450, 500, 550, 600, 650, 700, ∞ (No<br />
Limit)<br />
41 Delay Announcement Assignment NN Refer to 3-41 Delay Announcement<br />
Assignment on page 2-470.<br />
42 DIT Assignment No Assignment 2~7 digit Station numbers<br />
43 ANA Assignment No Assignment 2~7 digit Station numbers<br />
44 Caller ID Display Assignment for<br />
CO/PBX Line<br />
Not Specified N/A<br />
45 Live Record Trunk Selection NO NO = No Live Recording<br />
YS = Live Recording<br />
50 ISDN Line SPID Assignment Not Specified Up to 20 digits<br />
52 ISDN Trunk Directory Number<br />
Assignment<br />
Not Specified Up to 20 digits<br />
53 Caller Name Indication Selection NUM NO, NUM, NAM, TRK<br />
59 Automated Attendant Function<br />
Selection<br />
61 DIT/ANA Delay Answer Time<br />
Selection<br />
NORMAL NORMAL, DELAY<br />
0s (R2500 or lower)<br />
00s (R3000 or<br />
higher)<br />
62 DIT Tenant Assignment 00 00~47<br />
63 DIT Weekend Mode Selection YS YS, NO<br />
64 DIT Night Mode Delay Answer<br />
Selection<br />
65 Hold Tone Automated Attendant<br />
Selection<br />
NO NO, YS<br />
0s, 5s, 10s, 20s, 30s, 40s, 50s, 60s<br />
(R2500 or lower<br />
00 (No Time), 01~99s (R3000 or<br />
higher)<br />
NONE NONE, MSG 1~MSG 8<br />
67 CO/PBX Ringing Pattern Selection None None, Pattern A~Pattern H<br />
69 911 – Cut Through Trunk Selection NO NO, YES<br />
70 CIC Number Assignment 000 (Not Specified) CIC Range: 001~127<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
1 - 36 Multiline Terminal <strong>Programming</strong>
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
LK 3 CO/PBX Line Mode (Continued)<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
73 CO Message Waiting Yes/No<br />
Selection<br />
NO NO, YES<br />
90 Polarity Reverse Selection NO NO, YS<br />
91 Trunk Type Selection CO CO, PBX, TIE, DID, CTX (Assume-9)<br />
92 Trunk (Installed, DP/DTMF)<br />
Selection<br />
LK 4 <strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Memory Block Name Default Value <strong>Programming</strong> Values<br />
MF NIL, DP 10 pps, DP 20 pps, MF<br />
Memory Block Name Default Value <strong>Programming</strong> Values<br />
01 CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day<br />
Mode)<br />
02 CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night<br />
Mode)<br />
03 Doorphone Chime Assignment<br />
(Day Mode)<br />
04 Doorphone Chime Assignment<br />
(Night Mode)<br />
07 Code Restriction Class Assignment<br />
(Day Mode)<br />
08 Code Restriction Class Assignment<br />
(Night Mode)<br />
Refer to 4-01 CO/<br />
PBX Ring<br />
Assignment<br />
(Day Mode) on page<br />
2-501.<br />
Refer to 4-02 CO/<br />
PBX Ring<br />
Assignment<br />
(Night Mode) on<br />
page 2-503.<br />
Station Port 01 and<br />
02 Chime for All Four<br />
Doorphones).<br />
Station Port 01 and<br />
02 Chime (All Line<br />
Key LEDs on)<br />
No Ring, Immediate Ring, Delayed<br />
Ring<br />
No Ring, Immediate Ring, Delayed<br />
Ring<br />
DPH1, DPH2, DPH3, DPH4<br />
Station Port 01~120 Chime per<br />
Doorphone<br />
DPH1, DPH2, DPH3, DPH4<br />
Station Port 01~120 Chime per<br />
Doorphone<br />
00 (All Stations) Class 00~15 per Station<br />
00 (All Stations) Class 00~15 per Station<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 1 - 37
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
LK 4 <strong>Telephone</strong> Mode (Continued)<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Memory Block Name Default Value <strong>Programming</strong> Values<br />
09 <strong>Telephone</strong> to Tenant Assignment 00 (All Tenant<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong>s)<br />
Tenant Number<br />
10 Station Number Assignment 100 Refer to 4-10 Station Number<br />
Assignment on page 2-513.<br />
11 Ringing Line Preference Selection YS NO, YS<br />
12 Line Key Selection for <strong>Telephone</strong><br />
Mode<br />
13 CO/PBX Busy Forward Station<br />
Assignment<br />
14 Intercom Master Hunt Number<br />
Selection<br />
15 Intercom Master Hunt Number<br />
Forward Assignment<br />
17 Station to Class of Service Feature<br />
Assignment<br />
CO Refer to 4-12 Line Key Selection for<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Mode on page 2-517.<br />
Not Specified N/A<br />
NO NO, YS<br />
No <strong>Telephone</strong>s<br />
Specified<br />
Station Number (2~7 digits)<br />
00 Refer to 4-17 Station to Class of<br />
Service Feature Assignment on page<br />
2-526.<br />
18 Station Name Assignment Not Specified Up to six digits /characters (R3500 or<br />
lower)<br />
Up to 16 digits /characters (R4000/<br />
R4500 or higher)<br />
19 Trunk Outgoing Restriction LEDs Off Off = Not Restricted<br />
On = Restricted<br />
23 Prime Line/Hot Line Assignment Not Specified Up to 10 digits<br />
24 SLT Hookflash Assignment HOLD HOLD, DISC<br />
26 DISA ID Number Station<br />
Assignment<br />
28 Multilingual LCD Indication<br />
Selection<br />
01 Refer to 4-26 DISA ID Number Station<br />
Assignment on page 2-536.<br />
ENG JAPA, FREN, ENG, SPAN<br />
29 HFU Selection NO NO, YS<br />
30 Hold/Transfer Recall Display<br />
Selection<br />
31 Receiving Internal/All Call Page<br />
Selection<br />
YS YS, NO<br />
YS YS, NO<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
1 - 38 Multiline Terminal <strong>Programming</strong>
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
LK 4 <strong>Telephone</strong> Mode (Continued)<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Memory Block Name Default Value <strong>Programming</strong> Values<br />
32 Trunk Digit Restriction 00 (No Limit) 00~99<br />
35 Voice Mail/SLT Selection NO NO, YS<br />
36 Voice Prompt Selection NO NO, YS<br />
37 Extension Line Key Ring<br />
Assignment (Day Mode)<br />
38 Extension Line Key Ring<br />
Assignment (Night Mode)<br />
All LEDs Off LED Off (No Ring)<br />
Green LED (Immediate Ring)<br />
Red LED (Delayed Ring, Extension<br />
Line Key)<br />
All LEDs Off LED Off (No Ring)<br />
Green LED (Immediate Ring)<br />
Red LED (Delayed Ring, Extension<br />
LK)<br />
39 APR Ring Mode Assignment STA NON, STA, ALL<br />
40 LCR Class Selection 0 Class 0~4<br />
41 SIE/CAR Ringing Line Preference<br />
Selection<br />
42 Call Forward – Busy Immediately/<br />
Delay Selection<br />
43 Station to Call Appearance Block<br />
Assignment<br />
44 Caller ID Preset Dial Outgoing CO<br />
Selection<br />
YS NO, YS<br />
YS NO, YS<br />
All Stations Assigned<br />
Call Appearance<br />
Block 00<br />
Not Specified N/A<br />
46 Live Record Auto Delete Selection NO YS, NO<br />
47 ISDN Directory Number Selection YES YES, NO<br />
49 Caller ID Display for CAR Key<br />
Assignment<br />
Call Appearance Block 00~47<br />
00 (Not Specified) Refer to the Memory Block Description.<br />
50 Multiline Terminal Type Selection 16 16, 24, or 24A<br />
51 Off-Hook Ringing Selection YS YS, NO<br />
52 CO/PBX Answer Key Operation<br />
Without Ringing Assignment (Day<br />
Mode)<br />
YS NO, YS<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 1 - 39
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
LK 4 <strong>Telephone</strong> Mode (Continued)<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Memory Block Name Default Value <strong>Programming</strong> Values<br />
53 CO/PBX Answer Key Operation<br />
Without Ringing Assignment (Night<br />
Mode)<br />
54 Enhanced 911 CESID to Station<br />
Table Assignment<br />
55 CO/PBX <strong>Telephone</strong> Ringing Pattern<br />
Selection<br />
YS NO, YS<br />
Not Specified 7 or 10 digits plus up to 5-digit<br />
extension<br />
None None, Pattern A~Pattern H<br />
56 SMDR <strong>Telephone</strong> Print Selection YS YS, NO<br />
57 CO Line Ringing Pattern Priority<br />
Selection<br />
58 Automated Attendant Selection for<br />
DID<br />
CO CO, TEL<br />
NON NON, AA1~AA8<br />
59 APR/APA Hookflash Selection NO NO, YS<br />
62 ISDN-PRI Directory Number<br />
Selection<br />
64 Code Restriction Class (without<br />
Authorization Code) Day Mode<br />
Assignment<br />
65 Code Restriction Class (without<br />
Authorization Code) Night Mode<br />
Assignment<br />
None Calling Party Number (CPN)<br />
All Stations Class 15 Setting Data 00~15<br />
All Stations Class 15 Setting Data 00~15<br />
66 MOH or Ring Back Tone Selection MOH MOH, RBT<br />
67 IP Station Number Assignment Blank 10~89, 100~899, 1000~8999<br />
68 LCD Line Key – Name Assignment LK01~08:CO01~08 Name: Up to 8 characters<br />
69 CO Message Waiting Indication<br />
Assignment<br />
71 Station to Timer Class of Service Tel Ports 1 and 2 in<br />
Class 1. All other<br />
ports in Class 2.<br />
Not Assigned Line keys 1~24<br />
Tel Port No. 01~CO<br />
Tel Ports 01~CO<br />
Class 1~4<br />
90 SLT Data Line Security Assignment NORMAL NORMAL, DATA<br />
91 <strong>Telephone</strong> Ringing Variation<br />
Selection<br />
M M, L, H<br />
92 Receiving Volume Selection DOWN DOWN, UP<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
1 - 40 Multiline Terminal <strong>Programming</strong>
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
LK 4 <strong>Telephone</strong> Mode (Continued)<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Memory Block Name Default Value <strong>Programming</strong> Values<br />
93 Internal Zone Paging Selection NO No, A, B, C<br />
94 3-Minute Alarm Selection NO NO, YS<br />
95 DTMF/DP SLT Type Selection MF DP, MF<br />
LK 5 Trunk Group Mode<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Memory Block Name Default Value <strong>Programming</strong> Values<br />
00 Digit Add/Del for Tie Line<br />
Networking Assignment<br />
01 Tie Line Networking Tandem<br />
Connection Assignment<br />
02 8-Digit Matching Table to Trunk<br />
Group Assignment<br />
03 OCC Table to Trunk Group<br />
Assignment<br />
04 LCR Class to Trunk Group<br />
Selection<br />
05 Common Signaling Channel Route<br />
Selection<br />
06 Trunk Group Outgoing Priority<br />
Selection<br />
000<br />
(No Add or Delete)<br />
All Trunk Groups<br />
CO/PBX Line LEDs<br />
On<br />
Enabled<br />
CO/PBX Line LEDs<br />
On<br />
CO/PBX Line LEDs<br />
On<br />
Use All Tables<br />
0 0~4<br />
Delete up to two digits<br />
Add up to two digits<br />
On = Enable<br />
Off = Disable<br />
On = Enable<br />
Off = Disable<br />
On = Enable<br />
Off = Disable<br />
0 (Not Assigned) CCH Range: 1~4<br />
H → L H → L, L → H<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 1 - 41
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
LK 6 Copy Mode<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Memory Block Name Default Value <strong>Programming</strong> Values<br />
2 Tenant Mode Copy Assignment N/A N/A<br />
3 CO Line Mode Copy Assignment N/A N/A<br />
4 <strong>Telephone</strong> Mode Copy Assignment N/A N/A<br />
5 Trunk Group Mode Copy<br />
Assignment<br />
N/A N/A<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
1 - 42 Multiline Terminal <strong>Programming</strong>
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
LK 7 ETU Mode<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Memory Block Name Default Value <strong>Programming</strong> Values<br />
1 Card Interface Slot Assignment Refer to 7-1 Card Interface Slot Assignment on page 2-627.<br />
2 <strong>Telephone</strong> Type Assignment TEL NON, TEL, DSS CONSOL, SLT ADP,<br />
DIGITAL VM, MSG BOARD<br />
3-00 MIF (ACD) Assignment 00 (No Assignment) N/A<br />
3-01 MIF (LCR) Assignment 00 (No Assignment) N/A<br />
3-02 MIF (SMDR) Assignment 00 (No Assignment) N/A<br />
3-03 MIF (UCD) Assignment 00 (No Assignment) N/A<br />
3-04 MIF (Caller ID) Assignment 00 (No Function) N/A<br />
LK 8 Special Mode<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Memory Block Name Default Value <strong>Programming</strong> Values<br />
1 ROM Version Confirmation N/A N/A<br />
2 System Speed Dial Memory Clear N/A N/A<br />
3 Station Speed Dial Memory Clear N/A N/A<br />
8 Second Initialization N/A N/A<br />
Clock/Calendar Setting N/A N/A<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 1 - 43
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
1 - 44 Multiline Terminal <strong>Programming</strong>
Memory Blocks Chapter 2<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
SECTION 1 PROGRAMMING SYSTEM DATA USING THE MEMORY BLOCK<br />
This section provides detailed instructions for programming individual Memory<br />
Blocks. The Memory Blocks are listed numerically. For each Memory Block, the<br />
following information is provided.<br />
General Description is a brief explanation of the function of the Memory<br />
�<br />
Block.<br />
Display indicates the default information displayed in the Multiline Terminal<br />
�<br />
LCD during programming.<br />
Settings (when applicable) indicates the information that is entered using the<br />
�<br />
line keys on the Multiline Terminal.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures contains detailed procedures to program each<br />
�<br />
Memory Block.<br />
� Related <strong>Programming</strong> (when applicable) contains a list of associated<br />
Memory Blocks that may need to be programmed.<br />
Notes contains additional information related to programming the Memory<br />
�<br />
Block.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 1
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-1-00 Pause Time Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the pause time that can be inserted between digits<br />
dialed on CO/PBX and Tie lines.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
1.0s 3.0s<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + KK to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
0 0 : P A U S E 3 . 0 s<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-1-09 <strong>Manual</strong> Pause Selection<br />
1-1-24 PBX/CTX Access Code Assignment I<br />
1-1-25 PBX/CTX Access Code Assignment II<br />
3-91 Trunk Type Selection<br />
Data<br />
Setting<br />
1. A pause is automatically inserted following a CO/PBX Access Code (e.g., 9) by programming CO/PBX lines as<br />
PBX in Memory Block 3-91 (Trunk Type Selection) and 1-1-24/25 (PBX/CTX Access Code Assignment I/II).<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. <strong>Manual</strong> pauses can be stored for use when dialing outside lines by the Last Number Redial or Save/Store and<br />
Repeat features using Memory Block 1-1-09 (<strong>Manual</strong> Pause Selection).<br />
3. Pauses can be stored as part of System and Station Speed Dial buffers when needed.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
00<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BCM<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 2 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-1-01 DP Interdigit Time Selection<br />
General Description<br />
The DP Interdigit Time is the minimum pause time between Dial Pulses. Use this<br />
Memory Block to Select Pattern A or Pattern B.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK7 LK8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
A B<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 +KAto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
Data<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
0 1 : D P I N T E R B<br />
DP Dial<br />
Title<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
10 pps 20 pps<br />
Pattern A 650 ms. 500 ms.<br />
Pattern B 800 ms. 800 ms.<br />
3-92 Trunk (Installed, DP/DTMF) Selection<br />
Data<br />
Setting<br />
Dial<br />
Signal<br />
Minimum<br />
Pause<br />
Time<br />
Use this Memory Block when DP Tie lines or DID are assigned in Memory Block 3-92 [Trunk (Installed, DP/<br />
DTMF) Selection] to send Dial Pulse signaling.<br />
� Notes �<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
01<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BCM<br />
Dial<br />
Signal<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 3
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-1-02 Hookflash Time Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the loop open time for a hookflash signal sent to the<br />
CO or PBX when the Recall key on a Multiline Terminal is pressed. A Single Line<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> (SLT) generates a hookflash to the CO or PBX line when a Single Line<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> hookflash is assigned.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Page 1<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
20ms<br />
Page 2<br />
40ms 60ms 80ms 100ms 140ms 160ms 200ms<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
400ms 600ms 800ms 1.0s 1.5s 2.0s 3.0s 5.0s<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Title<br />
Data<br />
Setting<br />
0 2 : F L S H 6 0 0 m s | 2<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 +KBto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
C to go to the next page<br />
A to go to the previous page<br />
� Use the following to enter data:<br />
Page<br />
No.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
02<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BCM<br />
The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 4 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-1-46 Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-1-47 Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-3-02 SLT Hookflash Signal Selection<br />
4-24 SLT Hookflash Assignment<br />
1. A 1- or 2-digit Access Code can be assigned in Memory Block 1-1-46/47 [Access Code (1- or 2-Digit)<br />
Assignment] for Single Line <strong>Telephone</strong>s to send a hookflash signal on a CO/PBX line (default: 6 #).<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. A hookflash from a Single Line <strong>Telephone</strong> puts an existing call on hold or sends a hookflash signal on the<br />
CO/PBX line.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 5
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-1-03 Hold Recall Time Selection<br />
(Non-Exclusive Hold)<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the Hold time for a Non-Exclusive outside call<br />
before a recall tone is generated. When No Limit is selected, the hold recall alarm tone<br />
is not generated.<br />
This Memory Block can be adjusted in 1-second intervals (R3000 or higher).<br />
Display (R2500 or lower)<br />
Settings<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
25s 45s 60s 90s 120s 180s 240s ∞<br />
(No Limit)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Title<br />
0 3 : H O L D R E C L 2 5 s<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Data<br />
Setting<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 +KCto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Refer to the next page for R3000 or higher <strong>Programming</strong> Procedures.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
03<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BM<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 6 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Display (R3000 or higher)<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 +KCto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to enter the Data Setting for Class 1.<br />
Setting Data<br />
000s~255s (e.g., 045s = 45s)<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Timer Class of Service.<br />
5 Program the next Timer Class of Service or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Timer<br />
Class<br />
1-1-63 Hold Recall Time Selection (Exclusive)<br />
1-2-23 System Call Park Recall Time Selection<br />
4-71 Station to Timer Class of Service (R3000 or higher)<br />
1~4<br />
0 3 : H L D R C L 1 = 0 6 0 s<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
� Notes �<br />
Default Values<br />
Class 1~4 = 060s<br />
000s = No Limit<br />
1. Calls put on Exclusive Hold, recall using the data selected in Memory Block 1-1-63 [Hold Recall Time Selection<br />
(Exclusive)].<br />
2. Calls placed on hold on Call Appearance keys, recall using this Memory Block.<br />
3. Calls parked in System Call Park locations recall using Memory Block 1-2-23 (System Call Park Recall Time<br />
Selection).<br />
4. <strong>Telephone</strong> ports 1 and 2 are in Station to Timer Class of Service, Class 1 by default. All other ports are in Station<br />
to Timer Class of Service, Class 2 by default (R3000 or higher).<br />
5. When a system is upgraded from R2500 or lower, the Hold Recall Time Selection is reset to the default value<br />
during the upgrade process (R3000 or higher).<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 7
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-1-04 Automatic Redial Time Selection<br />
General Description<br />
When a called party is busy, the station user dials an Access Code and restores the<br />
handset. Use this Memory Block to define the redial timing parameters when<br />
automatic redial is set to a busy CO/PBX number. After the specified number of call<br />
attempts with no answer, the system stops dialing.<br />
Display<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Title<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + KD to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to enter the Data Setting for Table 1.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
Setting Data (Allowed):<br />
�<br />
Table 1 (Calling Time): 001~050 sec.<br />
Table 2 (Call Waiting Time): 001~100 sec.<br />
Table 3 (Call Attempts): 001~015 times<br />
000 cannot be entered.<br />
Table<br />
1~3<br />
0 4 : R E D I A L ( 1 ) 0 3 0<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next table.<br />
5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each remaining table. After pressing G for Table 3, the next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Default Values<br />
1. Definitions:<br />
Calling Time: The time that the system automatically calls the busy CO/PBX number. After the programmed time<br />
limit is reached, the call is abandoned.<br />
Call Waiting Time: The time the system waits between call attempts.<br />
Call Attempts: The number of times the system redials the busy CO/PBX number.<br />
� Notes �<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
04<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BM<br />
Table<br />
No.<br />
Description Value<br />
1 Calling Time 030<br />
2 Call Waiting Time 060<br />
3 Call Attempts 002<br />
2. When Call Pickup groups are assigned using Memory Block 4-09 (<strong>Telephone</strong> to Tenant Assignment), the CO<br />
lines must be assigned to the same Tenant group in Memory Block 2-01 (Trunk to Tenant Assignment) for this<br />
feature to work.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 8 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-1-05 Start Time Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the time after dialing before the system starts the<br />
Elapsed Call Time. Used for copper trunks only. Not supported by digital trunks.<br />
This Memory Block can be adjusted in 1-second intervals (R3000 or higher).<br />
Display (R2500 or lower)<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
10s 20s 30s 40s 50s 60s 70s 2s default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
0 5 : C A L L S T A R T 1 0 s<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + KE to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Refer to the next page for R3000 or higher <strong>Programming</strong> Procedures.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
05<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BM<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 9
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Display (R3000 or higher)<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 +KEto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to enter the Data Setting for Class 1.<br />
Setting Data<br />
00s~99s (e.g., 02s = 2s)<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Timer Class of Service.<br />
5 Program the next Timer Class of Service or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Timer<br />
Class<br />
0 5 : S T A R T 1 = 0 2 s<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
1-5-25 SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment<br />
4-71 Station to Timer Class of Service (R3000 or higher)<br />
1. This time is used for the features with functions described below:<br />
� Notes �<br />
Default Values<br />
Class 1~4 = 02s<br />
00s = No Limit<br />
Elapsed Call Time: The time after dialing before the Elapsed Call Time is started and displayed on a Multiline<br />
Terminal.<br />
SMDR Start Time: The time needed after dialing before the SMDR Valid Call Time is started. Refer to Memory<br />
Block 1-5-25 (SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment). For outgoing calls, both Elapsed Call Time and SMDR Valid<br />
Call Time must elapse before a call record is generated.<br />
2. <strong>Telephone</strong> ports 1 and 2 are in Station to Timer Class of Service, Class 1 by default. All other ports are in Station<br />
to Timer Class of Service, Class 2 by default (R3000 or higher).<br />
3. When a system is upgraded from R2500 or lower, the Start Time Selection is reset to the default value during<br />
the upgrade process (R3000 or higher).<br />
4. For copper trunks only. Not supported on digital trunks.<br />
1~4<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 10 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-1-06 CO/PBX Incoming Ringing Alarm<br />
Time Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the time between when a CO/PBX call is detected<br />
and the ringing tone changes to a higher pitch when the call is not answered. When<br />
No Limit is selected, the ringing tone does not change.<br />
This Memory Block can be adjusted in 1-second intervals (R3000 or higher).<br />
Display (R2500 or lower)<br />
Settings<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
10s 20s 30s ∞<br />
(No Limit)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Title<br />
0 6 : R I N G A L M ∞<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + KF to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Refer to the next page for R3000 or higher <strong>Programming</strong> Procedures.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
06<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BM<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 11
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Display (R3000 or higher)<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 +KFto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to enter the Data Setting for Class 1.<br />
Setting Data<br />
000s~255s (e.g., 020s = 20s)<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
0 6 : R I N G A L M 0 0 0 s<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
1-1-07 Tie Line Delay Ringing Time Selection<br />
3-07 CO/PBX Ringing Variation Selection<br />
4-01 CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)<br />
4-02 CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)<br />
4-91 <strong>Telephone</strong> Ringing Variation Selection<br />
� Notes �<br />
Default Values<br />
000s<br />
000s = No Limit<br />
1. Memory Blocks 4-01 and 4-02 [CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode/Night Mode)] must be set to ring.<br />
2. CO/PBX lines assigned for DIT/ANA do not activate this feature.<br />
3. Tie/DID lines assigned for Delayed Ringing follow this assignment after the delayed ringing starts.<br />
4. This feature uses the same ringing tone (Low, Medium, High) that is selected in Memory Blocks 3-07 (CO/PBX<br />
Ringing Variation Selection) and 4-91 (<strong>Telephone</strong> Ringing Variation Selection). When High is selected in these<br />
Memory Blocks, this feature does not function.<br />
5. Select ∞ (No Limit) to disable this feature.<br />
6. When a system is upgraded from R2500 or lower, the Start Time Selection is reset to the default value during<br />
the upgrade process (R3000 or higher).<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 12 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-1-07 Tie Line Delay Ringing Time<br />
Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the time before a Tie line call ringing at a station can<br />
begin ringing at other preassigned stations when it is not answered in a programmed<br />
time. CO/PBX Ringing Assignment defines the preassigned station.<br />
This Memory Block can be adjusted in 1-second intervals (R3000 or higher).<br />
Display (R2500 or lower)<br />
Settings<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
10s 20s 30s ∞<br />
(No Limit)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Title<br />
0 7 : T L D L Y R N G ∞<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + KG to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Refer to the next page for R3000 or higher <strong>Programming</strong> Procedures.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
07<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+ALM<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 13
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Display (R3000 or higher)<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 +KGto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to enter the Data Setting for Class 1.<br />
Setting Data<br />
000s~255s (e.g., 020s = 20s)<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Timer Class of Service.<br />
5 Program the next Timer Class of Service or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Timer<br />
Class<br />
0 7 : T L D L Y 1 = 0 0 0 s<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
1-1-34 Tie Line First Ring Pattern Selection<br />
4-01 CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)<br />
4-02 CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)<br />
4-12 Line Key Selection for <strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
4-71 Station to Timer Class of Service (R3000 or higher)<br />
1~4<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
Default Values<br />
Class 1~4 = 000s<br />
000s = No Limit<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 14 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Example:<br />
(D) ☎<br />
☎<br />
� Notes �<br />
1. To speak to station user A, station user D dials extension 100.<br />
2. In the example at station A:<br />
System 1 System 2<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong><br />
<strong>Electra</strong> System <strong>Elite</strong><br />
<strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> I<br />
System I<br />
The ICM LED blinks, and a ring tone that is different from the normal ringing tone is heard.<br />
�<br />
The call can be answered by lifting the handset.<br />
�<br />
� Stations B and C users cannot press the line key on the Multiline Terminals to answer the call.<br />
3. In the example, when station user A does not answer in the specified time:<br />
The ringing tone changes to the normal tone and station C starts ringing.<br />
�<br />
Any station (A, B, or C) user can press the flashing line key to answer the call.<br />
�<br />
4. After the timeout, the system uses the Day and Night Ringing Assignment and rings the assigned station.<br />
5. Select ∞ (No Limit) to disable this feature.<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong><br />
<strong>IPK</strong> System II ☎<br />
☎<br />
(A) 100<br />
(C) 102<br />
☎ ☎(B) 101<br />
☎<br />
☎(A) 100<br />
(B) 101<br />
(C) 102<br />
Time Elapsed<br />
In this example, systems 1 and 2 are connected. Stations A (extension 100)<br />
and C (extension 102) are assigned to ring on the Tie line using Memory<br />
Blocks 4-01 and 4-02 [CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day/Night) Mode].<br />
6. <strong>Telephone</strong> ports 1 and 2 are in Station to Timer Class of Service, Class 1 by default. All other ports are in Station<br />
to Timer Class of Service, Class 2 by default (R3000 or higher).<br />
7. When a system is upgraded from R2500 or lower, the Start Time Selection is reset to the default value during<br />
the upgrade process (R3000 or higher).<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 15
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-1-09 <strong>Manual</strong> Pause Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify either YS (Pause Insertion) or NO (Last Number<br />
Dialed/Speed Dial) to be executed using the Redial key when it is pressed after one or<br />
more digits of a dialed number are entered.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
NO YS<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + KI to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
0 9 : M A N P A U S E N O<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-1-00 Pause Time Selection<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
09<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTS<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 16 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
� �<br />
1.<br />
Notes<br />
When a user seizes a CO/PBX line and dials 907 4000 + B + 12345 with this Memory Block set to NO,<br />
the system interprets the sequence as:<br />
9074000XXX345 (XXX = B and 12 is interpreted as Speed Dial buffer 12).<br />
2. When a user seizes a CO/PBX line and dials 907 4000 + B + 12345 with this Memory Block set to YS,<br />
the system interprets the sequence as:<br />
9074000XXX12345 (XXX = is interpreted as a pause).<br />
3. The pause is inserted when Last Number Redial, Save and Repeat, or Store and Repeat is used to redial the<br />
number.<br />
4. When this feature is allowed, Multiline Terminal users cannot use consecutive Speed Dial using B .<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 17
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-1-11 System Transfer/Camp-On Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block system-wide to select whether or not the station user can<br />
press the Transfer key to perform a Ring Transfer or Station Camp-On.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
NO YS<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + AA to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
1 1 : R I N G T R F Y S<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
1-1-12 Station Transfer/Camp-On Recall Time Selection<br />
Transfers or camp-ons from Attendant Add-On Consoles are also affected using this Memory Block.<br />
� Notes �<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
11<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTS<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 18 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-1-12 Station Transfer/Camp-On Recall<br />
Time Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the time before a Ring Transfer or Station Camp-On<br />
from a station (without an Attendant Add-On Console) recalls back to the originating<br />
station when the call is not answered.<br />
This Memory Block can be adjusted in 1-second intervals (R3000 or higher).<br />
Display (R2500 or lower)<br />
Settings<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
25s 45s 60s 90s 120s 180s 240s ∞<br />
(No Limit)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Title<br />
1 2 : T R F R E C L 4 5 s<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Data<br />
Setting<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + AB to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Refer to the next page for R3000 or higher <strong>Programming</strong> Procedures.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
12<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BM<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 19
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Display (R3000 or higher)<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 +ABto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to enter the Data Setting for Class 1.<br />
Setting Data<br />
000s~999s (e.g., 020s = 20s)<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Timer Class of Service.<br />
5 Program the next Timer Class of Service or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Timer<br />
Class<br />
1-1-11 System Transfer/Camp-On Selection<br />
1-6-01 Attendant Add-On Console to <strong>Telephone</strong> Port Assignment<br />
1-8-08 Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2<br />
4-71 Station to Timer Class of Service (R3000 or higher)<br />
1~4<br />
1 2 : T R F R C L 1 = 0 6 0 s<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
� Notes �<br />
Default Values<br />
Class 1~4 = 060s<br />
000s = No Limit<br />
1. <strong>Telephone</strong> ports 1 and 2 are in Station to Timer Class of Service, Class 1 by default. All other ports are in Station<br />
to Timer Class of Service, Class 2 by default (R3000 or higher).<br />
2. When a system is upgraded from R2500 or lower to R3000 or higher, the Station Transfer/Camp-On Recall<br />
Time Selection is reset to the default during the upgrade process.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 20 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-1-13 CO Transfer Ring Pattern Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to select a Ring Pattern for CO transfers.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
(Page 1)<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
OFF<br />
(Page 2)<br />
ON A B C D E F<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
G H<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + AC to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
C to access the next page<br />
A to access the previous page<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
No. Page<br />
Title<br />
Data<br />
1 3 : C O T P T N C | 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-1-11 System Transfer/Camp-On Selection<br />
1-1-14 CO Transfer Ring Tone Selection<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
13<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BCS<br />
The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 21
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
The Ring Patterns are shown in the table below:<br />
Pattern<br />
Tone<br />
Off<br />
Tone<br />
On<br />
Line<br />
Key<br />
LK 1<br />
LK 2<br />
A LK 3<br />
B LK 4<br />
C LK 5<br />
D LK 6<br />
E LK 7<br />
F LK 8<br />
G<br />
H<br />
LK 1<br />
(Pg. 2)<br />
LK 2<br />
(Pg. 2)<br />
s= seconds<br />
0s 1s 2s<br />
3s 4s 5s 6s<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 22 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-1-14 CO Transfer Ring Tone Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to select a ring tone for CO transfers.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
A B C D E F G H default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + AD to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
The available tones are:<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
1 4 : C O T R F T O N E A<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Tone Frequency<br />
Tone A 480/600 (Modulation - 16 Hz)<br />
Tone B 480/606 (Modulation - 8 Hz)<br />
Tone C 1024/1285<br />
Tone D 1024<br />
Tone E 500<br />
Tone F 1024/1285 (Modulation - 16 Hz)<br />
Tone G 600/700 (Modulation - 16 Hz)<br />
Tone H 1024 (Envelope - 2 sec.)<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-1-11 System Transfer/Camp-On Selection<br />
1-1-13 CO Transfer Ring Pattern Selection<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
14<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BCS<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 23
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-1-18 System Speed Dial Restriction by<br />
Tenant<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not System Speed Dial is restricted for<br />
each tenant.<br />
Display<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Settings<br />
Page 1 Tenants 00~07<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07<br />
Page 2 – Tenants 08~15<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15<br />
Page 3 – Tenants 16~23<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23<br />
Page 4 – Tenants 24~31<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31<br />
Page 5 – Tenants 32~39<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39<br />
Page 6 – Tenants 40~47<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Title<br />
Dial<br />
Speed<br />
No.<br />
Buffer<br />
1 8 : S P E E D ( 0 X ) | 0 0<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Starting<br />
Tenant<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + AH to access the Memory Block.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
18<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AC<br />
Six pages<br />
provide access<br />
to the Tenant<br />
Numbers.<br />
Tenant<br />
Numbers 00~47<br />
correspond to<br />
the line keys<br />
listed in the<br />
table to the left.<br />
None are<br />
restricted.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 24 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the tenant number.<br />
Speed Dial buffers have the nine groups listed in the table below.<br />
Speed Dial Speed Dial Number<br />
Buffer No. 80 Codes 1000 Codes<br />
0X 00~09 000~099<br />
1X 10~19 100~199<br />
~<br />
6X 60~69 600~699<br />
7X 70~79 700~799<br />
8X N/A 800~899<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data<br />
C to move to the next page<br />
A to move to the previous page<br />
Each time a CO/PBX line key is pressed, the LED toggles between On and Off.<br />
CO/PBX<br />
Line LED<br />
Default Values<br />
All System Speed Dial buffers can<br />
be dialed from any tenant.<br />
4 Enter all pages for the selected buffer, and press G to write the data and display the next Speed Dial Buffer No.<br />
5 After entering data for the last Speed Dial Buffer No., press G to write that data, and the next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
~<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
~<br />
Off On<br />
Data Restricted Not Restricted<br />
1-1-33 Speed Dial Number/Name Display Selection<br />
1-1-35 Speed Dial Buffer Allocation<br />
2-01 Trunk to Tenant Assignment<br />
4-09 <strong>Telephone</strong> to Tenant Assignment<br />
X = 0~9<br />
The shaded area indicates<br />
the default setting.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 25
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
� �<br />
1. One or more tenants can be enabled to use each group.<br />
Notes<br />
2. Use this Memory Block to assign which tenants use each group.<br />
3. When speed dial is set to 1000, 900~999 cannot be restricted.<br />
4. The X in each Speed Dial Buffer No. is displayed even when it is not entered.<br />
5. Tenant numbers 00~07 are assigned to Flexible Line keys on the first page. Tenant numbers 08~15 are assigned<br />
to the Flexible Line keys on the second page. The tenant number corresponding to Flexible Line key 1 of the<br />
current page is displayed under Starting Tenant No. In all cases, each page has eight line keys.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 26 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-1-20 DID Digit Length Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to define the number of Direct Inward Dialing (DID) digits in<br />
Memory Block 1-1-22 (DID Digit Conversion Table).<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + BK to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Enter the data using the dial pad.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data<br />
H to clear all data<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Data<br />
No. Title<br />
2 0 : D I D D G T 3<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-1-21 DID Digit Conversion Assignment<br />
1-1-22 DID Digit Conversion Table<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
1-1-23 DID Forward Station Number for Busy Station or Undefined Digit<br />
5-00 Digit Add/Del For Tie Line Networking Assignment<br />
Default Values<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
20<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+ALN<br />
3 (Setting Data 2, 3, or 4)<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 27
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-1-21 DID Digit Conversion Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to enable the DID Digit Conversion Table, Memory Block<br />
1-1-22 (DID Digit Conversion Table), for each number.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
NO YS<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + BA to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option. Default Values<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
2 1 : D I D C N V N O<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-1-20 DID Digit Length Selection<br />
1-1-22 DID Digit Conversion Table<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
1-1-23 DID Forward Station Number for Busy Station or Undefined Digit<br />
5-00 Digit Add/Del For Tie Line Networking Assignment<br />
1. When NO is assigned, only Memory Block 5-00 has an impact on incoming DID numbers.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. When YS is assigned, each incoming DID number can be modified.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 28 Memory Blocks<br />
NO<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
21<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+ALN
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-1-22 DID Digit Conversion Table<br />
General Description<br />
Up to 200 incoming DID numbers can be assigned individually to ring at a preassigned<br />
2-digit, 3-digit, or 4-digit station number, closed number (plus outgoing digits), or<br />
tenant number (00~47) for day mode or night mode. This Memory Block applies to the<br />
DID number after it is modified by Memory Block 5-00 (Digit Add/Del for Tie Line<br />
Networking Assignment).<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
T<br />
(Station or<br />
Closed<br />
Number)<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
TN<br />
(Tenant)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Digits<br />
Received<br />
2 2 : D Y = T<br />
DNIS Data<br />
Mode<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + BB to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press Line Key to select Station or closed number or tenant.<br />
Enter the data using the dial pad.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or name (Refer to Appendix B Character Codes,<br />
Section 1 Character Assignment on page B-1.)<br />
B to switch between Day and Night<br />
H to clear all data<br />
C to assign the name (Refer to Dial Pad Entry chart)<br />
Station No. is a 2-, 3-, or 4-digit number (10~89, 100~899, or 1000~8999).<br />
Closed Number is a 2-, 3-, or 4-digit number to facilitate routing to the closed<br />
number.<br />
Tenant No. 00~47<br />
DNIS Data: 8-character maximum<br />
Digits Received: 0000~9999<br />
�<br />
Setting Data: �<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
Default Values<br />
Not Specified<br />
Default not<br />
assigned<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
22<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+ALN<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 29
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures (Continued)<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-1-20 DID Effective Digit Selection<br />
1-1-21 DID Digit Conversion Assignment<br />
1-1-23 DID Forward Station Number for Busy Station or Undefined Digit<br />
5-00 Digit Add/Del For Tie Line Networking Assignment<br />
1. When Memory Block 5-00 is used to add or delete digits on a trunk group, this Memory Block is used to route the<br />
digits after the add or delete.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. When converting a DID number to a Tenant, the following must be assigned to ring the desired station:<br />
Memory Block 4-01 [CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)]<br />
Memory Block 4-02 [CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)]<br />
Memory Block 4-09 (<strong>Telephone</strong> to Tenant Assignment).<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 30 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-1-23 DID Forward Station Number for<br />
Busy Station or Undefined Digit<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block when Memory Block 1-1-22 (DID Digit Conversion Table) is<br />
enabled to define where digits are routed when undefined or the station is busy.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
NON<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
T<br />
(TEL)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
TN<br />
(Tenant)<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + BC to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Enter Setting Data 1 using the Line key.<br />
Enter Setting Data 2 using the dial pad.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data<br />
TEL is 2-, 3-, or 4-digit number (10~89, 100~899, or 1000~8999).<br />
�<br />
Tenant number can be 00~47.<br />
�<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Setting<br />
1 Data<br />
2 3 : T R F E X = N O N<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
1-1-22 DID Digit Conversion Table<br />
Setting<br />
2<br />
Data<br />
Default Values<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 31<br />
NON<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
23<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+ALN
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
� Notes �<br />
When this Memory Block is set to a Tenant, the following must be assigned to ring the desired station:<br />
Memory Block 4-01 [CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)]<br />
Memory Block 4-02 [CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)]<br />
Memory Block 4-09 (<strong>Telephone</strong> to Tenant Assignment).<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 32 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-1-24 PBX/CTX Access Code Assignment I<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify a PBX line PBX/CTX Access Code together with<br />
pauses for outgoing calls.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + BD to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Enter the data using the dial pad.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data<br />
B to insert a pause<br />
H to clear all data<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
3-91 Trunk Type Selection<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
2 4 : P B X A C 9 –<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Default Values<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 33<br />
9–<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
24<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BA
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Example: ☎ <strong>Elite</strong><br />
� Notes �<br />
1. Features such as Code Restriction do not operate properly unless a PBX/CTX Access Code is specified. This<br />
limitation applies to PBX lines assigned in Memory Block 3-91 (Trunk Type Selection).<br />
2. A pause is not inserted in the number of an outgoing call on a CO line.<br />
3. Up to three numeric characters and three pauses can be specified.<br />
4. A pause cannot be inserted as the first digit or as consecutive digits.<br />
5. The entry for pause is –.<br />
<strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> System<br />
Intercom Line<br />
<strong>IPK</strong><br />
System<br />
PBX Line<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 34 Memory Blocks<br />
PBX<br />
CO Line
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-1-25 PBX/CTX Access Code Assignment II<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify a second PBX line PBX/CTX Access Code together<br />
with pauses for outgoing calls.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + BE to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Enter the option using the dial pad.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data<br />
B to insert a pause (cannot be first digit)<br />
H to clear all data<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
3-91 Trunk Type Selection<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
2 5 : P B X A C 8 –<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Default Values<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 35<br />
8–<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
25<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BA
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Example:<br />
☎<br />
<strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
System<br />
� Notes �<br />
<strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> System<br />
Intercom Line PBX Line<br />
1. Features such as Code Restriction do not operate properly unless a PBX/CTX Access Code is specified. This<br />
limitation only applies to PBX lines assigned in Memory Block 3-91 (Trunk Type Selection).<br />
2. A pause is not inserted in the number of an outgoing call on a CO line.<br />
3. Up to three numeric characters and three pauses can be specified.<br />
4. A pause cannot be inserted as the first or as consecutive digits.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 36 Memory Blocks<br />
PBX<br />
Tie Line
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-1-27 Automatic Day/Night Mode Switching<br />
Time Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign a start time for Pattern 1 and a different start time for<br />
Pattern 2 to automatically switch between Day Mode and Night Mode.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Pattern<br />
(1/2)<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + BG to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Enter the data using the dial pad.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data<br />
H to clear all data when the cursor is in the Data No. position<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The switching time for pattern 2 is displayed.<br />
5 Use the dial pad to change the time.<br />
6 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
7 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Mode Day<br />
Time<br />
Start<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Mode<br />
Night<br />
Time<br />
Start<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
2 7 : 1 : , :<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
1-1-32 Automatic Day/Night Mode by Day of Week Selection<br />
1-4-05 Automatic Tandem Trunk by Night Mode Selection<br />
1-8-07 Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection I<br />
1-8-48 Automatic Daylight Saving Time Selection.<br />
4-07 Code Restriction Class Assignment (Day Mode)<br />
4-08 Code Restriction Class Assignment (Night Mode)<br />
4-09 <strong>Telephone</strong> to Tenant Assignment<br />
Default Values<br />
Not Specified<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
27<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BM<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 37
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong> (Continued)<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
4-17 Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment<br />
4-37 Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Day Mode)<br />
4-38 Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Night Mode)<br />
1. The start time for Day Mode or Night Mode can be programmed to automatically switch modes at the specified<br />
times.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. A start time for Day Mode only or Night Mode only cannot be programmed.<br />
3. Day Mode and Night Mode cannot be programmed for the same start time.<br />
4. The time is entered using 24-hour clock only.<br />
5. The first time input indicates when Day Mode starts. The second time input indicates when Night Mode starts.<br />
6. Refer to Memory Block 1-1-32 (Automatic Day/Night Mode by Day of Week Selection) for selecting either Pattern<br />
1 or Pattern 2 Day/Night Mode start time for each day of the week. Assigning each day of the week to either<br />
Pattern 1 or Pattern 2 allows Day/Night Mode start time for Monday through Friday to differ from Day/Night Mode<br />
start time for Saturday and Sunday.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 38 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-1-28 Distinctive Ringing by <strong>Telephone</strong> or<br />
CO Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign a distinctive ringing tone for each telephone or each<br />
CO/PBX line.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
TEL CO<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + BH to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
2 8 : D S T R I N G T E L<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
3-07 CO/PBX Ringing Variation Selection<br />
4-01 CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)<br />
4-02 CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)<br />
4-91 <strong>Telephone</strong> Ringing Variation Selection<br />
1. TEL = <strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
Ringing tone is specified in Memory Block 4-91 (<strong>Telephone</strong> Ringing Variation Selection).<br />
� Notes �<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
28<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTS<br />
2. CO = CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
Ringing tone is specified for each CO/PBX line in Memory Block 3-07 (CO/PBX Ringing Variation Selection).<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 39
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-1-29 Private Line Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign an outside line as a private line. The private line<br />
cannot be seized by any other telephone, and an LED indication is not provided to<br />
other terminals.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + BI to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Enter the data using the dial pad.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data<br />
H to clear all data when cursor is at CO No. or Tel. Port No.<br />
Default Values<br />
Not Specified<br />
4 Press G to write the data. Data for the second line is displayed. Move the cursor to change the data.<br />
5 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Combination<br />
No.<br />
Title (1/2)<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
No. CO<br />
(01~64)<br />
2 9 : P 1 C = T =<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2-06 Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode<br />
Port No.<br />
Tel.<br />
(01~CO)<br />
4-12 Line Key Selection for <strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
1. Two private lines can be assigned to one station or one private line can be assigned to two stations.<br />
2. A Single Line <strong>Telephone</strong> (SLT) user cannot dial the Trunk Group Access Code to access a private line. The<br />
Single Line <strong>Telephone</strong> user can dial the specified Line Seizure Access Code assigned in Memory Blocks 1-1-46/<br />
1-1-47 [Access Code (1-digit/2-digit) Assignment], Function 063 or 064 to access the line.<br />
� Notes �<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
29<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BCS<br />
3. When a station is allowed Barge-In originate, and a second station is allowed Barge-In receive, Barge-In is not<br />
allowed on a private line unless both stations share the private line.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 40 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-1-30 Route Advance Block Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign a priority level (1~4) to each Trunk group assigned in<br />
a Route Advance Block. The system has 32 blocks that can be specified.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
3 0 : R T A D V 0 1 – 1 = 0 0<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + CK to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Write data using one of the following.<br />
Press G repeatedly to cycle until desired Block and Priority number are<br />
�<br />
displayed. Use the dial pad to enter the Trunk Group Number, and press<br />
G .<br />
� Use the dial pad to select Block Number, Priority Number, and Trunk Group in<br />
sequence, and press G after Block 32 to display the next Memory Block.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data<br />
Block<br />
No.<br />
� Block Numbers:<br />
1<br />
~<br />
32<br />
Title<br />
Block<br />
No.<br />
(1~32)<br />
Priority<br />
No.<br />
(1~4)<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Priority<br />
No.<br />
Setting Data<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
1 Trunk Groups 01~32<br />
2 Trunk Groups 01~32<br />
3 Trunk Groups 01~32<br />
4 Trunk Groups 01~32<br />
~<br />
~<br />
1 Trunk Groups 01~32<br />
2 Trunk Groups 01~32<br />
3 Trunk Groups 01~32<br />
4 Trunk Groups 01~32<br />
4 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Default Values<br />
All Blocks (00)<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
30<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BCS<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 41
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
3-03 Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment<br />
1. When 00 (Not Set) is programmed, no trunks are accessed for this priority setting.<br />
2. When Route Advance Block Numbers are assigned and a line key is pressed or an Access Code is dialed, the<br />
system starts searching for an idle line in a specified group (beginning with the Trunk group assigned priority 1).<br />
� Notes �<br />
3. When all CO/PBX lines are in use, the line with the next highest priority is seized.<br />
4. Route Advance Block Number Access Codes are defined in Memory Block 1-1-46 [Access Code (1-Digit)<br />
Assignment] or Memory Block 1-1-47 [Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment] function number 201~232.<br />
5. Press the Transfer key repeatedly to cycle through four priorities for each Block sequentially until all Blocks are<br />
covered, and then advance to the next Memory Block. The Trunk Group must be added using the dial pad keys.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 42 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-1-32 Automatic Day/Night Mode by Day of<br />
Week Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to select either Pattern 1 or Pattern 2 Day/Night Mode start<br />
time for each day of the week. Memory Block 1-1-27 (Automatic Day/Night Mode<br />
Switching Time Assignment) sets Day/Night Mode start time for Pattern 1 and Pattern<br />
2 to switch the system between Day Mode and Night Mode.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 Default not<br />
assigned.<br />
Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + CB to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
Each time a CO/PBX line is pressed, the LED indication changes from Pattern 1 to<br />
Pattern 2.<br />
CO/PBX<br />
Line LED<br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
3 2 : D / N B Y D A Y<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Off On<br />
Day/Night<br />
Automatic<br />
Switching<br />
Pattern 1<br />
Day/Night<br />
Automatic<br />
Switching<br />
Pattern 2<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
The shaded area indicates<br />
the default setting.<br />
Default Values<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
32<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BM<br />
Sunday ~ Saturday = Pattern 1<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 43
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-1-27 Automatic Day/Night Mode Switching Time Assignment<br />
1-8-07 Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection 1<br />
1-8-48 Automatic Daylight Saving Time Selection<br />
4-09 <strong>Telephone</strong> to Tenant Assignment<br />
4-17 Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment<br />
1. By designating two time settings in Memory Block 1-1-27 (Automatic Day/Night Mode Switching Time<br />
Assignment), one of the two settings can be assigned to each day of the week.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. To specify Day/Night Mode automatic switching time for Monday ~ Friday, and Day/Night Mode automatic<br />
switching time 2 for Saturday and Sunday, press CO/PBX line keys 1 and 7.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat<br />
Pattern 2 Pattern 1 Pattern 2<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 44 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-1-33 Speed Dial Number/Name Display<br />
Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether the dialed number or name is displayed first<br />
on the LCD of the originating station when an outgoing call is made using Speed Dial.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
DIAL NAME<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + CC to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Setting<br />
Title<br />
Data<br />
3 3 : S P D D I A L D I S P<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
1-1-18 System Speed Dial Restriction by Tenant<br />
1-1-35 Speed Dial Buffer Allocation<br />
When the name of the dialed party is not programmed in Memory Block 3-00, only the dialed number is displayed<br />
regardless of programming in this Memory Block.<br />
� Notes �<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
33<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BE<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 45
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-1-34 Tie Line First Ring Pattern Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to set a specific ringing pattern for incoming calls on Tie lines.<br />
After a delay interval specified in Memory Block 1-1-07 (Tie Line Delay Ringing Time<br />
Selection), a Tie call can ring at all Day/Night ring-assigned telephones using a<br />
different cadence.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
PAT1 PAT2 PAT3 PAT4 ICM VOICE<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + CDto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
3 4 : T L I R N G P A T 3<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
1-1-07 Tie Line Delay Ringing Time Selection<br />
1-1-53 Tie Line Delay Ring Pattern Selection<br />
4-01 CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)<br />
4-02 CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)<br />
1. Specify one pattern in the Ringing Pattern Selection Table.<br />
� Notes �<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
34<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+ALN<br />
2. When Voice is selected, switching from voice to tone is not allowed, Memory Block 1-1-07 (Tie Line Delay<br />
Ringing Time Selection) is not used, and Handsfree Answerback is not allowed at the receiving station.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 46 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Ringing Pattern Selection<br />
Pattern<br />
1<br />
2<br />
3<br />
4<br />
5 Same as Internal Ring<br />
6 Voice Announce<br />
0s 1s 2s 3s 4s 5s<br />
s= seconds<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 47<br />
6s
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-1-35 Speed Dial Buffer Allocation<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify either 100-memory or 1000-memory allocation.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
100 1000<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + CEto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
3 5 : S P D A L L O 1 0 0<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
1-1-18 System Speed Dial Restriction by Tenant<br />
1-1-33 Speed Dial Number/Name Display Selection<br />
1. The 100-memory option allows 80 System Speed Dial memories and 20 Station Speed Dial memories.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. The 1000-memory option does not allow Station Speed Dial memories.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
35<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BE<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 48 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-1-37 Trunk Queuing Timeout Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the time that a station with Trunk Queue set rings,<br />
before the queue is automatically canceled.<br />
This Memory Block can be adjusted in 1-second intervals (R3000 or higher).<br />
Display (R2500 or lower)<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
10s 20s 30s 60s<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
3 7 : T R U N K Q U E 1 0 s<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + CGto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Refer to the next page for R3000 or higher <strong>Programming</strong> Procedures.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
37<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BM<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 49
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Display (R3000 or higher)<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 +CGto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to enter the Data Setting for Class 1.<br />
Setting Data<br />
00s~99s (e.g., 02s = 2s)<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Timer Class of Service.<br />
5 Program the next Timer Class of Service or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Timer<br />
Class<br />
4-71 Station to Timer Class of Service (R3000 or higher)<br />
1~4<br />
3 7 : T R K Q U E 1 = 1 0 s<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
� Notes �<br />
Default Values<br />
Class 1~4 = 10s<br />
00s = No Limit<br />
1. When all trunks in a particular Trunk group are busy, the station user can dial an Access Code to queue on the<br />
busy Trunk group. When a Trunk in that group becomes idle, the queued station is signaled.<br />
2. <strong>Telephone</strong> ports 1 and 2 are in Station to Timer Class of Service, Class 1 by default. All other ports are in Station<br />
to Timer Class of Service, Class 2 by default (R3000 or higher).<br />
3. When a system is upgraded from R2500 or lower to R3000 or higher, the Trunk Queuing Timeout Selection is<br />
reset to the default value during the upgrade process.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 50 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-1-46 Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign a 1-digit number as an Access Code or station<br />
number.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + DF to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Enter the options using the dial pad.<br />
Use the following when entering data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data<br />
H<br />
I<br />
J<br />
L<br />
101 Trunk Group 1<br />
102 Trunk Group 2<br />
096 Last Number Redial<br />
4 Enter the Function Number for the Dial Number. Refer to the table on the following pages for a complete list.<br />
026 Callback Message Answer<br />
5 Press G to write the data and display the next Dial No.<br />
6 Program each Dial No., and press G after the last Dial No. to display the next Memory Block.<br />
7 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Dial<br />
No.<br />
0~9<br />
# *<br />
4 6 : 1 D G ( 0 ) = 1 7 6<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
1-1-47 Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-1-48 Access Code (3-Digit) Assignment<br />
Function<br />
No.<br />
Default Values<br />
Dial No.<br />
Function<br />
No.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
46<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BA<br />
Function Name<br />
K<br />
A~C<br />
D~G<br />
001 Station Number<br />
000 Not Used<br />
176 Specified Intercom Call<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 51
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
� �<br />
1. Select options from the list of function numbers in Memory Block 1-1-46 [Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment], and<br />
assign a number (from 0~9), �, or # to each selected function.<br />
Notes<br />
� When a function is assigned a 1-digit Access Code, 2-digit Access Codes with the same first digit become<br />
invalid (i.e., if a function is assigned to Access Code 5, Access Codes 50~59, 5�, and 5# cannot be used).<br />
2. To enter # or � as part of an Access Code, press B then L or J.<br />
3. This Memory Block is used when a 2- or 3-Digit Station Numbering Plan is programmed.<br />
4. When function 001 (Station Number) is assigned in this memory block, it cannot be assigned in Memory Block<br />
1-1-47 [Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment] or Memory Block 1-1-48 [Access Code (3-Digit) Assignment].<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 52 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
This table applies to Data Numbers 46, 47, and 48.<br />
Default<br />
Dial No.<br />
Function<br />
No.<br />
4, 5, 6, 7 000 Not Used<br />
1, 2, 3 001 Station Number<br />
002 Not Used<br />
~<br />
~<br />
019 Not Used<br />
Function Name<br />
020 Call Forward – No Answer Set<br />
021 Call Forward – No Answer Cancel<br />
022 Call Forward – Busy Set<br />
023 Call Forward – Busy Cancel<br />
43 024 Call Forward – Busy/No Answer Set<br />
44 025 Call Forward – Busy/No Answer<br />
Cancel<br />
# 026 Callback Message Answer<br />
6# 027 SLT Hookflash/DVM Hookflash<br />
028 Not Used<br />
029 Not Used<br />
41 030 Call Forward – All Call Set<br />
40 031 DND Set<br />
42 032 Call Forward – All Call/DND Cancel<br />
033 Call Forward – All Call Set from<br />
Destination<br />
Default<br />
Dial No.<br />
Function<br />
No.<br />
Function Name<br />
034 Call Forward – All Call Cancel from<br />
Destination<br />
035 Station Outgoing Lockout Set<br />
036 Station Outgoing Lockout Cancel<br />
037 Change Password<br />
038 Reset Password from Attendant<br />
039 Fax Status Indication (Tie/DID lines)<br />
040 Log - ON/OFF<br />
041 Account Code Entry<br />
67 042 Call Pickup Direct<br />
043 Not Used<br />
044 Timed Alarm Set at SLTs<br />
045 Timed Alarm Cancel at SLTs<br />
046 Set and Cancel of Timed Alarm for<br />
Single Line <strong>Telephone</strong> from<br />
Attendant<br />
4� 047 Call Park System Transfer<br />
4# 048 Call Park System Answer<br />
60 049 Volume/LCD Control<br />
050 Specified Tenant on CO/PBX/<br />
Centrex Line Seizure (1-digit)<br />
051 Specified Tenant on CO/PBX/<br />
Centrex Line Seizure (2-digit)<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 53
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
This table applies to Data Numbers 46, 47, and 48.<br />
Default<br />
Dial No.<br />
Function<br />
No.<br />
4, 5, 6, 7 000 Not Used<br />
1, 2, 3 001 Station Number<br />
002 Not Used<br />
~<br />
~<br />
019 Not Used<br />
Function Name<br />
020 Call Forward – No Answer Set<br />
021 Call Forward – No Answer Cancel<br />
022 Call Forward – Busy Set<br />
023 Call Forward – Busy Cancel<br />
43 024 Call Forward – Busy/No Answer Set<br />
44 025 Call Forward – Busy/No Answer<br />
Cancel<br />
# 026 Callback Message Answer<br />
6# 027 SLT Hookflash/DVM Hookflash<br />
028 Not Used<br />
029 Not Used<br />
41 030 Call Forward – All Call Set<br />
40 031 DND Set<br />
42 032 Call Forward – All Call/DND Cancel<br />
033 Call Forward – All Call Set from<br />
Destination<br />
Default<br />
Dial No.<br />
Function<br />
No.<br />
Function Name<br />
034 Call Forward – All Call Cancel from<br />
Destination<br />
035 Station Outgoing Lockout Set<br />
036 Station Outgoing Lockout Cancel<br />
037 Change Password<br />
038 Reset Password from Attendant<br />
039 Fax Status Indication (Tie/DID lines)<br />
040 Log - ON/OFF<br />
041 Account Code Entry<br />
67 042 Call Pickup Direct<br />
043 Not Used<br />
044 Timed Alarm Set at SLTs<br />
045 Timed Alarm Cancel at SLTs<br />
046 Set and Cancel of Timed Alarm for<br />
Single Line <strong>Telephone</strong> from<br />
Attendant<br />
4� 047 Call Park System Transfer<br />
4# 048 Call Park System Answer<br />
60 049 Volume/LCD Control<br />
050 Specified Tenant on CO/PBX/<br />
Centrex Line Seizure (1-digit)<br />
051 Specified Tenant on CO/PBX/<br />
Centrex Line Seizure (2-digit)<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 54 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Default<br />
Dial No.<br />
Function<br />
No.<br />
Function Name<br />
052 Call Pickup CO/PBX by Tenant<br />
(1-digit)<br />
053 Call Pickup CO/PBX/Centrex by<br />
Tenant (2-digit)<br />
054 Specified Tenant Internal Paging<br />
(1-digit)<br />
055 Specified Tenant Internal Paging<br />
(2-digit)<br />
056 Internal Emergency All Call Paging<br />
68 057 Intra-Tenant Call Pickup<br />
69 058 Night Chime Call Pickup<br />
059 Not Used<br />
060 Call Pickup CO/PBX for other<br />
Tenants<br />
061 Internal/CO/PBX Transfer Call<br />
Pickup in Same Tenant<br />
062 SLT Park to Non-Exclusive Hold<br />
063 Specified CO/PBX/Centrex Line<br />
Seizure (1-digit)<br />
064 Specified CO/PBX/Centrex Line<br />
Seizure (2-digit)<br />
065 Not Used<br />
6� 066 Call Pickup CO/PBX in Same Tenant<br />
067 Call Pickup (Tie only) in Same<br />
Tenant<br />
068 Call Pickup (PBX only) in Same<br />
Tenant<br />
069 Call Pickup (CO only) in Same<br />
Tenant<br />
51 070 All Internal Zone Paging<br />
52 071 Internal Zone A Paging<br />
53 072 Internal Zone B Paging<br />
54 073 Internal Zone C Paging<br />
5� 074 Internal/External Meet-Me<br />
Default<br />
Dial No.<br />
Function<br />
No.<br />
Function Name<br />
55 075 All External Zone Paging<br />
56 076 External Zone A Paging<br />
57 077 External Zone B Paging<br />
58 078 External Zone C Paging<br />
5# 079 External Meet-Me<br />
080 Outgoing (CO only) Access in Same<br />
Tenant<br />
59 081 All Internal/External Zone Paging<br />
082 System I. D. Number for Tie Line<br />
Networking<br />
083 Not Used<br />
085 Not Used<br />
086 Tie Line Seizure in Same Tenant<br />
087 PBX Line Seizure in Same Tenant<br />
78 088 Trunk Queuing Set<br />
79 089 Trunk Queuing Cancel<br />
76 090 Station Speed Dial <strong>Programming</strong><br />
(Single Line <strong>Telephone</strong>)<br />
091 Doorphone 1 Call<br />
092 Doorphone 2 Call<br />
093 Doorphone 3 Call<br />
094 Doorphone 4 Call<br />
77 095 Station/System Speed Dial Call<br />
(Single Line <strong>Telephone</strong>)<br />
� 096 Last Number Redial<br />
097 Not Used<br />
098 DSS 1 CALL<br />
099 DSS 2 CALL<br />
100 Not Used<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 55<br />
~<br />
~
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Default<br />
Dial No.<br />
Function<br />
No.<br />
9 101 Trunk Group 01<br />
8 102 Trunk Group 02<br />
70 103 Trunk Group 03<br />
71 104 Trunk Group 04<br />
72 105 Trunk Group 05<br />
73 106 Trunk Group 06<br />
74 107 Trunk Group 07<br />
75 108 Trunk Group 08<br />
Function Name<br />
109~132 Trunk Group 09~32<br />
133~139 Not Used<br />
45 140 Call Forward – Busy/No Answer Set<br />
for Call Arrival Key (CAR)<br />
46 141 Call Forward – Busy/No Answer<br />
Cancel for Call Arrival Key (CAR)<br />
47 142 Call Forward – All Call Set for Call<br />
Arrival Key (CAR)<br />
48 143 Call Forward – All Call Cancel for<br />
Call Arrival Key (CAR)<br />
144 Call Forward – All Split Set for Call<br />
Arrival Key (CAR)<br />
145 Call Forward – All Split Cancel for<br />
Call Arrival Key (CAR)<br />
146 Forced Account Code/Authorization<br />
Code<br />
147 Forced Account Code/Authorization<br />
Code Access<br />
148 Station Relocation<br />
150 Call Forward – No Answer Split Set<br />
151 Call Forward – No Answer Split<br />
Cancel<br />
152 Call Forward – Busy Split Set<br />
153 Call Forward – Busy Split Cancel<br />
154 Call Forward – Busy/ No Answer<br />
Split Set<br />
Default<br />
Dial No.<br />
Function<br />
No.<br />
Function Name<br />
155 Call Forward – Busy/ No Answer<br />
Split Cancel<br />
156 Call Forward – All Split Set<br />
157 Call Forward – All Split Cancel<br />
158 Call Forward – Busy/No Answer Split<br />
Set for Call Arrival Key (CAR)<br />
159 Call Forward – Busy/No Answer Split<br />
Cancel for Call Arrival Key (CAR)<br />
160~175 Not Used<br />
0 176 Specified Station Access Code 00<br />
177 Specified Station Access Code 01<br />
178 Specified Station Access Code 02<br />
179 Specified Station Access Code 03<br />
180 Specified Station Access Code 04<br />
181 Specified Station Access Code 05<br />
182 Specified Station Access Code 06<br />
183 Specified Station Access Code 07<br />
184 Specified Station Access Code 08<br />
185 Specified Station Access Code 09<br />
186 Specified Station Access Code 10<br />
187 Specified Station Access Code 11<br />
188 Specified Station Access Code 12<br />
189 Specified Station Access Code 13<br />
190 Specified Station Access Code 14<br />
191 Specified Station Access Code 15<br />
192 Specified Station Access Code 16<br />
193 Specified Station Access Code 17<br />
194 Specified Station Access Code 18<br />
195 Specified Station Access Code 19<br />
196 Specified Station Access Code 20<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 56 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Default<br />
Dial No.<br />
Function<br />
No.<br />
Function Name<br />
197 Specified Station Access Code 21<br />
198 Specified Station Access Code 22<br />
199 Specified Station Access Code 23<br />
200 Not Used<br />
201~232 Route Advance Block 01~32<br />
233~250 Not Used<br />
251 DISA Password Set (Any station)<br />
252 DISA Password Reset (Attendant<br />
only)<br />
253 DISA Password Confirmation<br />
(Attendant only)<br />
254 Not Used<br />
255 Not Used<br />
301 Third Digit Table Number 01 (2-digit<br />
Numbering Plan can only be<br />
entered.)<br />
~<br />
~<br />
304 Third Digit Table Number 04 (2-digit<br />
Numbering Plan can only be<br />
entered.)<br />
Default<br />
Dial No.<br />
Function<br />
No.<br />
Function Name<br />
401 Closed Number Block 1<br />
416 Closed Number Block 16<br />
501 VRS Voice Message Record/Verify/<br />
Erase (Voice Prompt, Automated<br />
Attendant)<br />
502 Voice Mail Message Set<br />
503 Voice Mail Message Cancel<br />
601 ARS Table 1<br />
602 ARS Table 2<br />
603 ARS Table 3<br />
604 ARS Table 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 57<br />
~<br />
~
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-1-47 Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign a 2-digit number as an Access Code.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + DG to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Enter the options using the dial pad.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data<br />
4 Enter the Function Number for the Dial Number. Refer to the table in Memory Block 1-1-46 [Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment].<br />
5 Press G to display next dial number in succession.<br />
6 After programming last Dial No., press G to display the next Memory Block.<br />
7 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Dial<br />
No.<br />
0~9<br />
# *<br />
4 7 : 2 D G ( 0 0 ) = 0 0 0<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
1-1-46 Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-1-48 Access Code (3-Digit) Assignment<br />
Function<br />
No.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
47<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BA<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 58 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
� �<br />
1. Select options from the list of function numbers in Memory Block 1-1-46 [Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment], and<br />
assign a number (from 00~99), �, or # to each selected function.<br />
Notes<br />
� When a function is assigned a 1-digit Access Code, 2-digit Access Codes with the same first digit become<br />
invalid (i.e., if a function is assigned to Access Code 5, Access Codes 50~59, 5�, and 5# cannot be used).<br />
2. To enter # or � as part of an Access Code, press B then L or J.<br />
3. Use this Memory Block when a 4-Digit Station Numbering Plan is programmed.<br />
4. When function 001 (Station Number) is assigned in this memory block, it cannot be assigned in Memory Block<br />
1-1-46 [Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment] or Memory Block 1-1-48 [Access Code (3-Digit) Assignment].<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 59
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-1-48 Access Code (3-Digit) Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign a 3-digit number as an Access Code.<br />
With System Software R2500, Function 001 (Station Number) can be assigned<br />
allowing 4-digit numbers by 10s group, 5-digit numbers by 100s group, 6-digit<br />
numbers by 1000s group, or 7-digit numbers by 10000s group.<br />
Display<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Title<br />
Third<br />
Digit<br />
Table<br />
No.<br />
(01~04)<br />
Dial<br />
No.<br />
0~9<br />
# *<br />
4 8 : 3 D G / 0 1 ( 0 ) = 0 0 0<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + DH to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Enter the Function No. for Dial No. 0 for Third Digit Table No. 01 using the dial pad.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data<br />
B andJto � enter<br />
B andLto enter #<br />
Function<br />
No.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Dial No.<br />
Default Values<br />
5 After last Dial No. entry, press G to write the data and display Third Digit Table No. 02, Dial No. 0.<br />
6 Enter Function No. for Dial No. 0, and press G to write the data and display the next Dial No.<br />
All Dial 000 (Not Used)<br />
7 After last Dial No. entry for Table 02, press G to write the data and display Third Digit Table No. 03, Dial No. 0.<br />
8 Enter Function No. for Dial No. 0, and press G to write the data and display the next Dial No.<br />
9 After last Dial No. entry for Table 03, press G to write the data and display Third Digit Table No. 04.<br />
10 Enter Function No. for Dial No. 0, and press G to write the data and display the next Dial No.<br />
11 After last Dial No. entry for Table 04, press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
12 Program next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
48<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BA<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 60 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-1-46 Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-1-47 Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-2-03 2~7-Digit Station Number Selection<br />
1-2-34 Expanded Station Number Assignment<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 61
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
� �<br />
1. Select options from the list of function numbers in Memory Block 1-1-46 [Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment],<br />
and assign a 3-digit Access Code.<br />
Notes<br />
� When a function is assigned a 1-digit Access Code or 2-digit Access Code, 3-digit Access Codes (with the<br />
same first digit) become invalid (i.e., if a function is assigned to Access Code 5, Access Codes 50~59, 5�,<br />
and 5# cannot be used).<br />
2. A station number is not assigned in this Memory Block.<br />
3. All items except function number 001 (Station Number) in 1-digit assignment are valid in this block (R2000 or<br />
lower only).<br />
4. Four groups of Access Code Tables can be used. 0~9, �, and # are the third digit Access Codes that are<br />
assigned in the third digit tables.<br />
5. Before using this function, assign function numbers 301~304 (Table No. for third digit) in Memory Block 1-1-47<br />
[Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment].<br />
6. To program Access Code 811 for Trunk Group 02:<br />
� Use Memory Block 1-1-47 [Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment] to assign function 301 to 81.<br />
� Set Third Digit Table No. 01 dial number 1 to function 102.<br />
7. By assigning Memory Blocks 1-2-03, 1-2-34, 1-1-47, and 1-1-48 as shown below, Stations can be assigned by<br />
the 10s group for 4-digit station numbers, 100s group for 5-digit station numbers, 1000s group for 6-digit station<br />
numbers, or 10000s group for 7-digit station numbers (System Software R2500).<br />
4-Digit Station Numbers<br />
MB 1-2-03 (2~7-Digit Station Number Selection) 4DGT<br />
MB 1-2-34 (Expanded Station Number Assignment) Blank<br />
MB 1-1-47 [Access Code (2-Digit ) Assignment] (AC20) 301 (Digit Table 01)<br />
MB 1-1-48 [Access Code (3-Digit ) Assignment] (Table 01, Dial 0) 001 (Station Number)<br />
Station Numbers are 2000~2009 (200X)<br />
5-Digit Station Numbers<br />
MB 1-2-03 (2~7-Digit Station Number Selection) 5DGT<br />
MB 1-2-34 (Expanded Station Number Assignment) 2<br />
MB 1-1-47 [Access Code (2-Digit ) Assignment] (AC20) 301 (Digit Table 01)<br />
MB 1-1-48 [Access Code (3-Digit ) Assignment] (Table 01, Dial 0) 001 (Station Number)<br />
Station Numbers are 20000~20009 (200XX)<br />
6-Digit Station Numbers<br />
MB 1-2-03 (2~7-Digit Station Number Selection) 6DGT<br />
MB 1-2-34 (Expanded Station Number Assignment) 20<br />
MB 1-1-47 [Access Code (2-Digit ) Assignment] (AC20 301 (Digit Table 01)<br />
MB 1-1-48 [Access Code (3-Digit ) Assignment] (Table 01, Dial 0) 001 (Station Number)<br />
Station Numbers are 200000~200999 (200XXX).<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 62 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
7-Digit Station Numbers<br />
MB 1-2-03 (2~7-Digit Station Number Selection) 7DGT<br />
Numbering Plan (2-Digit)<br />
Numbering Plan (3-Digit)<br />
3rd Digit Table No. 01<br />
� Notes (Continued) �<br />
MB 1-2-34 (Expanded Station Number Assignment) 200<br />
MB 1-1-47 [Access Code (2-Digit ) Assignment] (AC20 301 (Digit Table 01)<br />
MB 1-1-48 [Access Code (3-Digit ) Assignment] (Table 01, Dial 0) 001 (Station Number)<br />
Station Numbers are 2000000~2009999 (200XXXX).<br />
8. When function 001 (Station Number) is assigned in this memory block, it cannot be assigned in Memory Block<br />
1-1-46 [Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment] or Memory Block 1-1-47 [Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment].<br />
Dial No. Function Number<br />
81 301 (3rd Dgt Table 01)<br />
82 302 (3rd Dgt Table 02)<br />
83 303 (3rd Dgt Table 03)<br />
84 304 (3rd Dgt Table 04)<br />
Dial No. Function Number<br />
0 101 (Trunk Group 01)<br />
1 102 (Trunk Group 02)<br />
2 103 (Trunk Group 03)<br />
3 104 (Trunk Group 04)<br />
4 105 (Trunk Group 05)<br />
~<br />
~<br />
9 110 (Trunk Group 10)<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 63
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-1-49 Networking Trunk Group/Route<br />
Advance Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign the function number of the Trunk Group to be used to<br />
network an <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> 48/192 system to another system by Tie lines or CO/PBX/<br />
CTX lines.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + DI to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use dial pad to enter the Function Number for Closed Number Block 01 of the Trunk<br />
Group or the Route Advance Block.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data<br />
H to clear all data<br />
4 Press G to write selected data and display the next Closed Number Block.<br />
Default Values<br />
Not Specified<br />
5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each Closed Number Block. After data for the last Closed Number Block is written, the next Memory<br />
Block is displayed.<br />
6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Closed<br />
Number<br />
Block<br />
01~16<br />
4 9 : 0 1 = R T<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Function<br />
No.<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
1-1-30 Route Advance Block Assignment<br />
1-1-50 CO/PBX Outgoing Digit Add Assignment<br />
3-03 Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment<br />
Function Number 101~132 (Trunk Group 1~32, respectively) or 201~232 (Route Advance Block 1~32,<br />
respectively) is assigned to Closed Number blocks.<br />
� Notes �<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
49<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BCS<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 64 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-1-50 CO/PBX Outgoing Digit Add<br />
Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify up to 10 additional digits when a trunk in the Trunk<br />
group or Route Advance block assigned in Memory Block 1-1-49 (Networking Trunk<br />
Group/Route Advance Assignment) is seized, and a number is dialed.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Closed<br />
Number<br />
Block<br />
01~16<br />
5 0 : 0 1 =<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + EK to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use dial pad to enter digits to be added for Closed Number Block 01.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data<br />
H to clear all data<br />
B + Jto � enter<br />
B + Lto enter #<br />
4 Press G to write selected data and display the next Closed Number Block.<br />
Default Values<br />
Not Specified<br />
5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each Closed Number Block. After data for the last Closed Number Block is written, the next Memory<br />
Block is displayed.<br />
6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Add<br />
Digit<br />
10 Max.<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
1-1-46 Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-1-49 Networking Trunk Group/Route Advance Assignment<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
50<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BCS<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 65
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Example:<br />
Station 100<br />
Dials 200<br />
To assign System 1 in System <strong>Programming</strong>:<br />
� Notes �<br />
☎<br />
System<br />
1<br />
1. Memory Block 1-1-46 [Access Code (1-Digit) assignment]. Assignment 2 → 401 (Closed Number Block 01).<br />
2. Memory Block 1-1-49 (Networking Trunk Group/Route Advance Assignment). Assignment Block 01 → 102<br />
(Trunk group 02).<br />
3. Memory Block 1-1-50 (CO/PBX Outgoing Digit Add Assignment). Assignment Block 01 → Assign 2.<br />
4. Digits are added when the Access Code is dialed from the internal dial tone.<br />
5. This Memory Block also applies to ISDN trunks.<br />
Add 200<br />
System<br />
2<br />
☎<br />
Station 200<br />
Rings<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 66 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-1-51 CO Line Ringing Pattern Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign the initial ringing pattern or no ring for incoming calls<br />
on a CO line.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
A B C D E F G H<br />
LK 9<br />
NO<br />
LK 10 LK 11 LK 12 LK 13 LK 14 LK 15 LK 16<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + EAto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press corresponding CO/PBX line key to change data.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
C to access the next page<br />
A to access the previous page<br />
4 Press G to write data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-1-59 Synchronous Ringing Selection<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
5 1 : C O P T N A | 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Page<br />
No.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
51<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BCS<br />
The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 67
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
The Ring Patterns are shown in the table below:<br />
Pattern<br />
A<br />
B<br />
C<br />
D<br />
E<br />
F<br />
G<br />
H<br />
NO No Ring<br />
0s 1s 2s 3s 4s 5s 6s<br />
s= seconds<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 68 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-1-52 PBX Line Ringing Pattern Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign the initial ringing pattern or no ring for incoming calls<br />
on a PBX line.<br />
Display<br />
Page 1<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
A<br />
Page 2<br />
B C D E F G H<br />
LK 9<br />
NO<br />
LK 10 LK 11 LK 12 LK 13 LK 14 LK 15 LK 16<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Title<br />
5 2 : P B X P T N B | 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data Page<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + EBto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press corresponding CO/PBX line key to change data.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
C to access the next page<br />
A to access the previous page<br />
4 Press G to write data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
� Notes �<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
52<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BCS<br />
The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
Do not program this Memory Block if Memory Block 1-1-59 (Synchronous Ringing Selection) is assigned YS.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 69
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
The Ring Patterns are listed in the table below:<br />
Pattern<br />
A<br />
B<br />
C<br />
D<br />
E<br />
F<br />
G<br />
H<br />
NO No Ring<br />
0s 1s 2s 3s 4s 5s 6s<br />
s= seconds<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 70 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-1-53 Tie Line Delay Ring Pattern Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to select a ringing pattern or no ring for incoming calls on a Tie<br />
line after the timeout set in Memory Block 1-1-07 (Tie Line Delay Ringing Time<br />
Selection).<br />
Settings<br />
Page 1<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
A<br />
Page 2<br />
B C D E F G H<br />
LK 9<br />
NO<br />
LK 10 LK 11 LK 12 LK 13 LK 14 LK 15 LK 16<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
5 3 : T L I P T N D | 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Page<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + EC to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
C to access the next page<br />
A to access the previous page<br />
4 Press G to write data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
53<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+ALN<br />
The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 71
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-1-07 Tie Line Delay Ringing Time Selection<br />
1-1-34 Tie Line First Ring Pattern Selection<br />
4-01 CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)<br />
4-02 CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)<br />
The Ring Patterns are shown in the table below:<br />
Pattern<br />
A<br />
B<br />
C<br />
D<br />
E<br />
F<br />
G<br />
H<br />
NO No Ring<br />
s= seconds<br />
0s 1s 2s 3s 4s 5s 6s<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 72 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-1-54 Automated Attendant Transfer Ring<br />
Pattern<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the ringing pattern or no ring sent to the Multiline<br />
Terminal when an incoming call is received at the Automated Attendant and<br />
transferred.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Page 1<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
A<br />
Page 2<br />
B C D E F G H<br />
LK 9<br />
NO<br />
LK 10 LK 11 LK 12 LK 13 LK 14 LK 15 LK 16<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + ED to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
C to access the next page<br />
A to access the previous page<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
5 4 : A A P T N C | 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Refer to individual features in the <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Features and Specifications <strong>Manual</strong>.<br />
Page<br />
No.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
54<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AU<br />
The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 73
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
The Ring Patterns are shown in the table below:<br />
Pattern<br />
A<br />
B<br />
C<br />
D<br />
E<br />
F<br />
G<br />
H<br />
NO No Ring<br />
s= seconds<br />
0s 1s 2s 3s 4s 5s 6s<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 74 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-1-55 DID Line Ringing Pattern Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign the ringing pattern or no ring to be used for DID calls.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Page 1<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
A<br />
Page 2<br />
B C D E F G H<br />
LK 9<br />
NO<br />
LK 10 LK 11 LK 12 LK 13 LK 14 LK 15 LK 16<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + EE to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
Use the following to change page:<br />
�<br />
C to move to next page<br />
A to move to previous page<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-1-20 DID Digit Length Selection<br />
1-1-21 DID Digit Conversion Assignment<br />
1-1-22 DID Digit Conversion Table<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
5 5 : D I D P T N A | 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Page<br />
No.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
55<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+ALN<br />
The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 75
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-1-57 CO/PBX Prepause Time Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign a pause time before dialed digits can be sent over a<br />
CO/PBX line after the trunk is seized by a system user.<br />
Settings<br />
Page 1<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
NON<br />
Page 2<br />
1s 2s 3s 4s 5s 6s 7s<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
8s 9s 10s 11s 12s 13s<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
5 7 : P R E P A U S E 1 s | 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Page<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + EG to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
Use the following to change page:<br />
�<br />
C to move to next page<br />
A to move to previous page<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
57<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BCM<br />
The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 76 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-1-59 Synchronous Ringing Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not CO/PBX calls follow Synchronous<br />
Ringing.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
YS NO<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + EI to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
5 9 : S Y N C H R O N U S Y S<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-1-51 CO Line Ringing Pattern Selection<br />
1-1-52 PBX Line Ringing Pattern Selection<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
Synchronous Ringing does not apply to incoming DID calls, off-hook ringing calls, or CO/PBX ring transfer calls.<br />
� Notes �<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
59<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BCS<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 77
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-1-60 8-Digit Matching Table Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign the outgoing dial digit for Code Restriction (except<br />
OCC Dial Digit - Normal Dial). Program this assignment in one of two ways:<br />
a) When the user dials digit(s) and there is a match, the system allows free dialing or<br />
denies dialing by disconnecting. Refer to Memory Block 1-1-61 (8-Digit Matching<br />
Table to Class Assignment) for programming.<br />
b) When a user dials digit(s) and there is no match, the system allows free dialing or<br />
denies dialing by disconnecting. Refer to Memory Block 1-1-65 (Code Restriction<br />
Class Allow/Deny Selection) for programming.<br />
Display<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
6 0 : 8 D I G I T T A B L E<br />
0 0 / 0 0 = 9 1 1<br />
8-Digit<br />
Matching<br />
Table<br />
Dial<br />
Code<br />
Title<br />
Digit<br />
Dial<br />
8) (max.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + FK to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to enter the data for Dial Code 00 for 8-Digit Matching Table 00.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data<br />
H to clear data<br />
The information that can be entered includes:<br />
�<br />
Matching Table: 00~15 (8-digit)<br />
Dial Code: 00~15<br />
Dial Digit: 0~9, �, #, NANP = X, P, N (Maximum eight digits)<br />
Default Values<br />
Matching<br />
Table<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
60<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AC<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 78 Memory Blocks<br />
Dial<br />
Code<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
00 00 911<br />
11 00 0<br />
12 00 976<br />
13 00/ 01/02 1800/1888/1877<br />
14 00 1X<br />
15 00 X
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
4 Operation data includes:<br />
Operation<br />
Data<br />
5 Press G to write the data and advance to the next Dial Code. After all Dial Codes for 8-Digit Matching Table 00 are entered,<br />
press G again to display 8 Digit Matching Table 01.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Dial Number Operation<br />
K~I,J,L X B G +<br />
KandA P B H +<br />
B~I I<br />
� J J<br />
L<br />
L<br />
N<br />
#<br />
B +<br />
B +<br />
B +<br />
6 Repeat Steps 3 and 5 to cycle through all Dial Codes for all 8-Digit Matching Tables. After the last Dial Code for the last 8-Digit<br />
Matching Table is entered, the next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
7 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Refer to Chapter 3 Advanced Applications, Section 1 Code Restriction on page 3-1.<br />
1. There are 16, 8-Digit Matching Tables. Each 8-digit table contains 16 Dial Codes. Each dial code can have eight<br />
characters including digits and/or �, #, X, P, or N characters.<br />
2. NANP = North American Numbering Plan.<br />
� Notes �<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 79
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-1-61 8-Digit Matching Table to Class<br />
Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to program each 8-digit Matching Table to allow or deny<br />
assignment per class. Classes 00 and 15 are fixed. Only classes 01~14 can be<br />
programmed.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
NON<br />
YS<br />
(Allow)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong>.<br />
Title<br />
Class<br />
No.<br />
01~14<br />
NO<br />
(Deny)<br />
Table<br />
00~15<br />
6 1 : C L S 0 1 ( 0 0 ) = Y S<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + FA to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option for Class 01 Table 00.<br />
Classes: �<br />
Class 00 and 15 cannot be programmed<br />
Class 00 has no restrictions (Allow)<br />
Class 15 has restricted outgoing (Deny)<br />
Refer to the table on the next page.<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
Refer to Chapter 3 Advanced Applications, Section 1 Code Restriction on page 3-1.<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and advance to the next Table and then to the next Class. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each Class<br />
and Table.<br />
5 After data for the last Table for the last Class is entered, the next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
61<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AC<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 80 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Table 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15<br />
Class<br />
01 YS NO NO NO<br />
02 YS NO YS NO NO<br />
03 YS NO NO YS NO NO<br />
04 YS YS NO NO<br />
05 YS<br />
06 YS<br />
07 YS<br />
08 YS<br />
09 YS<br />
10 YS<br />
11 YS<br />
12 YS<br />
13 YS<br />
14 YS<br />
YS = Allow<br />
NO = Deny<br />
NON = Blank<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 81
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-1-62 System Speed Dial Override by Class<br />
Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify per Class whether or not Class Selection can<br />
override System Speed Dial.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
NO YS<br />
(Override)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + FB to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option for Class 01.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and advance to the next class. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each class.<br />
5 After data for the last class is entered, the next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Class<br />
No.<br />
01~14<br />
6 2 : S P D O V R ( 0 1 ) = Y S<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
1-1-18 System Speed Dial Restriction by Tenant<br />
At system default, all stations are set to Class 00 to allow override for System Speed Dial.<br />
� Notes �<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
62<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AC<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 82 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-1-63 Hold Recall Time Selection<br />
(Exclusive)<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the time for Exclusive Hold Recall. When No Limit is<br />
selected, Exclusive Hold Recall is not provided.<br />
This Memory Block can be adjusted in 1-second intervals (R3000 or higher).<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 5.0 8.0 ∞<br />
(No Limit)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
6 3 : H O L D R E C L 1 . 0<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + FC to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Refer to next page for R3000 or higher <strong>Programming</strong> Procedures.<br />
default. Times<br />
are in minutes.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
63<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BM<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 83
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Display (R3000 or higher)<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 +FCto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to enter the Data Setting for Class 1.<br />
Setting Data<br />
000s~999s (e.g., 020s = 20s)<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Timer Class of Service.<br />
5 Program the next Timer Class of Service or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Timer<br />
Class<br />
1-1-03 Hold Recall Time Selection (Non-Exclusive Hold)<br />
1-2-23 System Call Park Recall Time Selection<br />
4-71 Station to Timer Class of Service (R3000 or higher)<br />
1~4<br />
6 3 : H L D R C L 1 = 0 6 0 s<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
1. When an Exclusive Hold call recalls, the held call switches to a Non-Exclusive Hold call.<br />
� Notes �<br />
Default Values<br />
Class 1~4 = 060s<br />
000s = No Limit<br />
2. <strong>Telephone</strong> ports 1 and 2 are in Station to Timer Class of Service, Class 1 by default. All other ports are in Station<br />
to Timer Class of Service, Class 2 by default (R3000 or higher).<br />
3. When a system is upgraded from R2500 or lower to R3000 or higher, the Hold Recall Time Selection is reset to<br />
the default value during the upgrade process.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 84 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-1-65 Code Restriction Class Allow/Deny<br />
Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign Code Restriction 01~14 Classes as Allow or Deny.<br />
This assignment is used when there is no match or there is an overlap (duplicate<br />
numbers in tables with opposite assignments) of numbers in the 8-Digit Matching<br />
Tables.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
YS<br />
(Allow)<br />
NO<br />
(Deny)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + FE to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change data option. Default Values<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Refer to Chapter 3 Advanced Applications, Section 1 Code Restriction on page 3-1.<br />
� Notes �<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
Class 01~04 Allow (YS)<br />
Class 05~14 Deny (NO)<br />
4 Press G to write the data and advance to the next Class. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until last Class is assigned.<br />
5 The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
Class<br />
No.<br />
Title Function<br />
01~14<br />
6 5 : C L A S S ( 0 1 ) = Y S<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
65<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AC<br />
1. When a match is not found or duplicate match is made with opposite assignments, the system uses this memory<br />
Block.<br />
2. When the interdigit dialing time duration exceeds 10 seconds while a restricted station user is dialing on an<br />
outside line, the system automatically drops the call.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 85
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-1-66 8-Digit Matching Table to Normal<br />
Dial Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign the 8-Digit Matching Table by class for normal dialing<br />
as used or unused. When unused is assigned, the system does not check during<br />
normal dialing even when Memory Block 1-1-61 (8-Digit Matching Table to Class<br />
Assignment) is programmed.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Page 1<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
Table 00 Table 01 Table 02 Table 03 Table 04 Table 05 Table 06 Table 07<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
Table 08 Table 09 Table 10 Table 11 Table 12 Table 13 Table 14 Table 15<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
6 6 : N O R M A L D I A L | 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + FF to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change data option for each Table.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
C to access the next page<br />
A to access the previous page<br />
Each time a CO/PBX line key is pressed, the LED toggles between On<br />
�<br />
and Off.<br />
CO/PBX Line LED Off On<br />
Refer to Chapter 3 Advanced Applications, Section 1 Code Restriction on page 3-1.<br />
Page<br />
No.<br />
Data Restricted Not restricted<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
The shaded<br />
selection is<br />
the default.<br />
Default Values<br />
The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
66<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AC<br />
Tables 00~14 Used (Non-OCC and OCC)<br />
Table 15 Unused (OCC calls only)<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 86 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-1-67 OCC Table Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign an Other Common Carrier (OCC) code (8-digit<br />
maximum) in a table. A maximum of 16 codes can be assigned.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + FG to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to enter the data.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
OCC<br />
Table<br />
01~16<br />
6 7 : ( 0 1 ) =<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data<br />
H to clear data<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
The information that can be entered includes:<br />
�<br />
OCC Table: 01~16 (8-digit)<br />
�<br />
�<br />
Setting Data: 0~9, �, #, NANP = X, P, N (Maximum eight digits)<br />
Operation data includes:<br />
Operation<br />
Dial Number Operation<br />
Data<br />
K~I,J,L X B G +<br />
KandA P B H +<br />
B~I N B I +<br />
J B + �<br />
L # B +<br />
J<br />
L<br />
4 Press G to write the data and advance to the next OCC table.<br />
5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each OCC Table. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Refer to Chapter 3 Advanced Applications, Section 1 Code Restriction on page 3-1.<br />
Default Values<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
67<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AC<br />
OCC Table 01 ~ 15 Blank<br />
OCC Table 16 1010XXX<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 87
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-1-68 8-Digit Matching Table to OCC Table<br />
Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign each 8-Digit Matching Table to each Other Common<br />
Carrier (OCC) Code Table.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Page 1<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
Table 00<br />
Page 2<br />
Table 01 Table 02 Table 03 Table 04 Table 05 Table 06 Table 07<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
Table 08 Table 09 Table 10 Table11 Table 12 Table13 Table14 Table15<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + FH to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change data option.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
C to access the next page<br />
A to access the previous page<br />
Each time a CO/PBX line key is pressed, the LED toggles between On<br />
�<br />
and Off.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Refer to Chapter 3 Advanced Applications, Section 1 Code Restriction on page 3-1.<br />
Default Values<br />
Default not<br />
assigned.<br />
OCC Tables 01~15:<br />
All Matching Tables Not Used<br />
OCC Table 16:<br />
Matching Tables 00~14 Not Used<br />
Matching Table 15 Used<br />
4 Press G to write the data and advance to the next OCC table. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until last OCC data is entered.<br />
5 The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
OCC<br />
Table<br />
Title Page No.<br />
01~16<br />
6 8 : 8 D G O C C ( 0 1 ) | 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
CO/PBX Line LED Off On<br />
Data Unused Used<br />
The shaded area<br />
is the default<br />
setting.<br />
6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
68<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AC<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 88 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-1-69 Tie Line Code Restriction Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to restrict outgoing Tie line dialed digits.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
NO YS<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
6 9 : T I E R E S T = Y S<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + FI to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change data option. Default Values<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Refer to Chapter 3 Advanced Applications, Section 1 Code Restriction on page 3-1.<br />
Restriction<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
69<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AC<br />
Notes �<br />
�<br />
When Tie lines are assigned code restriction, the Access Code used to dial out of the distant system must be<br />
entered in front of the dialed number in the 8-Digit Matching Tables.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 89
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-1-70 Code Restriction Class Assignment<br />
When Lockout is Set<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign the Code Restriction Class when a station user sets<br />
the Station Outgoing Lockout or when the Attendant sets Attendant Station Outgoing<br />
Lockout.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
7 0 : R E S T C L A S S = 1 5<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + GK to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Used dial pad to enter class restriction.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
4 Press G to write selected data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Refer to Chapter 3 Advanced Applications, Section 1 Code Restriction on page 3-1.<br />
Default Values<br />
Class 15<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
70<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AC<br />
Notes �<br />
�<br />
When a station is locked out, the Code Restriction Class Assignment of this Memory Block is used instead of the<br />
Code Restriction Class assigned in Memory Block 4-07 [Code Restriction Class Assignment (Day Mode)] or 4-08<br />
[Code Restriction Class Assignment (Night Mode)].<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 90 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-1-71 First Delay Announcement Start Time<br />
Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the time between receiving a CO call and sending a<br />
First Delay Announcement to the calling party.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
00 10 20 30 40 50 60<br />
default. Times<br />
are in seconds.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + GA to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
7 1 : M S G S T A R T = 2 0<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-1-72 First Delay Announcement Repeat Selection<br />
1-8-13 VRS Message Function Assignment<br />
3-41 Delay Announcement Assignment<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
Notes �<br />
�<br />
This Memory Block does not display unless the MIFA-U ( ) ETU is installed.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
71<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AR<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 91
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-1-72 First Delay Announcement Repeat<br />
Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the number of times a First Delay Announcement is<br />
repeated.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + GB to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
7 2 : M S G 1 S E N D = 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
1-1-71 First Delay Announcement Start Time Selection<br />
1-8-12 VRS Message Recording Time Selection<br />
1-8-13 VRS Message Function Assignment<br />
3-41 Delay Announcement Assignment<br />
Notes �<br />
�<br />
1. This Memory Block does not display unless the MIFA-U( ) ETU is installed.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
72<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AR<br />
2. When Memory Block 2-08 is used, this is the number of times the message is played back-to-back. After this is<br />
done, the system looks at the timer in 1-1-73.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 92 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-1-73 First to Second Delay Announcement<br />
Interval Time Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the time between the end of the First Delay<br />
Announcement sending time and the start time of the Second Delay Announcement.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
00 10 20 30 40 50 60 ∞<br />
(No Limit)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + GC to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
7 3 : M S G I N T V L = 2 0<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
1-1-74 Second Delay Announcement Repeat Selection<br />
1-1-75 Second Delay Announcement Repeat Interval Time Selection<br />
1-8-13 VRS Message Function Assignment<br />
3-41 Delay Announcement Assignment<br />
Notes �<br />
�<br />
This Memory Block does not display unless the MIFA-U( ) ETU is installed.<br />
default. Times<br />
are in seconds.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
73<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AR<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 93
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-1-74 Second Delay Announcement Repeat<br />
Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the number of times a Second Delay Announcement<br />
is repeated.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + GD to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
7 4 : M S G 2 S E N D = 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
1-1-73 First to Second Delay Announcement Interval Time Selection<br />
1-1-75 Second Delay Announcement Repeat Interval Time Selection<br />
1-8-12 VRS Message Recording Time Selection<br />
1-8-13 VRS Message Function Assignment<br />
3-41 Delay Announcement Assignment<br />
Notes �<br />
�<br />
1. This Memory Block does not display unless the MIFA-U( ) ETU is installed.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
74<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AR<br />
2. When Memory Block 2-08 is used, this is the number of times the message is played back-to-back. After this is<br />
done, the system looks at 1-1-75 to repeat the procedure.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 94 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-1-75 Second Delay Announcement Repeat<br />
Interval Time Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the interval time to repeat Second Delay<br />
Announcement to the calling party.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
00 10 20 30 40 50 60 ∞<br />
(No Limit)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + GE to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
7 5 : M S G 2 R P E T = 2 0<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
1-1-73 First to Second Delay Announcement Interval Time Selection<br />
1-1-74 Second Delay Announcement Repeat Selection<br />
3-41 Delay Announcement Assignment<br />
Notes �<br />
�<br />
This Memory Block does not display unless the MIFA-U( ) ETU is installed.<br />
default. Times<br />
are in seconds.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
75<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AR<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 95
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-1-76 Barge-In Alert Tone Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not Barge-In Alert Tone is allowed.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
YS NO<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + GF to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
7 6 : A L E R T T O N E = Y S<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-8-08 Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2<br />
4-17 Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment<br />
4-90 SLT Data Line Security Assignment<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
Notes �<br />
�<br />
1. Monitoring telephone conversations may be illegal under certain circumstances and laws. Consult a legal advisor<br />
before implementing the monitor of conversations. Some federal and state laws require a monitoring party to use<br />
an alert tone to indicate monitoring and/or obtain consent from all parties to the conversation. Some laws provide<br />
strict penalties for illegal monitoring of telephone conversations.<br />
2. When YS is assigned, both internal and external parties receive the alert tone.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
76<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTS<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 96 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-1-77 Delayed Ringing Time Assignment<br />
(CO)<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign the delayed ringing time for incoming outside line<br />
calls.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + GG to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to enter data.<br />
Setting data: �<br />
KK~II<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
7 7 : D R I N G ( 1 ) = 1 5 s<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
1-2-26 Delayed Ringing Time Assignment (ICM)<br />
Default Values<br />
15 Seconds<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
77<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BCM<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 97
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-1-78 Caller ID Display Assignment for<br />
System Mode<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign up to 15 Multiline Terminals to display ANI/Caller ID<br />
Indication for normal incoming CO/PBX calls or CO/PBX calls ringing a Call Arrival<br />
(CAR) key.<br />
This Memory Block is used for System Software R1600 and lower. For System<br />
Software R1700 and higher it is no longer required.<br />
Display<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Title<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + GH to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to enter Entry No. 01 and Tel Port No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data<br />
Entry<br />
No.<br />
01~15<br />
7 8 : C A L L I D 0 1 =<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Port No.<br />
Tel<br />
(00~99<br />
A0~A9<br />
B0~B9<br />
Default Values<br />
Not specified<br />
4 Press G to write the data and advance to the next Entry No. After each tel port No. is selected, press G again. A total<br />
of 15 entries can be made. After the last data is entered, the next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Notes �<br />
�<br />
1. To display ANI/Caller ID Indication for normal incoming and CAR incoming calls, Caller ID Indication and Ring<br />
Assignment must be programmed.<br />
2. Fifteen Multiline Terminals can be assigned system-wide to display ANI/Caller ID.<br />
CO)<br />
3. A sixteenth terminal can be assigned to display ANI/Caller ID using another Memory Block.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
78<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AI<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 98 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-1-79 BGM Port Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign the CO/PBX port as a Background Music port.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + GI to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to enter the CO No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
7 9 : B G M C 0 = 0 0<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-8-08 Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2<br />
2-06 Line Key Selection For Tenant Mode<br />
No. CO<br />
(01~64)<br />
4-12 Line Key Selection For <strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
Default Values<br />
Not specified<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
79<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BCS<br />
Notes �<br />
�<br />
When separate Music on Hold and Station Background Music are required, use an analog CO port to support<br />
Station Background Music.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 99
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-1-80 ISDN DTMF Duration/Interdigit<br />
Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify tone duration/interdigit time of Dual-Tone<br />
Multifrequency (DTMF) signals for the ISDN trunk.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
default. Times<br />
70/60 100/70 400/100 600/100 900/200<br />
are in<br />
milliseconds.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + HK to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
8 0 : M F = 1 0 0 / 7 0<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
3-92 Trunk (Installed, DP/DTMF) Selection<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
80<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AN<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 100 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-1-81 ISDN Dial Interval Time Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the time between each digit dialed before digits are<br />
sent over the ISDN PRI line Network. This also applies to K-CCIS outgoing calls.<br />
This Memory Block can be adjusted in 1-second intervals (R3000 or higher).<br />
Display (2500 or lower)<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
2s 4s 8s 16s 32s<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
8 1 : I S D N D I A L 4 s<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + HA to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Refer to the next page for R3000 or higher <strong>Programming</strong> Procedures.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
81<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AN<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 101
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Display (3000 or higher)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 +HAto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to enter the Data Setting for Class 1.<br />
Setting Data<br />
01s~99s (e.g., 08s = 8s)<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
8 1 : I S D N D I A L 0 4 s<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-15-07 K-CCIS Message Response Timeout Assignment<br />
3-91 Trunk Type Selection<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
3-92 Trunk (Installed, DP/DTMF) Selection<br />
Default Values<br />
04 Seconds<br />
Notes �<br />
�<br />
1. When Maximum Digits are assigned, and a user dials a phone number equal to the limit set, the dialed digits are<br />
sent immediately over the Network without waiting for this timer to expire.<br />
2. R3000 or higher is required to adjust this Memory Block by 1-second intervals.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 102 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-1-82 CO Feature Code Service for Code<br />
Restriction<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to define a code to send to the CO in front of the dialed<br />
number to allow completion of a CO call made to a Code restricted number set to<br />
allow.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Code<br />
Table<br />
01~10<br />
8 2 : 0 1 =<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + HB to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to enter the Feature Code for Restriction to Code Table 01.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data<br />
4 Press G to write the data.<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for all code Tables. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Default Values<br />
Not specified<br />
� �<br />
Example: Set Code Table 01 to �67<br />
Notes<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
82<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AC<br />
When Tel 100 user dials Access Code 9, Feature Code �67 <strong>Telephone</strong> Number 12147517000 to access a line<br />
that is code restricted, the code restriction starts at 12147517000. When code restriction is set to allow, the 1214<br />
matches and the call goes through. When Code restriction is deny, the 1214 matches and user receives a<br />
reorder tone and ERROR is displayed on telephones that have a display.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 103
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-1-86 Call Monitoring Alert Tone<br />
Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not Call Monitoring Alert Tone is allowed.<br />
When allowed, the Conference LED indicates Call Monitoring. When denied, the<br />
Conference LED does not indicate Call Monitoring.<br />
System Software R2000 or higher is required.<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
YS NO<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK1 + HF to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
8 6 : A L E R T T O N E = Y S<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
1-8-08 Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2<br />
Page 6, LK6 and LK7<br />
Notes �<br />
�<br />
1. When YS is assigned, Call Monitoring Tone and the Conference LED indicate Call Monitoring.<br />
2. When NO is assigned, Call Monitoring Tone and the Conference LED do not indicate Call Monitoring.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
86<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTS<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 104 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-2-00 Internal Paging Timeout Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the time allowed for paging.<br />
This Memory Block can be adjusted in 1-second intervals (R3000 or higher).<br />
Display (R2500 or lower)<br />
Settings<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
90s 120s ∞<br />
(No Limit)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Title<br />
0 0 : P A G I N G 9 0 s<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK2 to access the Memory Block.<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Refer to next page for R3000 or higher <strong>Programming</strong> Procedures.<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
2<br />
Data No.<br />
00<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BP<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 105
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Display (R3000 or higher)<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK2 to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to enter the Data Setting for Class 1.<br />
Setting Data<br />
000s~255s (e.g., 020s = 20s)<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Timer Class of Service.<br />
5 Program the next Timer Class of Service or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Timer<br />
Class<br />
1-7-06 External Paging Timeout Selection<br />
4-93 Internal Zone Paging Selection<br />
4-71 Station to Timer Class of Service (R3000 or higher)<br />
Notes �<br />
�<br />
1. Types of paging include:<br />
All Internal Zone (51)<br />
�<br />
� Internal Zone Paging (52~54)<br />
� External Zone Paging (all speakers) (55)<br />
� External Zone Paging (individual speakers) (56~58)<br />
1~4<br />
0 0 : P A G I N G 1 = 0 9 0 s<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
Default Values<br />
Class 1~4 = 090s<br />
000s = No Limit<br />
� Internal/External Zone Paging (59)<br />
2. <strong>Telephone</strong> Ports 1 and 2 are in Station to Timer Class of Service, Class 1, by default. All other ports are in<br />
Station to Timer Class of Service, Class 2, by default.<br />
3. When a system is upgraded from R2500 or lower to R3000 or higher, the Internal Paging Timeout Selection is<br />
reset to the default during the upgrade process.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 106 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-2-01 Intercom Call Voice/Tone Signal<br />
Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether signal tone or voice is used first for an<br />
intercom call.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
TONE VOICE<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK2 +KAto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Title<br />
0 1 : V O I C E C A L L<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
1-6-03 DSS Call Voice/Tone Signal Selection<br />
Notes �<br />
�<br />
1. To switch from voice to tone signaling or from tone to voice, dial a station number, then dial 1.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
2<br />
Data No.<br />
01<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BI<br />
2. When tone signaling is programmed in this Memory Block, the called party cannot answer handsfree unless the<br />
originator of the call dials 1.<br />
3. This Memory Block has no effect on incoming Voice Announcement Tie/DID line calls. Refer to Memory Block<br />
1-1-34 (Tie Line First Ring Pattern Selection).<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 107
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-2-02 Automatic Callback Release Time<br />
Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the time allowed for an automatic callback before<br />
the request is automatically canceled.<br />
This Memory Block can be adjusted in 1-minute intervals (R3000 or higher).<br />
Display (R2500 or lower)<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
30s 1m 2m 3m 5m 10m 20m 30m default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
0 2 : C A L L B A C K 3 0 m<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK2 + KB to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Refer to next page for R3000 or higher <strong>Programming</strong> Procedures.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
2<br />
Data No.<br />
02<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BM<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 108 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Display (R3000 or higher)<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK2 + KB to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to enter the Data Setting for Class 1.<br />
Setting Data<br />
00m~99m (e.g., 05m =5m)<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Timer Class of Service.<br />
5 Program the next Timer Class of Service or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Timer<br />
Class<br />
4-71 Station to Timer Class of Service (R3000 or higher)<br />
1~4<br />
0 2 : C A L L B A C K 1 = 3 0 M<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
Default Values<br />
Class 1~4 = 30m<br />
00m = No Limit<br />
Notes �<br />
�<br />
1. <strong>Telephone</strong> Ports 1 and 2 are in Station to Timer Class of Service, Class 1, by default. All other ports are in<br />
Station to Timer Class of Service, Class 2, by default.<br />
2. When a system is upgraded from R2500 or lower to R3000 or higher, the Automatic Callback Release Time<br />
Selection is reset to the default during the upgrade process.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 109
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-2-03 2~7-Digit Station Number Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to determine the number of digits for station numbers. Either<br />
2-digit (10~89), 3-digit (100~899), or 4-digit (1000~8999) assignment is available or a<br />
5-, 6-, or 7-digit station numbering plan is available.<br />
System Software R2500 is required to assign 5-, 6-, or 7-Digit station numbering<br />
plan.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
2DGT 3DGT 4DGT 5DGT 6DGT 7DGT<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK2 + KCto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-1-46 Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-1-47 Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-1-48 Access Code (3-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-2-34 Expanded Station Number Assignment<br />
1-8-26 Voice Mail Quick Transfer Master Hunt Number<br />
4-10 Station Number Assignment<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
0 3 : S T A . N O . 3 D G T<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
2<br />
Data No.<br />
03<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BS<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 110 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
� Notes �<br />
1. The Station Numbering Plan can be 2-~7- digits; however, only one plan can be used at a time.<br />
2. After a change is made in this Memory Block, all station numbers must be reassigned in Memory Block 4-10<br />
(Station Number Assignment).<br />
3. By assigning Memory Blocks 1-2-03, 1-2-34, 1-1-47, and 1-1-48 as shown below, Stations can be assigned by<br />
the 10s group for 4-digit station numbers, 100s group for 5-digit station numbers, 1000s group for 6-digit station<br />
numbers, or 10000s group for 7-digit station numbers (System Software R2500).<br />
4-Digit Station Numbers<br />
MB 1-2-03 (2~7-Digit Station Number Selection) 4DGT<br />
MB 1-2-34 (Expanded Station Number Assignment) Blank<br />
MB 1-1-47 [Access Code (2-Digit ) Assignment] (AC20) 301 (Digit Table 01)<br />
MB 1-1-48 [Access Code (3-Digit ) Assignment] (Table 01, Dial 0) 001 (Station Number)<br />
Station Numbers are 2000~2009 (200X)<br />
5-Digit Station Numbers<br />
MB 1-2-03 (2~7-Digit Station Number Selection) 5DGT<br />
MB 1-2-34 (Expanded Station Number Assignment) 2<br />
MB 1-1-47 [Access Code (2-Digit ) Assignment] (AC20) 301 (Digit Table 01)<br />
MB 1-1-48 [Access Code (3-Digit ) Assignment] (Table 01, Dial 0) 001 (Station Number)<br />
Station Numbers are 20000~20009 (200XX)<br />
6-Digit Station Numbers<br />
MB 1-2-03 (2~7-Digit Station Number Selection) 6DGT<br />
MB 1-2-34 (Expanded Station Number Assignment) 20<br />
MB 1-1-47 [Access Code (2-Digit ) Assignment] (AC20) 301 (Digit Table 01)<br />
MB 1-1-48 [Access Code (3-Digit ) Assignment] (Table 01, Dial 0) 001 (Station Number)<br />
Station Numbers are 200000~200999 (200XXX)<br />
7-Digit Station Numbers<br />
MB 1-2-03 (2~7-Digit Station Number Selection) 7DGT<br />
MB 1-2-34 (Expanded Station Number Assignment) 200<br />
MB 1-1-47 [Access Code (2-Digit ) Assignment] (AC20) 301 (Digit Table 01)<br />
MB 1-1-48 [Access Code (3-Digit ) Assignment] (Table 01, Dial 0) 001 (Station Number)<br />
Station Numbers are 2000000~2009999 (200XXXX)<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 111
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-2-04 Call Arrival Key Block Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the number of Call Arrival keys that can be used in<br />
the system.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Page 1Ports 01~32<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
Port 01~04 Port 05~08 Port 09~12 Port 13~16 Port 17~20 Port 21~24 Port 25~28 Port 29~32<br />
Page 2 Ports 33~64<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
Port 33~36 Port 37~40 Port 41~44 Port 45~48 Port 49~52 Port 53~56 Port 57~60 Port 61~64<br />
Page 3 Ports 65~96<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
Port 65~68 Port 69~72 Port 73~76 Port 77~80 Port 81~84 Port 85~88 Port 89~92 Port 93~96<br />
Page 4 Ports 97~CO<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
Port 97~A0 Port A1~A4 Port A5~A8 Port A9~B2 Port B3~B6 Port B7~C0<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK2 + KDto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
LK is green = block assigned for CAR<br />
LK is red = block not available for CAR (hardware installed)<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
0 4 : C A R A S S I G N | 0 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Refer to individual features in the <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Features and Specifications <strong>Manual</strong>.<br />
Default Values<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
2<br />
Data No.<br />
04<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BK<br />
Default: No Call<br />
Arrival Key<br />
Blocks are<br />
assigned.<br />
No Call Arrival Key Blocks are assigned.<br />
Hardware equipped ports are red.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 112 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
� Notes �<br />
1. The <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> expanded system allows a maximum of 120 ports to be shared by station ports (ESI, SLI,<br />
FMS/VMS, and OPX) and Call Arrival Keys. When 32 station ports are being used, 88 remain for use as Call<br />
Arrival (CAR) Keys.<br />
2. The total number of shared and CAR ports are shared with PS ports.<br />
3. The <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> basic system allows a maximum of 32 ports to be shared by Legacy stations (ESI, SLI,<br />
FMS/VMS, and OPX) and Call Arrival Keys. In addition to the shared ports, 40 dedicated CAR ports can also be<br />
defined. Dedicated CAR ports are 33~72.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 113
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-2-08 Specified Station Access Code<br />
Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign specific stations for abbreviated dialing. Up to 24<br />
stations can be assigned.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK2 + KHto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to enter Specified Station Access Code 00 Tel Port No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
H to clear data<br />
Setting Data: �<br />
Tel. Port No. 01~120<br />
Specified Station Access Code is 00~23<br />
4 Press G to write data and display the next Specified Station Access Code.<br />
5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each Specified Station Access Code.<br />
6 The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
7 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Specified<br />
Station<br />
Access<br />
Code<br />
00~23<br />
0 8 : S P C L E X T 0 0 = 0 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
1-1-46 Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-1-47 Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment<br />
Tel.Port<br />
01~C0<br />
1-4-14 Automated Attendant Message Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-4-15 Automated Attendant Message Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment<br />
Default Values<br />
Access Code No. Value<br />
00 01<br />
01-23 Not Set<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
2<br />
Data No.<br />
08<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BA<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 114 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
� Notes �<br />
1. Specified stations can be accessed from intercom (ICM) dial tone or as an outside caller calling into the <strong>Electra</strong><br />
<strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> system Auto Attendant.<br />
2. The Specified Access Code is assigned in Memory Blocks 1-1-46 or 1-1-47 [Access Code (1-Digit/2-Digit)<br />
Assignment].<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 115
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-2-09~18 Customized Message 1~10<br />
Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to program various messages for display at a station LCD.<br />
When a user places an intercom (ICM) call from a station equipped with an LCD<br />
display to a station in DND mode, the applicable programmed message displays at the<br />
calling station.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
0 9 : D N D<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK2 + KI~AH to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Enter the options using the dial pad.<br />
Data<br />
Setting<br />
digits max.)<br />
(13<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Use the following enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data<br />
H to clear data<br />
4 Enter the characters to be displayed. Refer to Appendix B Character Codes, Section 1 Character Assignment on page B-1.<br />
5 After entering each message for Memory Block 1-2-9~18 (Custom Message 1~10 Assignment), press G to write the data.<br />
The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Default Values<br />
Data No. Message<br />
09 DND<br />
10 MEETING<br />
11 BUSINESS TRIP<br />
12 NOT IN<br />
13 WITH GUEST<br />
14 OUT OF OFFICE<br />
15~18 Not Specified<br />
Notes �<br />
�<br />
1. Ten messages are available, the first six are assigned at default.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
2<br />
Data No.<br />
09~18<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BI<br />
2. System Software allows a message to be entered using the dial pad instead of the ASCII Character Code Tables.<br />
Follow the procedure in Appendix B Character Codes, Section 1 Character Assignment on page B-1.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 116 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-2-19 Intercom Ring Pattern Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to select a ring pattern or turn the tone ON/OFF when intercom<br />
calls are made.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Page 1<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
OFF<br />
Page 2<br />
ON A B C D E F<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
G H<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Title<br />
1 9 : I C M P T N B | 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data Page<br />
2 Press LK1 + L2 + AI to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
C to go to the next page<br />
A to go to the previous page<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
2<br />
Data No.<br />
19<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BI<br />
The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 117
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
The Ring Patterns are listed in the table below:<br />
Pattern<br />
Line<br />
Key<br />
OFF LK 1<br />
ON LK 2<br />
A LK 3<br />
B LK 4<br />
C LK 5<br />
D LK 6<br />
E LK 7<br />
F LK 8<br />
G<br />
H<br />
LK 1<br />
(Pg. 2)<br />
LK 2<br />
(Pg. 2)<br />
s= seconds<br />
0s 1s 2s 3s 4s 5s 6s<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 118 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-2-20 Intercom Ring Tone Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to select a ring tone for intercom calls.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
A B C D E F G H default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK2 + BK to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Notes �<br />
�<br />
The available tones are:<br />
Tone A = (480/600):<br />
Tone B = (480/606):<br />
Tone C = (1024/1285)<br />
Tone D = (1024)<br />
Tone E = (500)<br />
Tone F = (1024/1285):<br />
Tone G = (600/700):<br />
Tone H = (1024)<br />
Title<br />
2 0 : I C M T O N E A<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
Modulation (16 Hz)<br />
Modulation (8 Hz)<br />
Modulation (16 Hz)<br />
Modulation (16 Hz)<br />
Envelope 2 sec.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
2<br />
Data No.<br />
20<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BI<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 119
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-2-21 PS <strong>Telephone</strong> Block Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the number of PS II stations that can be used in the<br />
system.<br />
Display<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Settings<br />
Page 1 Ports 01~32<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
Port 01~04 Port 05~08 Port 09~12 Port 13~16 Port 17~20 Port 21~24 Port 25~28 Port 29~32<br />
Page 2 Ports 33~64<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
Port 33~36 Port 37~40 Port 41~44 Port 45~48 Port 49~52 Port 53~56 Port 57~60 Port 61~64<br />
Page 3 Ports 65~96<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
Port 65~68 Port 69~72 Port 73~76 Port 77~80 Port 81~84 Port 85~88 Port 89~92 Port 93~96<br />
Page 4 Ports 97~C0<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
Port 97~A0 Port A1~A4 Port A5~A8 Port A9~B2 Port B3~B6 Port B7~C0<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Title<br />
2 1 : P H S A S S I G N | 0 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK2 + BAto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
LK is green = block assigned for PS<br />
LK is red = block not available for PS<br />
Press C to cycle between pages.<br />
�<br />
Setting Data indicates the first port number on the applicable page.<br />
�<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Default Values<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
2<br />
Data No.<br />
21<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AP<br />
Default: No PS<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong><br />
Blocks are<br />
assigned.<br />
No PS Terminal Blocks are assigned.<br />
Hardware equipped ports are red.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 120 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Notes �<br />
�<br />
1. The <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> basic system can support a maximum of 24 PS II stations.<br />
2. The <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> expanded system can support a maximum of 40 PS II stations.<br />
3. The <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> basic system can have 32 ports to be shared by station ports (ESI, SLI, FMS/VMS, CNF,<br />
and OPX), Call Arrival Keys, and PS stations. If 24 station ports are being used, eight remain for use as PS<br />
stations.<br />
4. The <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> expanded system allows a maximum of 120 ports to be shared by station ports (ESI, SLI,<br />
FMS/VMS, CNF, and OPX), Call Arrival Keys, PS stations, and IP phones (Memory Block 1-2-32.)<br />
5. The total number of PS station ports are shared with the total number of hardware and software station ports.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 121
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-2-22 Call Forward - No Answer Time<br />
Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the time before incoming intercom calls or incoming<br />
CO/PBX lines are forwarded to another station number when the called party does not<br />
answer.<br />
This Memory Block can be adjusted in 1-second intervals (R3000 or higher).<br />
Display (R2500 or lower)<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
4s 8s 12s 18s 24s 30s 60s<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
2 2 : F W D N O A N S 8 s<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK2 + BB to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Refer to next page for R3000 or higher <strong>Programming</strong> Procedures.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
2<br />
Data No.<br />
22<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BM<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 122 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Display (R3000 or higher)<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK2 + BB to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to enter the Data Setting for Class 1.<br />
Setting Data<br />
01s~99s (e.g., 05s =5s)<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Timer Class of Service.<br />
5 Program the next Timer Class of Service or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Timer<br />
Class<br />
1-1-46 Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-1-47 Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-1-48 Access Code (3-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-2-01 Intercom Call Voice/Tone Signal Selection<br />
1-8-08 Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2<br />
4-17 Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment<br />
4-42 Call Forward-Busy Immediately/Delay Selection<br />
4-71 Station to Timer Class of Service (R3000 or higher)<br />
1~4<br />
2 2 : N O A N S 1 = 1 2 s<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
Default Values<br />
Class 1~4 = 12s<br />
Notes �<br />
�<br />
1. <strong>Telephone</strong> Ports 1 and 2 are in Station to Timer Class of Service, Class 1, by default. All other ports are in<br />
Station to Timer Class of Service, Class 2, by default.<br />
2. When a system is upgraded from R2500 or lower to R3000 or higher, the Call Forward – No Answer Time<br />
Selection is reset to the default during the upgrade process.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 123
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-2-23 System Call Park Recall Time<br />
Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the time before a CO/PBX call recalls back to a<br />
station from Call Park.<br />
This Memory Block can be adjusted in 1-second intervals (R3000 or higher).<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 5.0 8.0 10.0 default. Times<br />
are in minutes.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
2 3 : P A R K R E C L 1 . 0<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK2 + BC to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Refer to next page for R3000 or higher <strong>Programming</strong> Procedures.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
2<br />
Data No.<br />
23<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BM<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 124 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Display (R3000 or higher)<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK2 + BC to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to enter the Data Setting for Class 1.<br />
Setting Data<br />
001s~999s (e.g., 120s = 2 Minutes)<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Timer Class of Service.<br />
5 Program the next Timer Class of Service or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Timer<br />
Class<br />
1~4<br />
2 3 : P R K R C L 1 = 0 6 0 s<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
4-71 Station to Timer Class of Service<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
Default Values<br />
Class 1~4 = 060s<br />
Notes �<br />
�<br />
1. <strong>Telephone</strong> Ports 1 and 2 are in Station to Timer Class of Service, Class 1, by default. All other ports are in<br />
Station to Timer Class of Service, Class 2, by default.<br />
2. When a system is upgraded from R2500 or lower to R3000 or higher, the System Call Park Recall Time<br />
Selection is reset to the default during the upgrade process.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 125
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-2-24 Intercom Feature Access Code<br />
Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign the Access Code for Voice/Tone change or Step<br />
Call.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
Dial<br />
No.<br />
2 4 : F E A A C ( 0 ) = 0 0 4<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK2 + BD to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to enter the Setting Data.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data<br />
B � + or # to � enter or #<br />
Setting Data<br />
Setting Code Feature<br />
000 Not Used<br />
001 Voice/Tone Switching<br />
002 Step Call<br />
003 Tone Override<br />
004 Automatic Callback<br />
005 Callback Request<br />
006 Voice Over Originate<br />
007 Quick Transfer to Voice Mail<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
4 Press G to write the data and advance to the next Dial No.<br />
5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each Dial No. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Default Values<br />
Dial Numbers<br />
0 = 004<br />
1 = 001<br />
2 = 002<br />
3~5 = 000<br />
6 = 006<br />
7 = 007<br />
8, 9 = 000<br />
= 003 �<br />
# = 005<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
2<br />
Data No.<br />
24<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BA<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 126 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-2-01 Intercom Call Voice/Tone Signal Selection<br />
1-8-08 Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2<br />
1-8-26 Voice Mail Quick Transfer Master Hunt Number<br />
4-17 Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment<br />
Notes �<br />
�<br />
1. Features can be assigned to more than one dial number.<br />
2. To enter � or # under Dial Numbers Selection, press B + � or #.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 127
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-2-25 Internal Paging Alert Tone Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not a call alert tone is provided when<br />
Internal Paging is used.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
YS NO<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
2 5 : I N P G T O N Y S<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK2 + BE to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
2<br />
Data No.<br />
25<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BP<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 128 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-2-26 Delayed Ringing Time Assignment<br />
(ICM)<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the delayed ringing time for incoming internal calls.<br />
Display<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK2 + BFto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Enter data using the dial pad.<br />
Setting Data: KK~II<br />
�<br />
4 Press G to write data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
2 6 : D R I N G ( 1 ) = 1 0 s<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
4-37 Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Day Mode)<br />
4-38 Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Night Mode)<br />
Default Values<br />
10 seconds<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
2<br />
Data No.<br />
26<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BI<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 129
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-2-30 PS Out of Area Time Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the retry time when a PS II is Out of Area.<br />
Display<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Title<br />
3 0 : O U T T I M E R 0 8 s<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK2 + CKto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Enter data using the dial pad.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor<br />
K<br />
right<br />
~ Ito enter numeric data<br />
Data<br />
Setting<br />
00~99<br />
Data<br />
4 Press G to write data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Default Values<br />
08 seconds<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
2<br />
Data No.<br />
30<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AP<br />
Notes �<br />
�<br />
1. When the PS Out of Area time is shorter than the Call Forward – No Answer time, the caller receives an Out of<br />
Area indication.<br />
2. This Memory Block is used to define the Time a system searches for a PS II before displaying Out of Area or<br />
providing a busy tone to the Caller.<br />
3. When using Call Forward – Busy/No Answer feature, verify that the time is compatible with this Memory Block.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 130 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-2-32 IP <strong>Telephone</strong> Block Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify when IP <strong>Telephone</strong>s that connect to the<br />
IPCA( )-U( ) ETU must use resources from the CPUI( )-U( ) ETU (Legacy system).<br />
When IP <strong>Telephone</strong> Blocks are assigned, the CPUI( )-U( ) ETU can control the<br />
following features for the IPC IP <strong>Telephone</strong>s:<br />
� Centralized Billing (K-CCIS)<br />
� Code Restriction<br />
� Enhanced 911<br />
ISDN-PRI Trunk Connections – Calling Party Number (CPN) Presentation from Station<br />
�<br />
Least Cost Routing (LCR)<br />
�<br />
� Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)<br />
System Software R2500 is required.<br />
Display<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Settings<br />
Page 1 Ports 01~32<br />
Title<br />
3 2 : I P A S S I G N | 0 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
Port 01~04 Port 05~08 Port 09~12 Port 13~16 Port 17~20 Port 21~24 Port 25~28 Port 29~32<br />
Page 2 Ports 33~64<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
Port 33~36 Port 37~40 Port 41~44 Port 45~48 Port 49~52 Port 53~56 Port 57~60 Port 61~64<br />
Page 3 Ports 65~96<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
Port 65~68 Port 69~72 Port 73~76 Port 77~80 Port 81~84 Port 85~88 Port 89~92 Port 93~96<br />
Page 4 Ports 97~C0<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
Port 97~A0 Port A1~A4 Port A5~A8 Port A9~B2 Port B3~B6 Port B7~C0<br />
LED Status Off On (Green) On (Red)<br />
Data Not Assigned IP Assigned)<br />
Data<br />
Setting<br />
00~CO<br />
Data<br />
Block Not<br />
Available<br />
Default is shaded, and no IP Phone<br />
Blocks are Assigned.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
2<br />
Data No.<br />
32<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AH<br />
Default: No PS<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong><br />
Blocks are<br />
assigned.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 131
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK2 + CB to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Data option.<br />
� LK Off – Not Assigned<br />
� LK Green – Block Assigned for IP Phone<br />
� LK Red – Block not available for IP Phone<br />
4 Press C to go to the next page.<br />
Press A to return to the previous page.<br />
5 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
7-1 Card Interface Slot Assignment<br />
1-2-04 Call Arrival Key Block Assignment<br />
1-2-21 PS <strong>Telephone</strong> Block Assignment<br />
1-2-33 IP <strong>Telephone</strong> Block Assignment Allow/Deny Selection<br />
4-07 Code Restriction Class Assignment (Day Mode)<br />
4-08 Code Restriction Class Assignment (Night Mode)<br />
4-40 LCR Class Selection<br />
4-54 Enhanced 911 CESID to Station Table Assignment<br />
4-56 SMDR <strong>Telephone</strong> Print Selection<br />
4-67 IP Station Number Assignment<br />
Notes �<br />
�<br />
1. The <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Basic port package allows up to 30 IP <strong>Telephone</strong>s to be installed using dedicated ports<br />
73~104.<br />
2. The maximum station port capacity for the <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Expanded port package is reduced by the number of<br />
IPC IP <strong>Telephone</strong>s assigned by this Memory Block in groups of four.<br />
3. The <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Expanded port package allows a maximum of 120 ports to be shared by station ports (ESI,<br />
SLI, OPX, FMS/VMS, etc.), Call Arrival Keys, PS <strong>Telephone</strong>s, and IP <strong>Telephone</strong>s. When 32 stations are used as<br />
IP <strong>Telephone</strong>s, 88 station ports remain for use by the Legacy system.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 132 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-2-33 IP <strong>Telephone</strong> Block Assignment<br />
Allow/Deny Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to designate whether or not Memory Block 1-2-32 (IP<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Block Assignment) is used. When this Memory Block is set to YS (Allow),<br />
Memory Block 1-2-32 can be used to assign IP <strong>Telephone</strong>s to connect to the<br />
IPCA( )-U( ) ETU to use resources from the CPUI( )-U( ) (Legacy system). When<br />
this Memory Block is set to NO (Deny), Memory Block 1-2-32 cannot be assigned.<br />
System Software R2500 is required.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
YS (Allow) NO (Deny)<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
3 3 : I P A S S I G N Y S<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK2 + CC to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
2<br />
Data No.<br />
33<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AH<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 133
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
7-1 Card interface Slot Assignment<br />
1-2-04 Call Arrival Key Block Assignment<br />
1-2-21 PS <strong>Telephone</strong> Block Assignment<br />
1-2-32 IP <strong>Telephone</strong> Block Assignment<br />
1-5-13 Printer Connected Selection<br />
4-07 Code Restriction Class Assignment (Day Mode)<br />
4-08 Code Restriction Class Assignment (Night Mode)<br />
4-40 LCR Class Selection<br />
4-47 ISDN Directory Number Selection<br />
4-54 Enhanced 911 CESID to Station Table Assignment<br />
4-56 SMDR <strong>Telephone</strong> Print Selection<br />
4-62 ISDN-PRI Directory Number Selection<br />
4-67 IP Station Number Assignment<br />
Notes �<br />
�<br />
When Memory Block 1-2-32 (IP <strong>Telephone</strong> Block Assignment) has data (Blocks) assigned, this Memory Block<br />
cannot be changed to NO (Deny).<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 134 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-2-34 Expanded Station Number<br />
Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign the lead digits when more than 4-digit station<br />
numbers are used.<br />
System Software R2500 is required.<br />
Display<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Title<br />
3 4 : E X T D I G I T<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK2 + CDto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Enter data using the dial pad.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor<br />
K<br />
right<br />
~ Ito enter numeric data<br />
2, 3, or 4 digit Blank (Not Specified)<br />
5 digit 1~8<br />
6 digit 10~89<br />
7 digit 100~899<br />
Data<br />
Setting<br />
1~899<br />
Data<br />
4 Press G to write data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Default Values<br />
Not Specified<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
2<br />
Data No.<br />
34<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTS<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 135
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-1-46 Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-1-47 Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-1-48 Access Code (3-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-2-03 2~7-Digit Station Number Assignment<br />
1-8-26 Voice Mail Quick Transfer Master Hunt Number<br />
4-10 Station Number Assignment<br />
Notes �<br />
�<br />
The setting data depends on the assignment in Memory Block 1-2-03.<br />
For 2, 3, or 4 digits Blank (Not Assigned)<br />
For 5 digits 1~8 (Assign one digit)<br />
For 6 digits 10~89 (Assign two digits)<br />
For 7 digits 100~899 (Assign three digits)<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 136 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-3-01 Bounce Protect Time Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify a time for detection of a valid off-hook indication that<br />
is long enough to prevent an unintentional bounce of the receiver from being detected<br />
as a new off-hook indication from a Single Line <strong>Telephone</strong> or Voice Mail system.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Page 1<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
0ms<br />
Page 2<br />
100ms 200ms 300ms 400ms 500ms 600ms 700ms<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
800ms 900ms 1000ms 1100ms 1200ms 1300ms 1400ms 1500ms<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK3 to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
0 1 : B N C E 3 0 0 m s | 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
1-3-05 Hookflash Start Time Selection<br />
Page<br />
No.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
3<br />
Data No.<br />
01<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTI<br />
The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 137
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-3-02 SLT Hookflash Signal Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether a line is held internally, or when behind a<br />
PBX, a hookflash (HF) signal is sent to the line when a Single Line <strong>Telephone</strong> user<br />
performs a hookflash.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
HOLD FLASH<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK3 +KBto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-1-02 Hookflash Time Selection<br />
4-24 SLT Hookflash Assignment<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
0 2 : S I G N A L H 0 L D<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Notes �<br />
�<br />
1. When Hold is specified, the CO/PBX line is put on Exclusive Hold.<br />
2. When Hold is selected, the PBX/CTX line can receive the hookflash signal using Access Code 6# (default).<br />
3. When Flash is specified, press the hookswitch to send the hookflash signal to the PBX/CTX line.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
3<br />
Data No.<br />
02<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTI<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 138 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-3-03 First Digit PBR Release Time<br />
Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the time a Push Button Receiver (PBR) circuit is<br />
connected when a dual-tone multifrequency (DTMF) Single Line <strong>Telephone</strong> user goes<br />
off-hook. After the time expires, the PBR is disconnected. When the Single Line<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> user dials a digit before the time expires, a PBR interdigit time starts.<br />
This Memory Block can be adjusted in 1-second intervals (R3000 or higher).<br />
Display (R2500 or lower)<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
10s 20s 30s 40s 50s 60s<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
0 3 : P B R R L S 1 0 s<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK3 + KC to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Refer to next page for R3000 or higher <strong>Programming</strong> Procedures.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
3<br />
Data No.<br />
03<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTI<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 139
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Display (R3000 or higher)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK3 + KC to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to enter the Data Setting for Class 1.<br />
Setting Data<br />
01s~99s (e.g., 05s =5s)<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next memory block.<br />
5 Program the next memory block, or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
0 3 : P B R R L S 1 0 s<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-8-10 PBR Interdigit Release Time Selection<br />
4-95 DTMF/DP SLT Type Selection<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
Notes �<br />
�<br />
R3000 or higher is required to adjust this memory block by 1-second intervals.<br />
Default Values<br />
10s<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 140 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-3-04 Dial 1 (DP) Hookflash Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not a dial pulse (DP) Single Line<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> provides a hookflash signal when the user presses 1 during an intercom or<br />
CO/PBX call.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
YS NO<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK3 + KDto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
0 4 : D I A L 1 F L S H Y S<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
4-90 SLT Data Line Security Assignment<br />
4-95 DTMF/DP SLT Type Selection<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
3<br />
Data No.<br />
04<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTI<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 141
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-3-05 Hookflash Start Time Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the minimum hookflash time from a Single Line<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> or analog Voice Mail system before it is detected as the beginning of a<br />
valid hookflash.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Page 1<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
40<br />
Page 2<br />
90 140 190 240 290 340 390<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
440 490 540 590 640 690 740 790<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK3 + KE to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
Press C to cycle between pages.<br />
�<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
0 5 : F L S H S T 2 9 0 | 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
1-3-01 Bounce Protect Time Selection<br />
1-3-06 Hookflash End Time Selection<br />
Page<br />
No.<br />
Notes �<br />
�<br />
Press hookswitch during CO/PBX call to place the line on hold or send hookflash to CO/PBX.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
3<br />
Data No.<br />
05<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTI<br />
The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
default. The<br />
times are in<br />
milliseconds.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 142 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-3-06 Hookflash End Time Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the maximum hookflash duration from a Single Line<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> to receive a second dial tone.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Page 1<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
00<br />
(HST + 0 ms.)<br />
Page 2<br />
01<br />
(HST + 100 ms.)<br />
02<br />
(HST + 200 ms.)<br />
03<br />
(HST + 300 ms.)<br />
04<br />
(HST + 400 ms.)<br />
05<br />
(HST + 500 ms.)<br />
06<br />
(HST + 600 ms.)<br />
07<br />
(HST + 700 ms.).<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
08<br />
(HST + 800 ms.)<br />
09<br />
(HST + 900 ms.)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
10<br />
(HST + 1000 ms.)<br />
11<br />
(HST + 1100 ms.)<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK3 + KF to access the Memory Block.<br />
12<br />
(HST + 1200 ms.)<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
Press C to cycle between pages.<br />
�<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-3-05 Hookflash Start Time Selection<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
0 6 : F L S H E N D = 0 7 | 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Page<br />
No.<br />
13<br />
(HST + 1300 ms.)<br />
14<br />
(HST + 1400 ms.)<br />
15<br />
(HST + 1500 ms.)<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
3<br />
Data No.<br />
06<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTI<br />
selection is<br />
the default.<br />
HST =<br />
Hookflash<br />
Start Time.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 143
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-3-07 Voice Mail Digit Add Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign up to four digits in front of the station number sent to<br />
the voice mail when a call is forwarded.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK3 + KG to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to enter data.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data<br />
B +Jto enter *<br />
B +Lto enter #<br />
Setting Data: 0~9, *, #<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
0 7 : V M A C E S S =<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
4-35 Voice Mail/SLT Selection<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Default Values<br />
All Blank<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
3<br />
Data No.<br />
07<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AV<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 144 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-3-08 Voice Mail DTMF Delay Time<br />
Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the delay time before dual-tone multifrequency<br />
(DTMF) tones are sent from Voice Mail Interface (VMI) ports.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
0s 1s 2s 3s 4s 5s 6s 8s default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK3 +KHto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
0 8 : V M D E L A Y = 1 s<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
4-35 Voice Mail/SLT Selection<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
Notes �<br />
�<br />
This Memory Block applies to both digital voice mail and analog voice mail ports.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
3<br />
Data No.<br />
08<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AV<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 145
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-3-09 Voice Mail Disconnect Time Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the time a disconnect signal is sent to the voice mail<br />
system.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
0.5s 1.0s 1.5s 2.0s 3.0s 3.5s<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK3 + KI to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
4-35 Voice Mail/SLT Selection<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
0 9 : V M D S C O N = 1 . 5 s<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
3<br />
Data No.<br />
09<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AV<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 146 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-3-10 Voice Mail DTMF Duration/Interdigit<br />
Time Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify dual-tone multifrequency (DTMF) duration and<br />
interdigit time for voice mail.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the<br />
default for Duration and<br />
60/70 110/80 410/100 610/100 810/190<br />
Interdigit Time. Times are in<br />
milliseconds.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK3 + AK to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX key to change data option. Default Values<br />
4 Press G to write the data and advance to the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
4-35 Voice Mail/SLT Selection<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
1 0 : V M M F = 1 1 0 / 8 0<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Duration time: 110 ms.<br />
Interdigit Time: 80 ms.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
3<br />
Data No.<br />
10<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AV<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 147
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-3-11 SLT/PS II Talk Start Timer<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign the time needed after a hookflash and dialing before<br />
three-party (two COs and one SLT) line conference is allowed from a Single Line<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> or PSII.<br />
System Software R2000 or higher is required.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK3 + AA to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to enter data.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
Setting Data: 01~99 sec<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
1 1 : T L K T M R = 1 0 s<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
1-8-08 Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2<br />
Page 3, LK 5<br />
3-04 Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Yes/NO Selection<br />
4-17 Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment<br />
Default Values<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 148 Memory Blocks<br />
10 sec<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
3<br />
Data No.<br />
11<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTI
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Notes �<br />
�<br />
1. This Memory Block applies only to trunks without answer supervision (i.e., loop or ground start).<br />
2. A hookflash before this timer or far end answer detection, drops the new call and returns to the original call.<br />
3. A hookflash after this timer or far end answer detection results in a three-party Conference call (two COs and one<br />
Single Line <strong>Telephone</strong>).<br />
4. A blind transfer can be performed anytime by hanging up after making the second call.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 149
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-3-12 SLT/ISDN TELCO Account Codes<br />
Allow/Deny Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify when ISDN (PRI/BRI) circuits have account codes<br />
set up by TELCO that must be entered by Single Line <strong>Telephone</strong> users.<br />
R3000 or higher is required.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded selection is the<br />
default.<br />
NO YES<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Title<br />
1 2 : I S D N A . C . N 0<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK3 + AB to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX key to change data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and advance to the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
3<br />
Data No.<br />
12<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTI<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 150 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-4-00 Tandem Transfer Automatic<br />
Disconnect Time Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify maximum time, in minutes, before the system<br />
automatically disconnects a Trunk-to-Trunk connection.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK4 to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to enter data.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
0 0 : A U T O D I S 0 6 0<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Jto move cursor left<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
Setting Data: 001~999 Minutes<br />
000 No Limit<br />
H to clear Data<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Refer to individual features in the <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Features and Specifications <strong>Manual</strong>.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
4<br />
Data No.<br />
00<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AT<br />
Notes �<br />
�<br />
This block is used for Direct Inward System Access (DISA), Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer, Call Forward – Off-Premise,<br />
and Tie line tandem features.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 151
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-4-01 Automated Attendant First Digit PBR<br />
Release Time Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the time a Push Button Receiver (PBR) remains<br />
connected after the Automated Attendant message is played when a calling party calls<br />
in through an Automated Attendant trunk.<br />
This Memory Block can be adjusted in 1-second intervals (R3000 or higher).<br />
Display (R2500 or lower)<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
5s 10s 20s 30s 40s 50s 60s<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
0 1 : A A P B R T I M E 2 0 s<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK4 + JA to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Refer to next page for R3000 or higher <strong>Programming</strong> Procedures.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
4<br />
Data No.<br />
01<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AU<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 152 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Display (R3000 or higher)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK4 + J +A to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to enter the Data Setting for Class 1.<br />
Setting Data<br />
01s~99s (e.g., 02s = 2s)<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next memory block.<br />
5 Program the next memory block, or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
0 1 : A A P B R R L S 2 0 s<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
4-71 Station to Timer Class of Service (R3000 or higher)<br />
Default Values<br />
20s<br />
Notes �<br />
�<br />
1. After PBR is connected, dialing must be completed in the specified time. After the first digit is dialed, interdigit<br />
time (default 7 sec.) controls the PBR time. Dialing the third digit exceeds the 20 sec. default, and the PBR is<br />
disconnected.<br />
2. R3000 or higher is required to adjust this memory block by 1-second intervals.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 153
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-4-02 Automated Attendant Transfer<br />
Delayed Ringing Time Selections<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the time that a call rings at the destination station<br />
before the automated attendant rings a programmed station.<br />
This Memory Block can be adjusted in 1-second intervals (R3000 or higher).<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
10s 20s 30s ∞<br />
(No Limit)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
0 2 : A A D L Y R N G ∞<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK4 + JBto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Refer to next page for R3000 or higher <strong>Programming</strong> Procedures.<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
4<br />
Data No.<br />
02<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AU<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 154 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Display (R3000 or higher)<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK4 + J +B to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to enter the Data Setting for Class 1.<br />
Setting Data<br />
00s~99s (e.g., 02s = 2s)<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Timer Class of Service.<br />
5 Program the next Timer Class of Service or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Timer<br />
Class<br />
0 2 : A A D L Y R N G 1 = 0 0 s<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
4-01 CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)<br />
4-02 CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)<br />
4-71 Station to Timer Class of Service (R3000 or higher)<br />
1~4<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
Default Values<br />
Class 1~4 = 00s<br />
00s = No Limit<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 155
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Example:<br />
( D)☎<br />
� Notes �<br />
PSTN<br />
1. To speak to station user A, the outside user D dials the telephone number for TRUNK 1, confirms the Automated<br />
Attendant message, and dials extension 100.<br />
2. In the example at station A:<br />
Trunk 1<br />
The ICM LED blinks and a ring tone that is different from the normal ringing tone is heard.<br />
�<br />
The call can be answered by lifting the handset.<br />
�<br />
� Station users B and C cannot press the line key on the Multiline Terminals to answer the call.<br />
3. In the example, if station user A does not answer in the specified time:<br />
The ringing tone changes to the normal tone and station C starts ringing.<br />
�<br />
Any station (A, B, or C) user can press the flashing line key to answer the call.<br />
�<br />
4. Select ∞ (No Limit) to disable this feature.<br />
<strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
☎ ☎<br />
☎<br />
(A) 100<br />
(B) 101<br />
(C) 102<br />
In this example, Public Switching <strong>Telephone</strong> Network (PSTN) and the system are<br />
connected by Trunk 1. Stations A (extension 100) and C (extension 102) are ring<br />
assigned to Trunk 1. Trunk 1 is assigned to Automated Attendant trunk.<br />
☎ ☎<br />
☎<br />
Time Elapsed<br />
(C) 102<br />
(B) 101<br />
(A) 100<br />
1. <strong>Telephone</strong> ports 1 and 2 are in Station to Timer Class of Service, Class 1 by default. All other ports are in<br />
Station to Timer Class of Service, Class 2 by default (R3000 or higher).<br />
2. When a system is upgraded from R2500 or lower to R3000 or higher, the Automated Attendant Transfer<br />
Delayed Ringing Time Selection is reset to the default value during the upgrade process.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 156 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-4-03 Automated Attendant No Answer<br />
Disconnect Time Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the time the Automated Attendant rings a station<br />
before the caller is automatically disconnected.<br />
This Memory Block can be adjusted in 1-second intervals (R3000 or higher).<br />
Display (R2500 or lower)<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
1m 2m 3m 4m<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
0 3 : A A D I S 2 m<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK4 + JCto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Refer to next page for R3000 or higher <strong>Programming</strong> Procedures.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
4<br />
Data No.<br />
03<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AU<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 157
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Display (R3000 or higher)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK4 + J +C to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to enter the Data Setting for Class 1.<br />
Setting Data<br />
001s~255s (e.g., 180s =3min)<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
0 3 : A A D I S C 1 2 0 s<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block, or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Refer to individual features in the <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Features and Specifications <strong>Manual</strong>.<br />
Notes �<br />
�<br />
1. When the called party does not answer in the programmed time, the call is dropped.<br />
2. R3000 or higher is required to adjust this Memory Block by 1-second intervals.<br />
Default Values<br />
120s<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 158 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-4-04 Tandem Transfer SMDR Print<br />
Extension Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify a special number to be output from Station Message<br />
Detail Recording (SMDR) to indicate an automatic trunk-to-trunk transfer.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK4 + JDto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to enter the Table Number and Setting Data.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
Setting Data (Allowed):<br />
2-Digit Number: 10~89<br />
3-Digit Number: 100~899<br />
4-Digit Number: 1000~8999<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
0 4 : T A N D E X T = 9 9 9<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
1-2-03 2-, 3-, or 4-Digit Station Number Selection<br />
Notes �<br />
�<br />
1. When the system is powered up initially, this Memory Block defaults to 3-digit number 999.<br />
2. When 2-digit station numbers are selected, this Memory Block defaults to 99.<br />
3. When 4-digit station numbers are selected, this Memory Block defaults to 9999.<br />
Default Values<br />
3-digit number = 999<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
4<br />
Data No.<br />
04<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AT<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 159
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-4-05 Automatic Tandem Trunk by Night<br />
Mode Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not the Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk<br />
Transfer feature follows the Night Mode assignment.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
NO YS<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK4 + JEto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
0 5 : T A N D B Y N T N O<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-1-27 Automatic Day/Night Mode Switching Time Assignment<br />
1-1-33 Speed Dial Number/Name Display Selection<br />
3-05 Trunk Incoming Answer Mode Selection<br />
3-06 Automatic Tandem Trunk Assignment<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
4<br />
Data No.<br />
05<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AT<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 160 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-4-08 Automated Attendant PBR Timeout<br />
Response Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify how a call answered by the Automated Attendant<br />
should be processed when a dual-tone multifrequency (DTMF) tone is not received.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
NORMAL RELEAS<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
0 8 : A A R E S N O R M A L<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK4 + JHto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Refer to individual features in the <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Features and Specifications <strong>Manual</strong>.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
4<br />
Data No.<br />
08<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AU<br />
Notes �<br />
�<br />
1. When NORMAL is selected, and a DTMF tone is not received during the Automated Attendant message or<br />
during the Automated Attendant Push Button Receiver (PBR) Release Time (20-second default), the system<br />
rings selected stations using Memory Block 4-01 [CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)] or Memory Block 4-02<br />
[CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)].<br />
2. When RELEAS is selected, and a DTMF tone is not received during the Automated Attendant message or during<br />
the Automated Attendant PBR Release Time (20-second default), the system drops the call after 30 seconds<br />
regulated by a fixed time.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 161
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-4-09 Automated Attendant PBR Start Time<br />
Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether the Push Button Receiver (PBR) can<br />
receive dual-tone multifrequency (DTMF) signaling while the Automated Attendant is<br />
sending the message or after the message is complete.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
FR AF<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK4 + JIto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
Setting Data:<br />
FR: While the Automated Attendant sends the message.<br />
AF: After the Automated Attendant sends the message.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
0 9 : P B R S T R T F R<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Refer to individual features in the <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Features and Specifications <strong>Manual</strong>.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
4<br />
Data No.<br />
09<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AU<br />
Notes �<br />
�<br />
When FR is assigned, the Automated Attendant message send start time and the PBR connected to Automated<br />
Attendant trunk start time are the same.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 162 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-4-11 Automated Attendant Message Day/<br />
Night Mode Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not Automated Attendant messages can<br />
be used in a Day/Night Mode setting.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
YS NO<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
A.A.<br />
Msg.<br />
NO.<br />
1~8<br />
Day/<br />
Night<br />
Mode<br />
1 1 : A A M S G 1 ( D Y ) = N O<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK4 + JJAAto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change data option for AA MSG1 in DY (Day) Mode.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
A~Hto enter numerical data<br />
B to toggle between Day Mode and Night Mode<br />
4 Press G to write the data, and display the next message.<br />
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for all eight messages. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
6 Return to this Memory Block, toggle B to select NT (Night) and repeat Steps 3, 4, and 5 for all messages for night Mode.<br />
The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
7 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Refer to individual features in the <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Features and Specifications <strong>Manual</strong>.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
4<br />
Data No.<br />
11<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AU<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 163
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-4-12 Automated Attendant Message to<br />
Tenant Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign Automated Attendant Messages to a Tenant.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
MSG AA<br />
(1~8)<br />
1 2 : A A 1 T N A T = 0 0<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK4 +JJABto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to change the Tenant for AA MSG1.<br />
K~Ito enter Tenant Number<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
4 Press G to write the data, and advance to the next message.<br />
5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for all AA messages. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Refer to individual features in the <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Features and Specifications <strong>Manual</strong>.<br />
Default Values<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
4<br />
Data No.<br />
12<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AU<br />
All Automated Attendant Messages:<br />
Tenant No. 00<br />
Notes �<br />
�<br />
When a tenant is not assigned to a specific automated message, the Automated Attendant sends the message<br />
assigned in Memory Block 1-4-11 (Automated Attendant Message Day/Night Mode Selection).<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 164 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-4-13 Automated Attendant Answer Delay<br />
Time Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the time, in seconds, before the Automated<br />
Attendant answers an incoming CO/PBX call.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
MSG. AA<br />
(1~8)<br />
1 3 : A A D L Y 1 = 0 4 s<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK4 +JJACto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to enter the delay time for AA MSG. 1.<br />
to enter number of seconds<br />
KK~II<br />
4 Press G to write the data, and advance to the next AA MSG.<br />
5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for all messages. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Refer to individual features in the <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Features and Specifications <strong>Manual</strong>.<br />
Default Values<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
4<br />
Data No.<br />
13<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AU<br />
All Automated Attendant Messages:<br />
4 sec.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 165
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-4-14 Automated Attendant Message Access<br />
Code (1-Digit) Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify a 1-digit code to route an incoming call from the<br />
Automated Attendant.<br />
Display<br />
.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK4 +JJADto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to enter function code for AA MSG. 1, Dial No. 0.<br />
UseK~Ito enter the function code.<br />
Setting Data (Allowed):<br />
�<br />
Function Code 001~053<br />
000 is unused.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and advance to the next dial number.<br />
5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each Dial No. AA MSG. 2, Dial No. 0 is displayed.<br />
6 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each Dial No. AA MSG. 3, Dial No. 0 is displayed.<br />
7 Continue this cycle for all Dial NOs. for all messages. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
8 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
DIAL.<br />
MSG. AA No.<br />
(0~9)<br />
(1~8)<br />
1 4 : A A A C 1 - O = 0 3 0<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Function<br />
Code<br />
Refer to individual features in the <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Features and Specifications <strong>Manual</strong>.<br />
Default Values<br />
Dial<br />
Number<br />
Function<br />
Code<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
4<br />
Data No.<br />
14<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AU<br />
Contents<br />
0 030 Specified<br />
Station Call (0)<br />
1 010 Station Number<br />
2 010 Station Number<br />
3 010 Station Number<br />
4 ~ 9 000 Unregistered<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 166 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
� �<br />
1. Function 011 (Bypass Automated Attendant) uses Memory Blocks 4-01 [CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)]<br />
and 4-02 [CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)] to ring according to those assignments.<br />
Notes<br />
2. Functions 015~016 (Ring Internal Paging Zone A/B/C) require assigning the following to ring the desired station:<br />
Memory Block 4-01 [CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)]<br />
Memory Block 4-02 [CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)]<br />
Memory Block 4-93 (Internal Zone Paging Selection).<br />
3. When a caller receives a busy signal after being transferred by the Automated Attendant, the following Fixed<br />
Access Codes apply:<br />
Step Call A<br />
Receive a second dial tone J<br />
CO rings based on Day/Night Ring Assignment.<br />
L<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 167
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Function<br />
Code<br />
Contents<br />
Function<br />
Code<br />
000 Unregistered 027 Not Used<br />
001 Automated Attendant Message (1) 028 Not Used<br />
002 Automated Attendant Message (2) 029 Not Used<br />
Contents<br />
003 Automated Attendant Message (3) 030 Specified Station Call (00) Refer to<br />
Memory Block 1-2-08 (Specified Station<br />
Access Code Assignment).<br />
004 Automated Attendant Message (4) 031 Specified Station Call (01)<br />
005 Automated Attendant Message (5) 032 Specified Station Call (02)<br />
006 Automated Attendant Message (6) 033 Specified Station Call (03)<br />
007 Automated Attendant Message (7) 034 Specified Station Call (04)<br />
008 Automated Attendant Message (8) 035 Specified Station Call (05)<br />
009 Not Used 036 Specified Station Call (06)<br />
010 Internal Number (Station Number) 037 Specified Station Call (07)<br />
011 Bypass Automated Attendant 038 Specified Station Call (08)<br />
012 Not Used 039 Specified Station Call (09)<br />
013 Not Used 040 Specified Station Call (10)<br />
014 Not Used 041 Specified Station Call (11)<br />
015 Ring Internal Paging Zone A 042 Specified Station Call (12)<br />
016 Ring Internal Paging Zone B 043 Specified Station Call (13)<br />
017 Ring Internal Paging Zone C 044 Specified Station Call (14)<br />
018 Not Used 045 Specified Station Call (15)<br />
019 Not Used 046 Specified Station Call (16)<br />
020 DSS 1 Call 047 Specified Station Call (17)<br />
021 DSS 2 Call 048 Specified Station Call (18)<br />
022 DISA Access Code 049 Specified Station Call (19)<br />
023 Not Used 050 Specified Station Call (20)<br />
024 Not Used 051 Specified Station Call (21)<br />
025 Not Used 052 Specified Station Call (22)<br />
026 Not Used 053 Specified Station Call (23)<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 168 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-4-15 Automated Attendant Message Access<br />
Code (2-Digit) Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify a 2-digit code to route an incoming call from the<br />
Automated Attendant.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK4 +JJAEto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to enter Function Code for MSG. 1, Dial No. 00.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
K~Hto enter Automated Attendant message number<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
MSG. AA<br />
(1~8)<br />
Dial.<br />
No.<br />
00~99<br />
1 5 : A A A C 1 – 0 O = 0 3 0<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
KK~IIto enter Dial No.<br />
Function<br />
Code<br />
4 Press G to write the data and to advance the Dial No.<br />
5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each Dial No. Message 2, Dial No. 00 is displayed.<br />
6 Continue this cycle until the Dial number function codes are assigned to all AA MSGs. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
7 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Default Values<br />
Refer to individual features in the <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Features and Specifications <strong>Manual</strong>.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
4<br />
Data No.<br />
15<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AU<br />
Dial No. Funct. Code Contents<br />
00 ~ 50 030 Specified Station Call (0)<br />
51 011<br />
Bypass Automated<br />
Attendant<br />
52 015 Paging Zone A Call<br />
53 016 Paging Zone B Call<br />
54 017 Paging Zone C Call<br />
55 ~ 99 000 Not Used<br />
Notes �<br />
�<br />
To use default 52~54, ringing must be assigned in Memory Blocks 4-01 [CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)]<br />
or 4-02 [CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)].<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 169
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-4-16 Automated Attendant Message Repeat<br />
Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the number of times a message from the Automated<br />
Attendant Is repeated to the calling party.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
MSG. AA<br />
(1~8)<br />
1 6 : A A M S G 1 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK4 +JJAFto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the number of times a message is<br />
repeated.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and advance to next AA MSG.<br />
5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each AA MSG. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Refer to individual features in the <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Features and Specifications <strong>Manual</strong>.<br />
Default Values<br />
The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
All Messages One Time<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
4<br />
Data No.<br />
16<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AU<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 170 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-4-17 Automated Attendant Delay<br />
Announcement Hold Tone Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the tone to be sent to the outside party after the<br />
Automated Attendant Delay Announcements are played.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
RBT MOH<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK4 +JJAGto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
Example: To change Ringback tone to Music On Hold, press CO/PBX LK2.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and advance to the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
1 7 : A A H O L D R B T<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
1-4-18 Automated Attendant Delay Announcement Assignment<br />
1-4-19 Automated Attendant 1 st to 2 nd Delay Announcement Interval Time Selection<br />
1-4-20 Automated Attendant Delay Announcement Disconnect Time Selection<br />
The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
4<br />
Data No.<br />
17<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AU<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 171
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-4-18 Automated Attendant Delay<br />
Announcement Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the order for the Automated Attendant messages<br />
that are played in Delayed Announcement Mode.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Page 1<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
NONE<br />
Page 2<br />
MSG1 MSG2 MSG3 MSG4 MSG5 MSG6 MSG7<br />
LK 1<br />
MSG8<br />
LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK4 +JJAH to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the 2 nd MSG for 1 st MSG 1.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor<br />
K<br />
right<br />
~ Ito enter numeric data<br />
C to toggle between pages<br />
4 Press G to write the data and advance to the next 1 st MSG.<br />
5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each 1 st MSG. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
1 st Data MSG<br />
MSG<br />
No. Title Page<br />
Title<br />
2nd 1~8<br />
1 8 : ( 1 ) 2 N D = N O N E | 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
1-4-19 Automated Attendant 1 st to 2 nd Delay Announcement Interval Time Selection<br />
1-4-20 Automated Attendant Delay Announcement Disconnect Time Selection<br />
Default Values<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
4<br />
Data No.<br />
18<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+ AU<br />
The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
1 st MSG No. 1~8: Not Specified<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 172 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-4-19 Automated Attendant 1 st to 2 nd Delay<br />
Announcement Interval Time<br />
Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the time, in seconds or minutes, between the<br />
Automated Attendant Delay Announcement messages.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Page 1<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
0s<br />
Page 2<br />
10s 20s 30s 1m 2m 3m 4m<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
5m 10m 20m<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK4 +JJAIto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the interval time.<br />
Example: To change 4 minutes to 10 seconds, press CO/PBX LK2.<br />
Press C to toggle between pages.<br />
�<br />
4 Press G to write the data and advance to the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
No. Title Page<br />
Data<br />
1 9 : 1 S T I N T R 4 m | 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-4-18 Automated Attendant Delay Announcement Assignment<br />
1-4-20 Automated Attendant Delay Announcement Disconnect Time Selection<br />
Default Values<br />
4 minutes<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
4<br />
Data No.<br />
19<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+ AU<br />
The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 173
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-4-20 Automated Attendant Delay<br />
Announcement Disconnect Time<br />
Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to establish the time, in seconds or minutes, the Automated<br />
Attendant rings the station before disconnecting the caller. This Memory Block only<br />
applies when the Automated Attendant is set to Delay Announcement Mode.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Page 1<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
0s<br />
Page 2<br />
10s 20s 30s 1m 2m 3m 4m<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
5m 10m 20m<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK4 +JJBKto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the disconnect time.<br />
Example: To change 30 seconds to 10 seconds, press CO/PBX LK2.<br />
Press C to toggle between pages.<br />
�<br />
4 Press G to write the selected data and advance to the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
2 0 : 2 N D I N T R 3 0 s | 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Page<br />
1-4-18 Automated Attendant Delay Announcement Assignment<br />
1-4-19 Automated Attendant 1 st to 2 nd Delay Announcement Interval Time Selection<br />
Default Values<br />
30 seconds<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
4<br />
Data No.<br />
20<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+ AU<br />
The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 174 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-4-21 Automated Attendant Extension<br />
Number Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the Automated Attendant message to be played<br />
when a DID call is received.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK4 +JJBAto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Enter Setting Data using the dial pad for AA MSG 1.<br />
Use the following:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
~ Ito enter numeric data<br />
2-Digit Station Number: 10~89<br />
K<br />
3-Digit Station Number: 100~899<br />
4-Digit Station Number: 1000~8999<br />
H to clear all data when cursor is at setting position<br />
4 Press G to write the data and advance to the next AA MSG.<br />
5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each AA MSG. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
MSG AA<br />
1~8<br />
2 1 : A A M S G 1 =<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
1-1-46,47 Access Code (1-Digit, 2-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-2-03 2-, 3-, or 4-Digit Station Number Selection<br />
Default Values<br />
� Notes �<br />
No Message Specified<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
4<br />
Data No.<br />
21<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+ AU<br />
This number is the same as Extension Number, CAR key number, and ACD/UCD/SCD. Pilot number cannot be<br />
assigned.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 175
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-4-22 Automated Attendant Direct<br />
Extension Ring Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the Automated Attendant message to be played for<br />
direct transfer to the extension number.<br />
Display<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK4 +JJBBto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the Dial pad to enter Station Number for AA MSG 1.<br />
Use the following:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
~ Ito enter numeric data<br />
2-Digit Station Number: 10~89<br />
K<br />
3-Digit Station Number: 100~899<br />
4-Digit Station Number: 1000~8999<br />
H to clear all data when cursor is at setting position<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next AA MSG.<br />
5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each AA MSG. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
MSG AA<br />
1~8<br />
2 2 : A A T R F 1 =<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
1-1-46,47 Access Code (1-Digit, 2-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-2-03 2-, 3-, or 4-Digit Station Number Selection<br />
Default Values<br />
� Notes �<br />
No Message Specified<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
4<br />
Data No.<br />
22<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+ AU<br />
The CAR Number and AA number can also be assigned as Extension Number. When Extension Number is not<br />
assigned, the Memory Block 1-4-08 time is followed.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 176 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-5-02 SMDR Print Format<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not all digits are printed. When ALL is<br />
specified, all digits are printed. When MSK (Mask) is specified, the last four digits are<br />
masked and printed as XXXX.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
ALL MSK<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK5 to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
0 2 : F O R M A T A L L<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-5-13 Printer Connected Selection<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
5<br />
Data No.<br />
02<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AS<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 177
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-5-13 Printer Connected Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to program printer connection. When the printer is not<br />
connected to the system, an alarm sounds at stations connected to Ports 01 and 02.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
NO<br />
SMDR Off<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
PC<br />
CSV Format<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
YES<br />
SMDR On<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK5 + AC to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
1 3 : P R I N T E R N O<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-5-02 SMDR Print Format<br />
1-5-14 Printer Line Feed Control Selection<br />
1-5-25 SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
1-8-35 COM Port Baud Rate Setting Assignment<br />
1-8-36 COM Port Parity/Stop Bit Setting Assignment<br />
� Notes �<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
5<br />
Data No.<br />
13<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AS<br />
When PC is assigned, the SMDR output data can be saved in a Comma-Separated Values (CSV) format file on a<br />
PC. The file can then be opened using PC software (i.e., MS Excel) to analyze, filter, and/or sort the data.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 178 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-5-14 Printer Line Feed Control Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the data format to be sent to the Station Message<br />
Detail Recording (SMDR) printer. When YS is set, a return is provided with the call<br />
record.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
YS NO<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK5 + ADto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
1 4 : L I N E F E E D Y S<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-5-02 SMDR Print Format<br />
1-5-13 Printer Connected Selection<br />
1-5-25 SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
5<br />
Data No.<br />
14<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AS<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 179
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Notes �<br />
�<br />
Example: Settings to specify the format of communication data output to the printer.<br />
� Line Feed control in effect.<br />
07/03/92 09:00 08-05-12 OG 123<br />
00:15:32<br />
12345678<br />
102885167537000 LCR FWD234<br />
� No Line Feed control.<br />
07/03/92<br />
12345678<br />
(No Limit)<br />
09:00 08-05-12 OG 123 00:15:32 10288516753700 LCR IWD234<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 180 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-5-25 SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign the minimum call time before the Station Message<br />
Detail Recording (SMDR) outputs a record of the outgoing CO/PBX call.<br />
Display<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK5 +BE to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to enter data.<br />
Minimum time assignment is 000 sec.<br />
�<br />
Time assignment can be set from 000~099 sec. in increments of 10.<br />
�<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-1-05 Start Time Selection<br />
1-5-13 Printer Connected Selection<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
2 5 : S M D R T I M = 0 4 0 s<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Default Values<br />
040 seconds<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
5<br />
Data No.<br />
25<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AS<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 181
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-5-26 SMDR Incoming/Outgoing Print<br />
Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the call records to be output from the Station<br />
Message Detail Recording (SMDR): OUT = print outgoing call records only, INC =<br />
print incoming call records only, ALL = print incoming and outgoing call records.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
ALL OUT INC<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK5 +BFto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
2 6 : P R I N T M O D = O U T<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-5-13 Printer Connected Selection<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
5<br />
Data No.<br />
26<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AS<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 182 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-6-01 Attendant Add-On Console to<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Port Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign an Attendant Add-On Console to a telephone port<br />
number.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK6 to access this Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to enter the data.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data<br />
4 Press G to write the data and advance to the next DSS No.<br />
5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each DSS. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
No. DSS<br />
1~4<br />
0 1 : D S S 1 = P 0 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
7-2 <strong>Telephone</strong> Type Assignment<br />
Data<br />
Setting<br />
1. The telephone with an Attendant Add-On Console connected must be specified by port number.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. A maximum of four Attendant Add-On Consoles can be connected to a system.<br />
Default Values<br />
3. A maximum of four Attendant Add-On Consoles can be connected to one telephone.<br />
DSS Tel Port No.<br />
1 › 01<br />
2 › 02<br />
3 › 01<br />
4 › 02<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
6<br />
Data No.<br />
01<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTD<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 183
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-6-03 DSS Call Voice/Tone Signal Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether Voice or Tone signaling is to be used first<br />
when calling an extension from an Attendant Add-On Console.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
TONE VOICE<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK6 + J+J+ C.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
0 3 : V O I C E C A L L<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-6-01 Attendant Add-On Console to <strong>Telephone</strong> Port Assignment<br />
1. To switch Voice/Tone signaling, dial 1 from a station.<br />
� Notes �<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
6<br />
Data No.<br />
03<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTD<br />
2. When tone signaling is programmed in this Memory Block, the called party cannot answer handsfree unless the<br />
Direct Station Select (DSS) station user dials 1 to switch it to Voice.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 184 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-6-05 Attendant Add-On Console Key<br />
Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign functions to the Attendant Add-On Console keys.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Page 1<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
NON<br />
TEL01<br />
(01~120)<br />
INT A<br />
(Paging Zone)<br />
INT B<br />
(Paging Zone)<br />
INT C<br />
(Paging Zone)<br />
INT ALL<br />
(Paging<br />
Zones)<br />
EXT A<br />
(Paging Zone)<br />
EXT B<br />
(Paging Zone)<br />
Page 2<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
EXT C<br />
(Paging Zone)<br />
EXT ALL<br />
(Paging<br />
Zones)<br />
MSG<br />
(Waiting)<br />
NT MOD<br />
(Night Mode)<br />
TRF<br />
(Transfer)<br />
IN OUT<br />
(Attendant<br />
Station<br />
Outgoing<br />
Lockout)<br />
CO<br />
(Trunk 01~64)<br />
Page 3<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
VM<br />
(Live Record)<br />
VB<br />
(Mail Box)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
DSS<br />
No.<br />
1~4<br />
Button<br />
No.<br />
01~60<br />
DPH 1<br />
(Doorphone)<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
0 5 : 1 / 0 1 = T E L 0 1 | 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
DPH 2<br />
(Doorphone)<br />
Page<br />
No.<br />
RELAY 0<br />
(General<br />
Purpose)<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK6 +J+J+Eto access the Memory Block.<br />
RELAY 1<br />
(General<br />
Purpose)<br />
Call Park<br />
Keys ( 0~9 or<br />
00~39)<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
6<br />
Data No.<br />
05<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTD<br />
Shaded area<br />
indicates<br />
default.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 185
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures (Continued)<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key and dial pad keys to change the data<br />
option:<br />
Functions can be assigned to keys 01~60 on Attendant Add-On Consoles 1~4.<br />
Functions to be programmed:<br />
Station No. 01~120<br />
�<br />
Internal Paging Zone A<br />
�<br />
Internal Paging Zone B<br />
�<br />
Internal Paging Zone C<br />
�<br />
Internal Paging Zone ALL<br />
�<br />
External Paging Zone A<br />
�<br />
External Paging Zone B<br />
�<br />
External Paging Zone C<br />
�<br />
External Zone Paging ALL<br />
�<br />
Message Waiting<br />
�<br />
Night Mode Switching<br />
�<br />
Transfer<br />
�<br />
Attendant Station Outgoing Lockout<br />
�<br />
CO (Trunk 01~64)<br />
�<br />
Feature Access Key with Live Record<br />
�<br />
Digital Voice Mail Mailbox Number<br />
�<br />
DPH 1 & 2<br />
�<br />
General Purpose Relay 0 and 1<br />
�<br />
DSS Key Number<br />
4 Press G to write the data.<br />
1 2 3 4 5 6<br />
7 8 9 10 11 12<br />
13 14 15 16 17 18<br />
19 20 21 22 23 24<br />
25 26 27 28 29 30<br />
31 32 33 34 35 36<br />
37 38 39 40 41 42<br />
43 44 45 46 47 48<br />
49 50 51 52 53 54<br />
55 56 57 58 59 60<br />
5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for all buttons for each DSS. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Default Values<br />
DSS<br />
No.<br />
Key No. Data Setting<br />
� Use the following to enter data:<br />
to move the cursor left<br />
L to move the cursor right<br />
J<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data<br />
G to write selected data<br />
C to go to the next page<br />
A to go to the previous<br />
page<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 186 Memory Blocks<br />
1~4<br />
01 TEL No. 01<br />
02 TEL No. 02<br />
~<br />
~<br />
48 TEL. No. 48<br />
49 Night Mode Switching<br />
50<br />
51<br />
52<br />
Internal Paging Zone A<br />
(INT A)<br />
Internal Paging Zone B<br />
(INT B)<br />
Internal Paging Zone C<br />
(INT C)<br />
53<br />
All Internal Paging Zone<br />
(INT ALL)<br />
54 Vacant<br />
55 Message Waiting (MSG)<br />
56<br />
57<br />
58<br />
External Paging Zone A<br />
(EXT A)<br />
External Paging Zone B<br />
(EXT B)<br />
External Paging Zone C<br />
(EXT C)<br />
59<br />
External Paging Zone All<br />
(EXT ALL)<br />
60 Transfer (TRF)
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-6-01 Attendant Add-On Console to <strong>Telephone</strong> Port Assignment<br />
7-2 <strong>Telephone</strong> Type Assignment<br />
1. When TEL is assigned to a line key, the red LED is used to indicate Station Status.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. When a function (e. g., Message or Paging) that does not require a green LED is assigned to a 2-color LED key,<br />
the green LED does not function.<br />
3. <strong>Telephone</strong> number setting data for telephone sets is determined by the number of installed ESI(8)-U( ) ETUs.<br />
4. Message Waiting and Attendant Station Outgoing Lockout cannot be assigned on the same console.<br />
5. DSS/CO keys should be programmed on line keys 1~48 only.<br />
6. The VM (Live Record) key with Live Record has seven features:<br />
Feature No. Feature<br />
00 Record Start<br />
01 Record Pause/Restart<br />
02 Record Erase<br />
03 Record Finish<br />
04 Record Erase/Restart<br />
05 Pager<br />
06 Record Confirmation<br />
Each function can be assigned by dialing the Feature No. using the dial pad after pressing LK1 on page 3.<br />
7. Digital Voice Mail Mailbox Number can be entered using two, three, or four digits of the Mailbox number on the<br />
dial pad. This feature is used for Live Record addressing. The Live Record feature must be assigned also to a<br />
line key on the console.<br />
8. R3000 or higher is required to support Centralized BLF on the DSS Console. The Mail Box (Page 3, LK 2) key<br />
on the Attendant Add-On Console is used to support the BLF of the remote stations across K-CCIS.<br />
9. R4000 or higher is required to support Call Park Keys.<br />
10. When the system is set for 10 Call Park Locations, 0~9 are used. When the system is set for 40 Call Park<br />
Locations 00~39 are used to assign the Call Park keys. Refer to Memory Block 1-8-51 (Call Park Selection).<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 187
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-6-07 Message Board Lamp Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign mailbox numbers for each Message Display Board.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
NON<br />
(Unassigned)<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
MSG<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK6 + J+J+Gto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press line key to select Setting Data 1. Use the dial pad to select Setting Data 2.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor to the left<br />
Lto move the cursor to the right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data<br />
H to clear all data<br />
Setting Data 2: Mailbox No.<br />
�<br />
2-digits 10 ~ 89<br />
3-digits 100 ~ 899<br />
4-digits 1000 ~ 8999<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
4 Press G to write the selected data. The next Lamp No. is displayed. After all 48 lamps are assigned, the next Board No. is<br />
displayed.<br />
5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each lamp (01~48) and for each board (1~8). The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Board<br />
No.<br />
Lamp<br />
No.<br />
Setting<br />
1 Data<br />
0 7 : 1 – 0 1 N O N<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
7-2 <strong>Telephone</strong> Type Assignment<br />
Setting<br />
2 Data<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
6<br />
Data No.<br />
07<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTB<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 188 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-6-08 Attendant Transfer Selection During<br />
Live Record<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to control the Attendant DSS/BLF transfer while the Attendant<br />
is engaged in Live Record. The call is transferred to either the DSS/BLF extension or<br />
the voice mailbox of the DSS/BLF extension. When YS is selected, the call is<br />
transferred to the DSS/BLF extension. When NO is selected, the Live Record session<br />
is addressed to that DSS/BLF extension (no transfer).<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
NO YS<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
0 8 : D S S S E L Y S<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK6 + J + J + Hto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
6<br />
Data No.<br />
08<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+ BTD<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 189
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 190 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-7-00 Doorphone Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to enable the doorphones in System <strong>Programming</strong>.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 Default not<br />
assigned.<br />
DPH1 DPH2 DPH3 DPH4<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK7 to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the CO/PBX line key corresponding to each doorphone. The LED changes to indicate the data each time the CO/PBX line<br />
key is pressed.<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
0 0 : D P H A S S I G N<br />
CO/PBX<br />
Line LED<br />
Title<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Off On<br />
Data No Yes<br />
1-7-01 Doorphone Display Time Selection<br />
The shaded area is the<br />
default setting.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
7<br />
Data No.<br />
00<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTP<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 191
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-7-01 Doorphone Display Time Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the time, in seconds, a doorphone call signals a<br />
station before it times out.<br />
This Memory Block can be adjusted in 1-second intervals (R3000 or higher).<br />
Display (R2500 or lower)<br />
Settings<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
10s 30s 60s 90s<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Title<br />
0 1 : D P H T I M E R 1 0 s<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK7 + KA to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the CO/PBX line key corresponding to the time assignment.<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Refer to next page for R3000 or higher <strong>Programming</strong> Procedures.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
7<br />
Data No.<br />
01<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTP<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 192 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Display (R3000 or higher)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK7 + KA to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to enter the Data Setting for Class 1.<br />
Setting Data<br />
01s~99s (e.g., 02s = 2s)<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next memory block.<br />
5 Program the next memory block, or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
0 1 : D P H T M R 1 0 s<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-7-00 Doorphone Assignment<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
R3000 or higher is required to adjust this memory block by 1-second intervals.<br />
� Notes �<br />
Default Values<br />
10s<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 193
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-7-02 External Speaker Connection<br />
Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not external speakers are connected to<br />
the system.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
ESP A ESP B ESP C<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK7+ KB to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the CO/PBX line key corresponding to each ESP Zone. The LED changes to indicate the data each time the CO/PBX line<br />
key is pressed.<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
0 2 : E S P C O N N<br />
CO/PBX<br />
Line LED<br />
Title<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Off On<br />
Data No Yes<br />
1-7-03 External Paging Alert Tone Selection<br />
The shaded area indicates<br />
the default setting.<br />
Only three external speaker zones can be connected to the system.<br />
� Notes �<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
7<br />
Data No.<br />
02<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BP<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 194 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-7-03 External Paging Alert Tone Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not a paging alert tone is sent on<br />
External Zone Paging (all speakers/individual speaker).<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
YS NO<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK7 + KC to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
0 3 : E S P T O N E Y S<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-7-02 External Speaker Connection Selection<br />
1-7-08 External Speaker Chime Selection<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
7<br />
Data No.<br />
03<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BP<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 195
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-7-04 Doorphone Ring Pattern Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to turn doorphone Off/On or specify the doorphone ring<br />
pattern. Doorphones can be individually assigned.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Page 1<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
OFF<br />
Page 2<br />
ON A B C D E F<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
G H<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK7 + KD to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the CO/PBX line key corresponding to the time assignment.<br />
Press C to alternate pages.<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
0 4 : D P H 1 C Y C L O N | 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-7-00 Doorphone Assignment<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
1-7-05 Doorphone Ringing Frequency Selection<br />
4-03 Doorphone Chime Assignment (Day Mode)<br />
4-04 Doorphone Chime Assignment (Night Mode)<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
7<br />
Data No.<br />
04<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTP<br />
The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 196 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
The Doorphone Ring Patterns are shown in the table below:<br />
Pattern<br />
Tone<br />
Off<br />
Tone<br />
On<br />
LK 1<br />
LK 2<br />
A LK 3<br />
B LK 4<br />
C LK 5<br />
D LK 6<br />
E LK 7<br />
F LK 8<br />
G<br />
H<br />
Line<br />
Key<br />
LK 1<br />
(Pg. 2)<br />
LK 2<br />
(Pg. 2)<br />
0s 1s 2s 3s 4s 5s<br />
s= seconds<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 197<br />
6s
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-7-05 Doorphone Ringing Frequency<br />
Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the doorphone ringing frequency. Doorphones can<br />
be individually assigned.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
A B C D E F G H default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Title<br />
0 5 : D P H 1 F R E Q C<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK7+ KE to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
The available tones are:<br />
Tone Frequency<br />
4 Press G to write the data.<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
Tone A 480/600 (Modulation - 16 Hz)<br />
Tone B 480/606 (Modulation - 8 Hz)<br />
Tone C 1024/1285<br />
Tone D 1024<br />
Tone E 500<br />
Tone F 1024/1285 (Modulation - 16 Hz)<br />
Tone G 600/700 (Modulation - 16 Hz)<br />
Tone H 1024 (Envelope - 2 sec.)<br />
5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each of the four doorphones. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
7<br />
Data No.<br />
05<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTP<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 198 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-7-00 Doorphone Assignment<br />
1-7-04 Doorphone Ring Pattern Selection<br />
4-03 Doorphone Chime Assignment (Day Mode)<br />
4-04 Doorphone Chime Assignment (Night Mode)<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 199
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-7-06 External Paging Timeout Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the time allowed for External Paging before timeout<br />
and release of the paging circuit. R1000/R2500/R3500 Speaker 59 uses this timer.<br />
This Memory Block can be adjusted in 1 second intervals (R3000 or higher).<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 5.0 8.0 ∞<br />
(No Limit)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Title<br />
0 6 : E S P T I M E R 5 . 0<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK7+ KF to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Refer to next page for R3000 or higher <strong>Programming</strong> Procedures.<br />
default. Times<br />
are in minutes.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
7<br />
Data No.<br />
06<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BP<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 200 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Display (R3000 or higher)<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK7 + KF to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to enter the Data Setting for Class 1.<br />
Setting Data<br />
000s~999s (e.g., 300s = 5m)<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Timer Class of Service.<br />
5 Program the next Timer Class of Service or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-2-00 Internal Paging Timeout Selection<br />
1-7-02 External Speaker Connection Selection<br />
4-71 Station to Timer Class of Service (R3000 or higher)<br />
1. Types of paging include:<br />
� All Internal Zone (51)<br />
Timer<br />
Class<br />
� Internal Zone Paging (52~54)<br />
� Notes �<br />
� External Zone Paging (all speakers) (55)<br />
� External Zone Paging (individual speakers) (56~58)<br />
1~4<br />
0 6 : E S P T M R 1 = 3 0 0 s<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
Default Values<br />
Class 1~4 = 300s<br />
000S = No Limit<br />
� Internal/External Zone Paging (59)<br />
2. <strong>Telephone</strong> ports 1 and 2 are in Station to Timer Class of Service, Class 1 by default. All other ports are in<br />
Station to Timer Class of Service, Class 2 by default (R3000 or higher).<br />
3. When a system is upgraded from R2500 or lower to R3000 or higher, the External Paging Timeout Selection is<br />
reset to the default value during the upgrade process.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 201
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-7-07 External Ring Relay Pattern Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign a distinctive ringing control/interval pattern to relay<br />
circuits.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
PT1 PT2 PT3 PT4<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press L1 + LK7 + KG to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
Use dial pad keys 1~4 to specify external ring relay.<br />
�<br />
4 Press G to write the data.<br />
PT5 PT6 PT7<br />
(Continuous<br />
5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each of the four Ring Relays. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Ext<br />
Ring<br />
Relay<br />
(1~4)<br />
0 7 : E X T R I N G 1 = P T 3<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
1-2-00 Internal Paging Timeout Selection<br />
1-7-02 External Speaker Connection Selection<br />
2-08 ECR Relay to Tenant Assignment<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
� Notes �<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
7<br />
Data No.<br />
07<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BP<br />
An External Tone relay or the Night Chime relay must be assigned in Memory Block 2-08 (ECR Relay to Tenant<br />
Assignment) before the tone is generated.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 202 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Pattern<br />
1<br />
2<br />
3<br />
4<br />
5<br />
6<br />
7<br />
0s 1s 2s 3s 4s 5s 6s<br />
Continuous<br />
s= seconds<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 203
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-7-08 External Speaker Chime Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether a normal paging alert tone (4 tones) sounds<br />
before the speech path is established, a chime sounds at the start of the call, or a<br />
chime sounds at the start and end of the call.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
PRT C-S C-B<br />
default.<br />
PRT = Normal Paging Tone Before the Page<br />
C-S = Chime - Start Only (4 Tone Chime)<br />
C-B = Chime - Both Start and End (4 Tone Chime)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK7+ KH to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
0 8 : S P K O N P R T<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
1-7-03 External Page Alert Tone Selection<br />
1-7-09 External Speaker Chime Start Time Selection<br />
Memory Block 1-7-03 (External Paging Alert Zone Selection) must be enabled for this Memory Block to function.<br />
� Notes �<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
7<br />
Data No.<br />
08<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BP<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 204 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-7-09 External Speaker Chime Start Time<br />
Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block only when paging alert tone (four tones) is assigned in<br />
Memory Block 1-7-08 (External Speaker Chime Selection). This Memory Block<br />
specifies the delay time (in milliseconds) after an external paging code is dialed before<br />
the paging alert tone is provided.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Page 1<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
000<br />
Page 2<br />
100 200 300 400 500 600 700<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK7 +KI to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
Use the following when entering data:<br />
�<br />
A or C to cycle between pages, + to go from page 2 to page 1, = to go from page 1 to page 2<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
0 9 : S T A R T = 7 0 0 | 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
1-7-08 External Speaker Chime Selection<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
7<br />
Data No.<br />
09<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BP<br />
The shaded<br />
selection (in ms)<br />
is the default.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 205
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 206 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-8-01 SLT or Automated Attendant/DISA to<br />
CPU PBR Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether the four Push Button Receiver (PBR)<br />
circuits in the CPUI( )-U( ) ETU are used for Single Line <strong>Telephone</strong>s or Automated<br />
Attendant/Direct Inward System Access (DISA).<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
PBR 1<br />
and 2<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
PBR 3<br />
and 4<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK8 to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
The LED indication changes to indicate the data each time the CO/PBX line key is pressed.<br />
CO/PBX<br />
Line LED<br />
Title<br />
0 1 : P B R ( S L T / A A )<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Off On<br />
Data Single Line <strong>Telephone</strong> A.A./DISA<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
The shaded area<br />
indicates the default<br />
setting.<br />
� Notes �<br />
Default not<br />
assigned.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
8<br />
Data No.<br />
01<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTI<br />
When LK1 and LK2 are assigned to Automated Attendant/DISA, a PBR( )-U( ) ETU must be installed in the<br />
system when Single Line <strong>Telephone</strong>s are used.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 207
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-8-02 PBR Receive Level Assignment for<br />
Automated Attendant/DISA<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the receiving level of the Push Button Receiver<br />
(PBR) at the Automated Attendant/Direct Inward System Access (DISA).<br />
Display<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
PBR<br />
No.<br />
1/2<br />
0 2 : P B R 1 = 0 3<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK8 KB + to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to change the data option. The information that can be entered<br />
includes:<br />
Setting Data Receiving Level<br />
00 -33.0 dBm<br />
01 -34.0 dBm<br />
02 -35.0 dBm<br />
03 -36.0 dBm<br />
04 -37.0 dBm<br />
05 -38.0 dBm<br />
06 -39.0 dBm<br />
07 -40.0 dBm<br />
08 -41.0 dBm<br />
09 -42.0 dBm<br />
10 -43.0 dBm<br />
11 -44.0 dBm<br />
12 -45.0 dBm<br />
13 -46.0 dBm<br />
14 -47.0 dBm<br />
15 -48.0 dBm<br />
4 Press G to write the data and advance to the next PBR.<br />
5 Enter next PBR, and press G to write data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Default Values (PBR 1 and 2)<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
Receiving<br />
Level<br />
03 -36.0 dBm<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
8<br />
Data No.<br />
02<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AU<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 208 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
� �<br />
1. When the Automated Attendant answers, the DTMF signal level from the calling party is reduced from the Public<br />
Switched <strong>Telephone</strong> Network (PSTN). This Memory Block specifies the minimum detectable receiving level.<br />
Notes<br />
Setting Data 15 is the most sensitive.<br />
2. PBR 1 data is for Channels 1 and 2 and PBR 2 is for Channels 3 and 4 in the CPUI( )-U( ) ETU.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 209
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-8-04 Time Display (12h/24h) Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify either a 12-hour (00:00 to 11:59 a.m., noon to 11:59<br />
p.m.) or 24-hour (00:00 to 23:59) time display.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
12 24<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data Setting<br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
0 4 : 1 2 H O U R D I S P<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK8 + KD to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
8<br />
Data No.<br />
04<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BM<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 210 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-8-07 Class of Service (Attendant) Feature<br />
Selection 1<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to allow or deny specific attendant features for each Class Of<br />
Service. When individual stations are assigned, the station user can access only the<br />
features designated as allow.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Page 1<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
Night Mode<br />
Switching<br />
Night Mode<br />
Switching Per<br />
Tenant<br />
System<br />
Speed Dial<br />
<strong>Programming</strong><br />
Not Used Not Used Not Used<br />
Automatic<br />
Trunk-to-<br />
Trunk<br />
Transfer Set/<br />
Reset<br />
Automated<br />
Attendant/<br />
DISA Set/<br />
Reset Mode<br />
Page 2<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
Timed Alarm<br />
for Single<br />
Line<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong><br />
Set/Reset<br />
Call Forward<br />
Set/Reset<br />
from<br />
Destination<br />
Station<br />
System-Wide<br />
Reset<br />
Refer to Note<br />
1<br />
Password<br />
(Outgoing<br />
Restriction)<br />
Refer to Note<br />
2<br />
DISA<br />
Password<br />
Cancel<br />
DISA<br />
Password<br />
Confirmation<br />
Weekend<br />
Mode Per<br />
Tenant<br />
Forced<br />
Account<br />
Code/<br />
Authorization<br />
Code<br />
<strong>Programming</strong><br />
Page 3<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
Terminal<br />
Exchange<br />
Mode Set<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
CO VM<br />
Callback<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong><br />
Number<br />
<strong>Programming</strong><br />
Station Name<br />
Assignment<br />
Class<br />
No.<br />
(00~15)<br />
0 7 : C L S 1 ( 0 0 ) | 0 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Page<br />
No.<br />
(1~3)<br />
Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
8<br />
Data No.<br />
07<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTS<br />
Default not<br />
assigned.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 211
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK8 + KG to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to enter data.<br />
The LED indication changes to indicate the data each time a CO/PBX line key is pressed.<br />
CO/PBX<br />
Line Key LED<br />
Use the following when entering data:<br />
�<br />
Press C to go to the next page.<br />
Press A to go to the previous page.<br />
4 Press G key. Data for Class 01 ~ 15 is displayed successively.<br />
5 Press G to write the data for Class 15. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Off On<br />
Data Deny Allow<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-8-08 Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2<br />
4-17 Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment<br />
The shaded area indicates<br />
the default setting.<br />
1. System-Wide Reset selection resets the following: Call Forward – All Call, Do Not Disturb, Customized Message,<br />
and Callback Request.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. Password (Outgoing Restriction) selection cancels Station Lockout and default password for another station.<br />
3. Sixteen Classes (00 ~ 15) of feature restriction patterns allow a station user to activate particular features while<br />
restricting others.<br />
4. At default, stations 100 and 101 are in class 00. All other stations are in class 15.<br />
5. Stations are assigned to a Class of Service in Memory Block 4-17 (Station to Class of Service Feature<br />
Assignment).<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 212 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Classes 00 ~ 15 are programmed in this Memory Block as feature restriction classes. In Memory Block 4-17 (Station to<br />
Class of Service Feature Assignment) specify any class of service for each telephone to assign features the user can/<br />
cannot activate.<br />
Corresponding<br />
CO/PBX Line<br />
Key<br />
Page 1<br />
Page 2<br />
Page 3<br />
Function Name<br />
Default<br />
Class 00<br />
LK1 Night Mode Switching (System-Wide)) Allow Deny<br />
LK2 Night Mode Switching (Tenant) Allow Deny<br />
LK3 System Speed Dial <strong>Programming</strong> Allow Deny<br />
LK4 Not Used N/A N/A<br />
LK5 Not Used N/A N/A<br />
LK6 Not Used N/A N/A<br />
LK7 Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer (Set/Reset) and programming of<br />
Outgoing Numbers<br />
Allow Deny<br />
LK8 Automated Attendant/DISA Mode (Set/Reset) Allow Deny<br />
LK1 Timed Alarm (Set/Reset) for Single Line <strong>Telephone</strong>s (From Attendant) Allow Deny<br />
LK2 Call Forward – All Call (Set/Reset) from Destination Station, Call<br />
Forward CAR Keys, Call Forward – All Call Set, and Call<br />
Forward – Busy/No Answer set<br />
LK3 System-Wide Reset of Timed Alarm, Call Forward – All Call, Do Not<br />
Disturb, Customized Message, and Callback Request<br />
Allow Deny<br />
Deny Deny<br />
LK4 Cancel Station Lockout and Default Password for another Station Allow Deny<br />
LK5 DISA Password Cancel Allow Deny<br />
LK6 DISA Password Confirmation Allow Deny<br />
LK7 Automated Attendant Weekend Mode (Set/Reset) Tenant Allow Deny<br />
LK8 Forced Account Code/Authorization Code <strong>Programming</strong> Allow Deny<br />
LK1 Terminal Exchange Mode Set Allow Deny<br />
LK2 CO VM Callback <strong>Telephone</strong> Number <strong>Programming</strong> (R2000 or higher) Allow Deny<br />
LK3 Station Name Assignment – All stations (R4000 or higher) Deny Deny<br />
LK4~LK8 Not Used N/A N/A<br />
Default<br />
Class 01 ~ 15<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 213
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-8-08 Class of Service (Station) Feature<br />
Selection 2<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to allow or deny specific station features for each Class of<br />
Service. When individual stations are assigned, the station user can access only the<br />
features specified as allow.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Page 1<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
Call Forward<br />
– All Call,<br />
DND, Break<br />
Mode<br />
Page 2<br />
Trunk<br />
Queuing<br />
Automatic<br />
Callback<br />
Barge-In<br />
(Calling Party)<br />
Barge-In<br />
Receive<br />
(Called Party)<br />
Timed Alarm<br />
Set/Cancel<br />
From SLT<br />
General<br />
Purpose<br />
Relay<br />
Voice /<br />
Tone<br />
Override<br />
(Originate)<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
Absence<br />
Message<br />
Callback<br />
Request Set<br />
Station<br />
Outgoing<br />
Lockout Set<br />
Not Used<br />
Call Forward<br />
– Busy/No<br />
Answer Set<br />
VRS Voice<br />
Message<br />
Not Used<br />
DISA<br />
Password Set<br />
Page 3<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
Not Used<br />
User Ringing<br />
Line<br />
Preference<br />
Set/Reset<br />
Voice/Tone<br />
Override<br />
(Receive)<br />
LCR/ARS<br />
Bypass<br />
Station Trunkto-Trunk<br />
Transfer<br />
Account Code<br />
Entry<br />
Digit<br />
Restriction<br />
Time<br />
Selection<br />
Call Alert<br />
Notification<br />
Page 4<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
LCR/ARS<br />
Recall<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
DSS Key<br />
Transfer<br />
Operation<br />
Title<br />
Class<br />
No.<br />
(00~15)<br />
0 8 : C L S 2 ( 0 0 ) | 0 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
ANI/Caller ID<br />
No Page<br />
(1~6)<br />
ANI/Caller ID<br />
Number<br />
Selection<br />
Live Record<br />
Allow/Deny<br />
Auto Record<br />
Allow/Deny<br />
BGM<br />
Selection<br />
Unsupervised<br />
Conference<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
8<br />
Data No.<br />
08<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTS<br />
Default not<br />
assigned.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 214 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Page 5<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
Forced<br />
Account Code<br />
/Authorization<br />
Code<br />
Group<br />
Listening<br />
Selection<br />
Station<br />
Relocation<br />
Set Call<br />
Forward – Off<br />
-Premise<br />
Pre-Set<br />
Dialing<br />
Allow/Deny<br />
Live<br />
Monitoring<br />
ANI/Caller ID<br />
Display<br />
Selection<br />
Not Used<br />
Page 6<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
ARS Overflow<br />
VMS<br />
Message<br />
Indication<br />
Unverified for<br />
Forced<br />
Account Code<br />
/Authorization<br />
Code<br />
Not Used<br />
Caller ID for<br />
K-CCIS<br />
Call Monitor<br />
(Originate)<br />
Call Monitor<br />
(Receive)<br />
Saved<br />
Caller ID<br />
missed<br />
call Info.<br />
Page 7<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
Send<br />
Caller ID to<br />
SLT<br />
Not Used<br />
Station Name<br />
Assignment<br />
Hot Key Pad<br />
Interactive<br />
Soft Keys<br />
DNIS Display Not Used Not Used<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK8 + KH to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to enter Class No.<br />
Use the following to enter Class No:<br />
�<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data<br />
Jto move cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
4 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to allow or deny the feature selection.<br />
The LED indication changes to indicate data each time CO/PBX line key is pressed.<br />
CO/PBX<br />
Line Key LED<br />
Press C to go to the next page.<br />
Press A to go back to the previous page.<br />
5 Press G key to transfer data.<br />
6 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each Class. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
7 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Off On<br />
Data Deny Allow<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-8-07 Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection 1<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 215
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
4-17 Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment<br />
1. Sixteen Classes (00 ~ 15) of feature restriction patterns allow a station user to activate particular features while<br />
restricting others.<br />
2. At default, all stations are in Class 00.<br />
� Notes �<br />
3. Stations are assigned to a Class of Service in Memory Block 4-17 (Station to Class of Service Feature<br />
Assignment).<br />
4. LCR/ARS Bypass (Page 3, LK 4) applies only when the station is assigned to an LCR/ARS Class (1~4) in<br />
Memory Block 4-40 (LCR Class Selection). LCR/ARS Bypass does not apply when using access codes to<br />
directly access an ARS Table (functions 601~604 – ARS Tables 1~4) in Memory Blocks 1-1-46~48 [Access<br />
Code (1/2/3-Digit) Assignment].<br />
5. ARS Overflow (Page 6, LK 1) allows or restricts access to Trunk Group 01 when the first priority trunk group<br />
(programmed route) is busy.<br />
6. When the SLIB(4)-U( ) ETU is used, and a change is made to Pg 7 LK1 (Send Caller ID to SLT), reset may be<br />
required for proper functionality.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 216 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Corresponding<br />
CO/PBX<br />
Line Key<br />
Page 1<br />
Page 2<br />
Page 3<br />
Function Name<br />
Default<br />
Class 00<br />
Default<br />
Class 01 ~ 15<br />
LK1 Set Call Forward – All Call, Do Not Disturb (DND), Break Mode Allow Deny<br />
LK2 Trunk Queuing Allow Deny<br />
LK3 Automatic Callback Allow Deny<br />
LK4 Barge-In Originate on a CO/PBX Line (Calling Party) Deny Deny<br />
LK5 Barge-In Receive (Called Party) Allow Deny<br />
LK6 Timed Alarm (Set/Cancel) From SLT Allow Deny<br />
LK7 General Purpose Relay Allow Deny<br />
LK8 Voice Override/Tone Override Originate Allow Deny<br />
LK1 Absence Message Allow Deny<br />
LK2 Callback Request Originate Allow Deny<br />
LK3 Station Outgoing Lockout (Set/Cancel) Allow Deny<br />
LK4 Not Used N/A N/A<br />
LK5 Call Forward – Busy/ No Answer Set Allow Deny<br />
LK6 VRS Voice Message Record/Verify/Erase Allow Deny<br />
LK7 Not Used N/A N/A<br />
LK8 DISA Password Set Allow Deny<br />
LK1 Not Used N/A N/A<br />
LK2 User Ringing Line Preference Set/Reset Allow Deny<br />
LK3 Voice/Tone Override/Camp-On Receive Allow Deny<br />
LK4 LCR/ARS Bypass (Trunk Groups 02~32) De ny Deny<br />
LK5 Station Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Deny Deny<br />
LK6 Account Code Entry Deny Deny<br />
LK7 Digit Restriction Time Selection Allow Allow<br />
LK8 Call Alert Notification for DIT and DID Allow Deny<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 217
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Corresponding<br />
CO/PBX<br />
Line Key<br />
Page 4<br />
Page 5<br />
Page 6<br />
Function Name<br />
LK1 LCR/ARS Recall Allow Deny<br />
LK2 DSS Key Transfer Operation Deny Deny<br />
LK3 ANI/Caller ID Deny Deny<br />
LK4 ANI/Caller ID Number/Name Selection<br />
When deny is set, Name is displayed if Name and number are received.<br />
When allow is set, Number is displayed if Name and number are<br />
received.<br />
Deny Deny<br />
LK5 Live Record Allow/Deny (Memory Block 1-8-26 must be set.) Deny Deny<br />
LK6 Auto Record Allow/Deny (LK5 must be on, and Memory Block 1-8-26<br />
must be set.)<br />
Deny Deny<br />
LK7 BGM Selection Allow Deny<br />
LK8 Unsupervised Conference Deny Deny<br />
LK1 Forced Account Code/Authorization Code Deny Deny<br />
LK2 Group Listening Selection Deny Deny<br />
LK3 Station Relocation Allow Deny<br />
LK4 Set Call Forward – Off- Premise (Related to Page 1 LK1 and Page 2<br />
LK5).<br />
Deny Deny<br />
LK5 Pre-Set Dialing (Allow/Deny) Deny Deny<br />
LK6 Live Monitoring Deny Deny<br />
LK7 Caller ID Display Selection<br />
If allow is set, Caller ID Name and Number display at the same time.<br />
Deny Deny<br />
LK8 Not Used N/A N/A<br />
LK1 ARS Overflow Deny Deny<br />
LK2 Voice Mail Message Indication on Line Keys Deny Deny<br />
LK3 Unverified for Forced Account Code/Authorization Code<br />
Deny means Verified; Allow means Unverified<br />
Default<br />
Class 00<br />
Default<br />
Class 01 ~ 15<br />
Deny Deny<br />
LK4 Not Used N/A N/A<br />
LK5 Caller ID for K-CCIS Allow Deny<br />
LK6 Call Monitor (Originate) (R2000 or higher) Deny Deny<br />
LK7 Call Monitor( Receive) (R2000 or higher) Allow Deny<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 218 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Corresponding<br />
CO/PBX<br />
Line Key<br />
Page 7<br />
LK8 Save Caller ID Missed Call Information (R3000 or higher)<br />
(Version 6.00 MIFM or higher)<br />
Deny Deny<br />
LK1 Send Caller ID Information to SLT (R3000 or higher) Deny Deny<br />
LK2 Not Used N/A N/A<br />
LK3 Station Name Assignment – Own Station (R4000 or higher) Allow Deny<br />
LK4 Hot Key Pad (R4000 or higher) Deny Deny<br />
LK5 Interactive Soft Keys (R4000 or higher) Deny Deny<br />
LK6 DNIS Display for Transferred Calls (R4000 or higher) Deny Deny<br />
LK7 Not Used<br />
LK8 Not Used<br />
Function Name<br />
Default<br />
Class 00<br />
Default<br />
Class 01 ~ 15<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 219
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-8-09 Music on Hold Pattern Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the Music on Hold pattern.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
A B<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK8 +KI to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-8-31 Hold Tone Source Assignment<br />
1-8-32 Hold Interval Tone Volume Selection<br />
1. Music on Hold can be provided to CO/PBX and intercom calls that are placed on hold.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. One of two melodies can be selected (R2500 or lower):<br />
A = American Folk Song Medley<br />
B = Christmas Song Medley<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
0 9 : M O H = A<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
3. For R3000 or higher, the internal Music on hold source for CPUI( )-U10 ETU Lot 3XXX or higher and<br />
CPUI( )-U20 ETU provides the following options:<br />
A = Hold Tone (default)<br />
B = American Folk Song Medley<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
8<br />
Data No.<br />
09<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BCS<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 220 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-8-10 PBR Interdigit Release Time Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the interdigit release time for the Push Button<br />
Receiver (PBR).<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
3s 4s 5s 6s 7s 8s 9s 10s default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK8 + AK to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
1 0 : P B R R E L E A S 7 s<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
1-3-03 First Digit PBR Release Time Selection<br />
1-8-01 SLT or Automated Attendant/DISA to CPU PBR Selection<br />
A DTMF Single Line <strong>Telephone</strong> connected to the <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> system must be supported by a PBR that<br />
receives DTMF signals.<br />
� Notes �<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
8<br />
Data No.<br />
10<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BM<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 221
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Specified Time: 10 sec. Default<br />
Memory Block 1-3-03<br />
Specified Time: 7 sec. Default<br />
Memory Block 1-8-10<br />
Specified Time: 7 sec. Default<br />
Memory Block 1-8-10<br />
Off-hook<br />
9<br />
7<br />
5<br />
3<br />
Dial Tone is sent (PBR connected)<br />
Dial the first digit.<br />
Dial the second digit.<br />
Dial the third digit.<br />
When the PBR is not detected in the specified time,<br />
PBR is released.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 222 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-8-11 System Refresh Time Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign the System Refresh Time during idle periods.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
NON 4H 8H 12H 24H<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
1 1 : R E F R E S H 4 H<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK8 + AA to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
The system automatically refreshes itself during idle periods based on the time specified in this Memory Block.<br />
� Notes �<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
8<br />
Data No.<br />
11<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BM<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 223
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-8-12 VRS Message Recording Time<br />
Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the recording time and number of messages for<br />
each Voice Recording Service (VRS) channel.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
15s x16 30s x 8 60s x 4 120s x 2<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Title<br />
VRS<br />
Chan.<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
1 2 : V R S 1 1 5 s x 1 6<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK8 + AB to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press corresponding CO/PBX line key to change data option.<br />
Use the following to enter VRS Channel:<br />
�<br />
K~Hto enter numeric data<br />
4 Press G to write the data and advance to the next VRS Channel.<br />
Default Values<br />
5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each of the seven remaining VRS channels. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
� Notes �<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
8<br />
Data No.<br />
12<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AR<br />
All VRS Channels<br />
Recording Time = 15 seconds,<br />
16 messages<br />
Voice Recording Services Channel 1 has 240 seconds for message recording. The number of messages that<br />
can be recorded depends on message length. Divide 240 by the message length to obtain the number.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 224 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-8-13 VRS Message Function Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign the recorded voice prompt Delay Announcement/<br />
Automated Attendant Message to the Voice Recording Service (VRS) Message<br />
number. Refer to Memory Block 1-8-12 (VRS Message Recording Time Selection).<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Page 1<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
NON<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
V1<br />
(Voice Prompt)<br />
VRS<br />
Channel<br />
No.<br />
(1~8)<br />
Message<br />
No.<br />
(1~16)<br />
V2<br />
(Voice Prompt)<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
1 3 : V R S 1 / 0 1 = N O N | 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M1<br />
(Delay<br />
message)<br />
M2<br />
(Delay<br />
message)<br />
Not Used Not Used Not Used<br />
Page 2<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
D1<br />
D2<br />
D3<br />
D4<br />
D5<br />
D6<br />
D7<br />
D8<br />
(Day A A)<br />
Page 3<br />
(Day A A) (Day A A) (Day A A) (Day A A) (Day A A) (Day A A) (Day A A)<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
N1<br />
N2<br />
N3<br />
N4<br />
N5<br />
N6<br />
N7<br />
N8<br />
(Night A A)<br />
Page 4<br />
(Night A A) (Night A A) (Night A A) (Night A A) (Night A A) (Night A A) (Night A A)<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
W1<br />
W2<br />
W3<br />
W4<br />
W5<br />
W6<br />
W7<br />
W8<br />
(Weekend A A) (Weekend A A) (Weekend A A) (Weekend A A) (Weekend A A) (Weekend A A) (Weekend A A) (Weekend A A)<br />
Page<br />
No.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
8<br />
Data No.<br />
13<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AR<br />
The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 225
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK8 + AC to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press corresponding CO/PBX line key to change data option.<br />
Use to the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
K~Ito enter VRS Channel and message number<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Jto move cursor left<br />
Lto move cursor right<br />
C to go to the next page<br />
A to go back to the previous page<br />
Refer to individual features in the <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Features and Specifications <strong>Manual</strong>.<br />
Default Values<br />
All Channels of Block: No Message<br />
4 Press G to write the data and advance to the next message. After Message No. 16, the next VRS is displayed.<br />
5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each message for each VRS. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 226 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-8-15 Tone Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign each system tone to the flexible tables.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Page 1<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
A<br />
Page 2<br />
B C D E F G H<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
I J K L M<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Table<br />
No.<br />
(00~12)<br />
Tone<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
1 5 : ( 0 0 ) D T = A | 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK8 + AE to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data option.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
K~Ito enter Table No.<br />
C to alternate between pages<br />
4 Press G to write the data and advance to the next table.<br />
5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each remaining table. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
Page<br />
No.<br />
6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
8<br />
Data No.<br />
15<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BI<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 227
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Table<br />
Number<br />
Tone LCD Default<br />
00 ICM Dial Tone DT A<br />
01 Second Dial Tone 2DT B<br />
02 Special Dial Tone SPDT C<br />
03 Busy Tone BT D<br />
04 Reorder/Error Tone ROT E<br />
05 Howler Tone HWT F<br />
06 Service Set Tone SST G<br />
07 ICM Ringback Tone RBT1 I<br />
08 Tie/DID Ringback<br />
Tone<br />
RBT2 H<br />
09 Call Waiting Tone CWT J<br />
10 LCR Dial Tone SDTT K<br />
11 Tone Burst 1 TB1 G<br />
12 Tone Burst 2 TB2 K<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 228 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Tone Frequency Intermit Cycle<br />
A 350/440 Continuous<br />
B 350/440 120 IPM<br />
0.25 On, 0.25 Off<br />
C 440 240 IPM<br />
0.125 On, 0.125 Off<br />
D 480/620 60 IPM<br />
0.5 On, 0.5 Off<br />
E 480/620 120 IPM<br />
F 2400<br />
16<br />
Modulation<br />
Continuous<br />
G 440 Continuous<br />
H 440/480 2 sec On<br />
4 sec Off<br />
I 440/480 1 sec On<br />
2 sec Off<br />
J 440 60 IPM<br />
K 400 Continuous<br />
L 800 60 IPM<br />
M No Tone Continuous<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 229
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-8-16 Voice Prompt to Tone Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign the voice prompt to each tone. Voice prompt is<br />
provided only during the Internal Dial tone or Call Waiting tone.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
PR1 PR2<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Table<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK8 + AF to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change data option.<br />
Table No. 1: Dial tone<br />
�<br />
Table No. 2: Call Waiting tone<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Tone<br />
Name<br />
6 : 0 1 : D T = P R 1<br />
1 6 : 0 1 : D T = P R 1<br />
1<br />
I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
T<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
4 Press G to write the data and advance to Table 02.<br />
5 After entering Table 2 data, press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Refer to individual features in the <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Features and Specifications <strong>Manual</strong>.<br />
Default Values<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
8<br />
Data No.<br />
16<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AR<br />
Dial Tone: PR1<br />
Call Waiting Tone: PR2<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 230 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-8-17 PC <strong>Programming</strong> Password<br />
Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign system passwords that must be entered when<br />
connecting to the system using SAT PC <strong>Programming</strong>.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Class<br />
No.<br />
1,2<br />
1 7 : ( 1 ) =<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK8 + AG to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the following to enter Class 1 (Technician Mode) and password (8 digits max.).<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data<br />
H to clear data<br />
4 Press G to write the data and advance to Class 2 (End User Mode).<br />
Default Values<br />
� Notes �<br />
Class 1, 2 All Blank<br />
5 After entering Class 2 password, press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
6 Program next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
1. Password 1 (Class 1) is used for Technician SAT PC <strong>Programming</strong>.<br />
2. Password 2 (Class 2) is used for End User SAT PC <strong>Programming</strong>.<br />
3. Password 1 (Class 1) can be assigned only by telephone programming. It cannot be assigned or changed by<br />
Technician or End User SAT PC <strong>Programming</strong>.<br />
4. Password 2 (Class 2) can be assigned by telephone programming or Technician SAT PC <strong>Programming</strong>. It<br />
cannot be assigned or changed by End User SAT PC <strong>Programming</strong>.<br />
5. Password 2 (Class 2) cannot be assigned until Password 1 (Class1) is assigned in the Memory Block.<br />
6. The password for both classes can have up to five digits.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
8<br />
Data No.<br />
17<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+CSP<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 231
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-8-18 Site Name Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify a site name for PC <strong>Programming</strong> software to use to<br />
program the system.<br />
Display<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Title<br />
1 8 : S I T E =<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK8 + AH to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the Character Code Table in Appendix B Character Codes, Section 1 Character Assignment on page B-1 and enter up to<br />
eight characters for Setting Data.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
H to clear data at cursor<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
1. When programmed, this assignment creates a directory in the PC after download is performed.<br />
� Notes �<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
8<br />
Data No.<br />
18<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+CSN<br />
2. System Software allows the name to be entered using the dial pad instead of the ASCII Character Code Tables.<br />
Follow the procedure in Appendix B Character Codes, Section 1 Character Assignment on page B-1.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 232 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-8-25 ACD/UCD Group Agent Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the Agent Station Number and the Automatic Call<br />
Distribution/Uniform Call Distribution (ACD/UCD) Group Number where each agent is<br />
assigned.<br />
Display<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK8 + BE to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Setting data includes Group no. (1 ~ 4) and Station No. (4 digits max.) Use the dial pad<br />
to enter data.<br />
Agent station number is one of the following:<br />
2 digit (10 ~ 89)<br />
�<br />
3 digit (100 ~ 899)<br />
�<br />
4 digit (1000 ~ 8999)<br />
�<br />
4 Press G to write Group and Station No. and advance to next Agent number (1 ~ 32).<br />
5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each remaining Agent. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
6 Program next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Agent<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
(1~32)<br />
Group<br />
No.<br />
(1~4)<br />
2 5 : A G 0 1 / G P _ =<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Station<br />
No.<br />
4 Digits (max.)<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
1-1-46 Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-1-47 Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-1-48 Access Code (3-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-2-03 2-, 3- or 4-Digit Station Number Selection<br />
1-12-00 ACD/UCD Group Pilot Number Assignment<br />
UCD and ACD cannot be installed in the same system.<br />
Default Values<br />
� Notes �<br />
Not Specified<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
8<br />
Data No.<br />
25<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AA<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 233
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-8-26 Voice Mail Quick Transfer Master<br />
Hunt Number<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify a Voice Mail Master Hunt Number to operate Quick<br />
Transfer to Voice Mail. This Memory Block also enables the voice mail display in the<br />
LCD of a Multiline Terminal when a voice mail machine sets a message.<br />
R2500 or higher is required to assign a 5-, 6-, or 7-digit Master Hunt Number.<br />
Display (R1700 or lower)<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Display (R2000 or higher)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 6 : V M M A S T E R 0 0 0<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Title<br />
Title<br />
2 6 : V M M S T R 0 0 0<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK8 + BF to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use dial pad to enter agent station No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data<br />
Jto move cursor left<br />
Lto move cursor right<br />
Station<br />
No.<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Station number is one of the following:<br />
�<br />
2 digit (10 ~89)<br />
3 digit (100 ~ 899)<br />
4 digit (1000 ~ 8999)<br />
5 digit (10000 ~ 89999)<br />
6 digit (100000 ~ 899999)<br />
7 digit (1000000 ~8999999)<br />
Station<br />
No.<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
Default Values<br />
Not Specified<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
8<br />
Data No.<br />
26<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AV<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 234 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
5 Program next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-1-46 Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-1-47 Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-1-48 Access Code (3-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-2-03 2~7-Digit Station Number Selection<br />
1-2-24 Intercom Feature Access Code Assignment<br />
1-2-34 Expanded Station Number Assignment<br />
4-10 Station Number Assignment<br />
4-14 Intercom Master Hunt Number Selection<br />
4-15 Intercom Master Hunt Number Forward Assignment<br />
4-35 Voice Mail/SLT Selection<br />
The following procedure must be followed every time the Voice Mail<br />
ETU is to be inserted into the KSU.<br />
Installation Procedure for the Voice Mail ETU<br />
1. Verify that the battery is connected to CN4.<br />
2. Turn off the KSU system power.<br />
3. Wearing a grounding strap, place the Shutdown Switch on the voice mail ETU in RUN or, if equipped, place the MB<br />
Switch to ON.<br />
4. Install the voice mail ETU in the KSU.<br />
5. Turn the KSU power ON.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 235
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-8-27 Forced Account Code/Authorization<br />
Code Length Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the number of digits for the Forced Account Code/<br />
Authorization Code.<br />
Display<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK8 + BG to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use dial pad to enter number of digits.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
K~Ito enter digits<br />
Jto move cursor left<br />
Lto move cursor right<br />
Setting Data = 01 ~ 13 digits<br />
�<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
2 7 : F O R C E D 1 0 D G T<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
1-1-46~48 Access Code (1/2/3-Digit) Assignment<br />
Function 146 – Forced Account Code/Authorization Code<br />
Function 147 – Forced Account Code/Authorization Code Access<br />
1-8-07 Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection 1<br />
Page 2, LK 8 – Forced Account Code/Authorization Code <strong>Programming</strong><br />
1-8-08 Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2<br />
Page 5, LK 1– Forced Account Code/Authorization Code<br />
Page 6, LK 3 – Unverified for Forced Account Code/Authorization Code<br />
4-07 Code Restriction Class Assignment (Day Mode)<br />
4-08 Code Restriction Class Assignment (Night Mode)<br />
4-17 Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment<br />
Default Values<br />
10 Digits<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
8<br />
Data No.<br />
27<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BF<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 236 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong> (Continued)<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
4-64 Code Restriction Class (Without Authorization Code) Day Mode Assignment<br />
4-65 Code Restriction Class (Without Authorization Code) Night Mode Assignment<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 237
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-8-29 SCD (Simplified Call Distribution)<br />
Pilot Number Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the SCD Pilot number for each group. Any valid<br />
unused station number can be used.<br />
Display<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK8 + BI to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use dial pad to enter an extension number.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
K~Ito enter digits<br />
Jto move cursor left<br />
Lto move cursor right<br />
Setting Data = 2~4 digits<br />
�<br />
4 Press G to write the data and advance to next Group No. (1~4).<br />
5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each remaining Group No. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
6 Program next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Group<br />
No.<br />
2 9 : P I L O T 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
1-8-30 SCD Group Agent Assignment<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
Default Values<br />
Not Assigned<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
8<br />
Data No.<br />
29<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AA<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 238 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-8-30 SCD Group Agent Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign stations to one of four simplified call distribution<br />
groups. A total of 32 stations can be assigned.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK8 + CK to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use dial pad to enter Grp (1~4) and the Setting Data (station number) for each agent.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
K~Ito enter digits<br />
Jto move cursor left<br />
Lto move cursor right<br />
Setting Data = Maximum of 4 digits<br />
�<br />
4 Press G to write the data and select the next Agent No.<br />
5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each remaining Agent No. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
6 Program next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Agent<br />
1~32<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Group<br />
1~4<br />
3 0 : S G 0 1 1 =<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
1-8-29 SCD (Simplified Call Distribution) Pilot Number Assignment<br />
Default Values<br />
Not Assigned<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
8<br />
Data No.<br />
30<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AA<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 239
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-8-31 Hold Tone Source Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign an internal or external Music on Hold source.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
INT EXT<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK8 + CA to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the MOH source. Default Values<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
3 1 : H L D T S R C I N T<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-8-09 Music On Hold Pattern Selection<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
1-8-32 Hold Internal Tone Volume Selection<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 240 Memory Blocks<br />
INT<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
8<br />
Data No.<br />
31<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BCS
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-8-32 Hold Internal Tone Volume Selection<br />
General Description<br />
When the internal Music On Hold source is used, this Memory Block can be used to<br />
pad the music by -6 dB.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 1 LK 2 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
0dB -6dB<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK8 + CB to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the dB setting. Default ValuesDefault Values<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
3 2 : H L D T V O L 0 d B<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-8-31 Hold Tone Source Assignment<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 241<br />
0 dB<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
8<br />
Data No.<br />
32<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BCS
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-8-33 Master Clock Selection<br />
General Description<br />
When a DTI-U( ) ETU (T-1), PRT(1)-U( ) ETU, or BRT(4)-U( ) ETU is installed,<br />
clocking must be synchronized. When this Memory Block is set for Cabinet 0 (default),<br />
the system is set to be a Master Clock source. <strong>Programming</strong> this Memory Block<br />
defines the system to be a slave from its connected source.<br />
When the master clock selection is changed, press the Reset switch on the CPU to reset the<br />
�<br />
system.<br />
Display<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
3 3 : M S T R C L C K 0 :<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK8 + CC to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use dial pad to enter number of digits.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
K~Ito enter digits<br />
Jto move cursor left<br />
Lto move cursor right<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Example 1: (<strong>Elite</strong> 100 is Master Clock Source)<br />
MB 1-8-33<br />
Setting<br />
Title<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong><br />
(100)<br />
Cabinet 0<br />
Master<br />
Cabinet<br />
0~3<br />
DTI<br />
Cabinet 1<br />
Slot 1<br />
Slot<br />
1~8<br />
T1<br />
DTI<br />
Cabinet 1<br />
Slot 1<br />
Default Values<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
8<br />
Data No.<br />
33<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AD<br />
Cabinet 0 (Master System)<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong><br />
Cabinet 1<br />
Slot 1<br />
(Slave)<br />
DTI<br />
Cabinet 1<br />
Slot 4<br />
DTI<br />
Cabinet 1<br />
Slot 1<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 242 Memory Blocks<br />
(200)<br />
T1<br />
(300)<br />
Cabinet 1<br />
Slot 1<br />
(Slave)
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Example 2: (The PSTN is Master Clock Source)<br />
PSTN<br />
MB 1-8-33<br />
Setting<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
ISDN<br />
PRI<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong><br />
PRT<br />
Cabinet 1<br />
Slot 4<br />
DTI<br />
Cabinet 1<br />
Slot 1<br />
7-1 Card Interface Slot Assignment<br />
T1<br />
DTI<br />
Cabinet 1<br />
Slot 1<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong><br />
DTI<br />
Cabinet 1<br />
Slot 4<br />
DTI<br />
Cabinet 1<br />
Slot 1<br />
(100) (200) (300)<br />
Cabinet 1<br />
Slot 4<br />
(Slave)<br />
Cabinet 1<br />
Slot 1<br />
(Slave)<br />
1. When ISDN/T1 or ISDN/T1 and Wireless trunks are installed, confirm that Switch SW1 is set to the proper<br />
position on the CLKG-U( ) Unit (ISDN.PHS) and assign this Memory Block for proper Master Clock setting.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. When only Wireless is installed (No ISDN/T1), this Memory Block should be left at the default setting.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 243<br />
T1<br />
Cabinet 1<br />
Slot 1<br />
(Slave)
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-8-35 COM Port Baud Rate Setting<br />
Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the baud rates for individual COM ports.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 The shaded selection is the<br />
default. Baud Rates are in<br />
4.8 9.6 19.2 38.4<br />
Kbps.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK8 + CE to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to select the baud rate for each COM port. Default Values<br />
4 Press G to write the data, and advance to the next COM port.<br />
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each remaining COM port. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
6 Program next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-5-13 Printer Connected Selection<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
5 : B D R T 1 = 3 8 . 4<br />
3 5 : B D R T 1 = 3 8 . 4<br />
3<br />
I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
T<br />
COM 1 = PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
COM 1 = LCR<br />
COM 2 = Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)<br />
COM 3 = Automatic Call Distribution [Not used by <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Basic Port Package (48).]<br />
� Notes �<br />
COM 1 = 38.4<br />
COM 2 = 4.8<br />
COM 3 = 9.6<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
8<br />
Data No.<br />
35<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+CSS<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 244 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-8-36 COM Port Parity/Stop Bit Setting<br />
Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the Parity and Stop bit for the individual COM ports.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
NON/1 NON/2 EVEN/1 ODD/1<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK8 + CF to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to select the parity and stop bit setting. Default Values<br />
4 Press G to write the data, and advance to the next COM port.<br />
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each remaining COM port. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
6 Program next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-5-13 Printer Connected Selection<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
3 6 : P / S 1 = N O N / 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
COM 1 = PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
COM 1 = LCR<br />
COM 2 = Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)<br />
COM 3 = Automatic Call Distribution [Not used by <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Basic Port Package (48).]<br />
� Notes �<br />
COM 1 = Non/1<br />
COM 2 = Non/1<br />
COM 3 = Non/1<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
8<br />
Data No.<br />
36<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+CSS<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 245
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-8-37 General Purpose Relay Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not the General Purpose Relays on the<br />
ECR-U( ) ETU are used.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
NO YS<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK8 + CG to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to specify whether or not relay 0 is used. Default Values<br />
4 Press G to write the data and advance to relay 1.<br />
5 Press G to write the data for relay 1. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
6 Program next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
Relay<br />
No.0,1<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
3 7 : R E L A Y ( 0 ) = N O<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
1-6-05 Attendant Add-On Console Key Selection<br />
These General Purpose Relays are normally open relays.<br />
� Notes �<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 246 Memory Blocks<br />
NO<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
8<br />
Data No.<br />
37<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BP
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-8-38 Modem Number For Remote<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
A socket modem can be installed on the MIFM-U( ) ETU when it is installed in S1 or<br />
S2 of the B64-U20 KSU. Use this Memory Block to assign the extension number for<br />
the socket modem.<br />
Display<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK8 + CH to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use dial pad to enter number of digits.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
K~Ito enter digits<br />
Jto move cursor left<br />
Lto move cursor right<br />
Setting Data = maximum of 4 digits<br />
�<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
8 : M O D E M =<br />
3 8 : M O D E M =<br />
3<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
T<br />
7-1 Card Interface Slot Assignment<br />
Default Values<br />
Not assigned<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
8<br />
Data No.<br />
38<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+CSS<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 247
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-8-40 ACD Hunt Time<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign the time for hunting among the Automatic Call<br />
Distribution/Uniform Call Distribution (ACD/UCD) agents that do not answer an ACD/<br />
UCD call.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
10s 20s 30s 60s 120s 240s ∞<br />
(No Limit)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK8 + DK to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to assign the value. Default Values<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
4 0 : A C D T I M E R 1 0 S<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-8-25 ACD/UCD Group Agent Assignment<br />
1-12-00 ACD/UCD Group Pilot Number Assignment<br />
1-12-01 ACD/UCD Group Overflow Destination Assignment<br />
1-12-02 ACD/UCD Overflow Time Selection<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
10 seconds<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
8<br />
Data No.<br />
40<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AA<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 248 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-8-43 Enhanced 911 Trunk Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this feature to define an available loop-start trunk as a CAMA or an ISDN PRI<br />
trunk. When a user dials 911, the system seizes the E911 trunk and sends additional<br />
digits (CESID) to enable the PSAP center to recognize the callback telephone<br />
number. The E911 trunk must be connected to a COI(4)/(8)-U( ), COID(4)/(8)-U( ),<br />
COIB(4)-U( ), or COIB(8)-U( ) Loop Start port and assigned to the system. When the<br />
system is installed at a K-CCIS Remote Office, the Trunk Group or Route Advance<br />
Block that connects to the Main Office is assigned.<br />
System Software R2000 or higher is required to select a Trunk Group or Route<br />
Advance Block.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK8 The shaded<br />
CO/PBX<br />
No.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
TG/RAB<br />
No.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Title<br />
4 3 : 9 1 1 T R U N K<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK8 + DC to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press Line Key to select CO/PBX No. or TG/RAB No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data<br />
Jto move cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
H to clear data<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
Setting Data: Not Specified (default)<br />
�<br />
CO No. 01~64<br />
101~132 Trunk Group 01~32<br />
201~232 Route Advance Block 01~32<br />
System Software R1700 and lower only allows CO No. 01~64 to be entered.<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
8<br />
Data No.<br />
43<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AE<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 249
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-8-44 Enhanced 911 Alternate Route Assignment<br />
1-8-45 Enhanced 911 Alternate Route Assignment (Maintenance Busy)<br />
1-8-46 Enhanced 911 Dialing Digit Assignment<br />
1-15-19 Centralized 911 Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-20 Centralized 911 Originating Number Selection<br />
1-15-21 Centralized 911 Look Ahead Routing Allow/Deny Selection<br />
4-54 Enhanced 911 CESID to Station Table Assignment<br />
1. Only one CAMA or ISDN PRI trunk can be assigned per system.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. The E911 trunk can be connected to a COI(4)/(8)-U( ), COID(4)/(8)-U( ), COIB(4)-U( ), or COIB(8)-U( ) ETU.<br />
CAMA trunk support is provided on COIB(4)-U20 port 3 or COIB(8)-U10 ports 3 and 7 only. Other COI ETUs<br />
support CAMA trunks on all ports.<br />
3. Information provided to the E911 system is called Caller Emergency Service Identification (CESID) that can be a<br />
7- to 10-digit number. Caller ID can be used instead of CESID. The E911 Operator data base uses Caller ID or<br />
the CESID to provide a callback number and location for emergency response.<br />
4. To seize the E911 trunk:<br />
� Dial 911 after receiving internal dial tone.<br />
� Dial 911 after accessing an outside trunk with a line key.<br />
� Dial 911 after accessing an outside trunk with an access code.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 250 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-8-44 Enhanced 911 Alternate Route<br />
Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the trunk route or route advance block to be seized<br />
when the E911 trunk is busy. Normally, this Memory Block is left unassigned.<br />
Display<br />
Data No.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK8 + DD to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to enter data.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data<br />
Jto move cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
H to Clear Data.<br />
Setting Data: Not Specified No Alternate Route (default)<br />
�<br />
101~132 Trunk Group 01~32<br />
201~ 232 Route Advance Block 01~32<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
4 4 : 9 1 1 A L T R T<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-8-43 Enhanced 911 Trunk Assignment<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
1-8-45 Enhanced 911 Alternate Route Assignment (Maintenance Busy)<br />
1-8-46 Enhanced 911 Dialing Digit Assignment<br />
4-54 Enhanced 911 CESID to Station Table<br />
One trunk group or one route advance block per system can be specified.<br />
� Notes �<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
8<br />
Data No.<br />
44<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AE<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 251
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-8-45 Enhanced 911 Alternate Route<br />
Assignment (Maintenance Busy)<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the trunk route or route advance block to be seized<br />
when the E911 trunk is in maintenance busy or trouble out of service.<br />
Display<br />
Data No.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK8 + DE to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to enter data.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data<br />
Jto move cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
H to Clear Data.<br />
Setting Data: (Default: Trunk Group 01)<br />
�<br />
101~132 Trunk Group 01~32 (Default 101 for Trunk Group 01)<br />
201~ 232 Route Advance Block 01~32<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
4 5 : 9 1 1 M N T 1 0 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-8-43 Enhanced 911 Trunk Assignment<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
1-8-44 Enhanced 911 Alternate Route Assignment<br />
1-8-46 Enhanced 911 Dialing Digit Assignment<br />
4-54 Enhanced 911 CESID to Station Table<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
8<br />
Data No.<br />
45<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AE<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 252 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
� �<br />
1. When the E911 trunk is maintenance busy or trouble out of service, E911 calls are routed to the trunk group<br />
assigned by E911 Alternate Route Assignment.<br />
Notes<br />
2. One trunk group or one route advance block per system can be specified.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 253
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-8-46 Enhanced 911 Dialing Digit<br />
Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the number of digits to be sent when a call is<br />
originated by dialing 911.<br />
System Software R2000 or higher is required to assign 9911.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
1 11 911 9911<br />
default.<br />
Settings<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK8 + DF to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to assign the value.<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
4 6 : 9 1 1 D I A L 9 9 1 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-8-43 Enhanced 911 Trunk Assignment<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
1-8-44 Enhanced 911 Alternate Route Assignment<br />
1-8-45 Enhanced 911 Alternate Route Assignment (Maintenance Busy)<br />
1-15-19 Centralized 911 Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-20 Centralized 911 Originating Number Selection<br />
1-15-21 Centralized 911 Look Ahead Routing Allow/Deny Selection<br />
4-54 Enhanced 911 CESID to Station Table<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
8<br />
Data No.<br />
46<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AE<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 254 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-8-47 Call Arrival Key Voice Mail Message<br />
Notification Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign the Call Arrival Key that is used to send Voice Mail<br />
message notification to other systems.<br />
Display<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK8 +DG to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Enter Setting Data using the dial pad.<br />
Use the following:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
~ Ito enter numeric data<br />
2-Digit CAR: 10~89<br />
K<br />
3-Digit CAR: 100~899<br />
4-Digit CAR: 1000~8999<br />
H to clear all data when cursor is at setting position<br />
4 Press G to write the data. Memory Block 1-1-00 is displayed.<br />
5 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
4 7 : V M M S G C A R<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-1-46,47 Access Code (1-Digit, 2-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-2-03 2-, 3-, or 4-Digit Station number selection<br />
1-2-04 Call Arrival Key Block Assignment<br />
4-10 Station Number Assignment<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
Default Values<br />
Not Specified<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
8<br />
Data No.<br />
47<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
� + AV<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 255
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-8-48 Automatic Daylight Saving Time<br />
Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to allow (YS) or deny (NO) the system clock adjustment for<br />
Daylight Saving Time.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
YS NO<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK8 + DH to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the setting option.<br />
4 Press G to write the selected data and display Memory Block 1-8-00.<br />
5 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
4 8 : D A Y L I G H T Y S<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
1-1-27 Automatic Day/Night Mode Switching Time Assignment<br />
1-1-32 Automatic Day/Night Mode Switching by Day of Week Assignment<br />
When allow is set in this Memory Block, the system automatically sets the time ahead one hour on the first<br />
Sunday in April or sets the time back one hour on the last Sunday in October.<br />
� Notes �<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
8<br />
Data No.<br />
48<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BM<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 256 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-8-49 New AA-Info Yes/No Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not New AA-Info is allowed. New<br />
Application-to-Application (AA) Info is used with internal Voice Mail Systems<br />
[i.e.,CMS( )-U( ), FMS( )-U( ), or VMS( )-U( ) ETUs]. For external digital Voice Mail<br />
Systems and VP/CTI Systems, this Memory Block must be set to NO. Refer to Table<br />
2-1 (Voice Mail AA-Info Settings).<br />
R2000 or higher is required.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
NO YS<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Title<br />
4 9 : N E W A A I N F O Y S<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK8 + DI to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the setting option.<br />
4 Press G to write the selected data and display next Memory Block or Memory Block 1-8-00.<br />
5 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
8<br />
Data No.<br />
49<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AV<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 257
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Table 2-1 Voice Mail AA-Info Settings<br />
DOS Based Voice Mails<br />
Hardware Type Voice Mail Q Revision Correct AA Info Type<br />
<strong>Elite</strong>Mail U10/U20 FMS Q26031 or lower<br />
VMS Q30931 or lower<br />
<strong>Elite</strong>Mail U20/U30 ALL CMS<br />
FMS Q05631 or higher<br />
VMS Q00631 or higher<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 258 Memory Blocks<br />
OLD<br />
NEW<br />
CMS-U30 Q11131 or higher NEW<br />
FMS-U30 Q21131 or higher NEW<br />
VMS-U30 Q31131 or higher NEW<br />
VMP-U30/40 Q21631, Q50131, G51231 or<br />
higher<br />
Linux Based Voice Mails (<strong>Elite</strong>Mail CTI/LX Lite)<br />
NEW<br />
VMP-U40 ANY NEW<br />
OS/2 Based Voice Mails (<strong>Elite</strong>Mail CTI/VP)<br />
ANY ANY OLD
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
7-1 Card interface Slot Assignment<br />
7-2 <strong>Telephone</strong> Type Assignment<br />
1-1-46 Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment<br />
Functions 020, 025, 027, 030, 032~034, 140~145<br />
1-1-47 Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment<br />
Functions 020, 025, 027, 030, 032~034, 140~145<br />
1-1-48 Access Code (3-Digit) Assignment<br />
Functions 020, 025, 027, 030, 032~034, 140~145<br />
1-2-24 Intercom Feature Access Code Assignment<br />
Function 007<br />
1-8-08 Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2<br />
Page 1, LK1 and LK5; Page 3, LK3 ON/OFF, Page 6, LK2<br />
1-8-26 Voice Mail Quick Transfer Master Hunt Number<br />
4-10 Station Number Assignment<br />
4-14 Intercom Master Hunt Number Selection<br />
4-15 Intercom Master Hunt Number Forward Assignment<br />
4-17 Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment<br />
Depending on the installed Digital Voice Mail system, set this Memory Block as follows:<br />
� Notes �<br />
YS Internal CMS, FMS, VMS, or VMP ETUs<br />
NO Internal <strong>Elite</strong>Mail VP or CTI, External <strong>Electra</strong>Mail or <strong>Electra</strong>Mail CTI<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 259
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-8-51 Call Park Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign either 10 or 40 Call Park – System Locations.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
10 Park<br />
Locations<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
40 Park<br />
Locations<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK8 + EA to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the selected data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
5 1 : C A L L P A R K 1 0<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
1-6-05 Attendant Add-On Console Key Selection<br />
When a system is upgraded, 10 Park Locations are assigned as default.<br />
� Notes �<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
8<br />
Data No.<br />
51<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTS<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 260 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-9-00 DISA ID Code Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the Direct Inward System Access (DISA) ID Code<br />
number.<br />
Display<br />
Buffer<br />
ID<br />
No.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No. Title<br />
(01~C0)<br />
0 1 / 0 0 : C O D E = 0 0 0 0<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK9 to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to enter the data.<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
Setting Data:<br />
�<br />
2-digit DISA ID Code: 00~99 (00 no data)<br />
3-digit DISA ID Code: 000~999 (000 no data)<br />
4-digit DISA ID Code: 0000~9999 (0000 no data)<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data<br />
D to access the next assigned ID buffer number or cycle back to 1<br />
B + 1, 2, 3 = A, B, or C for Port Number<br />
ID Buffer Number:<br />
�<br />
01~99<br />
A0~A9<br />
B0~B9<br />
C0<br />
4 Press G to write the data. Memory Block 1-9-02 is displayed.<br />
Default Values<br />
5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each remaining sequential ID Buffer No. displayed after each password choice is made in Memory<br />
Block 1-9-02.<br />
1. Assign 000 (No Data) for stations that are not installed or stations that are denied DISA access.<br />
� Notes �<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
9<br />
Data No.<br />
00<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BD<br />
If DISA ID Code is assigned as 2-digit:<br />
ID Buffer Number 01~10 = Code 10<br />
ID Buffer Number 11~20 = Code 11<br />
Thru<br />
ID Buffer Number B1~C0 = Code 21<br />
If DISA ID Code is assigned as 3-digit:<br />
ID Buffer Number 01~C0 = Code 100~219<br />
If DISA ID Code is assigned as 4-digit:<br />
ID Buffer Number 01~C0 = Code 1000<br />
and in 10s increments to 2190<br />
2. This Memory Block cycles through ID Buffer Nos. alternating with Memory Block 1-9-02 password specification<br />
for each Buffer No.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 261
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-9-02 DISA Password Effect/Invalid<br />
Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not a Direct Inward System Access<br />
(DISA) Password is required. When NO is assigned, the calling party can use the<br />
DISA feature without a DISA Password.<br />
This Memory Block is automatically displayed after data is written for each ID Buffer<br />
No. (01~CO for <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> 192 or 01~48 for <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> 48) in Memory Block<br />
1-9-00. After password selection is entered, the next sequential ID Buffer NO. is<br />
displayed on Memory Block 1-9-00. This cycle is repeated until all DISA ID codes are<br />
assigned, and then cycles back to ID Buffer No. 1. <strong>Programming</strong> does not<br />
automatically cycle to Memory Block 1-10-00.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Buffer<br />
ID<br />
No.<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
NO YS<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
(01~CO)<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK9 + JB to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
Setting Data:<br />
NO (LK1) = DISA Password is not required.<br />
YS (LK2) = DISA Password is required. Assign with MB 1-1-46~48 [Access Code (1-,2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment].<br />
4 Press G to write the data and return to the next Memory Block 1-9-00.<br />
5 After last DISA ID Password decision is made, press G to write the data and return to Buffer No. 01 on Memory Block 1-9-00.<br />
6 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
0 1 / 0 2 : P A S W O R D = Y S<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
Refer to individual features in the <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Features and Specifications <strong>Manual</strong>.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
9<br />
Data No.<br />
02<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BD<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 262 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-10-00 Call by Call Type of Network ID<br />
Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to send the Type of Number ID (TNI) for each Route Advance<br />
Block (RAB). This setting data is sent in the TNI field of the NSF-IE (Network Specified<br />
Facility-Information Element) when making outgoing calls.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
RAB<br />
01~32 Title<br />
No.<br />
0 1 / 0 0 : T N I = 2<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK10 to access the Memory Block. Default Values<br />
3 Enter data using the dial pad.<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
JandLto move the cursor<br />
K~Ito enter data<br />
D to select next RAB No.<br />
Setting Data:<br />
�<br />
0, 1 Reserved (Not Used)<br />
2 National Network Identification<br />
3~7 Reserved (Not Used)<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program Memory Blocks 1-10-01~09. RAB 2 for this Memory Block is displayed.<br />
All RABS 2<br />
6 Repeat steps 3, 4, and 5 for all RABs. After Memory Block 1-10-09 is programmed for RAB 32, Memory Block 1-10-20 is<br />
displayed.<br />
7 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
10<br />
Data No.<br />
00<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AY<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 263
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
3-03 Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment<br />
1-1-30 Route Advance Block Assignment<br />
1-1-46, 47, 48 Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-10-01 Call by Call ID Plan Assignment<br />
1-10-02 Call by Call Type of Number Assignment<br />
1-10-03 Call by Call Numbering Plan ID Assignment<br />
1-10-04 Call by Call Network ID Assignment<br />
1-10-05 Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Service)<br />
1-10-06 Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Feature)<br />
1-10-07 Call by Call Service Parameter Assignment<br />
1-10-08 Call by Call Max Digit Assignment<br />
1-10-09 Call by Call Simulated Facility Group Assignment<br />
1-10-20 Call by Call Outgoing SFG Assignment<br />
1-10-21 Call by Call Outgoing/ Incoming SFG Assignment<br />
1-10-22 Call by Call Incoming Type Selection<br />
1-13-03 Call by Call Service Selection<br />
4-12 Line Key Selection for <strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
Call by Call Type of Network ID Assignment (Memory Block 1-10-00) and Call by Call ID Plan Assignment (Memory<br />
Block 1-10-01) are sent to the network only when Network ID Assignment is made using Memory Block 1-10-04 (Call<br />
by Call Network ID Assignment).<br />
� Notes �<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 264 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-10-01 Call by Call ID Plan Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to send the Network ID Plan (NIP) for each Route Advance<br />
Block (RAB). This setting data is sent in the NIP field of the NSF-IE (Network Specified<br />
Facility-Information Element) when making outgoing calls.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
RAB<br />
01~32<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
0 1 / 0 1 : N I P = 0 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK10 + JA to access the Memory Block. Default Values<br />
3 Enter data using the dial pad.Use the following to enter data:<br />
JandLto move the cursor<br />
K~Ito enter data<br />
D to select next RAB No.<br />
Setting Data:<br />
�<br />
00 Reserved (Not Used)<br />
01 Interexchange Carrier Code<br />
02~15 Reserved (Not Used)<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
All RABs 01<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
10<br />
Data No.<br />
01<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AY<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 265
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
3-03 Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment<br />
1-1-30 Route Advance Block Assignment<br />
1-1-46, 47, 48 Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-10-00 Call by Call Type of Network ID Assignment<br />
1-10-02 Call by Call Type of Number Assignment<br />
1-10-03 Call by Call Numbering Plan ID Assignment<br />
1-10-04 Call by Call Network ID Assignment<br />
1-10-05 Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Service)<br />
1-10-06 Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Feature)<br />
1-10-07 Call by Call Service Parameter Assignment<br />
1-10-08 Call by Call Max Digit Assignment<br />
1-10-09 Call by Call Simulated Facility Group Assignment<br />
1-10-20 Call by Call Outgoing SFG Assignment<br />
1-10-21 Call by Call Outgoing/ Incoming SFG Assignment<br />
1-10-22 Call by Call Incoming Type Selection<br />
1-13-03 Call by Call Service Selection<br />
4-12 Line Key Selection for <strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
Call by Call Type of Network ID Assignment (Memory Block 1-10-00) and ID Plan Assignment (Memory Block<br />
1-10-01) are sent to the network only when Network ID Assignment is made using Memory Block 1-10-04 (Call<br />
by Call Network ID Assignment).<br />
� Notes �<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 266 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-10-02 Call by Call Type of Number<br />
Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to send the Type of Number (TN) for each Route Advance<br />
Block (RAB). This setting data is sent in the TN field of the CPN-IE (Called Party<br />
Number-Information Element) when making outgoing calls.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
RAB<br />
01~32 Title<br />
No.<br />
0 1 / 0 2 : T N = 0<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK10 + JB to access the Memory Block. Default Values<br />
3 Enter data using the dial pad.<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
JandLto move the cursor<br />
K~Ito enter data<br />
D to select next RAB No.<br />
Setting Data:<br />
�<br />
0 Unknown<br />
1 International Number<br />
2 National<br />
3 Network Specific Number<br />
4 Subscriber (Local number)<br />
5~7 Not Used<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
All RABs 0<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
10<br />
Data No.<br />
02<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AY<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 267
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
3-03 Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment<br />
1-1-30 Route Advance Block Assignment<br />
1-1-46, 47, 48 Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-10-00 Call by Call Type of Network ID Assignment<br />
1-10-01 Call by Call ID Plan Assignment<br />
1-10-03 Call by Call Numbering Plan ID Assignment<br />
1-10-04 Call by Call Network ID Assignment<br />
1-10-05 Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Service)<br />
1-10-06 Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Feature)<br />
1-10-07 Call by Call Service Parameter Assignment<br />
1-10-08 Call by Call Max Digit Assignment<br />
1-10-09 Call by Call Simulated Facility Group Assignment<br />
1-10-20 Call by Call Outgoing SFG Assignment<br />
1-10-21 Call by Call Outgoing/ Incoming SFG Assignment<br />
1-10-22 Call by Call Incoming Type Selection<br />
1-13-03 Call by Call Service Selection<br />
4-12 Line Key Selection for <strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
Call by Call Type of Network ID Assignment (Memory Block 1-10-00) and ID Plan Assignment (Memory Block<br />
1-10-01) are sent to the network only when Network ID Assignment is made using Memory Block 1-10-04 (Call by<br />
Call Network ID Assignment).<br />
� Notes �<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 268 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-10-03 Call by Call Numbering Plan ID<br />
Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to send the Numbering Plan Identification (NPI) for each Route<br />
Advance Block (RAB). This setting data is sent in the NPI field of the CPN-IE (Called<br />
Party Number-Information Element) when making outgoing calls.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
RAB<br />
01~32 Title<br />
No.<br />
0 1 / 0 3 : N P I = 0 0<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK10 + JC to access the Memory Block. Default Values<br />
3 Enter data using the dial pad.<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
JandLto move the cursor<br />
K~Ito enter data<br />
D to select next RAB No.<br />
Setting Data:<br />
�<br />
00 Unknown<br />
01 ISDN Number Plan<br />
02 Reserved (Not Used)<br />
03 Data Numbering Plan (Future)<br />
04~08 Not Used<br />
09 Private Numbering Plan<br />
10~15 Not Used<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
All RABs 00<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
10<br />
Data No.<br />
03<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AY<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 269
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
3-03 Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment<br />
1-1-30 Route Advance Block Assignment<br />
1-1-46, 47, 48 Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-10-00 Call by Call Type of Network ID Assignment<br />
1-10-01 Call by Call ID Plan Assignment<br />
1-10-02 Call by Call Type of Number Assignment<br />
1-10-04 Call by Call Network ID Assignment<br />
1-10-05 Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Service)<br />
1-10-06 Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Feature)<br />
1-10-07 Call by Call Service Parameter Assignment<br />
1-10-08 Call by Call Max Digit Assignment<br />
1-10-09 Call by Call Simulated Facility Group Assignment<br />
1-10-20 Call by Call Outgoing SFG Assignment<br />
1-10-21 Call by Call Outgoing/ Incoming SFG Assignment<br />
1-10-22 Call by Call Incoming Type Selection<br />
1-13-03 Call by Call Service Selection<br />
4-12 Line Key Selection for <strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
Call by Call Type of Network ID Assignment (Memory Block 1-10-00) and ID Plan Assignment (Memory Block<br />
1-10-01) are sent to the network only when Network ID Assignment is made using Memory Block 1-10-04 (Call<br />
by Call Network ID Assignment).<br />
� Notes �<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 270 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-10-04 Call by Call Network ID Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to send the Network Identification (NID) for each Route<br />
Advance Block (RAB). This setting data is sent in the NID field of the CIC-IE (Carrier<br />
Identification Code-Information Element) when making outgoing calls.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK10 + JD to access the Memory Block. Default Values<br />
3 Enter three or four digit data using the dial pad.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
JandLto move the cursor<br />
K~Ito enter data<br />
D to select next RAB No.<br />
H to clear Setting Data<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Data<br />
RAB<br />
01~32 Title<br />
No.<br />
0 1 / 0 4 : N I D =<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
3-03 Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment<br />
1-1-30 Route Advance Block Assignment<br />
1-1-46, 47, 48 Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-10-00 Call by Call Type of Network ID Assignment<br />
1-10-01 Call by Call ID Plan Assignment<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
1-10-02 Call by Call Type of Number Assignment<br />
1-10-03 Call by Call Numbering Plan ID Assignment<br />
1-10-05 Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Service)<br />
1-10-06 Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Feature)<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
10<br />
Data No.<br />
04<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AY<br />
All RABs Unspecified<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 271
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-10-07 Call by Call Service Parameter Assignment<br />
1-10-08 Call by Call Max Digit Assignment<br />
1-10-09 Call by Call Simulated Facility Group Assignment<br />
1-10-20 Call by Call Outgoing SFG Assignment<br />
1-10-21 Call by Call Outgoing/ Incoming SFG Assignment<br />
1-10-22 Call by Call Incoming Type Selection<br />
1-13-03 Call by Call Service Selection<br />
4-12 Line Key Selection for <strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
1. Call by Call Type of Network ID Assignment (Memory Block 1-10-00) and ID Plan Assignment (Memory Block<br />
1-10-01) are sent to the network only when Network ID Assignment is made using Memory Block 1-10-04 (Call<br />
by Call Network ID Assignment).<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. A three- or four-digit code is used to specify the setting data.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 272 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-10-05 Call by Call Facility Coding Value<br />
Assignment (Service)<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the Facility Coding Value (Service) for each Route<br />
Advance Block (RAB). This setting data is sent in the FCV-S field of the NSF-IE<br />
(Network Specific Facility Code-Information Element) when making outgoing calls.<br />
Display<br />
Data<br />
RAB<br />
01~32 Title<br />
No.<br />
0 1 / 0 5 : F C V – S = 0 0<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
JE<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK10 + to access the Memory Block. Default Values<br />
3 Enter three or four digit data using the dial pad.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
J<br />
�<br />
andLto move the cursor<br />
K~Ito enter data<br />
D to select next RAB No.<br />
Setting Data:<br />
�<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
PRT ETU SW1<br />
Setting Setting Data Description<br />
5ESS (Lucent)<br />
and<br />
4ESS (AT&T)<br />
NI-2<br />
(Nortel)<br />
DMS100<br />
(Nortel)<br />
00 Non-CBC Route Advance Block (None)<br />
01 SDN (Software Defined Network)<br />
02 MEGACOM800<br />
03 MEGACOM<br />
06 ACCUNET (Future)<br />
08 International 800<br />
16 AT&T MultiQuest (900 Service)<br />
17 INWATS<br />
18 OUTWATS<br />
19 Foreign Exchange (FX)<br />
20 Tie Trunk (TIE)<br />
01 Private<br />
02 INWATS<br />
03 OUTWATS<br />
04 Foreign Exchange (FX)<br />
05 Tie Trunk (TIE)<br />
All RABs 00 (None)<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
10<br />
Data No.<br />
05<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AY<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 273
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
3-03 Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment<br />
1-1-30 Route Advance Block Assignment<br />
1-1-46, 47, 48 Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-10-00 Call by Call Type of Network ID Assignment<br />
1-10-01 Call by Call ID Plan Assignment<br />
1-10-02 Call by Call Type of Number Assignment<br />
1-10-03 Call by Call Numbering Plan ID Assignment<br />
1-10-04 Call by Call Network ID Assignment<br />
1-10-06 Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Feature)<br />
1-10-07 Call by Call Service Parameter Assignment<br />
1-10-08 Call by Call Max Digit Assignment<br />
1-10-09 Call by Call Simulated Facility Group Assignment<br />
1-10-20 Call by Call Outgoing SFG Assignment<br />
1-10-21 Call by Call Outgoing/ Incoming SFG Assignment<br />
1-10-22 Call by Call Incoming Type Selection<br />
1-13-03 Call by Call Service Selection<br />
4-12 Line Key Selection for <strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
SW1 is a 4-position DIP switch on the PRT(1)-U( ) ETU that is used to select the desired application.<br />
� Notes �<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 274 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-10-06 Call by Call Facility Coding Value<br />
Assignment (Feature)<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the Facility Coding Value (Feature) for each Route<br />
Advance Block (RAB). This setting data is sent in the FCV-F field of the NSF-IE<br />
(Network Specific Facility Code-Information Element) when making outgoing calls.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
Rab<br />
01~32 Title<br />
No.<br />
0 1 / 0 6 : F C V – F = 0 0<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK10 +JF to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Enter three or four digit data using the dial pad.<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
�<br />
�<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
JandLto move the cursor<br />
K~Ito enter data<br />
D to select next RAB No.<br />
Setting Data:<br />
PRT ETU SW1<br />
Setting Setting Data Description<br />
5ESS (AT&T)<br />
00 Non-CBC Route Advance Block (None)<br />
01~04 Reserved (Not Used)<br />
05 Operator (Local Exchange)<br />
06 Operator (Default-Common Carrier)<br />
07~31 Reserved (Not Used)<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Default Values<br />
All RABs 00<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
10<br />
Data No.<br />
06<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AY<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 275
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
3-03 Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment<br />
1-1-30 Route Advance Block Assignment<br />
1-1-46, 47, 48 Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-10-00 Call by Call Type of Network ID Assignment<br />
1-10-01 Call by Call ID Plan Assignment<br />
1-10-02 Call by Call Type of Number Assignment<br />
1-10-03 Call by Call Numbering Plan ID Assignment<br />
1-10-04 Call by Call Network ID Assignment<br />
1-10-05 Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Service)<br />
1-10-07 Call by Call Service Parameter Assignment<br />
1-10-08 Call by Call Max Digit Assignment<br />
1-10-09 Call by Call Simulated Facility Group Assignment<br />
1-10-20 Call by Call Outgoing SFG Assignment<br />
1-10-21 Call by Call Outgoing/ Incoming SFG Assignment<br />
1-10-22 Call by Call Incoming Type Selection<br />
1-13-03 Call by Call Service Selection<br />
4-12 Line Key Selection for <strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
SW1 is a 4-position DIP switch on the PRT(1)-U( ) ETU that is used to select the desired application.<br />
� Notes �<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 276 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-10-07 Call by Call Service Parameter<br />
Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the Service Parameters for each Route Advance<br />
Block (RAB). This setting data is sent to the Service Parameters in the NSF-IE<br />
(Network Specific Facility Code-Information Element) when making outgoing calls.<br />
Service Parameter Assignment is an Identification Number that is assigned when<br />
subscribing with the carrier for the different services.<br />
Display<br />
RAB<br />
01~32<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
1~5<br />
Setting<br />
1 Data<br />
0 1 / 0 7 : S P 1 = 0 – 0 0 0<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK10 + JG to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Enter 1~5 digits for Setting Data using the dial pad.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
JandLto move the cursor<br />
K~Ito enter data<br />
D to select next RAB No.<br />
Setting<br />
2 Data<br />
Setting Data No. 1 = 0 or 1 for each entry.<br />
�<br />
Setting Data No. 2 = Three-digit code 000~127 for each entry.<br />
�<br />
4 Press G to write the data. Digit 2 is displayed.<br />
Default Values<br />
All RABs 0~000<br />
5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each remaining digit for RAB 1. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
10<br />
Data No.<br />
07<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AY<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 277
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
3-03 Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment<br />
1-1-30 Route Advance Block Assignment<br />
1-1-46, 47, 48 Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-10-00 Call by Call Type of Network ID Assignment<br />
1-10-01 Call by Call ID Plan Assignment<br />
1-10-02 Call by Call Type of Number Assignment<br />
1-10-03 Call by Call Numbering Plan ID Assignment<br />
1-10-04 Call by Call Network ID Assignment<br />
1-10-05 Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Service)<br />
1-10-06 Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Feature)<br />
1-10-08 Call by Call Max Digit Assignment<br />
1-10-09 Call by Call Simulated Facility Group Assignment<br />
1-10-20 Call by Call Outgoing SFG Assignment<br />
1-10-21 Call by Call Outgoing/ Incoming SFG Assignment<br />
1-10-22 Call by Call Incoming Type Selection<br />
1-13-03 Call by Call Service Selection<br />
4-12 Line Key Selection for <strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
The Service Parameter is provided by the ISDN Service Provider.<br />
� Notes �<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 278 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-10-08 Call by Call Max Digit Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the maximum digits dialed for each Route Advance<br />
Block (RAB). When the maximum digits are dialed, the PRT(1)-U( ) ETU sends<br />
SETUP information to the ISDN Provider (Network).<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
RAB<br />
01~32<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK10 +JH to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Enter data using the dial pad.<br />
�<br />
�<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
JandLto move the cursor<br />
K~Ito enter data<br />
D to select next RAB No.<br />
Setting Data = 00 (No Limit)<br />
= 01~24 digits<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
0 1 / 0 8 : M D G T = 0 0<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
3-03 Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment<br />
1-1-30 Route Advance Block Assignment<br />
1-1-46, 47, 48 Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-10-00 Call by Call Type of Network ID Assignment<br />
1-10-01 Call by Call ID Plan Assignment<br />
1-10-02 Call by Call Type of Number Assignment<br />
1-10-03 Call by Call Numbering Plan ID Assignment<br />
1-10-04 Call by Call Network ID Assignment<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
1-10-05 Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Service)<br />
Default Values<br />
All RABs 00 (No Limit)<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
10<br />
Data No.<br />
08<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AY<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 279
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-10-06 Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Feature)<br />
1-10-07 Call by Call Service Parameter Assignment<br />
1-10-09 Call by Call Simulated Facility Group Assignment<br />
1-10-20 Call by Call Outgoing SFG Assignment<br />
1-10-21 Call by Call Outgoing/ Incoming SFG Assignment<br />
1-10-22 Call by Call Incoming Type Selection<br />
1-13-03 Call by Call Service Selection<br />
4-12 Line Key Selection for <strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 280 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-10-09 Call by Call Simulated Facility Group<br />
Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the Simulated Facility Group (SFG) for each Route<br />
Advance Block (RAB).<br />
Display<br />
RAB<br />
01~32<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK10 + JI to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Enter data using the dial pad.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
JandLto move the cursor<br />
K~Ito enter data<br />
D to select next RAB No.<br />
� Setting Data = 00 (Not Specified)<br />
= 01~16<br />
Default Values<br />
All RABs 00<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next RAB for Memory Block 1-10-00 is displayed. After data for RAB 32 is entered, SFG 1 for<br />
Memory Block 1-10-20 is displayed.<br />
5 Program Memory Block 1-10-20 or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
0 1 / 0 9 : S F G = 0 0<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
3-03 Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment<br />
1-1-30 Route Advance Block Assignment<br />
1-1-46, 47, 48 Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-10-00 Call by Call Type of Network ID Assignment<br />
1-10-01 Call by Call ID Plan Assignment<br />
1-10-02 Call by Call Type of Number Assignment<br />
1-10-03 Call by Call Numbering Plan ID Assignment<br />
1-10-04 Call by Call Network ID Assignment<br />
Data<br />
Setting<br />
00~16<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
10<br />
Data No.<br />
09<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AY<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 281
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-10-05 Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Service)<br />
1-10-06 Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Feature)<br />
1-10-07 Call by Call Service Parameter Assignment<br />
1-10-08 Call by Call Max Digit Assignment<br />
1-10-20 Call by Call Outgoing SFG Assignment<br />
1-10-21 Call by Call Outgoing/Incoming SFG Assignment<br />
1-10-22 Call by Call Incoming Type Selection<br />
1-13-03 Call by Call Service Selection<br />
4-12 Line Key Selection for <strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
This Memory Block specifies which RAB is linked to an SFG.<br />
� Notes �<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 282 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-10-20 Call by Call Outgoing SFG<br />
Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the outgoing call service assignment for the<br />
Simulated Facility Group (SFG).<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK10 +JJBKto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Enter data using the dial pad.<br />
�<br />
�<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
JandLto move the cursor<br />
K~Ito enter data<br />
D to select next SFG No.<br />
Setting Data = 01~64<br />
= 99 (Not Specified)<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program Memory Blocks 1-10-21 and 1-10-22. The next SFG is displayed.<br />
Default Values<br />
All SFGs 99<br />
6 Repeat Steps 3, 4, and 5 for each SFG. After SFG 16 data is programmed, RAB 1 of Memory Block 1-10-00 is displayed.<br />
7 Program the cycle again or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Data<br />
SFG<br />
01~16 Title<br />
No.<br />
0 1 / 2 0 : O G = 9 9<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
3-03 Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment<br />
1-1-30 Route Advance Block Assignment<br />
1-1-46, 47, 48 Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-10-00 Call by Call Type of Network ID Assignment<br />
1-10-01 Call by Call ID Plan Assignment<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
1-10-02 Call by Call Type of Number Assignment<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
10<br />
Data No.<br />
20<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AY<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 283
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-10-03 Call by Call Numbering Plan ID Assignment<br />
1-10-04 Call by Call Network ID Assignment<br />
1-10-05 Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Service)<br />
1-10-06 Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Feature)<br />
1-10-07 Call by Call Service Parameter Assignment<br />
1-10-08 Call by Call Max Digit Assignment<br />
1-10-09 Call by Call Simulated Facility Group Assignment<br />
1-10-21 Call by Call Outgoing/ Incoming SFG Assignment<br />
1-10-22 Call by Call Incoming Type Selection<br />
1-13-03 Call by Call Service Selection<br />
4-12 Line Key Selection for <strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 284 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-10-21 Call by Call Outgoing/Incoming SFG<br />
Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the outgoing/incoming call service assignment for<br />
the Simulated Facility Group (SFG).<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
SFG<br />
01~16 Title<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK10 + JJBA to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Enter three or four digit data using the dial pad.<br />
�<br />
�<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
JandLto move the cursor<br />
K~Ito enter data<br />
D to select next SFG No.<br />
Setting Data = 01~64<br />
= 99 (Not Specified)<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
0 1 / 2 1 : O G I C = 9 9<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
3-03 Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment<br />
1-1-30 Route Advance Block Assignment<br />
1-1-46, 47, 48 Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-10-00 Call by Call Type of Network ID Assignment<br />
1-10-01 Call by Call ID Plan Assignment<br />
1-10-02 Call by Call Type of Number Assignment<br />
1-10-03 Call by Call Numbering Plan ID Assignment<br />
1-10-04 Call by Call Network ID Assignment<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
Default Values<br />
All SFGs 99<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
10<br />
Data No.<br />
21<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AY<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 285
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-10-05 Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Service)<br />
1-10-06 Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Feature)<br />
1-10-07 Call by Call Service Parameter Assignment<br />
1-10-08 Call by Call Max Digit Assignment<br />
1-10-09 Call by Call Simulated Facility Group Assignment<br />
1-10-20 Call by Call Outgoing SFG Assignment<br />
1-10-22 Call by Call Incoming Type Selection<br />
1-13-03 Call by Call Service Selection<br />
4-12 Line Key Selection for <strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 286 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-10-22 Call by Call Incoming Type Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the type of trunk for each Simulated Facility Group<br />
(SFG).<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
CO DID<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK10 + JJBBto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
JandLto move the cursor<br />
D to select next RAB No.<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next SFG for Memory Block 1-10-20 is displayed. The SFG Memory Block 1-10-20~22<br />
cycle is repeated until the data for SFG 16 is entered. RAB 1 is displayed for Memory Block 1-10-00.<br />
5 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Data<br />
SFG<br />
01~16 Title<br />
No.<br />
0 1 / 2 2 : I N C O M D I D<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
3-03 Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment<br />
1-1-30 Route Advance Block Assignment<br />
1-1-46~48 Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-10-00 Call by Call Type of Network ID Assignment<br />
1-10-01 Call by Call ID Plan Assignment<br />
1-10-02 Call by Call Type of Number Assignment<br />
1-10-03 Call by Call Numbering Plan ID Assignment<br />
1-10-04 Call by Call Network ID Assignment<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
10<br />
Data No.<br />
22<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AY<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 287
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-10-04 Call by Call Network ID Assignment<br />
1-10-05 Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Service)<br />
1-10-06 Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Feature)<br />
1-10-07 Call by Call Service Parameter Assignment<br />
1-10-08 Call by Call Max Digit Assignment<br />
1-10-09 Call by Call Simulated Facility Group Assignment<br />
1-10-20 Call by Call Outgoing SFG Assignment<br />
1-10-21 Call by Call Outgoing/Incoming SFG Assignment<br />
1-13-03 Call by Call Service Selection<br />
Refer to individual features in the <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Features and Specifications <strong>Manual</strong> for correct routing of<br />
calls for Direct Inward Dialing.<br />
� Notes �<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 288 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-11-00 T1 Signal Format Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the signal format of the T1 trunk connected to the<br />
system. The signal format used (12- or 24-Multiframe) depends on the channel service<br />
unit/demarcation (CSU/D mark) equipment being used.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
12<br />
(SF)<br />
24<br />
(ESF)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
DTI No.<br />
(01~08) Title<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK11 to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
Setting Data:<br />
�<br />
SF = Superframe Format (12-Multiframe)<br />
ESF = Extended Superframe Format (24-Multiframe)<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
1 / 0 0 : F R A M E = 2 4<br />
0 1 / 0 0 : F R A M E = 2 4<br />
0<br />
I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
T<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
7-1 Card Interface Slot Assignment<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
The DTI-U( ) ETU must be assigned in the system to set this Memory Block.<br />
� Notes �<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
11<br />
Data No.<br />
00<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AD<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 289
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-11-01 Clear Channel Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the clear channel selection. when the Zero Byte<br />
Time channel is available, the CLKG-U( ) Unit cannot extract a clock signal from the<br />
T1 trunk. The T1 trunk modifies the Zero Byte Time channel to extract a clock signal<br />
for the CLKG-U( ) Unit.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
ZCS B8ZS<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK11 + KA to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Data<br />
DTI No.<br />
(01~08) Title<br />
No.<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
7-1 Card Interface Slot Assignment<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
0 1 / 0 1 : O B Y T E = Z C S<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
The DTI-U( ) ETU must be assigned in the system to set this Memory Block.<br />
� Notes �<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
11<br />
Data No.<br />
01<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AD<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 290 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-11-02 Line Length Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the distance, in feet, between the channel service<br />
unit/demarcation (CSU/D mark) and the DTI-U( ) ETU. This specifies the equalization<br />
values of the detect signal in the DTI-U( ) ETU.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
1<br />
(0 - 131)<br />
2<br />
(132 - 262)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
3<br />
(263 - 393)<br />
4<br />
(394 - 524<br />
5<br />
(525 - 655)<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK11 + KB to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
Line Key<br />
Data<br />
DTI No.<br />
(01~08) Title<br />
No.<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
0 1 / 0 2 : L I N E = 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
LCD<br />
Indication<br />
Description<br />
LK 1 1 0~131 feet<br />
LK 2 2 132~262 feet<br />
LK 3 3 263~393 feet<br />
LK 4 4 394~524 feet<br />
LK 5 5 525~655 feet<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
7-1 Card Interface Slot Assignment<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
The DTI-U( ) ETU must be assigned in the system to set this Memory Block.<br />
� Notes �<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
11<br />
Data No.<br />
02<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AD<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 291
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-11-03 IP K-CCIS Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign the IAD(8)-U( ) ETU used for K-CCIS over IP.<br />
System Software R1500~R1700 or R2500 is required.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
NO YS<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
DTI No.<br />
(01~08) Title<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK11 + KC to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
1 / 0 0 : F R A M E = 2 4<br />
0 1 / 0 3 : C C I S o I P N O<br />
0<br />
I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
T<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
7-1 Card Interface Slot Assignment<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
1-15-05 Destination Point Code Transfer Assignment<br />
1-15-06 Originating Office Code Number Assignment<br />
1-15-07 K-CCIS Message Response Timeout Assignment<br />
1-15-08 Link Reconnect Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-09 K-CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Assignment<br />
1-15-11 Centralized Billing Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-12 Centralized Billing - Point Code of Center Office Assignment<br />
1-15-13 Centralized Day/Night Switching for Remote Office Assignment<br />
1-15-14 Centralized Day/Night Switching for Main Office Assignment<br />
1-15-15 Centralized BLF Send Point Code Assignment<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
11<br />
Data No.<br />
03<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AD<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 292 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-15-16 Centralized BLF Send Extension Number Assignment<br />
1-15-17 Centralized BLF Send Time Assignment<br />
1-15-18 Centralized BLF Display Extension Number Assignment<br />
1. The IAD(8)-U( ) ETU is programmed as a DTI (DTI4 or DTI8) ETU in Memory Block 7-1 (Card Interface Slot<br />
Assignment) when used for K-CCIS over IP.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. Assign this Memory Block to YS when IAD(8)-U( ) ETUs are installed with one of the following applications<br />
loaded:<br />
IP CCH ETU [IP(K-CCIS)]<br />
IP CCH ETU for NEAX [IP(K-CCIS) to NEAX (Point-to-Multipoint)]<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 293
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-11-05 T1 Channel Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the digital trunk interface (DTI) channel numbers to<br />
be used.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
DTI No.<br />
(01~08) Title<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK11 + KE to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to select DTI channel number.<br />
Use to following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
C to go to the next page<br />
Channel Numbers (01~24) correspond to CO/PBX line key.<br />
CO/PBX<br />
Line<br />
Key<br />
0 1 / 0 5 : C H A N E L | 0 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
DTI No.<br />
1<br />
Channel No.<br />
DTI No.<br />
2<br />
DTI No.<br />
3~8<br />
Channel<br />
No.<br />
Page<br />
01~08 01~08 01~08 01~08 1<br />
09~16 09~16 09~16 09~16 2<br />
17~24 17~24 17~24 17~24 3<br />
CO/PBX<br />
Line LED<br />
Data<br />
Off On<br />
No<br />
(Not Assigned)<br />
Yes<br />
(Assigned)<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
Default Values<br />
DTI No. 1 Channels 01~24 = Off<br />
DTI No. 2 Channels 01~24 = Off<br />
DTI No. 3 Channels 01~24 = Off<br />
DTI No. 4 Channels 01~24 = Off<br />
DTI No. 5 Channels 01~24 = Off<br />
DTI No. 6 Channels 01~24 = Off<br />
DTI No. 7 Channels 01~24 = Off<br />
DTI No. 8 Channels 01~24 = Off<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
11<br />
Data No.<br />
05<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AD<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 294 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
7-1 Card Interface Slot Assignment<br />
The DTI-U( ) ETU must be assigned in the system to set this Memory Block.<br />
� Notes �<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 295
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-11-06 Signaling Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify Loop Start (LS) or Ground Start (GS) Trunk<br />
Signaling when using T1.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
LS GS<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
DTI No.<br />
(01~08) Title<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK11 + KF to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write data and advance to the next Channel No.<br />
5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each Channel No. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Channel<br />
No.<br />
0 1 / 0 6 : T R N K 0 1 = L S<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
1-11-07 DTI Trunk Type Assignment<br />
7-1 Card Interface Slot Assignment<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
The DTI-U( ) ETU must be assigned in the system to set this Memory Block.<br />
� Notes �<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
11<br />
Data No.<br />
06<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AD<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 296 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-11-07 DTI Trunk Type Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign the trunk type (CO/E&M Tie line/DID/ANI) four<br />
channels at a time. Assignment to an individual channel is impossible.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 6 LK 7 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
CO E&M DID ANI<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK11 + KG to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
� Use dial pad keys to change DTI Number (01~08).<br />
Block<br />
No.<br />
Data<br />
DTI No.<br />
(01~08) Title<br />
No.<br />
0 1 / 0 7 : T R K ( 1 ) C O<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
DTI<br />
No. 1<br />
4-Channel Unit<br />
DTI<br />
No. 2<br />
Block<br />
No.<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
1~6<br />
DTI No.<br />
3~8<br />
1 01~04 01~04 01~04<br />
2 05~08 05~08 05~08<br />
3 09~12 09~12 09~12<br />
4 13~16 13~16 13~16<br />
5 17~20 17~20 17~20<br />
6 21~24 21~24 21~24<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
11<br />
Data No.<br />
07<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AD<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 297
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-11-06 Signaling Selection<br />
7-1 Card Interface Slot Assignment<br />
Notes<br />
�<br />
1. A DTI-U( ) ETU must be assigned in the system to set this Memory Block.<br />
2. When the default setting is changed to E&M or DID, the affected trunks are automatically reassigned to Trunk<br />
Group 00. When trunks 01 ~ 08 are affected, default line key assignment for all Multiline Terminals changes to<br />
Not Used and must also be reassigned. Memory Block 3-14 resets to second dial.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 298 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-11-08 Digits Delete for T1 ANI Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to delete the Information Digits received from the Network on<br />
Feature Group D Trunks.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data Block<br />
DTI<br />
Title<br />
1~6<br />
01~08 No.<br />
0 1 / 0 8 : 1 – D E L 2 D G T<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK11 + KH to access the Memory Block. Default Values<br />
3 Use the dial pad to enter Setting Data 1 and Setting Data 2.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter data<br />
~ KCto change DTI Number<br />
KA<br />
Setting Data 1:<br />
�<br />
Block<br />
No.<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
DTI<br />
No. 1<br />
4-Channel Unit<br />
DTI<br />
No. 2<br />
Setting Data 2:<br />
�<br />
0 No Delete<br />
1~9 Number of Digits to Delete<br />
Setting<br />
2 Data<br />
DTI No.<br />
3~8<br />
1 01~04 01~04 01~04<br />
2 05~08 05~08 05~08<br />
3 09~12 09~12 09~12<br />
4 13~16 13~16 13~16<br />
5 17~20 17~20 17~20<br />
6 21~24 21~24 21~24<br />
4 Press G to write the data. Memory Block 1-11-00 is displayed.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 299<br />
2<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
11<br />
Data No.<br />
08<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AD
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
5 Program Memory Block 1-11-00 again or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
7-1 Card interface Slot Assignment<br />
1-11-05 T1 Channel Selection<br />
1-11-07 DTI Trunk Type Assignment<br />
Example of ANI information: KP009727517645STKP7100ST.<br />
00 Information digits<br />
9727517645 ANI information<br />
7100 DNIS Digits<br />
� Notes �<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 300 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-12-00 ACD/UCD Group Pilot Number<br />
Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the Pilot Number of an Automatic Call Distribution/<br />
Uniform Call Distribution (ACD/UCD) Group where incoming calls are terminated.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
Group No.<br />
(1~4) Title<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK12 to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Enter data using the dial pad.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data<br />
Setting Data:<br />
�<br />
Pilot No.<br />
2-digit (10~89)<br />
3-digit (100~899)<br />
4-digit (1000~8999)<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program Memory Block 1-12-01 and 1-12-02. The next Group No. is displayed.<br />
Default Values<br />
Not Specified<br />
6 Repeat Steps 3, 4, and 5 for each Group No. After Group 4 is programmed, Group 1 for Memory Block 1-12-00 is displayed.<br />
7 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
0 1 / 0 0 : P I L O T =<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Data<br />
Setting<br />
No.<br />
(Pilot<br />
max. 4 Digits)<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
1-1-46 Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-1-47 Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-1-48 Access Code (3-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-2-03 2-, 3-, 4-Digit Station Number Selection<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
12<br />
Data No.<br />
00<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AA<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 301
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-8-25 ACD/UCD Group Agent Assignment<br />
1-12-01 ACD/UCD Group Overflow Destination Assignment<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 302 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-12-01 ACD/UCD Group Overflow<br />
Destination Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the station or Station Hunt group where the overflow<br />
call of each Automatic Call Distribution/Uniform Call Distribution (ACD/UCD) group is<br />
routed when incoming calls overflow.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
Group No.<br />
(1~4) Title<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK12 + JA to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Enter data using the dial pad.<br />
The following are used when entering data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data<br />
Setting Data:<br />
�<br />
Station No.<br />
2-digit (10~89)<br />
3-digit (100~899)<br />
4-digit (1000~8999)<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
0 1 / 0 1 : O V F L W =<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-1-46 Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-1-47 Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-1-48 Access Code (3-Digit) Assignment<br />
Data<br />
Setting<br />
No.<br />
(Station<br />
max. 4 Digits)<br />
1-2-03 2-, 3-, 4-Digit Station Number Selection<br />
1-8-25 ACD/UCD Group Agent Assignment<br />
Default Values<br />
Not Specified<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
12<br />
Data No.<br />
01<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AA<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 303
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
� �<br />
1. An ACD/UCD Group Pilot Number cannot be programmed as the overflow destination.<br />
Notes<br />
2. UCD and ACD cannot be installed in the same system.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 304 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-12-02 ACD/UCD Overflow Time Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the maximum time a waiting Automatic Call<br />
Distribution/Uniform Call Distribution (ACD/UCD) call remains at an ACD/UCD group<br />
before overflowing to a specified Station or Station Hunt group.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
∞ 10 20 30 60 120 180 240<br />
selection is the<br />
default. Times<br />
are in seconds.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
Group No.<br />
(1~4) Title<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK12 + JB to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Group No. for Memory Block 1-12-00 is displayed.<br />
5 Program Memory Blocks 1-12-00~02 for each Group No. After Group No. 4 is programmed, Group No. 1 for Memory Block<br />
1-12-00 is displayed again.<br />
6 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
0 1 / 0 2 : O V F T M R = 6 0<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-1-46 Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-1-47 Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-1-48 Access Code (3-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-2-03 2-, 3-, 4-Digit Station Number Selection<br />
1-8-25 ACD/UCD Group Agent Assignment<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
1-12-01 ACD/UCD Group Overflow Destination Assignment<br />
An ACD/UCD Group Pilot Number cannot be programmed as the overflow destination.<br />
� Notes �<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
12<br />
Data No.<br />
02<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AA<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 305
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 306 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-13-00 PRT Channel Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign the available B channels used for PRI.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Page 1<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
Channel 1<br />
Page 2<br />
Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
Channel 9<br />
Page 3<br />
Channel 10 Channel 11 Channel 12 Channel 13 Channel 14 Channel 15 Channel 16<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
Channel 17 Channel 18 Channel 19 Channel 20 Channel 21 Channel 22 Channel 23 Channel 24<br />
CO/PBX<br />
Line LED<br />
Data<br />
Off On<br />
No (Not<br />
Assigned)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
PRT<br />
1~8<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Yes<br />
(Assigned)<br />
Title<br />
0 1 / 0 0 : C H A N N E L | 0 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK13 to access the Memory Block.<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
The shaded selection is<br />
the default.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
13<br />
Data No.<br />
00<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AN<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 307
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
7-1 Card interface Slot Assignment<br />
1-13-01 PRT Signal Format Selection<br />
1-13-02 Clear Channel Selection<br />
1-13-03 Call by Call Service Selection<br />
1-13-04 PRT B Channel Outgoing Priority Selection<br />
1-13-05 PRT B Channel-to-Trunk Group Assignment<br />
1. Only 16 Channels can be assigned with the <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Basic Port Package.<br />
1. UP to eight PRT ETUs can be assigned.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. PRT(1)-U( ) firmware, version 4.0 or higher is required for individual channel assignment.<br />
3. When the PRT(1)-U( ) has firmware, version 3.6 or lower, available channels are Channel 1 to the last channel<br />
assigned in this Memory Block.<br />
4. The number of available channels depends on the PRT(1)-U( ) assigned in Memory Block 7-1.<br />
For example, when PRT8 is assigned in Memory Block 7-1, any eight channels can be assigned (allowed) in this<br />
Memory Block. Any channel skipped (Not Assigned) is still an available channel from 0 to the last assigned<br />
channel.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 308 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-13-01 PRT Signal Format Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the signal format of the PRT trunk connected to the system.<br />
The signal format used (12- or 24-Multiframe) depends on the channel service unit/demarcation<br />
(CSU/D mark) equipment being used.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
12<br />
(SF)<br />
24<br />
(ESF)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
PRT<br />
1~8 Title<br />
No.<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
0 1 / 0 1 : F R A M E = 2 4<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK13 + KA to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block2 is displayed.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block2 or press E to go back on-line.<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
13<br />
Data No.<br />
01<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AN<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 309
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
7-1 Card interface Slot Assignment<br />
1-13-01 PRT Signal Format Selection<br />
1-13-03 Call by Call Service Selection<br />
1-13-04 PRT B Channel Outgoing Priority Selection<br />
1-13-05 PRT B Channel-to-Trunk Group Assignment<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 310 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-13-02 Clear Channel Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the clear channel selection. When the Zero Byte<br />
Time channel is available, the CLKG-U( ) Unit cannot extract a clock signal from the<br />
PRT trunk. The PRT trunk modifies the Zero Byte Time channel to extract a clock<br />
signal for the CLKG-U( ) Unit.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
ZCS B8ZS<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
PRT<br />
1~8<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK13 + KB to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
0 1 / 0 2 : O B Y T E = B 8 Z S<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-13-00 PRT Channel Assignment<br />
1-13-01 PRT Signal Format Selection<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
13<br />
Data No.<br />
02<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AN<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 311
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-13-03 Call by Call Service Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not Call by Call Service is activated per<br />
PRT.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
YS NO<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK13 + KC to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data. Memory Block 1-13-00 is displayed again.<br />
5 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Data<br />
PRT<br />
1~8 Title<br />
No.<br />
0 1 / 0 3 : C B C S V N O<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-13-00 PRT Channel Assignment<br />
1-13-02 Clear Channel Selection<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
13<br />
Data No.<br />
03<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AN<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 312 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-13-04 PRT B Channel Outgoing Priority<br />
Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign the Outgoing Priority for the B-channels when calls<br />
are originated on a PRT(1)-U( ) ETU.<br />
This assignment is allowed by handset programming and SAT.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
H → L<br />
High to Low<br />
PRT<br />
1~8<br />
L → H<br />
Low to High<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK13 + KD to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
0 1 / 0 4 : C H S L C = H > L<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
7-1 Card Interface Slot Assignment<br />
1-13-00 PRT Channel Assignment<br />
1-13-01 PRT Signal Format Selection<br />
1-13-03 Call by Call Service Selection<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
1-13-05 PRT B Channel-to-Trunk Group Assignment<br />
5-06 Trunk Group Outgoing Priority Selection<br />
This Memory Block applies to all firmware versions of the PRT(1)-U( ) ETU.<br />
� Notes �<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
13<br />
Data No.<br />
04<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AN<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 313
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-13-05 PRT B Channel-to-Trunk Group<br />
Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign a Trunk Group Number to each B channel or any<br />
Trunk Group for each B channel. Changing this assignment is not normally required<br />
and default should be set. This Memory Block could be used when different trunks are<br />
used in the same PRI span or for a tenant application where multiple tenants share the<br />
PRI span and separation of B channels is required.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
PRT<br />
1~8<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK13 + KE to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use dial pad keys to enter Trunk Group.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move cursor left<br />
Lto move cursor right<br />
Ch. B<br />
01~23<br />
0 1 / 0 5 : B 0 1 = T G 0 O<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data<br />
� 00 is No Trunk Group<br />
01~32 are Trunk Groups 01~32<br />
Data<br />
Setting<br />
Group<br />
Trunk<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next B channel or next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Default Values<br />
00, No Trunk Group<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
13<br />
Data No.<br />
05<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AN<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 314 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
7-1 Card Interface Slot Assignment<br />
1-13-00 PRT Channel Assignment<br />
1-13-01 PRT Signal Format Selection<br />
1-13-02 Clear Channel Selection<br />
1-13-03 Call by Call Service Selection<br />
1-13-04 PRT B Channel Outgoing Priority Selection<br />
3-03 Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment<br />
3-91 Trunk Type Selection<br />
1. This Memory Block must be coordinated with Memory Block 3-03 (Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment). The<br />
number of assigned channels must be the same or greater (including default) than the number of trunks to a<br />
trunk group assigned In Memory Block 3-03.<br />
For Example, When Memory Block 3-03 has five PRT trunks for Trunk Group 1, this Memory Block must have at<br />
least five B channels for Trunk Group 1.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. This Memory Block applies only to PRT(1)-U( ) ETU firmware version 4.0 or higher.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 315
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 316 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-14-00 ARS Allow/Deny Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify system wide whether or not Automatic Route<br />
Selection (ARS) is allowed.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
NO<br />
(Deny)<br />
YES<br />
(Allow)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK14 to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
0 0 : A R S N O<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
3-03 Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment<br />
4-40 LCR Class Selection<br />
1-1-30 Route Advance Block Assignment<br />
1-8-08 Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2<br />
1-14-01 ARS Dialing Assignment<br />
1-14-02 ARS Dial Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-14-03 ARS Route Table Number Assignment<br />
1-14-04 ARS Trunk Group to Route Number Assignment<br />
1-14-05 ARS Digit Delete Assignment<br />
1-14-06 ARS Digit Add Assignment<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
14<br />
Data No.<br />
00<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AB<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 317
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-14-01 ARS Dialing Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign a dialing plan to one of four ARS Tables. Each table<br />
contains 128 maximum dialing assignments for the selected dialing plan.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Table<br />
No.<br />
1~4<br />
0 1 : 1 / 0 1 =<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK14 + KA to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use dial pad keys to select Table number.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move cursor left<br />
Lto move cursor right<br />
H to clear setting data<br />
Table No. 1~4 (Table Number is Class number)<br />
�<br />
Dial No. 01~C8<br />
�<br />
Setting Data: �<br />
0~9, J, �, #, X, P, N (8 Digit Maximum)<br />
Operation Data Includes:<br />
�<br />
Operation<br />
Data<br />
Dial<br />
No.<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Dial Operation<br />
X K~I, L J, Redial + 7<br />
P K and A Redial + 8<br />
N B~ I Redial + 9<br />
� J Redial + �<br />
# L Redial + #<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Dial No. is displayed.<br />
Default Values<br />
5 Repeat Steps 3 and 5 for each Dial No. (01~C8) for Table 1. After Dial No. C8 is programmed, the next Table No. is displayed.<br />
6 Repeat <strong>Programming</strong> cycle for each dial No. (01~C8) for Tables 2~4. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
7 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 318 Memory Blocks<br />
None<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
14<br />
Data No.<br />
01<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AB
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
3-03 Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment<br />
4-40 LCR Class Selection<br />
1-1-30 Route Advance Block Assignment<br />
1-8-08 Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2<br />
1-14-00 ARS Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-14-02 ARS Dial Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-14-03 ARS Route Table Number Assignment<br />
1-14-04 ARS Trunk Group to Route Number Assignment<br />
1-14-05 ARS Digit Delete Assignment<br />
1-14-06 ARS Digit Add Assignment<br />
Entries A0~C8 are 100~128.<br />
� Notes �<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 319
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-14-02 ARS Dial Allow/Deny Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not to Allow digits that are entered in the<br />
ARS dialing assignment to be routed using the ARS feature.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
YES NO<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Table<br />
No.<br />
1~4<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK14 + KB to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data option.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
K~Ito select data<br />
Jto move cursor left<br />
Lto move cursor right<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Dial No. is displayed.<br />
5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each Dial No. (01~C8) for Table 1. After Dial No. C8 is programmed, the next Table No. is displayed.<br />
6 Repeat <strong>Programming</strong> cycle for each Dial No.(01~C8) for Tables 2~4. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
7 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Dial<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
0 2 : 1 / 0 1 A / D Y E S<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
3-03 Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment<br />
4-40 LCR Class Selection<br />
1-1-30 Route Advance Block Assignment<br />
1-8-08 Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2<br />
1-14-00 ARS Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-14-01 ARS Dialing Assignment<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
14<br />
Data No.<br />
02<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AB<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 320 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-14-03 ARS Route Table Number Assignment<br />
1-14-04 ARS Trunk Group to Route Number Assignment<br />
1-14-05 ARS Digit Delete Assignment<br />
1-14-06 ARS Digit Add Assignment<br />
1. Entries A0~C8 are 100~128.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. When NO (Deny) is set, the other Memory Blocks for this dialing assignment do not have to be programmed.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 321
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-14-03 ARS Route Table Number Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign each ARS Dialing Assignment to an ARS Route<br />
Assignment.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Table<br />
1~4<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK14 + KCto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use dial pad keys to select Table number (1~4), Dial number (01~C8), and Route number (01~32).<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
K~Ito select data<br />
Jto move cursor left<br />
Lto move cursor right<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Dial No. is displayed.<br />
5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each Dial No (01~C8) for Table 1. After Dial No. C8 is programmed, the next table No. is displayed.<br />
6 Repeat <strong>Programming</strong> cycle for dial Nos. 01~C8 for each Table (1~4). The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
7 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Dial<br />
No.<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
3-03 Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment<br />
4-40 LCR Class Selection<br />
Title<br />
0 3 : 1 / 0 1 R O U T E 0 0<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
1-1-30 Route Advance Block Assignment<br />
1-8-08 Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2<br />
1-14-00 ARS Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-14-01 ARS Dialing Assignment<br />
1-14-02 ARS Dial Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-14-04 ARS Trunk Group to Route Number Assignment<br />
1-14-05 ARS Digit Delete Assignment<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
14<br />
Data No.<br />
03<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AB<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 322 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-14-06 ARS Digit Add Assignment<br />
1. Entries A0~C8 are 100~128.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. When ARS Route Assignment 00 is selected, the call is sent to Trunk Group 01 exactly as it was dialed.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 323
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-14-04 ARS Trunk Group to Route Number<br />
Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether a Trunk Group, Route Advance Block, or<br />
ICM is used for each Route assignment.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
NORMAL<br />
(Originate)<br />
TKGP<br />
(01~32)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
RAB<br />
(01~32)<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK14 + KDto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data 1 option.<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
K~Ito select Data Setting Data 2 Trunk Group Number (01~32) or Setting Data 2 RAB (01~32)<br />
Jto move cursor left<br />
Lto move cursor right<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Route No. is displayed.<br />
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each Route No. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 324 Memory Blocks<br />
ICM<br />
6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Route<br />
No.<br />
Setting<br />
1<br />
Data<br />
0 4 / 0 1 = N O R M A L<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
3-03 Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment<br />
4-40 LCR Class Selection<br />
1-1-30 Route Advance Block Assignment<br />
1-8-08 Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2<br />
1-14-00 ARS Allow/Deny Selection<br />
Setting<br />
2 Data<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
14<br />
Data No.<br />
04<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AB
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-14-01 ARS Dialing Assignment<br />
1-14-02 ARS Dial Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-14-03 ARS Route Table Number Assignment<br />
1-14-05 ARS Digit Delete Assignment<br />
1-14-06 ARS Digit Add Assignment<br />
1-14-07 ARS Max Digit Assignment<br />
1. When NORMAL is selected, the call is routed to Trunk Group 1 exactly as dialed.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. ICM is used when the open numbering plan is used (K-CCIS).<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 325
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-14-05 ARS Digit Delete Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the number of digits to delete from the Route<br />
assignment.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK14 + KEto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use dial pad keys K~I to select Route No. (01~32) and number of digits (00~10).<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move cursor left<br />
Lto move cursor right<br />
Route<br />
No.<br />
0 5 : D E L E T E 0 1 = 0 0<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
If Setting Data is 00, digits are not deleted.<br />
�<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Route No. is displayed.<br />
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each Route No. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
14<br />
Data No.<br />
05<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AB<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 326 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
3-03 Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment<br />
4-40 LCR Class Selection<br />
1-1-30 Route Advance Block Assignment<br />
1-8-08 Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2<br />
1-14-00 ARS Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-14-01 ARS Dialing Assignment<br />
1-14-02 ARS Dial Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-14-03 ARS Route Table Number Assignment<br />
1-14-04 ARS Trunk Group to Route Number Assignment<br />
1-14-06 ARS Digit Add Assignment<br />
1-14-07 ARS Max Digit Assignment<br />
The maximum number of digits that can be deleted cannot exceed the number of digits used to route the call.<br />
� Notes �<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 327
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-14-06 ARS Digit Add Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the number of digits to add to the Route assignment.<br />
Display<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Route<br />
No.<br />
0 6 / 0 1 =<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK14 + KF to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use dial pad keys K~I,J,Lto select Route No. (01~32) and enter the<br />
additional dialing digits.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move cursor left<br />
Lto move cursor right<br />
B +Jto J enter<br />
B +Lto L enter<br />
B +Kto enter a pause<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Route No. is displayed.<br />
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each Route No. Memory Block 1-14-00 is displayed.<br />
6 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
3-03 Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment<br />
4-40 LCR Class Selection<br />
1-1-30 Route Advance Block Assignment<br />
1-8-08 Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2<br />
1-14-00 ARS Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-14-01 ARS Dialing Assignment<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
1-14-02 ARS Dial Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-14-03 ARS Route Table Number Assignment<br />
Default Values<br />
Not Specified<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
14<br />
Data No.<br />
06<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AB<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 328 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-14-04 ARS Trunk Group to Route Number Assignment<br />
1-14-05 ARS Digit Delete Assignment<br />
1-14-07 ARS Max Digit Assignment<br />
A maximum of 10 digits can be added to a route assignment.<br />
� Notes �<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 329
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-14-07 ARS Max Digit Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the number of digits to be collected by the system<br />
before the message is sent to the network.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK14 + KG to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use dial pad keys to enter Setting Data.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move cursor left<br />
Lto move cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data<br />
4 Press G to write the data.<br />
5 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
3-03 Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment<br />
4-40 LCR Class Selection<br />
1-1-30 Route Advance Block Assignment<br />
1-8-08 Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2<br />
1-14-00 ARS Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-14-01 ARS Dialing Assignment<br />
Route<br />
01~32.<br />
0 7 : M A X D G T 0 1 = 2 4<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
1-14-02 ARS Dial Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-14-03 ARS Route Table Number Assignment<br />
1-14-04 ARS Trunk Group to Route Number Assignment<br />
1-14-05 ARS Digit Delete Assignment<br />
1-14-06 ARS Digit Add Assignment<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
Default Values<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
14<br />
Data No.<br />
07<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AM<br />
Length = 24 Digits<br />
Valid range for setting data: 01~99<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 330 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
� �<br />
1. When 00 is set for this Memory Block, refer to Memory Block 1-1-81 (ISDN / K-CCIS Interval Time Selection) for<br />
the time it takes before the message is sent to the K-CCIS Network.<br />
Notes<br />
2. ARS Max Digit Assignment applies to K-CCIS Trunk Routes routed through Automatic Route Selection.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 331
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 332 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-15-00 K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to activate K-CCIS by assigning a Main or Remote system.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
NONE MAIN REMOTE<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK15 to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data.<br />
5 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
7-1 Card Interface Slot Assignment<br />
7-3-01 MIF (LCR) Assignment<br />
7-3-02 MIF (SMDR) Assignment<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
0 0 : C C I S N O N E<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
1-15-01 Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignment<br />
1-15-02 Common Signal Channel Assignment<br />
1-15-03 Originating Point Code Assignment<br />
1-15-04 Destination Point Code Assignment<br />
1-15-05 Destination Point Code Transfer Assignment<br />
1-15-06 Originating Office Code Number Assignment<br />
1-15-07 K-CCIS Message Response Timeout Assignment<br />
1-15-08 Link Reconnect Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-09 K-CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Assignment<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
15<br />
Data No.<br />
00<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AW<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 333
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong> (Continued)<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-15-10 Calling Name Display Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-11 Centralized Billing Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-12 Centralized Billing – Point Code of Center Office Assignment<br />
1-15-13 Centralized Day/Night Switching for Remote Office Assignment<br />
1-15-14 Centralized Day/Night Switching for Main Office Assignment<br />
1-15-15 Centralized BLF Send Point Code Assignment<br />
1-15-16 Centralized BLF Send Extension Number Assignment<br />
1-15-17 Centralized BLF Send Time Assignment<br />
1-15-18 Centralized BLF Display Extension Number Assignment<br />
3-70 CIC Number Assignment<br />
5-05 Common Signaling Channel Route Selection<br />
1-1-05 Start Time Selection<br />
1-5-02 SMDR Print Format<br />
1-5-13 Printer Connected Selection<br />
1-5-14 Printer Line Feed Control Selection<br />
1-5-25 SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment<br />
1-5-26 SMDR Incoming/Outgoing Print Selection<br />
1-8-35 COM Port Baud Rate Setting Assignment<br />
4-56 SMDR <strong>Telephone</strong> Print Selection<br />
1. For <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong>-to-<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Network only one system can be set for Main. All other systems must<br />
be set from Remote.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. When connected to a PBX, the <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> must be set for REMOTE in this Memory Block.<br />
3. When this Memory Block is set to NONE, K-CCIS with point-to-point T1 lines does not function even when all<br />
other K-CCIS Memory Blocks are allowed.<br />
4. The Main or Remote setting only applies to the Centralized Day/Night Mode Change - K-CCIS feature and only<br />
when using traditional K-CCIS with point-to-point T1 lines and IP(K-CCIS) to NEAX ( Point-to-Multipoint) (R2500<br />
or higher).<br />
5. This Memory Block is not used and has no effect on the IP (K-CCIS) feature (R1700 or lower).<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 334 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-15-01 Common Signal Channel Data Speed<br />
Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign the Data Transmission speed for each Common<br />
Signaling channel.<br />
DisplayS<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
64k 56k 48k(1) 48k(2)<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK15 + KAto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data option.<br />
Two adaptation rates are available with the 48 Kbps data transmission.<br />
�<br />
The adaptation method must match the rate adaptation of the clock source<br />
office.<br />
Data format for 48k(1) is as follows:<br />
Data format for 48k(2) is as follows:<br />
4 Press G to write the data.<br />
5 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
0 1 : C C H 1 = 5 6 k<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
1 1<br />
1<br />
Data<br />
Data<br />
1<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
15<br />
Data No.<br />
01<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AW<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 335
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
7-1 Card Interface Slot Assignment<br />
7-3-01 MIF (LCR) Assignment<br />
7-3-02 MIF (SMDR) Assignment<br />
1-15-00 K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection<br />
1-15-02 Common Signal Channel Assignment<br />
1-15-03 Originating Point Code Assignment<br />
1-15-04 Destination Point Code Assignment<br />
1-15-05 Destination Point Code Transfer Assignment<br />
1-15-06 Originating Office Code Number Assignment<br />
1-15-07 K-CCIS Message Response Timeout Assignment<br />
1-15-08 Link Reconnect Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-09 K-CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Assignment<br />
1-15-10 Calling Name Display Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-11 Centralized Billing Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-12 Centralized Billing – Point Code of Center Office Assignment<br />
1-15-13 Centralized Day/Night Switching for Remote Office Assignment<br />
1-15-14 Centralized Day/Night Switching for Main Office Assignment<br />
1-15-15 Centralized BLF Send Point Code Assignment<br />
1-15-16 Centralized BLF Send Extension Number Assignment<br />
1-15-17 Centralized BLF Send Time Assignment<br />
1-15-18 Centralized BLF Display Extension Number Assignment<br />
3-70 CIC Number Assignment<br />
5-05 Common Signaling Channel Route Selection<br />
1-1-05 Start Time Selection<br />
1-5-02 SMDR Print Format<br />
1-5-13 Printer Connected Selection<br />
1-5-14 Printer Line Feed Control Selection<br />
1-5-25 SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment<br />
1-5-26 SMDR Incoming/Outgoing Print Selection<br />
1-8-35 COM Port Baud Rate Setting Assignment<br />
4-56 SMDR <strong>Telephone</strong> Print Selection<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 336 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-15-02 Common Signal Channel Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign a T1 Trunk to be a Common Signaling Channel.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK15 + KB to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use dial pad keys to enter Setting Data.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move cursor left<br />
Lto move cursor right<br />
K~ Ito enter numeric data<br />
4 Press G to write the data.<br />
5 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
C-Channel<br />
1~4<br />
0 2 : C S C 1 = C O 0 0<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
7-1 Card Interface Slot Assignment<br />
7-3-01 MIF (LCR) Assignment<br />
7-3-02 MIF (SMDR) Assignment<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
1-15-00 K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection<br />
1-15-01 Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignment<br />
1-15-03 Originating Point Code Assignment<br />
1-15-04 Destination Point Code Assignment<br />
1-15-05 Destination Point Code Transfer Assignment<br />
1-15-06 Originating Office Code Number Assignment<br />
1-15-07 K-CCIS Message Response Timeout Assignment<br />
1-15-08 Link Reconnect Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-09 K-CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Assignment<br />
Default Values:<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 337<br />
00<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
15<br />
Data No.<br />
02<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AW
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong> (Continued)<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-15-10 Calling Name Display Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-11 Centralized Billing Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-12 Centralized Billing – Point Code of Center Office Assignment<br />
1-15-13 Centralized Day/Night Switching for Remote Office Assignment<br />
1-15-14 Centralized Day/Night Switching for Main Office Assignment<br />
1-15-15 Centralized BLF Send Point Code Assignment<br />
1-15-16 Centralized BLF Send Extension Number Assignment<br />
1-15-17 Centralized BLF Send Time Assignment<br />
1-15-18 Centralized BLF Display Extension Number Assignment<br />
3-70 CIC Number Assignment<br />
5-05 Common Signaling Channel Route Selection<br />
1-1-05 Start Time Selection<br />
1-5-02 SMDR Print Format<br />
1-5-13 Printer Connected Selection<br />
1-5-14 Printer Line Feed Control Selection<br />
1-5-25 SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment<br />
1-5-26 SMDR Incoming/Outgoing Print Selection<br />
1-8-35 COM Port Baud Rate Setting Assignment<br />
4-56 SMDR <strong>Telephone</strong> Print Selection<br />
Any DTI Trunk can be assigned as the C-Channel for K-CCIS connection.<br />
� Notes �<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 338 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-15-03 Originating Point Code Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign the originating point code for each Common<br />
Signaling Channel.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK15 +KC to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use dial pad keys to enter Setting Data.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move cursor left<br />
Lto move cursor right<br />
K~ Ito enter numeric data<br />
Point Code Range is 00001~16367.<br />
�<br />
4 Press G to write the data.<br />
5 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
C-Channel<br />
1~4<br />
0 3 : O R G C C H 1<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
7-1 Card Interface Slot Assignment<br />
7-3-01 MIF (LCR) Assignment<br />
7-3-02 MIF (SMDR) Assignment<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
1-15-00 K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection<br />
1-15-01 Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignment<br />
1-15-02 Common Signal Channel Assignment<br />
1-15-04 Destination Point Code Assignment<br />
1-15-05 Destination Point Code Transfer Assignment<br />
1-15-06 Originating Office Code Number Assignment<br />
1-15-07 K-CCIS Message Response Timeout Assignment<br />
1-15-08 Link Reconnect Allow/Deny Selection<br />
Default Values:<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 339<br />
Blank<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
15<br />
Data No.<br />
03<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AW
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong> (Continued)<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-15-09 K-CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Assignment<br />
1-15-10 Calling Name Display Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-11 Centralized Billing Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-12 Centralized Billing – Point Code of Center Office Assignment<br />
1-15-13 Centralized Day/Night Switching for Remote Office Assignment<br />
1-15-14 Centralized Day/Night Switching for Main Office Assignment<br />
1-15-15 Centralized BLF Send Point Code Assignment<br />
1-15-16 Centralized BLF Send Extension Number Assignment<br />
1-15-17 Centralized BLF Send Time Assignment<br />
1-15-18 Centralized BLF Display Extension Number Assignment<br />
3-70 CIC Number Assignment<br />
5-05 Common Signaling Channel Route Selection<br />
1-1-05 Start Time Selection<br />
1-5-02 SMDR Print Format<br />
1-5-13 Printer Connected Selection<br />
1-5-14 Printer Line Feed Control Selection<br />
1-5-25 SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment<br />
1-5-26 SMDR Incoming/Outgoing Print Selection<br />
1-8-35 COM Port Baud Rate Setting Assignment<br />
4-56 SMDR <strong>Telephone</strong> Print Selection<br />
1. Each C-Channel used must have an Originating Point Code assigned.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. When more than one C-Channel is used, the same point code is used for each C-Channel.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 340 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-15-04 Destination Point Code Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign the Destination Point Code for each Common<br />
Signaling Channel.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK15 + KD to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use dial pad keys to enter Setting Data.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move cursor left<br />
Lto move cursor right<br />
K~ Ito enter numeric data<br />
Point Code Range is 00001~16367.<br />
�<br />
4 Press G to write the data.<br />
5 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
C-Channel<br />
1~4<br />
0 4 : D S T C C H 1<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
7-1 Card Interface Slot Assignment<br />
7-3-01 MIF (LCR) Assignment<br />
7-3-02 MIF (SMDR) Assignment<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
1-15-00 K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection<br />
1-15-01 Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignment<br />
1-15-02 Common Signal Channel Assignment<br />
1-15-03 Originating Point Code Assignment<br />
1-15-05 Destination Point Code Transfer Assignment<br />
1-15-06 Originating Office Code Number Assignment<br />
1-15-07 K-CCIS Message Response Timeout Assignment<br />
Default Values:<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 341<br />
Blank<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
15<br />
Data No.<br />
04<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AW
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong> (Continued)<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-15-08 Link Reconnect Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-09 K-CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Assignment<br />
1-15-10 Calling Name Display Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-11 Centralized Billing Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-12 Centralized Billing – Point Code of Center Office Assignment<br />
1-15-13 Centralized Day/Night Switching for Remote Office Assignment<br />
1-15-14 Centralized Day/Night Switching for Main Office Assignment<br />
1-15-15 Centralized BLF Send Point Code Assignment<br />
1-15-16 Centralized BLF Send Extension Number Assignment<br />
1-15-17 Centralized BLF Send Time Assignment<br />
1-15-18 Centralized BLF Display Extension Number Assignment<br />
3-70 CIC Number Assignment<br />
5-05 Common Signaling Channel Route Selection<br />
1-1-05 Start Time Selection<br />
1-5-02 SMDR Print Format<br />
1-5-13 Printer Connected Selection<br />
1-5-14 Printer Line Feed Control Selection<br />
1-5-25 SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment<br />
1-5-26 SMDR Incoming/Outgoing Print Selection<br />
1-8-35 COM Port Baud Rate Setting Assignment<br />
4-56 SMDR <strong>Telephone</strong> Print Selection<br />
Each C-Channel used must have a Destination Point Code assigned.<br />
� Notes �<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 342 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-15-05 Destination Point Code Transfer<br />
Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign the Destination Point Code to the associated<br />
Common Signaling Channel when K-CCIS commands are required to pass through a<br />
tandem system. This Memory Block is used for Centralized K-CCIS features.<br />
With R1500 or higher, a CCH Channel i can be assigned for K-CCIS over IP.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Table<br />
255)<br />
(001~<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK15 + KE to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use dial pad keys to enter Setting Data.<br />
Press Redial + 1 to assign i for K-CCIS over IP for R1500 or higher.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move cursor left<br />
Lto move cursor right<br />
K~ Ito enter numeric data<br />
� Point Code Range is 00001~16367.<br />
T001~T255 can be assigned.<br />
4 Press G to write the data.<br />
5 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
Point<br />
Code<br />
0 5 : T 0 0 1 : = 0<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
C-Channel<br />
i 1~4,<br />
Default Values:<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 343<br />
Blank<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
15<br />
Data No.<br />
05<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AW
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Example: <strong>Elite</strong> 100 is Master for Centralized Day/Night Mode Change (K-CCIS).<br />
10 TG 10<br />
System A (100s) System B (200s) System C (300s)<br />
MB 1-15-03 CCH1 = PC 00001 MB 1-15-03 CCH1 = PC 00002 MB 1-15-03 CCH1 = PC 00003<br />
MB 1-15-04 CCH1 = PC 00002 MB 1-15-04 CCH1 = PC 00001 MB 1-15-04 CCH1 = PC 00002<br />
MB 1-15-04 CCH2 = PC 00003<br />
MB 1-15-05 Not assigned MB 1-15-05 PC 00003 = CCH2 MB 1-15-05 Not assigned<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
7-1 Card Interface Slot Assignment<br />
7-3-01 MIF (LCR) Assignment<br />
System A<br />
PC 00001<br />
7-3-02 MIF (SMDR) Assignment<br />
DTI<br />
Cabinet 1<br />
Slot 1<br />
☎<br />
(Attendant)<br />
100<br />
1-15-00 K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection<br />
1-15-01 Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignment<br />
1-15-02 Common Signal Channel Assignment<br />
1-15-03 Originating Point Code Assignment<br />
1-15-04 Destination Point Code Assignment<br />
1-15-06 Originating Office Code Number Assignment<br />
1-15-07 K-CCIS Message Response Timeout Assignment<br />
1-15-08 Link Reconnect Allow/Deny Selection<br />
T1<br />
CCIS<br />
1-15-09 K-CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Assignment<br />
1-15-10 Calling Name Display Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-11 Centralized Billing Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-12 Centralized Billing – Point Code of Center Office Assignment<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
DTI<br />
Cabinet 1<br />
Slot 1<br />
DTI<br />
Cabinet 1<br />
Slot 4<br />
DTI<br />
Cabinet 1<br />
Slot 1<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 344 Memory Blocks<br />
T1<br />
CCIS<br />
10 TG 10 11 TG 10<br />
System B<br />
PC 00002<br />
System C<br />
PC 00003<br />
(100s) (200s) (300s)<br />
Sys B<br />
CCH Channel 1<br />
Sys A<br />
CCH Channel 1<br />
Sys C<br />
CCH Channel 1<br />
Sys B<br />
CCH Channel 2
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong> (Continued)<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-15-13 Centralized Day/Night Switching for Remote Office Assignment<br />
1-15-14 Centralized Day/Night Switching for Main Office Assignment<br />
1-15-15 Centralized BLF Send Point Code Assignment<br />
1-15-16 Centralized BLF Send Extension Number Assignment<br />
1-15-17 Centralized BLF Send Time Assignment<br />
1-15-18 Centralized BLF Display Extension Number Assignment<br />
3-70 CIC Number Assignment<br />
5-05 Common Signaling Channel Route Selection<br />
1-1-05 Start Time Selection<br />
1-5-02 SMDR Print Format<br />
1-5-13 Printer Connected Selection<br />
1-5-14 Printer Line Feed Control Selection<br />
1-5-25 SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment<br />
1-5-26 SMDR Incoming/Outgoing Print Selection<br />
1-8-35 COM Port Baud Rate Setting Assignment<br />
4-56 SMDR <strong>Telephone</strong> Print Selection<br />
1. This Memory Block is required for the following K-CCIS features:<br />
� Centralized Billing - K-CCIS<br />
� Notes �<br />
� Centralized Day/Night Mode Change - K-CCIS<br />
Centralized BLF (K-CCIS)<br />
�<br />
2. Assigning a CCH i channel is used for IP (K-CCIS) feature.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 345
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-15-06 Originating Office Code Number<br />
Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign the Office Code to the system when Open<br />
Numbering Plan is used.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK15 + KF to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use dial pad keys to enter Setting data.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move cursor left<br />
Lto move cursor right<br />
K~ Ito enter numeric data<br />
� The Maximum Office Code Number can have four digits and should<br />
include the Access Code for the open numbering plan. Valid range is<br />
0~9999.<br />
4 Press G to write the data.<br />
5 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
0 6 : O F F I C E<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
7-1 Card Interface Slot Assignment<br />
7-3-01 MIF (LCR) Assignment<br />
7-3-02 MIF (SMDR) Assignment<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
1-15-00 K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection<br />
1-15-01 Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignment<br />
1-15-02 Common Signal Channel Assignment<br />
1-15-03 Originating Point Code Assignment<br />
1-15-04 Destination Point Code Assignment<br />
Default Values:<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 346 Memory Blocks<br />
Blank<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
15<br />
Data No.<br />
06<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AW
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong> (Continued)<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-15-05 Destination Point Code Transfer Assignment<br />
1-15-07 K-CCIS Message Response Timeout Assignment<br />
1-15-08 Link Reconnect Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-09 K-CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Assignment<br />
1-15-10 Calling Name Display Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-11 Centralized Billing Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-12 Centralized Billing – Point Code of Center Office Assignment<br />
1-15-13 Centralized Day/Night Switching for Remote Office Assignment<br />
1-15-14 Centralized Day/Night Switching for Main Office Assignment<br />
1-15-15 Centralized BLF Send Point Code Assignment<br />
1-15-16 Centralized BLF Send Extension Number Assignment<br />
1-15-17 Centralized BLF Send Time Assignment<br />
1-15-18 Centralized BLF Display Extension Number Assignment<br />
3-70 CIC Number Assignment<br />
5-05 Common Signaling Channel Route Selection<br />
1-1-05 Start Time Selection<br />
1-5-02 SMDR Print Format<br />
1-5-13 Printer Connected Selection<br />
1-5-14 Printer Line Feed Control Selection<br />
1-5-25 SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment<br />
1-5-26 SMDR Incoming/Outgoing Print Selection<br />
1-8-35 COM Port Baud Rate Setting Assignment<br />
4-56 SMDR <strong>Telephone</strong> Print Selection<br />
The Access Code must be part of the Office Code Number Assigned.<br />
� Notes �<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 347
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-15-07 K-CCIS Message Response Timeout<br />
Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign the time before a call or message request is<br />
canceled when no response is received from the destination office.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK15 + KG to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use dial pad keys to enter Setting data.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Use Jto move cursor left<br />
Use Lto move cursor right<br />
Use K~ Ito enter numeric data<br />
Setting Data: �<br />
00 = ∞ (Infinity)<br />
01~99 Seconds are valid times.<br />
4 Press G to write the data.<br />
5 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
7-1 Card Interface Slot Assignment<br />
7-3-01 MIF (LCR) Assignment<br />
7-3-02 MIF (SMDR) Assignment<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
0 7 : R E S T I M E 3 0 s<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
1-15-00 K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection<br />
1-15-01 Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignment<br />
1-15-02 Common Signal Channel Assignment<br />
1-15-03 Originating Point Code Assignment<br />
1-15-04 Destination Point Code Assignment<br />
Default Values:<br />
30 Seconds<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
15<br />
Data No.<br />
07<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AW<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 348 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong> (Continued)<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-15-05 Destination Point Code Transfer Assignment<br />
1-15-06 Originating Office Code Number Assignment<br />
1-15-08 Link Reconnect Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-09 K-CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Assignment<br />
1-15-10 Calling Name Display Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-11 Centralized Billing Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-12 Centralized Billing – Point Code of Center Office Assignment<br />
1-15-13 Centralized Day/Night Switching for Remote Office Assignment<br />
1-15-14 Centralized Day/Night Switching for Main Office Assignment<br />
1-15-15 Centralized BLF Send Point Code Assignment<br />
1-15-16 Centralized BLF Send Extension Number Assignment<br />
1-15-17 Centralized BLF Send Time Assignment<br />
1-15-18 Centralized BLF Display Extension Number Assignment<br />
3-70 CIC Number Assignment<br />
5-05 Common Signaling Channel Route Selection<br />
1-1-05 Start Time Selection<br />
1-5-02 SMDR Print Format<br />
1-5-13 Printer Connected Selection<br />
1-5-14 Printer Line Feed Control Selection<br />
1-5-25 SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment<br />
1-5-26 SMDR Incoming/Outgoing Print Selection<br />
1-8-35 COM Port Baud Rate Setting Assignment<br />
4-56 SMDR <strong>Telephone</strong> Print Selection<br />
When a response from the distant system is not received in the specified time, the system cancels the call. The<br />
user hears Reorder Tone and CONGESTION is displayed.<br />
� Notes �<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 349
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-15-08 Link Reconnect Allow/Deny Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to allow or deny the Link Reconnect feature.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
NO<br />
(Deny)<br />
YS<br />
(Allow)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK15 + KH to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data.<br />
5 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
7-1 Card Interface Slot Assignment<br />
7-3-01 MIF (LCR) Assignment<br />
7-3-02 MIF (SMDR) Assignment<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
0 8 : R E C O N N E C T Y S<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
1-15-00 K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection<br />
1-15-01 Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignment<br />
1-15-02 Common Signal Channel Assignment<br />
1-15-03 Originating Point Code Assignment<br />
1-15-04 Destination Point Code Assignment<br />
1-15-05 Destination Point Code Transfer Assignment<br />
1-15-06 Originating Office Code Number Assignment<br />
1-15-07 K-CCIS Message Response Timeout Assignment<br />
1-15-09 K-CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Assignment<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
15<br />
Data No.<br />
08<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AW<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 350 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong> (Continued)<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-15-10 Calling Name Display Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-11 Centralized Billing Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-12 Centralized Billing – Point Code of Center Office Assignment<br />
1-15-13 Centralized Day/Night Switching for Remote Office Assignment<br />
1-15-14 Centralized Day/Night Switching for Main Office Assignment<br />
1-15-15 Centralized BLF Send Point Code Assignment<br />
1-15-16 Centralized BLF Send Extension Number Assignment<br />
1-15-17 Centralized BLF Send Time Assignment<br />
1-15-18 Centralized BLF Display Extension Number Assignment<br />
3-70 CIC Number Assignment<br />
5-05 Common Signaling Channel Route Selection<br />
1-1-05 Start Time Selection<br />
1-5-02 SMDR Print Format<br />
1-5-13 Printer Connected Selection<br />
1-5-14 Printer Line Feed Control Selection<br />
1-5-25 SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment<br />
1-5-26 SMDR Incoming/Outgoing Print Selection<br />
1-8-35 COM Port Baud Rate Setting Assignment<br />
4-56 SMDR <strong>Telephone</strong> Print Selection<br />
1. When NO is selected, Link Reconnect does not take place.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. When Local Loop/Ground Start Trunks are used, and a disconnect signal is not received from the network, the<br />
time set in Memory Block 1-1-05 (Start Time Selection) applies for the reconnect to take place.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 351
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-15-09 K-CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding<br />
Hop Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the maximum number of multiple Call Forwarding<br />
hops over the K-CCIS network.<br />
Display<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK15 + KI to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use dial pad keys to enter Setting Data.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move cursor left<br />
Lto move cursor right<br />
K~ Ito enter numeric data<br />
4 Press G to write the data.<br />
5 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
0 9 : C C I S M A X T R F 5<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
7-1 Card Interface Slot Assignment<br />
7-3-01 MIF (LCR) Assignment<br />
7-3-02 MIF (SMDR) Assignment<br />
1-15-00 K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection<br />
1-15-01 Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignment<br />
1-15-02 Common Signal Channel Assignment<br />
1-15-03 Originating Point Code Assignment<br />
1-15-04 Destination Point Code Assignment<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
1-15-05 Destination Point Code Transfer Assignment<br />
1-15-06 Originating Office Code Number Assignment<br />
Default Values:<br />
5<br />
Range: 1~7<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
15<br />
Data No.<br />
09<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AW<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 352 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong> (Continued)<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-15-07 K-CCIS Message Response Timeout Assignment<br />
1-15-08 Link Reconnect Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-10 Calling Name Display Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-11 Centralized Billing Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-12 Centralized Billing – Point Code of Center Office Assignment<br />
1-15-13 Centralized Day/Night Switching for Remote Office Assignment<br />
1-15-14 Centralized Day/Night Switching for Main Office Assignment<br />
1-15-15 Centralized BLF Send Point Code Assignment<br />
1-15-16 Centralized BLF Send Extension Number Assignment<br />
1-15-17 Centralized BLF Send Time Assignment<br />
1-15-18 Centralized BLF Display Extension Number Assignment<br />
3-70 CIC Number Assignment<br />
5-05 Common Signaling Channel Route Selection<br />
1-1-05 Start Time Selection<br />
1-5-02 SMDR Print Format<br />
1-5-13 Printer Connected Selection<br />
1-5-14 Printer Line Feed Control Selection<br />
1-5-25 SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment<br />
1-5-26 SMDR Incoming/Outgoing Print Selection<br />
1-8-35 COM Port Baud Rate Setting Assignment<br />
4-56 SMDR <strong>Telephone</strong> Print Selection<br />
This Memory Block applies to both traditional K-CCIS with point-to-point T1 lines and IP (K-CCIS).<br />
� Notes �<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 353
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-15-10 Calling Name Display Allow/Deny<br />
Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block per Common Signaling Channel to allow or deny sending the<br />
station name.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
NO YS<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK15 + AK to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data.<br />
5 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Data C-Channel<br />
1~4<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
1 0 : C C H 1 N A M E N 0<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
7-1 Card Interface Slot Assignment<br />
7-3-01 MIF (LCR) Assignment<br />
7-3-02 MIF (SMDR) Assignment<br />
1-15-00 K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection<br />
1-15-01 Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignment<br />
1-15-02 Common Signal Channel Assignment<br />
1-15-03 Originating Point Code Assignment<br />
1-15-04 Destination Point Code Assignment<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
1-15-05 Destination Point Code Transfer Assignment<br />
1-15-06 Originating Office Code Number Assignment<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
15<br />
Data No.<br />
10<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AW<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 354 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong> (Continued)<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-15-07 K-CCIS Message Response Timeout Assignment<br />
1-15-08 Link Reconnect Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-09 K-CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Assignment<br />
1-15-11 Centralized Billing Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-12 Centralized Billing – Point Code of Center Office Assignment<br />
1-15-13 Centralized Day/Night Switching for Remote Office Assignment<br />
1-15-14 Centralized Day/Night Switching for Main Office Assignment<br />
1-15-15 Centralized BLF Send Point Code Assignment<br />
1-15-16 Centralized BLF Send Extension Number Assignment<br />
1-15-17 Centralized BLF Send Time Assignment<br />
1-15-18 Centralized BLF Display Extension Number Assignment<br />
3-70 CIC Number Assignment<br />
5-05 Common Signaling Channel Route Selection<br />
1-1-05 Start Time Selection<br />
1-5-02 SMDR Print Format<br />
1-5-13 Printer Connected Selection<br />
1-5-14 Printer Line Feed Control Selection<br />
1-5-25 SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment<br />
1-5-26 SMDR Incoming/Outgoing Print Selection<br />
1-8-35 COM Port Baud Rate Setting Assignment<br />
4-56 SMDR <strong>Telephone</strong> Print Selection<br />
1. This Memory Block determines whether or not the station name is sent to the distant system.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. This Memory Block is not used with and has no effect on the IP (K-CCIS) feature.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 355
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-15-11 Centralized Billing Allow/Deny<br />
Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign the <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> to send billing to the Billing<br />
Center Office (NEAX2000/2400) across the K-CCIS network. <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> does<br />
not support receiving and managing billing information.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
Deny<br />
NO<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Allow<br />
YS<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK15 + A Ato access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data.<br />
5 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
1 1 : B I L L I N G N O<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
7-1 Card Interface Slot Assignment<br />
7-3-01 MIF (LCR) Assignment<br />
7-3-02 MIF (SMDR) Assignment<br />
1-15-00 K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection<br />
1-15-01 Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignment<br />
1-15-02 Common Signal Channel Assignment<br />
1-15-03 Originating Point Code Assignment<br />
1-15-04 Destination Point Code Assignment<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
1-15-05 Destination Point Code Transfer Assignment<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
15<br />
Data No.<br />
11<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AW<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 356 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong> (Continued)<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-15-06 Originating Office Code Number Assignment<br />
1-15-07 K-CCIS Message Response Timeout Assignment<br />
1-15-08 Link Reconnect Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-09 K-CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Assignment<br />
1-15-10 Calling Name Display Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-12 Centralized Billing – Point Code of Center Office Assignment<br />
1-15-13 Centralized Day/Night Switching for Remote Office Assignment<br />
1-15-14 Centralized Day/Night Switching for Main Office Assignment<br />
1-15-15 Centralized BLF Send Point Code Assignment<br />
1-15-16 Centralized BLF Send Extension Number Assignment<br />
1-15-17 Centralized BLF Send Time Assignment<br />
1-15-18 Centralized BLF Display Extension Number Assignment<br />
3-70 CIC Number Assignment<br />
5-05 Common Signaling Channel Route Selection<br />
1-1-05 Start Time Selection<br />
1-5-02 SMDR Print Format<br />
1-5-13 Printer Connected Selection<br />
1-5-14 Printer Line Feed Control Selection<br />
1-5-25 SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment<br />
1-5-26 SMDR Incoming/Outgoing Print Selection<br />
1-8-35 COM Port Baud Rate Setting Assignment<br />
4-56 SMDR <strong>Telephone</strong> Print Selection<br />
Memory Block 1-15-00 (K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection) does not apply for the Centralized<br />
Billing - K-CCIS feature.<br />
� Notes �<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 357
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-15-12 Centralized Billing – Point Code of<br />
Center Office Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign the Common Signaling Channel number and point<br />
code of the Billing Center Office (NEAX2000/2400).<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK15 + AB to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use dial pad keys to enter C-Channel and Point Code.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move cursor left<br />
Lto move cursor right<br />
K~ Ito enter numeric data<br />
Point code range is 00001~16367.<br />
4 Press G to write the data, and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
C-Ch<br />
1~4<br />
1 2 : B I L C C H O<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
7-1 Card Interface Slot Assignment<br />
7-3-01 MIF (LCR) Assignment<br />
7-3-02 MIF (SMDR) Assignment<br />
Point<br />
Code<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
1-15-00 K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection<br />
1-15-01 Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignment<br />
1-15-02 Common Signal Channel Assignment<br />
1-15-03 Originating Point Code Assignment<br />
1-15-04 Destination Point Code Assignment<br />
1-15-05 Destination Point Code Transfer Assignment<br />
Default Values:<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 358 Memory Blocks<br />
Blank<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
15<br />
Data No.<br />
12<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AW
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong> (Continued)<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-15-06 Originating Office Code Number Assignment<br />
1-15-07 K-CCIS Message Response Timeout Assignment<br />
1-15-08 Link Reconnect Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-09 K-CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Assignment<br />
1-15-10 Calling Name Display Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-11 Centralized Billing Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-13 Centralized Day/Night Switching for Remote Office Assignment<br />
1-15-14 Centralized Day/Night Switching for Main Office Assignment<br />
1-15-15 Centralized BLF Send Point Code Assignment<br />
1-15-16 Centralized BLF Send Extension Number Assignment<br />
1-15-17 Centralized BLF Send Time Assignment<br />
1-15-18 Centralized BLF Display Extension Number Assignment<br />
3-70 CIC Number Assignment<br />
5-05 Common Signaling Channel Route Selection<br />
1-1-05 Start Time Selection<br />
1-5-02 SMDR Print Format<br />
1-5-13 Printer Connected Selection<br />
1-5-14 Printer Line Feed Control Selection<br />
1-5-25 SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment<br />
1-5-26 SMDR Incoming/Outgoing Print Selection<br />
1-8-35 COM Port Baud Rate Setting Assignment<br />
4-56 SMDR <strong>Telephone</strong> Print Selection<br />
1. The <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> can be only a Remote Office for a NEAX2000/2400 Billing Center Office.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. When the <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> is a tandem office and Billing Information is not required, this assignment is not<br />
necessary.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 359
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-15-13 Centralized Day/Night Switching for<br />
Remote Office Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign the <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> to switch Day/Night mode when<br />
it receives the command from a main office.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
Deny<br />
(NO)<br />
Allow<br />
(YS)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK15 + AC to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data, and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
1 3 : C E N D / N N O<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
7-1 Card Interface Slot Assignment<br />
7-3-01 MIF (LCR) Assignment<br />
7-3-02 MIF (SMDR) Assignment<br />
1-15-00 K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection<br />
1-15-01 Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignment<br />
1-15-02 Common Signal Channel Assignment<br />
1-15-03 Originating Point Code Assignment<br />
1-15-04 Destination Point Code Assignment<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
1-15-05 Destination Point Code Transfer Assignment<br />
1-15-06 Originating Office Code Number Assignment<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
15<br />
Data No.<br />
13<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AW<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 360 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong> (Continued)<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-15-07 K-CCIS Message Response Timeout Assignment<br />
1-15-08 Link Reconnect Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-09 K-CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Assignment<br />
1-15-10 Calling Name Display Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-11 Centralized Billing Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-12 Centralized Billing – Point Code of Center Office Assignment<br />
1-15-14 Centralized Day/Night Switching for Main Office Assignment<br />
1-15-15 Centralized BLF Send Point Code Assignment<br />
1-15-16 Centralized BLF Send Extension Number Assignment<br />
1-15-17 Centralized BLF Send Time Assignment<br />
1-15-18 Centralized BLF Display Extension Number Assignment<br />
3-70 CIC Number Assignment<br />
5-05 Common Signaling Channel Route Selection<br />
1-1-05 Start Time Selection<br />
1-5-02 SMDR Print Format<br />
1-5-13 Printer Connected Selection<br />
1-5-14 Printer Line Feed Control Selection<br />
1-5-25 SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment<br />
1-5-26 SMDR Incoming/Outgoing Print Selection<br />
1-8-35 COM Port Baud Rate Setting Assignment<br />
4-56 SMDR <strong>Telephone</strong> Print Selection<br />
1. Memory Block 1-15-00 (K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection) is used for the Centralized Day/Night<br />
Switching - K-CCIS feature when using traditional K-CCIS with point-to-point T1 lines.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. This Memory Block is used for the Remote Office only.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 361
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-15-14 Centralized Day/Night Switching for<br />
Main Office Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign the Point Codes and the CCH Channel to control<br />
remote systems for Centralized Day/Night Switching.<br />
A CCH Channel of i can be assigned for K-CCIS over IP (R1500 or higher).<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK15 + AD to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use dial pad keys to enter Table number, CCH Channel, and Point Code.<br />
Press Redial + 1 to assign i for K-CCIS over IP (R1500 or higher).<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move cursor left<br />
Lto move cursor right<br />
K~ Ito enter numeric data<br />
Point code range is 00001~16367.<br />
Tables 01~16 can be assigned.<br />
4 Press G to write the data, and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each table. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Table<br />
01~16<br />
Point<br />
Code<br />
1 4 : T 0 1 : = 0<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
7-1 Card Interface Slot Assignment<br />
7-3-01 MIF (LCR) Assignment<br />
7-3-02 MIF (SMDR) Assignment<br />
1-15-00 K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection<br />
CCH<br />
Channel<br />
1~4, i<br />
1-15-01 Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignment<br />
Default Values:<br />
All Tables Not Specified<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
15<br />
Data No.<br />
14<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AW<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 362 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong> (Continued)<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-15-02 Common Signal Channel Assignment<br />
1-15-03 Originating Point Code Assignment<br />
1-15-04 Destination Point Code Assignment<br />
1-15-05 Destination Point Code Transfer Assignment<br />
1-15-06 Originating Office Code Number Assignment<br />
1-15-07 K-CCIS Message Response Timeout Assignment<br />
1-15-08 Link Reconnect Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-09 K-CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Assignment<br />
1-15-10 Calling Name Display Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-11 Centralized Billing Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-12 Centralized Billing – Point Code of Center Office Assignment<br />
1-15-13 Centralized Day/Night Switching for Remote Office Assignment<br />
1-15-15 Centralized BLF Send Point Code Assignment<br />
1-15-16 Centralized BLF Send Extension Number Assignment<br />
1-15-17 Centralized BLF Send Time Assignment<br />
1-15-18 Centralized BLF Display Extension Number Assignment<br />
3-70 CIC Number Assignment<br />
5-05 Common Signaling Channel Route Selection<br />
1-1-05 Start Time Selection<br />
1-5-02 SMDR Print Format<br />
1-5-13 Printer Connected Selection<br />
1-5-14 Printer Line Feed Control Selection<br />
1-5-25 SMDR Valid Call Time Assignment<br />
1-5-26 SMDR Incoming/Outgoing Print Selection<br />
1-8-35 COM Port Baud Rate Setting Assignment<br />
4-56 SMDR <strong>Telephone</strong> Print Selection<br />
1. Memory Block 1-15-00 (K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection) is used for the Centralized Day/Night Switching<br />
feature.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. This Memory Block is used for the Main Office only.<br />
3. Up to 16 Remote Offices can be controlled by a Main Office.<br />
4. The <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> cannot be a Main Office for a NEAX2000/2400 PBX.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 363
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-15-15 Centralized BLF Send Point<br />
Code Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign the Destination Point Codes and the CCH Channel<br />
of systems to be sent Centralized BLF messages. A CCH Channel of i can be<br />
assigned for K-CCIS over IP.<br />
R1500 or higher is required.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK15 + AE to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use dial pad keys to enter Group No., CCH Channel, and Point Code.<br />
Press Redial + 1 to assign i for K-CCIS over IP (R1500 or higher).<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move cursor left<br />
Lto move cursor right<br />
K~ Ito enter numeric data<br />
Point code range is 00001~16367.<br />
Group No. 1~8 can be assigned.<br />
4 Press G to write the data, and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each Group No.<br />
6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
Group<br />
No.<br />
1~8<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Point<br />
Code<br />
1 5 : S E N D 1 : = 0<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
7-1 Card Interface Slot Assignment<br />
1-8-08 Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2 (Page 6, LK 2)<br />
1-15-00 K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection<br />
1-15-01 Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignment<br />
1-15-02 Common Signal Channel Assignment<br />
CCH<br />
Channel<br />
1~4, i<br />
Default Values:<br />
All Tables Not Specified<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
15<br />
Data No.<br />
15<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AW<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 364 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong> (Continued)<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-15-03 Originating Point Code Assignment<br />
1-15-04 Destination Point Code Assignment<br />
1-15-05 Destination Point Code Transfer Assignment<br />
1-15-06 Originating Office Code Number Assignment<br />
1-15-07 K-CCIS Message Response Timeout Assignment<br />
1-15-08 Link Reconnect Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-09 K-CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Assignment<br />
1-15-10 Calling Name Display Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-11 Centralized Billing Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-12 Centralized Billing – Point Code of Center Office Assignment<br />
1-15-13 Centralized Day/Night Switching for Remote Office Assignment<br />
1-15-14 Centralized Day/Night Switching for Main Office Assignment<br />
1-15-16 Centralized BLF Send Extension Number Assignment<br />
1-15-17 Centralized BLF Send Time Assignment<br />
1-15-18 Centralized BLF Display Extension Number Assignment<br />
3-70 CIC Number Assignment<br />
4-12 Line Key Selection for <strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
4-17 Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment<br />
5-05 Common Signaling Channel Route Assignment<br />
Up to eight Remote Offices can be sent Busy Lamp Field (BLF) status messages.<br />
� Notes �<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 365
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-15-16 Centralized BLF Send Extension<br />
Number Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign the Extension Numbers for sending Centralized BLF<br />
messages.<br />
R1500 or higher is required.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
Send Group<br />
1<br />
Send Group<br />
2<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
Send Group<br />
3<br />
Send Group<br />
4<br />
Send Group<br />
5<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK15 + AF to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use dial pad keys to enter Table number and Extension No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move cursor left<br />
Lto move cursor right<br />
Table<br />
No.<br />
(001~120<br />
1 5 : S E N D 0 0 1 =<br />
K~ Ito enter numeric data<br />
Three Digit Extension Number: 100~899<br />
Four Digit Extension Number: 1000~8999<br />
Tables 001~120 can be assigned.<br />
Send Group<br />
6<br />
4 Press corresponding CO/PBX line key to select the Send Group No.<br />
5 Press G to write the data, and display the next Memory Block.<br />
6 Repeat Steps 4 and 5 for each Send Group No.<br />
Extension<br />
Number<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
7 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Send Group<br />
7<br />
Send Group<br />
8<br />
Default Values:<br />
All Tables Not Specified<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
15<br />
Data No.<br />
16<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AW<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 366 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
7-1 Card Interface Slot Assignment<br />
1-8-08 Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2 (Page 6, LK 2)<br />
1-15-00 K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection<br />
1-15-01 Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignment<br />
1-15-02 Common Signal Channel Assignment<br />
1-15-03 Originating Point Code Assignment<br />
1-15-04 Destination Point Code Assignment<br />
1-15-05 Destination Point Code Transfer Assignment<br />
1-15-06 Originating Office Code Number Assignment<br />
1-15-07 K-CCIS Message Response Timeout Assignment<br />
1-15-08 Link Reconnect Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-09 K-CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Assignment<br />
1-15-10 Calling Name Display Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-11 Centralized Billing Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-12 Centralized Billing – Point Code of Center Office Assignment<br />
1-15-13 Centralized Day/Night Switching for Remote Office Assignment<br />
1-15-14 Centralized Day/Night Switching for Main Office Assignment<br />
1-15-15 Centralized BLF Send Extension Number Assignment<br />
1-15-17 Centralized BLF Send Time Assignment<br />
1-15-18 Centralized BLF Display Extension Number Assignment<br />
3-70 CIC Number Assignment<br />
4-12 Line Key Selection for <strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
4-17 Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment<br />
5-05 Common Signaling Channel Route Assignment<br />
1. The Send Group Number selected by the Line Key is the Group number assigned in Memory Block 1-15-15<br />
(Centralized BLF Send Point Code Assignment).<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. Up to 120 Extension Numbers (entries in the table) can be assigned to send BLF messages. With each assigned<br />
extension number, up to eight destination offices can be selected until 240 extension numbers are assigned.<br />
3. A maximum of 240 total sending Extension Numbers (BLF messages) can be assigned. If 30 Extension<br />
Numbers (entries in the table) are assigned with each set for all eight groups (systems), the 240 limit is reached<br />
and no more Extension Numbers can be entered.<br />
4. When a Send Group (Point Code) is cleared in Memory Block 1-15-15, it is also cleared in this Memory Block.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 367
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-15-17 Centralized BLF Send Time<br />
Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign the time interval for sending BLF information across<br />
the K-CCIS Network.<br />
R1500 or higher is required.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
4 Seconds<br />
(04s)<br />
8 Seconds<br />
(08s)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
12 Seconds<br />
(12s)<br />
16 Seconds<br />
(16s)<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK15 + AG to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data, and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
1 7 : S E N D T I M E 0 4 s<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
7-1 Card Interface Slot Assignment<br />
7-3-01 MIF (LCR) Assignment<br />
7-3-02 MIF (SMDR) Assignment<br />
1-15-00 K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection<br />
1-15-01 Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignment<br />
1-15-02 Common Signal Channel Assignment<br />
1-15-03 Originating Point Code Assignment<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
1-15-04 Destination Point Code Assignment<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
15<br />
Data No.<br />
17<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AW<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 368 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong> (Continued)<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-15-05 Destination Point Code Transfer Assignment<br />
1-15-06 Originating Office Code Number Assignment<br />
1-15-07 K-CCIS Message Response Timeout Assignment<br />
1-15-08 Link Reconnect Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-09 K-CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Assignment<br />
1-15-10 Calling Name Display Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-11 Centralized Billing Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-12 Centralized Billing – Point Code of Center Office Assignment<br />
1-15-13 Centralized Day/Night Switching for Remote Office Assignment<br />
1-15-14 Centralized Day/Night Switching for Main Office Assignment<br />
1-15-15 Centralized BLF Send Point Code Assignment<br />
1-15-16 Centralized BLF Send Extension Number Assignment<br />
1-15-18 Centralized BLF Display Extension Number Assignment<br />
3-70 CIC Number Assignment<br />
4-12 Line Key Selection for <strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
4-17 Station to Class of Service Feature Selection<br />
5-05 Common Signaling Channel Route Selection<br />
The BLF messages are sent in a four-second cycle (at default), so some delay occurs to change the indication in the<br />
destination office. In the network configured with two systems, it can take four to five seconds (at default) to change<br />
the BLF indication in the destination office.<br />
� Notes �<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 369
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-15-18 Centralized BLF Receive Extension<br />
Number Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign the Extension Numbers of remote systems to receive<br />
Centralized BLF messages.<br />
R1500 or higher is required.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK15 + AH to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use dial pad keys to enter Table No. and Extension No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move cursor left<br />
Lto move cursor right<br />
K~ Ito enter numeric data<br />
Setting data includes:<br />
�<br />
Three Digit Extension Numbers: 100~899<br />
Four Digit Extension Numbers: 1000~8999<br />
Tables: 001~120<br />
4 Press G to write the data, and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each Table No.<br />
6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
Table<br />
Number<br />
001~120<br />
1 8 : B L F 0 0 1 =<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
7-1 Card Interface Slot Assignment<br />
Extension<br />
Number<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
1-8-08 Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2 (Page 6, LK 2)<br />
1-15-00 K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection<br />
1-15-01 Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignment<br />
1-15-02 Common Signal Channel Assignment<br />
Default Values:<br />
All Tables Not Specified<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
15<br />
Data No.<br />
18<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AW<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 370 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong> (Continued)<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-15-03 Originating Point Code Assignment<br />
1-15-04 Destination Point Code Assignment<br />
1-15-05 Destination Point Code Transfer Assignment<br />
1-15-06 Originating Office Code Number Assignment<br />
1-15-07 K-CCIS Message Response Timeout Assignment<br />
1-15-08 Link Reconnect Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-09 K-CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Assignment<br />
1-15-10 Calling Name Display Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-11 Centralized Billing Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-12 Centralized Billing – Point Code of Center Office Assignment<br />
1-15-13 Centralized Day/Night Switching for Remote Office Assignment<br />
1-15-14 Centralized Day/Night Switching for Main Office Assignment<br />
1-15-15 Centralized BLF Send Point Code Assignment<br />
1-15-16 Centralized BLF Send Extension Number Assignment<br />
1-15-17 Centralized BLF Send Time Assignment<br />
3-70 CIC Number Assignment<br />
4-12 Line Key Selection for <strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
4-17 Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment<br />
5-05 Common Signaling Channel Route Assignment<br />
1. Up to 120 remote <strong>Telephone</strong>’s BLF can be received per system.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. All Multiline Terminals in the system can assign DSS/BLF keys for the supported remote telephone’s BLF.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 371
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-15-19 Centralized 911 Allow/Deny Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign the <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> installed as a Main Office to<br />
send the Calling Party Number out the CAMA trunk when an emergency 911 call is<br />
originated from a remote K-CCIS office.<br />
This Memory Block is used at the main office and tandem offices.<br />
R2000 or higher is required.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
NO (Deny) YS (Allow)<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK15 + AI to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data, and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
1 9 : C E N 9 1 1 N O<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-8-43 Enhanced 911 Trunk Assignment<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
1-8-44 Enhanced 911 Alternate Route Assignment<br />
1-8-45 Enhanced 911 Alternate Route Assignment (Maintenance Busy)<br />
1-8-46 Enhanced 911 Dialing Digit Assignment<br />
1-15-20 Centralized 911 Originating Number Selection<br />
1-15-21 Centralized 911 Look Ahead Routing Allow/Deny Selection<br />
4-54 Enhanced 911 CESID to Station Table Assignment<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
15<br />
Data No.<br />
19<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AW<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 372 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
� �<br />
1. Assign this Memory Block to YS (Allow) at the Main Office and all tandem offices to allow the Calling Party<br />
Number to be sent out on the CAMA or an ISDN PRI trunk when a 911 call is received from a remote K-CCIS<br />
Notes<br />
system.<br />
2. This system data must be set at the Main Office and any tandem office that passes E911 calls.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 373
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-15-20 Centralized 911/Calling Party (CPN)<br />
Originating Number Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign the <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> installed as a Remote K-CCIS<br />
Office to send the Station Number or CES-ID or Calling Party Number for Calling Party<br />
Number information to the Main Office when an Emergency 911 call is originated.<br />
This Memory Block is used at remote offices only.<br />
R2000 or higher is required.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
STA.<br />
(Station<br />
No.)<br />
CESID<br />
(CES-ID)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK15 + BK to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data, and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
2 0 : 9 1 1 O R G S T A .<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
1-8-43 Enhanced 911 Trunk Assignment<br />
1-8-44 Enhanced 911 Alternate Route Assignment<br />
1-8-45 Enhanced 911 Alternate Route Assignment (Maintenance Busy)<br />
1-8-46 Enhanced 911 Dialing Digit Assignment<br />
1-15-19 Centralized 911 Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-21 Centralized 911 Look Ahead Routing Allow/Deny Selection<br />
The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
15<br />
Data No.<br />
20<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AW<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 374 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong> (Continued)<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
4-54 Enhanced 911 CESID to Station Table Assignment<br />
4-62 ISDN-PRI Directory Number<br />
1. Use this Memory Block for 911 outgoing calls from a remote office to select Station Number or CES-ID for Calling<br />
Party Number information. When the main office is a NEAX2000 or <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong>, this data is set to CES-ID.<br />
When the main office is a NEAX2400, this data is set to Station Number.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. This system data is used at remote offices only.<br />
3. This Memory Block is used when the following K-CCIS features are used:<br />
Centralized E911 – K-CCIS<br />
�<br />
Calling Party Number (CPN) Presentation from Station Information<br />
�<br />
4. Use Memory Block 4-54 (Enhanced 911 CESID to Station Table Assignment) to provide the CESID for 911 Calls.<br />
5. Use Memory Block 4-62 (ISDN-PRI Directory Number) to provide The Calling Party Number (CPN) Presentation<br />
from Station Information.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 375
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
1-15-21 Centralized 911 Look Ahead Routing<br />
Allow/ Deny Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign the <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> installed at a remote K-CCIS<br />
office to allow an alternate line to be used when all trunks at the main office are busy<br />
when an Emergency 911 call is originated at the remote K-CCIS office.<br />
This Memory Block is used at remote offices only.<br />
R2000 or higher is required.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
NO (Deny) YS (Allow)<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK15 + BA to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data, and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
2 1 : 9 1 1 R O U T I N G N O<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-8-43 Enhanced 911 Trunk Assignment<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
1-8-44 Enhanced 911 Alternate Route Assignment<br />
1-8-45 Enhanced 911 Alternate Route Assignment (Maintenance Busy)<br />
1-8-46 Enhanced 911 Dialing Digit Assignment<br />
1-15-19 Centralized 911Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-20 Centralized 911 Originating Number Selection<br />
4-54 Enhanced 911 CESID to Station Table Assignment<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
15<br />
Data No.<br />
21<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AW<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 376 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
� �<br />
1. When no outgoing trunks are available at the main or tandem office, and a 911 call is originated at the remote<br />
office, the following alternate outgoing process is applied when this Memory Block is set to YS (allow):<br />
Notes<br />
When a trunk number is assigned in Memory Block 1-8-43, and a Centralized 911 call is originated, the <strong>Electra</strong><br />
<strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> searches for an idle trunk in the Trunk Group (TG)/Route Advance Block (RAB) assigned in Memory<br />
Block 1-8-44.<br />
When an RAB is assigned in Memory Block 1-8-43, and a Centralized 911 call is originated, the <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
searches for an idle line in the TG that has lower priority in the route advance block assigned in Memory Block<br />
1-8-43, and then searches for an idle line in the trunk group/route advance block assigned in Memory Block<br />
1-8-44.<br />
When a Centralized E911call is originated by an RAB assigned by Memory Block 1-8-44, the <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
searches for an idle line in the Trunk Group with lower priority than the RAB assigned in Memory Block 1-8-44.<br />
When a Centralized E911 call is originated by a TG assigned in Memory Block 1-8-44 or an idle line cannot be<br />
found in the outgoing line search process, the caller hears a busy tone with BUSY display.<br />
2. This system data is used only at remote offices.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 377
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 378 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-16-00 Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not Auto Negotiation is enabled for each<br />
port of the HUB(8)-U( ) ETU. When No is selected, Memory Block 1-16-01 (Port<br />
Speed Selection 10/100 Base -T) and Memory Block 1-16-02 (Port Duplex Mode<br />
Selection) are used. When equipment with auto negotiation function is connected to a<br />
port, ensure that the YS is set for this Memory Block.<br />
R1500 or higher is required.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
YS NO<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
HUB<br />
1~3<br />
PORT<br />
1~8<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK16 to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data.<br />
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each Port.<br />
6 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
Title<br />
0 0 : 1 - 1 A U T O Y S<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
16<br />
Data No.<br />
00<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AB<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 379
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
7-1 Card Interface Slot Selection<br />
1-16-01 Port Speed Selection – 10/100 Base T<br />
1-16-02 Port Duplex Mode Selection<br />
1-16-03 MDI/MDIX Mode Selection<br />
1-16-04 VLAN Mode Selection<br />
1-16-05 Default VLAN ID Tag Insertion Assignment<br />
1-16-06 Port Based Priority Selection<br />
1-16-07 High Priority RX Tag Threshold<br />
1-16-08 High Priority TX Tag Assignment<br />
1-16-09 Low Priority TX Tag Assignment<br />
1-16-10 Port Mirroring Selection<br />
1-16-11 Mirroring Source Port Assignment<br />
1-16-12 Mirroring Target Port Assignment<br />
1-16-13 VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment<br />
1-16-14 Port VLAN Group Membership<br />
1-16-15 VLAN Tag Insertion Selection<br />
1-16-16 Flow Control for Full Duplex Selection<br />
1-16-17 Back Pressure for Half Duplex Selection<br />
Only one HUB(8)-U( ) ETU can be assigned and installed for each cabinet.<br />
� Notes �<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 380 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-16-01 Port Speed Selection – 10/100 Base-T<br />
General Description<br />
When Memory Block 1-16-00 (Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection) is set to NO, use<br />
this Memory Block to specify the Ethernet port speed as 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps for<br />
each port of each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU.<br />
R1500 or higher is required.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
10 100<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
HUB<br />
1~3<br />
PORT<br />
1~8<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK16 + JJKAto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data.<br />
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each port.<br />
6 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
Title<br />
0 1 : 1 - 1 S P E E D 1 0 0<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
16<br />
Data No.<br />
01<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AB<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 381
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
7-1 Card Interface Slot Selection<br />
1-16-00 Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection<br />
1-16-02 Port Duplex Mode Selection<br />
1-16-03 MDI/MDIX Mode Selection<br />
1-16-04 VLAN Mode Selection<br />
1-16-05 Default VLAN ID Tag Insertion Assignment<br />
1-16-06 Port Based Priority Selection<br />
1-16-07 High Priority RX Tag Threshold<br />
1-16-08 High Priority TX Tag Assignment<br />
1-16-09 Low Priority TX Tag Assignment<br />
1-16-10 Port Mirroring Selection<br />
1-16-11 Mirroring Source Port Assignment<br />
1-16-12 Mirroring Target Port Assignment<br />
1-16-13 VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment<br />
1-16-14 Port VLAN Group Membership<br />
1-16-15 VLAN Tag Insertion Selection<br />
1-16-16 Flow Control for Full Duplex Selection<br />
1-16-17 Back Pressure for Half Duplex Selection<br />
1. Only one HUB(8)-U( ) ETU can be assigned and installed for each cabinet.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. This Memory Block is effective only when Memory BLock 1-16-00 (Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection) is set to<br />
NO.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 382 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-16-02 Port Duplex Mode Selection<br />
General Description<br />
When Memory Block 1-16-00 (Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection) is set to NO, use<br />
this Memory Block to specify duplex mode (HALF or FULL) for each port of each<br />
HUB(8)-U( ) ETU.<br />
R1500 or higher is required.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
HALF FULL<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
HUB<br />
1~3<br />
PORT<br />
1~8<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK16 + JJKBto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data.<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each port of each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU.<br />
6 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
Title<br />
0 2 : 1 - 1 H A L F D U P L<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
16<br />
Data No.<br />
02<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AB<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 383
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
7-1 Card Interface Slot Selection<br />
1-16-00 Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection<br />
1-16-01 Port Speed Selection – 10/100 Base T<br />
1-16-03 MDI/MDIX Mode Selection<br />
1-16-04 VLAN Mode Selection<br />
1-16-05 Default VLAN ID Tag Insertion Assignment<br />
1-16-06 Port Based Priority Selection<br />
1-16-07 High Priority RX Tag Threshold<br />
1-16-08 High Priority TX Tag Assignment<br />
1-16-09 Low Priority TX Tag Assignment<br />
1-16-10 Port Mirroring Selection<br />
1-16-11 Mirroring Source Port Assignment<br />
1-16-12 Mirroring Target Port Assignment<br />
1-16-13 VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment<br />
1-16-14 Port VLAN Group Membership<br />
1-16-15 VLAN Tag Insertion Selection<br />
1-16-16 Flow Control for Full Duplex Selection<br />
1-16-17 Back Pressure for Half Duplex Selection<br />
1. Only one HUB(8)-U( ) ETU can be assigned and installed for each cabinet.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. This Memory Block is effective only when Memory Block 1-16-00 (Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection) is set to<br />
NO.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 384 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-16-03 MDI/MDIX Mode Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify an MDI/MDIX mode for each port of each<br />
HUB(8)-U( ) ETU.<br />
R1500 or higher is required.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
MDIX MDI Auto<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
HUB<br />
1~3<br />
PORT<br />
1~8<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK16 +JJKC to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data.<br />
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each Port of each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU.<br />
6 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
Title<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
0 3 : 1 - 1 M O D E A U T O<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
16<br />
Data No.<br />
03<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AB<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 385
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
7-1 Card Interface Slot Selection<br />
1-16-00 Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection<br />
1-16-01 Port Speed Selection – 10/100 Base T<br />
1-16-02 Port Duplex Mode Selection<br />
1-16-04 VLAN Mode Selection<br />
1-16-05 Default VLAN ID Tag Insertion Assignment<br />
1-16-06 Port Based Priority Selection<br />
1-16-07 High Priority RX Tag Threshold<br />
1-16-08 High Priority TX Tag Assignment<br />
1-16-09 Low Priority TX Tag Assignment<br />
1-16-10 Port Mirroring Selection<br />
1-16-11 Mirroring Source Port Assignment<br />
1-16-12 Mirroring Target Port Assignment<br />
1-16-13 VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment<br />
1-16-14 Port VLAN Group Membership<br />
1-16-15 VLAN Tag Insertion Selection<br />
1-16-16 Flow Control for Full Duplex Selection<br />
1-16-17 Back Pressure for Half Duplex Selection<br />
1. Only one HUB(8)-U( ) ETU can be assigned and installed for each cabinet.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. MDI/MDIX is an Ethernet port connection using twisted-pair cable. Medium Dependent Interface (MDI) is the<br />
Media Attachment Unit (MAU) component that provides the physical and electrical connection to the cabling<br />
medium. An MDIX (MDI crossover) is an MDI version that enables cabling between like devices. MDI ports<br />
connect to MDIX ports using straight-through twisted-pair cabling; both MDI-to-MDI and MDIX to-MDIX<br />
connections use crossover twisted-pair cabling.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 386 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-16-04 VLAN Mode Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not IEEE 802.1q VLAN Tagging is<br />
enabled for each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU. This Memory Block must also be enabled to use<br />
IEEE 802.p Priority. Priority options can be enabled in Memory Block 1-16-06 (Port<br />
Based Priority Selection), Memory Block 1-16-07(High Priority RX Tag Threshold),<br />
Memory Block 1-16-08 (High Priority TX Tag Assignment), and Memory Block 1-16-09<br />
(Low Priority TX Tag Assignment).<br />
R1500 or higher is required.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
NO YS<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
HUB<br />
1~3<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK16 +JJKD to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data.<br />
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU.<br />
6 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
Title<br />
0 4 : 1 V L A N N O<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
16<br />
Data No.<br />
04<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AB<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 387
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
7-1 Card Interface Slot Selection<br />
1-16-00 Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection<br />
1-16-01 Port Speed Selection – 10/100 Base T<br />
1-16-02 Port Duplex Mode Selection<br />
1-16-03 MDI/MDIX Mode Selection<br />
1-16-05 Default VLAN ID Tag Insertion Assignment<br />
1-16-06 Port Based Priority Selection<br />
1-16-07 High Priority RX Tag Threshold<br />
1-16-08 High Priority TX Tag Assignment<br />
1-16-09 Low Priority TX Tag Assignment<br />
1-16-10 Port Mirroring Selection<br />
1-16-11 Mirroring Source Port Assignment<br />
1-16-12 Mirroring Target Port Assignment<br />
1-16-13 VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment<br />
1-16-14 Port VLAN Group Membership<br />
1-16-15 VLAN Tag Insertion Selection<br />
1-16-16 Flow Control for Full Duplex Selection<br />
1-16-17 Back Pressure for Half Duplex Selection<br />
1. Only one HUB(8)-U( ) ETU can be assigned and installed for each cabinet.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. A virtual (logical) LAN is a local area network with a definition that maps workstations on a basis other than<br />
geographic location (for example: department, user type, or primary application). The virtual LAN controller can<br />
change or add workstations and manage load balancing and bandwidth allocation easier than with a physical<br />
picture of the LAN. Network management software keeps track of relating the virtual picture of the LAN with the<br />
actual physical picture.<br />
3. When VLAN Mode is enabled, the port based Tag VLAN feature can be used. In Tag VLAN mode, a received<br />
frame is switched according to a combination of the Address and VLAN ID. When the incoming frame is not<br />
tagged or VLAN ID = 0, the VLAN ID is set to the default assigned by Memory Block 1-16-05 (Default VLAN ID<br />
Assignment). Default LAN ID range is 0001~4095 (0x001~0xfff Hex).<br />
4. For Tag VLAN feature, the HUB(8)-U( ) ETU has a VLAN table and an entry in the table is Media Access Control<br />
(MAC) address and VLAN ID source dependent. Therefore, multiple entries could have the same address with<br />
different VLAN IDs.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 388 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-16-05 Default VLAN ID Tag Insertion<br />
Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to insert VLAN ID tagging to data frames from network devices<br />
that cannot insert VLAN tags. When data without a VLAN tag is transmitted by the<br />
device on the port, a tag is inserted with the VLAN ID assigned by this Memory Block.<br />
R1500 or higher is required.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
HUB<br />
1~3<br />
PORT<br />
1~8<br />
Title<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK16 + JJKE to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use dial pad keys to enter Setting data.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Use Jto move cursor left<br />
Use Lto move cursor right<br />
Use K~ Ito enter numeric data<br />
VLAN ID range is 0001~4095 (0x001~ 0xfff Hex).<br />
�<br />
4 Press G to write the data.<br />
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each port.<br />
6 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
0 5 : 1 - 1 I D = 0 0 0 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Default Values:<br />
All ports = 0001<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
16<br />
Data No.<br />
05<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AB<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 389
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
7-1 Card Interface Slot Selection<br />
1-16-00 Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection<br />
1-16-01 Port Speed Selection – 10/100 Base T<br />
1-16-02 Port Duplex Mode Selection<br />
1-16-03 MDI/MDIX Mode Selection<br />
1-16-04 VLAN Mode Selection<br />
1-16-06 Port Based Priority Selection<br />
1-16-07 High Priority RX Tag Threshold<br />
1-16-08 High Priority TX Tag Assignment<br />
1-16-09 Low Priority TX Tag Assignment<br />
1-16-10 Port Mirroring Selection<br />
1-16-11 Mirroring Source Port Assignment<br />
1-16-12 Mirroring Target Port Assignment<br />
1-16-13 VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment<br />
1-16-14 Port VLAN Group Membership<br />
1-16-15 VLAN Tag Insertion Selection<br />
1-16-16 Flow Control for Full Duplex Selection<br />
1-16-17 Back Pressure for Half Duplex Selection<br />
1. Only one HUB(8)-U( ) ETU can be assigned and installed per cabinet.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. When Memory Block 1-16-04 (VLAN Mode Selection) is set to YS, this port based Tag VLAN feature can be<br />
used. In the Tag VLAN mode, a received packet is switched according to a combination of the MAC address and<br />
VLAN ID. When the incoming packet is not tagged or the VLAN ID = 0, the VLAN ID is set to the default ID<br />
specified by this Memory Block.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 390 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-16-06 Port Based Priority Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this memory block to specify how frames, reaching the ingress port without VLAN<br />
tags are marked for queuing internally in the HUB(8). The HUB(8) has two queues:<br />
High Priority and Low Priority. When the frame reaches the egress port, settings for<br />
Memory Blocks 1-16-08 (for High Priority frames) and 1-16-09 (for Low Priority<br />
frames) for the egress port are used to convert the low or high priority queue to a<br />
VLAN tag priority (0~7). Set to NO (default), this Memory block does not mark frames<br />
for either queue; Memory Block 1-16-07 then determines the priority queue for where<br />
the frame is sent.<br />
R1500 or higher is required.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
NO<br />
(Not<br />
Assigned)<br />
LO<br />
Low<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
HUB<br />
1~3<br />
PORT<br />
1~8<br />
HI<br />
High<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK16 + JJKF to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data.<br />
Title<br />
0 6 : 1 - 1 Q o S N O<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU.<br />
6 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
16<br />
Data No.<br />
06<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AB<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 391
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
7-1 Card Interface Slot Selection<br />
1-16-00 Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection<br />
1-16-01 Port Speed Selection – 10/100 Base T<br />
1-16-02 Port Duplex Mode Selection<br />
1-16-03 MDI/MDIX Mode Selection<br />
1-16-04 VLAN Mode Selection<br />
1-16-05 Default VLAN ID Tag Insertion Assignment<br />
1-16-07 High Priority RX Tag Threshold<br />
1-16-08 High Priority TX Tag Assignment<br />
1-16-09 Low Priority TX Tag Assignment<br />
1-16-10 Port Mirroring Selection<br />
1-16-11 Mirroring Source Port Assignment<br />
1-16-12 Mirroring Target Port Assignment<br />
1-16-13 VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment<br />
1-16-14 Port VLAN Group Membership<br />
1-16-15 VLAN Tag Insertion Selection<br />
1-16-16 Flow Control for Full Duplex Selection<br />
1-16-17 Back Pressure for Half Duplex Selection<br />
1. Only one HUB(8)-U( ) ETU can be assigned and installed for each cabinet.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. In networks, QoS indicates that transmission rates, error rates, and other characteristics can be measured,<br />
improved, and to some extent, guaranteed in advance. QoS is particularly important for continuous transmission<br />
of high-bandwidth video, multimedia, and voice information.<br />
3. The HUB(8)-U( ) ETU has two priority assignment methods: Port Based Priority ( frame received) or Tag Based<br />
Priority. Unknown Unicast Frames are always set for Low priority.<br />
The Port Based Priority feature can assign priority of all frame except the Unknown Unicast Packets.<br />
The priority of received packets is always that assigned by this Memory Block.<br />
4. When LO or HI is selected, QoS mode follows the setting of this system data only, even when a tagged frame is<br />
received.<br />
5. When NO is selected, the priority of a received frame follows the value of the priority field of the Tag in the<br />
received frame. Low or high priority depends on the setting of Memory Block 1-16-07 (High Priority RX Tag<br />
Threshold).<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 392 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-16-07 High Priority RX Tag Threshold<br />
General Description<br />
The HUB(8) has two queues: High Priority and Low Priority. When Memory Block<br />
1-16-06 is set to NO, and the priority of the VLAN tag is equal to or greater than the<br />
setting in this block, the tag is queued for high priority. Otherwise, it is queued for low<br />
priority. When it is transmitted out the egress port of the HUB(8), it retains its original<br />
VLAN tag priority value.<br />
R1500 or higher is required.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
HUB<br />
1~3<br />
PORT<br />
1~8<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK16 + JJKG to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use dial pad keys to enter Setting data.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Use Jto move cursor left<br />
Use Lto move cursor right<br />
Use K~ Ito enter numeric data<br />
Priority range is lowest 0~7 highest.<br />
�<br />
4 Press G to write the data.<br />
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU port.<br />
6 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
Title<br />
0 7 : 1 - 1 H I G H R X = 7<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
Default Values:<br />
All ports = 7<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
16<br />
Data No.<br />
07<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AB<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 393
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
7-1 Card Interface Slot Selection<br />
1-16-00 Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection<br />
1-16-01 Port Speed Selection – 10/100 Base T<br />
1-16-02 Port Duplex Mode Selection<br />
1-16-03 MDI/MDIX Mode Selection<br />
1-16-04 VLAN Mode Selection<br />
1-16-05 Default VLAN ID Tag Insertion Assignment<br />
1-16-06 Port Based Priority Selection<br />
1-16-08 High Priority TX Tag Assignment<br />
1-16-09 Low Priority TX Tag Assignment<br />
1-16-10 Port Mirroring Selection<br />
1-16-11 Mirroring Source Port Assignment<br />
1-16-12 Mirroring Target Port Assignment<br />
1-16-13 VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment<br />
1-16-14 Port VLAN Group Membership<br />
1-16-15 VLAN Tag Insertion Selection<br />
1-16-16 Flow Control for Full Duplex Selection<br />
1-16-17 Back Pressure for Half Duplex Selection<br />
1. Only one HUB(8)-U( ) ETU can be assigned and installed for each cabinet.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. This Memory Block selects which priority field to assign as High. When a received frame contains a Tag per<br />
IEEE802.1q definition, the HUB(8)-U( ) ETU can assign high priority based on this Memory Block.<br />
3. This Memory Block is effective only when Memory Block 1-16-06 (Port Based Priority Selection) is set to NO.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 394 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-16-08 High Priority TX Tag Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
For frames marked at the ingress port by Memory Block 1-16-06 as High Priority, this<br />
memory block setting on the egress port assigns a value (0 ~7) to the priority field of<br />
the VLAN tag. The default is 7.<br />
R1500 or higher is required.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
HUB<br />
1~3<br />
PORT<br />
1~8<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK16 + JJKH to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use dial pad keys to enter Setting data.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Use Jto move cursor left<br />
Use Lto move cursor right<br />
Use K~ Ito enter numeric data<br />
Priority range is lowest 0~7 highest.<br />
�<br />
4 Press G to write the data.<br />
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each port.<br />
6 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
Title<br />
0 8 : 1 - 1 H I G H T X = 7<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
Default Values:<br />
All ports = 7<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
16<br />
Data No.<br />
08<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AB<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 395
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
7-1 Card Interface Slot Selection<br />
1-16-00 Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection<br />
1-16-01 Port Speed Selection – 10/100 Base T<br />
1-16-02 Port Duplex Mode Selection<br />
1-16-03 MDI/MDIX Mode Selection<br />
1-16-04 VLAN Mode Selection<br />
1-16-05 Default VLAN ID Tag Insertion Assignment<br />
1-16-06 Port Based Priority Selection<br />
1-16-07 High Priority RX Tag Threshold<br />
1-16-09 Low Priority TX Tag Assignment<br />
1-16-10 Port Mirroring Selection<br />
1-16-11 Mirroring Source Port Assignment<br />
1-16-12 Mirroring Target Port Assignment<br />
1-16-13 VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment<br />
1-16-14 Port VLAN Group Membership<br />
1-16-15 VLAN Tag Insertion Selection<br />
1-16-16 Flow Control for Full Duplex Selection<br />
1-16-17 Back Pressure for Half Duplex Selection<br />
1. Only one HUB(8)-U( ) ETU can be assigned and installed for each cabinet.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. When the HUB(8)-U( ) ETU transmits a frame in VLAN mode, the priority field can be assigned for each frame<br />
transmitted by the assignment of this Memory Block.<br />
This Memory Block assigns the priority value for High Priority frames. Memory Block 1-16-09 (Low Priority TX<br />
Tag Assignment) assigns the priority for Low Priority frames.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 396 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-16-09 Low Priority TX Tag Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
For frames marked at the ingress port by Memory Block 1-16-06 as Low Priority, this<br />
memory block setting on the egress port assigns a value (0 ~7) to the priority field of<br />
the VLAN tag. The default is 0.<br />
R1500 or higher is required.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
HUB<br />
1~3<br />
PORT<br />
1~8<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK16 + JJKI to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use dial pad keys to enter Setting data.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Use Jto move cursor left<br />
Use Lto move cursor right<br />
Use K~ Ito enter numeric data<br />
Priority range is lowest 0~7 highest.<br />
�<br />
4 Press G to write the data.<br />
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each port.<br />
6 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
Title<br />
0 9 : 1 - 1 L O W T X = 0<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
Default Values:<br />
All ports = 0<br />
System Mode<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 397<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
16<br />
Data No.<br />
08 09<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AB �+AB
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
7-1 Card Interface Slot Selection<br />
1-16-00 Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection<br />
1-16-01 Port Speed Selection – 10/100 Base T<br />
1-16-02 Port Duplex Mode Selection<br />
1-16-03 MDI/MDIX Mode Selection<br />
1-16-04 VLAN Mode Selection<br />
1-16-05 Default VLAN ID Tag Insertion Assignment<br />
1-16-06 Port Based Priority Selection<br />
1-16-07 High Priority RX Tag Threshold<br />
1-16-08 High Priority TX Tag Assignment<br />
1-16-10 Port Mirroring Selection<br />
1-16-11 Mirroring Source Port Assignment<br />
1-16-12 Mirroring Target Port Assignment<br />
1-16-13 VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment<br />
1-16-14 Port VLAN Group Membership<br />
1-16-15 VLAN Tag Insertion Selection<br />
1-16-16 Flow Control for Full Duplex Selection<br />
1-16-17 Back Pressure for Half Duplex Selection<br />
1. Only one HUB(8)-U( ) ETU can be assigned and installed for each cabinet.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. When the HUB(8)-U( ) ETU transmits a packet in VLAN mode, the priority field can be assigned for each frame<br />
transmitted by the assignment of this Memory Block.<br />
This Memory Block assigns the priority value for Low Priority frames. Memory Block 1-16-08 (High Priority TX<br />
Tag Assignment) assigns the priority for High Priority frames.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 398 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-16-10 Port Mirroring Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not Port Mirroring is enabled for each<br />
HUB(8)-U( ) ETU. The source port and the target port must be members of the same<br />
VLAN(s).<br />
R1500 or higher is required.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
NO<br />
(Normal)<br />
YS<br />
(Mirror)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
HUB<br />
1~3<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK16 + JJAK to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data.<br />
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU.<br />
6 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
Title<br />
1 0 : 1 M I R R O R N O<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
16<br />
Data No.<br />
10<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AB<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 399
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
7-1 Card Interface Slot Selection<br />
1-16-00 Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection<br />
1-16-01 Port Speed Selection – 10/100 Base T<br />
1-16-02 Port Duplex Mode Selection<br />
1-16-03 MDI/MDIX Mode Selection<br />
1-16-04 VLAN Mode Selection<br />
1-16-05 Default VLAN ID Tag Insertion Assignment<br />
1-16-06 Port Based Priority Selection<br />
1-16-07 High Priority RX Tag Threshold<br />
1-16-08 High Priority TX Tag Assignment<br />
1-16-09 Low Priority TX Tag Assignment<br />
1-16-11 Mirroring Source Port Assignment<br />
1-16-12 Mirroring Target Port Assignment<br />
1-16-13 VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment<br />
1-16-14 Port VLAN Group Membership<br />
1-16-15 VLAN Tag Insertion Selection<br />
1-16-16 Flow Control for Full Duplex Selection<br />
1-16-17 Back Pressure for Half Duplex Selection<br />
1. Only one HUB(8)-U( ) ETU can be assigned and installed for each cabinet.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. The HUB(8)-U( ) ETU is an eight-port switching HUB. One port can be set as a source port, and one port can be<br />
set as a target port for port mirroring to monitor traffic data.<br />
3. To allow this function, set this Memory Block to YS, and program Memory Block 1-16-11 (Mirroring Source Port<br />
Selection) and Memory Block 1-16-12 (Mirroring Target Port Selection).<br />
4. When mirroring data to a PC for protocol analysis, an 802.1q/p-aware network interface card is required to<br />
capture tagged frames.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 400 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-16-11 Mirroring Source Port Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
When Port Mirroring is enabled in Memory Block 1-16-10 (Port Mirroring Selection),<br />
use this Memory Block to specify a port with data to be monitored on another port<br />
specified by Memory Block 1-16-12 (Mirroring Target Port Assigment) for each<br />
HUB(8) -U( ) ETU. The source port and target port must be in the same VLAN(s).<br />
R1500 or higher is required.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
HUB<br />
1~3<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK16 + JJAA to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use dial pad keys to enter Setting Data.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Use Jto move cursor left<br />
Use Lto move cursor right<br />
Use K~ Ito enter numeric data<br />
Port range is 1~8.<br />
�<br />
4 Press G to write the data.<br />
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU.<br />
6 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
Title<br />
1 1 : 1 S O U R C E = 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
Default Values:<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 401<br />
Port 1<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
16<br />
Data No.<br />
11<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AB
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
7-1 Card Interface Slot Selection<br />
1-16-00 Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection<br />
1-16-01 Port Speed Selection – 10/100 Base T<br />
1-16-02 Port Duplex Mode Selection<br />
1-16-03 MDI/MDIX Mode Selection<br />
1-16-04 VLAN Mode Selection<br />
1-16-05 Default VLAN ID Tag Insertion Assignment<br />
1-16-06 Port Based Priority Selection<br />
1-16-07 High Priority RX Tag Threshold<br />
1-16-08 High Priority TX Tag Assignment<br />
1-16-09 Low Priority TX Tag Assignment<br />
1-16-10 Port Mirroring Selection<br />
1-16-12 Mirroring Target Port Assignment<br />
1-16-13 VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment<br />
1-16-14 Port VLAN Group Membership<br />
1-16-15 VLAN Tag Insertion Selection<br />
1-16-16 Flow Control for Full Duplex Selection<br />
1-16-17 Back Pressure for Half Duplex Selection<br />
1. Only one HUB(8)-U( ) ETU can be assigned and installed for each cabinet.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. The HUB(8)-U( ) ETU is an eight-port switching HUB. One port can be set as a source port, and one port can be<br />
set as a target port for port mirroring to monitor traffic data.<br />
To allow this function, set Memory Block 1-16-10 (Port Mirroring Selection) to YS, and program Memory Block<br />
1-16-12 (Mirroring Target Port Selection).<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 402 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-16-12 Mirroring Target Port Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
When Port Mirroring is enabled in Memory Block 1-16-10 (Port Mirroring Selection),<br />
use this Memory Block to specify a target port that monitors frames transmitted on the<br />
source port specified by Memory Block 1-16-11 (Mirroring Source Port Assigment) for<br />
each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU. The source port and target port must be in the same VLAN(s).<br />
R1500 or higher is required.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
HUB<br />
1~3<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK16 + JJAB to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use dial pad keys to enter Setting data.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Use Jto move cursor left<br />
Use Lto move cursor right<br />
Use K~ Ito enter numeric data<br />
Port range is 1~8.<br />
�<br />
4 Press G to write the data.<br />
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU.<br />
6 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
Title<br />
1 2 : 1 T A R G E T = 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
Default Values:<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 403<br />
Port 1<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
16<br />
Data No.<br />
12<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AB
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
7-1 Card Interface Slot Selection<br />
1-16-00 Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection<br />
1-16-01 Port Speed Selection – 10/100 Base T<br />
1-16-02 Port Duplex Mode Selection<br />
1-16-03 MDI/MDIX Mode Selection<br />
1-16-04 VLAN Mode Selection<br />
1-16-05 Default VLAN ID Tag Insertion Assignment<br />
1-16-06 Port Based Priority Selection<br />
1-16-07 High Priority RX Tag Threshold<br />
1-16-08 High Priority TX Tag Assignment<br />
1-16-09 Low Priority TX Tag Assignment<br />
1-16-10 Port Mirroring Selection<br />
1-16-11 Mirroring Source Port Assignment<br />
1-16-13 VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment<br />
1-16-14 Port VLAN Group Membership<br />
1-16-15 VLAN Tag Insertion Selection<br />
1-16-16 Flow Control for Full Duplex Selection<br />
1-16-17 Back Pressure for Half Duplex Selection<br />
1. Only one HUB(8)-U( ) ETU can be assigned and installed for each cabinet.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. The HUB(8)-U( ) ETU is an eight-port switching HUB. One port can be set as a source port, and one port can be<br />
set as a target port for port mirroring to monitor traffic data.<br />
To allow this function, set Memory Block 1-16-10 (Port Mirroring Selection) to YS, and program Memory Block<br />
1-16-11 (Mirroring Source Port Selection).<br />
3. When mirroring data to a PC for protocol analysis, an 802.1q/p-aware network interface card is required to<br />
capture tagged frames.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 404 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-16-13 VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to create a list of valid VLAN IDs to be recognized by the<br />
HUB(8)-U( ) ETU.<br />
R1500 or higher is required.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
HUB<br />
1~3<br />
Title<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK16 + JJAC to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use dial pad keys to enter Setting data.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Use Jto move cursor left<br />
Use Lto move cursor right<br />
Use K~ Ito enter numeric data<br />
ID range is 0001~4095 (0x001~ 0xfff Hex).<br />
�<br />
4 Press G to write the data.<br />
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU and VLAN Group.<br />
6 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
Gp VLAN<br />
01~16<br />
1 3 : 1 1 D 0 1 = 0 0 0 0<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
Default Values:<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 405<br />
0000<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
16<br />
Data No.<br />
13<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AB
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
7-1 Card Interface Slot Selection<br />
1-16-00 Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection<br />
1-16-01 Port Speed Selection – 10/100 Base T<br />
1-16-02 Port Duplex Mode Selection<br />
1-16-03 MDI/MDIX Mode Selection<br />
1-16-04 VLAN Mode Selection<br />
1-16-05 Default VLAN ID Tag Insertion Assignment<br />
1-16-06 Port Based Priority Selection<br />
1-16-07 High Priority RX Tag Threshold<br />
1-16-08 High Priority TX Tag Assignment<br />
1-16-09 Low Priority TX Tag Assignment<br />
1-16-10 Port Mirroring Selection<br />
1-16-11 Mirroring Source Port Assignment<br />
1-16-12 Mirroring Target Port Assignment<br />
1-16-14 Port VLAN Group Membership<br />
1-16-15 VLAN Tag Insertion Selection<br />
1-16-16 Flow Control for Full Duplex Selection<br />
1-16-17 Back Pressure for Half Duplex Selection<br />
Only one HUB(8)-U( ) ETU can be assigned and installed for each cabinet.<br />
� Notes �<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 406 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-16-14 Port VLAN Group Membership<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to create a list of accepted VLANs for each port. When<br />
Memory Block 1-16-04 (VLAN Mode Selection) is set to YS, each port accepts<br />
frames tagged with VLAN IDs only when the port is programmed as a member of that<br />
VLAN Group. Frames without VLAN tags are also permitted. When Port Mirroring is<br />
used, the source and target ports must be members of the same VLAN(s).<br />
R1500 or higher is required.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
NO YS<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
HUB<br />
1~3<br />
Title<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK16 + JJAD to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data.<br />
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU and VLAN Group.<br />
6 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
Gp VLAN<br />
01~16<br />
Port<br />
1~8<br />
1 4 : 1 P O R T 0 1 = 1 N O<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
16<br />
Data No.<br />
14<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AB<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 407
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
7-1 Card Interface Slot Selection<br />
1-16-00 Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection<br />
1-16-01 Port Speed Selection – 10/100 Base T<br />
1-16-02 Port Duplex Mode Selection<br />
1-16-03 MDI/MDIX Mode Selection<br />
1-16-04 VLAN Mode Selection<br />
1-16-05 Default VLAN ID Tag Insertion Assignment<br />
1-16-06 Port Based Priority Selection<br />
1-16-07 High Priority RX Tag Threshold<br />
1-16-08 High Priority TX Tag Assignment<br />
1-16-09 Low Priority TX Tag Assignment<br />
1-16-10 Port Mirroring Selection<br />
1-16-11 Mirroring Source Port Assignment<br />
1-16-12 Mirroring Target Port Assignment<br />
1-16-13 VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment<br />
1-16-15 VLAN Tag Insertion Selection<br />
1-16-16 Flow Control for Full Duplex Selection<br />
1-16-17 Back Pressure for Half Duplex Selection<br />
1. Only one HUB(8)-U( ) ETU can be assigned and installed for each cabinet.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. When this Memory Block is set to YS, the port becomes a member of the VLAN GRP.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 408 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-16-15 VLAN Tag Insertion Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not the port should insert VLAN tags in<br />
frames transmitted on this port. When this Memory Block is set to NO, tags are<br />
deleted from frames of the same VLAN Group transmitted on this port.<br />
R1500 or higher is required.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
NO YS<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
HUB<br />
1~3<br />
Title<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK16 + JJAE to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data.<br />
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU and VLAN Group.<br />
6 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
Gp VLAN<br />
01~16<br />
Port<br />
1~8<br />
1 5 : 1 T A G 0 1 = 1 N O<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
16<br />
Data No.<br />
15<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AB<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 409
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
7-1 Card Interface Slot Selection<br />
1-16-00 Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection<br />
1-16-01 Port Speed Selection – 10/100 Base T<br />
1-16-02 Port Duplex Mode Selection<br />
1-16-03 MDI/MDIX Mode Selection<br />
1-16-04 VLAN Mode Selection<br />
1-16-05 Default VLAN ID Tag Insertion Assignment<br />
1-16-06 Port Based Priority Selection<br />
1-16-07 High Priority RX Tag Threshold<br />
1-16-08 High Priority TX Tag Assignment<br />
1-16-09 Low Priority TX Tag Assignment<br />
1-16-10 Port Mirroring Selection<br />
1-16-11 Mirroring Source Port Assignment<br />
1-16-12 Mirroring Target Port Assignment<br />
1-16-13 VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment<br />
1-16-14 Port VLAN Group Membership<br />
1-16-16 Flow Control for Full Duplex Selection<br />
1-16-17 Back Pressure for Half Duplex Selection<br />
1. Only one HUB(8)-U( ) ETU can be assigned and installed for each cabinet.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. When this Memory Block is set to NO, the Tag is deleted from the packet for transmission on this port with the<br />
specific VLAN GRP.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 410 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-16-16 Flow Control for Full Duplex<br />
Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not Full duplex IEEE802.3x Flow Control<br />
is enabled for each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU port.<br />
R1500 or higher is required.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
NO YS<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
HUB<br />
1~3<br />
PORT<br />
1~8<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK16 + JJAF to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data.<br />
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU port.<br />
6 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
Title<br />
1 6 : 1 - 1 F L O W N O<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
16<br />
Data No.<br />
16<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AB<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 411
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
7-1 Card Interface Slot Selection<br />
1-16-00 Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection<br />
1-16-01 Port Speed Selection – 10/100 Base T<br />
1-16-02 Port Duplex Mode Selection<br />
1-16-03 MDI/MDIX Mode Selection<br />
1-16-04 VLAN Mode Selection<br />
1-16-05 Default VLAN ID Tag Insertion Assignment<br />
1-16-06 Port Based Priority Selection<br />
1-16-07 High Priority RX Tag Threshold<br />
1-16-08 High Priority TX Tag Assignment<br />
1-16-09 Low Priority TX Tag Assignment<br />
1-16-10 Port Mirroring Selection<br />
1-16-11 Mirroring Source Port Assignment<br />
1-16-12 Mirroring Target Port Assignment<br />
1-16-13 VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment<br />
1-16-14 Port VLAN Group Membership<br />
1-16-15 VLAN Tag Insertion Selection<br />
1-16-17 Back Pressure for Half Duplex Selection<br />
Only one HUB(8)-U( ) ETU can be assigned and installed for each cabinet.<br />
� Notes �<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 412 Memory Blocks
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1-16-17 Back Pressure for Half Duplex<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not half-duplex Back Pressure Flow<br />
Control is enabled for each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU port.<br />
R1500 or higher is required.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
NO YS<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
HUB<br />
1~3<br />
PORT<br />
1~8<br />
2 Press LK1 + LK16 + JJAG to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data.<br />
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU port.<br />
6 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
Title<br />
1 7 : 1 - 1 B A C K N O<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
System Mode<br />
1<br />
Submode<br />
16<br />
Data No.<br />
17<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AB<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 413
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
7-1 Card Interface Slot Selection<br />
1-16-00 Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection<br />
1-16-01 Port Speed Selection – 10/100 Base T<br />
1-16-02 Port Duplex Mode Selection<br />
1-16-03 MDI/MDIX Mode Selection<br />
1-16-04 VLAN Mode Selection<br />
1-16-05 Default VLAN ID Tag Insertion Assignment<br />
1-16-06 Port Based Priority Selection<br />
1-16-07 High Priority RX Tag Threshold<br />
1-16-08 High Priority TX Tag Assignment<br />
1-16-09 Low Priority TX Tag Assignment<br />
1-16-10 Port Mirroring Selection<br />
1-16-11 Mirroring Source Port Assignment<br />
1-16-12 Mirroring Target Port Assignment<br />
1-16-13 VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment<br />
1-16-14 Port VLAN Group Membership<br />
1-16-15 VLAN Tag Insertion Selection<br />
1-16-16 Flow Control for Full Duplex Selection<br />
Only one HUB(8)-U( ) ETU can be assigned and installed for each cabinet.<br />
� Notes �<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 414 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2-01 Trunk to Tenant Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign CO/PBX lines to a tenant.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Page 1<br />
Tenant<br />
No.<br />
Data<br />
Trunk<br />
(00~47) Title<br />
No.<br />
0 0 / 0 1 : T R K – T N T | 0 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
01<br />
Page 2<br />
02 03 04 05 06 07 08<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
09<br />
Page 3<br />
10 11 12 13 14 15 16<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
17<br />
Page 4<br />
18 19 20 21 22 23 24<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
25<br />
Page 5<br />
26 27 28 29 30 31 32<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
33<br />
Page 6<br />
34 35 36 37 38 39 40<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
41<br />
Page 7<br />
42 43 44 45 46 47 4/<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
49<br />
Page 8<br />
50 51 52 53 54 55 56<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
57 58 59* 60 21 62 63 64<br />
Tenant Mode<br />
2<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
01<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BN<br />
All line keys are<br />
assigned.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 415
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK2 to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data<br />
D to go to the next assigned Tenant No.<br />
C to go to the next page<br />
A to go to the previous page<br />
� Data Options:<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program Memory Blocks 2-05~2-09. The next Tenant No. is displayed.<br />
Default Values<br />
6 Repeat steps 3, 4, and 5 for each Tenant No. Memory Block 2-01 Tenant 00 is displayed.<br />
7 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
\<br />
CO/PBX<br />
Line LED<br />
Data<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
2-05 Line Key Selection<br />
Off On<br />
No<br />
(Not Assigned)<br />
4-09 <strong>Telephone</strong> to Tenant Assignment<br />
Yes<br />
(Assigned)<br />
Tenant 00 = All trunks are assigned<br />
Tenant 01~47 = Not assigned<br />
When data is changed while the system is busy, DATA ENTRY is displayed at the programming station until the<br />
system becomes idle.<br />
� Notes �<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 416 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2-05 Line Key Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to select Tenant-Wide Mode or <strong>Telephone</strong> Mode line key<br />
assignment for each tenant.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Tenant<br />
No.<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
TNAT TEL<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
(00~47) Title<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK2 + KE to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option to TNAT.<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
2-06 Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode<br />
4-12 Line Key Selection for <strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
1. Mixed use of Tenant-Wide Mode and <strong>Telephone</strong> Mode is permitted in the system.<br />
2. Tenant-Wide Mode:<br />
� Notes �<br />
Memory Block 2-06 (Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode) permits assignment of any desired feature to each of<br />
the CO/PBX line keys. All the telephones in a tenant are assigned the same features.<br />
3. <strong>Telephone</strong> Mode:<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
0 0 / 0 5 : M O D E T E L<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Tenant Mode<br />
2<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
05<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BN<br />
Memory Block 4-12 (Line Key Selection for <strong>Telephone</strong> Mode) permits assignment of any feature to each of the<br />
CO/PBX line keys. Each telephone can be assigned different features.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 417
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2-06 Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign functions to each CO/PBX line key on each<br />
telephone in a tenant specified as Tenant Mode in Memory Block 2-05 (Line Key<br />
Selection).<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Page 1<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
NON<br />
CO<br />
(CO/PBX)<br />
FW BNA FW ALL<br />
Call<br />
Appearance<br />
Key<br />
Feature<br />
Access Key<br />
The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 418 Memory Blocks<br />
TKGP<br />
Route<br />
Advance<br />
Page 2<br />
LK 9 LK102 LK 11 LK 12 LK 13 LK 14 LK 15 LK 16<br />
SIE Microphone H SET<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Tenant<br />
No.<br />
(00~47)<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Line<br />
Key<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
(01~24) Page<br />
1<br />
0 0 / 0 6 : L 0 1 = C O 0 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
SCROLL<br />
(ANI/Caller<br />
ID)<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
DND<br />
(On/Off)<br />
LOG<br />
(On/Off)<br />
BGM<br />
(On/Off)<br />
2 Press LK2 + KF to access the Memory Block. Verify that Memory Block 2-05 is set to TNAT.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to select the function for Line Key No. 01. When indicated, add Setting Data 2 using<br />
dial keys.<br />
4 Press G to write data and display Line Key No. 2.<br />
5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each Line Key assignment. After Line Key No. 24 is programmed, the next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
2<br />
ICM<br />
Tenant Mode<br />
2<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
06<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BN
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
7 The operation data includes:<br />
Setting Data Page 1<br />
Line<br />
Key<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Setting Data (1)<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter the numeric data or Tenant No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to the next assigned Tenant No.<br />
C to change page; = is page 1,+ is page 2<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
2-05 Line Key Selection<br />
LCD<br />
Indication<br />
Setting Data (2)<br />
1 Not Specified NON N/A<br />
2 CO CO 01~64<br />
3 CFW - BNA FW BNA N/A<br />
4 CFW - ALL FW ALL N/A<br />
5 Call Appearance Block (00~47) C<br />
Call Appearance<br />
Key 01~24<br />
6 Feature Access F A 01~16<br />
7 Trunk Group TKGP 01~32<br />
8 Route Advance ADV 01~32<br />
Setting Data Page 2<br />
9<br />
Secondary Incoming Extension<br />
(Including CAR)<br />
SIE<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Port No.<br />
01~C0<br />
10 Microphone MIC N/A<br />
11 Headset H SET N/A<br />
12 Scroll Key SCROLL N/A<br />
13 DND On/Off DND N/A<br />
14 Log On/Off LOG N/A<br />
15 BGM On/Off BGM N/A<br />
16 Intercom Key ICM N/A<br />
Default Values<br />
Tenant 00 = CO/PBX Lines 01~08<br />
Tenant 01~ 47 = Not Assigned<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 419
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
� �<br />
1. Specify Call Appearance as the call appearance number of Call Appearance Block numbers from Memory Block<br />
4-43 (Station to Call Appearance Block Assignment).<br />
Notes<br />
2. Use this Memory Block to assign the following functions to each of the CO/PBX line keys on each telephone in a<br />
tenant specified as Tenant Mode in Memory Block 2-05 (Line Key Selection):<br />
� Not specified (NON)<br />
� CO/PBX Line (CO) 01~64<br />
� CFW - BNA<br />
� CFW - ALL<br />
Call Appearance (C) 00~47, 01~24 (Each Call Appearance Block may have a maximum of 24 Call<br />
�<br />
Appearance keys).<br />
� Feature Access (FA) 01~16<br />
� Trunk Group (TKGP) 01~32<br />
� Route Advance Block (ADV) 01~32<br />
� Secondary Incoming Extension (SIE) 01~C0<br />
� Microphone (MIC)<br />
� Headset (H SET)<br />
� Scroll Key for ANI/Caller ID (SCROLL)<br />
� DND On/Off<br />
� LOG On/Off<br />
� BGM On/Off<br />
� Intercom Key (ICM)<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 420 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2-07 System Speed Dial Display<br />
Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not confirmation of the Speed Dial<br />
numbers and messages stored in the system Speed Dial memory is allowed.<br />
Display<br />
Tenant<br />
No.<br />
Settings<br />
Page 1 – When system Speed Dial is 80 buffers:<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
00~09<br />
Page 2<br />
10~19 20~29 30~39 40~49 50~59 60~69 70~79<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
Page 1 – When system Speed Dial is 1000 buffers:<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 499<br />
000~099<br />
Page 2<br />
100~199 200~299 300~399 400~499 500~599 600~699 700~799<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
800~899 900~999<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
(00~47) Title<br />
No.<br />
0 0 / 0 7 : S P D D S P | 0 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Page<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK2 + KG to access the Memory Block.<br />
All line keys<br />
are at the<br />
default<br />
setting.<br />
Tenant Mode<br />
2<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
07<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BN<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 421
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures (Continued)<br />
3 Press the CO/PBX Line key. The LED indication changes to indicate the data<br />
each time the CO/PBX line key is pressed.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter number data<br />
C to go to next page<br />
A to go to previous page<br />
D to go to the next assigned Tenant No.<br />
CO/PBX<br />
Line LED<br />
Default Values<br />
4 After entering data for both pages, press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Off On<br />
Data No (Not Assigned) Yes (Assigned)<br />
1-1-35 Speed Dial Buffer Allocation<br />
1-8-07 Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection 1<br />
The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
� Notes �<br />
All Speed Dial confirmation allowed<br />
1. When Deny is specified, no display is presented even when a System Speed Dial call is originated.<br />
2. Divide the Speed Dial numbers into groups and specify, per tenant, whether confirmation is allowed or denied.<br />
3. Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) prints telephone numbers.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 422 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2-08 ECR Relay to Tenant Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify Tenant Assignment for External Tone Ring/Night<br />
Chime function.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
External<br />
Tone Relay<br />
1<br />
External<br />
Tone Relay<br />
2<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Tenant<br />
No.<br />
(00~47)<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
External<br />
Tone Relay<br />
3<br />
External<br />
Tone Relay<br />
4<br />
Night Chime<br />
2 Press LK2 + KH to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
D to go to the next assigned Tenant No.<br />
4 Press the G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Title<br />
0 / 0 8 : R L Y T E N A N T<br />
0<br />
0 / 0 8 : R L Y T E N A N T<br />
0<br />
I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
T<br />
I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
T<br />
1-7-07 External Ring Relay Pattern Selection<br />
Default Values<br />
� Notes �<br />
Default not<br />
assigned.<br />
All Tenants No Assignment<br />
1. By assigning Night Chime to a Tenant, incoming calls to the Tenant group in Night Mode can be answered using<br />
the Night Call Pickup Access Code.<br />
2. The relays are fixed (nonprogrammable).<br />
Tenant Mode<br />
2<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
08<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BN<br />
3. Night Chime must be assigned for Night Call Pickup to work. A relay may be assigned even when an ECR-U( )<br />
ETU is not installed in the system.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 423
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2-09 DID Limit to Tenant Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign the number of DID calls allowed to ring at a specified<br />
tenant.<br />
Display<br />
Tenant<br />
No.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
0 0 : 0 9 : L I M I T 0 0<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK2 + KI to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Enter Setting Data using the dial pad.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Tenant No. for Memory Block 2-01 is displayed.<br />
Default Values<br />
� Notes �<br />
00 (No Limit)<br />
01~64 Incoming Calls<br />
5 Program all Tenants. After Tenant 47 is programmed, the display cycles back to Tenant 01 of Memory Block 2-01.<br />
6 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
Setting<br />
00~64<br />
Data<br />
System Mode<br />
2<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
09<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+ BN<br />
Only DID incoming calls are limited. Outgoing calls, Internal (ICM) calls, and normal incoming calls are not<br />
limited.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 424 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3-00 Trunk Name/Number Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify telephone name/number for the CO/PBX line that is<br />
displayed when the CO/PBX Line is seized, or during an incoming call.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
Number Name<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
No.<br />
CO/PBX<br />
(01~64)<br />
0 1 /<br />
2 Press LK3 to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Leave Number set or press LK2 to change to name for the data option for the selected<br />
CO/PBX No. 01, and enter the number or name (refer to Notes).<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.<br />
B to generate a - (hyphen)<br />
H to generate a space (clear after hold)<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 After Memory Blocks 3-02~3-70 are programmed, the next CO/PBX No. is displayed.<br />
Default Values<br />
Not Specified<br />
6 Repeat steps 3~5 for each CO/PBX No. After the last CO/PBX number is programmed, CO/PBX No. 01 is displayed again.<br />
7 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
Data<br />
Setting<br />
digits maximum)<br />
(13<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
3<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
00<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BCT<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 425
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3-02 Trunk Status Selection<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether a CO/PBX line is used for call origination<br />
and termination or termination only.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
CO/PBX<br />
No.<br />
(01~64)<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
OUT&IN IN<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No. Setting Data<br />
Setting<br />
0 1 / 0 2 : O U T & I N<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK3 + G to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX Line Key to change the option.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
3<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
02<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BCT<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 426 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3-03 Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign a Trunk Group Number (01~32) to each CO/PBX<br />
line.<br />
Display<br />
CO/PBX<br />
No.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
(01~64) Title<br />
No.<br />
0 1 / 0 3 : T R K G P = 0 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Group<br />
Trunk<br />
(01~32)<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK3 + G + KCto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Enter data for CO/PBX No. 01 using the dial pad to change the Trunk Group<br />
number.<br />
Use the following enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.<br />
Trunk Group No:<br />
�<br />
00: Not Set<br />
01~32: Trunk Group 01~32<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Default Values<br />
� Notes �<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
3<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
03<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BCT<br />
CO/PBX lines (01~08) in Trunk Group 01<br />
CO/PBX lines (09~64) in Trunk Group 00<br />
All Tie lines in Trunk Group 02<br />
All DID lines Trunk Group 00<br />
1. When a Trunk group Access Code is dialed, an idle CO line is selected automatically and seized from the same<br />
Trunk group dialed (the CO line of either same tenant or another tenant can be seized).<br />
2. By specifying the priority order, up to four routes (Trunk groups) can be selected in Memory Block 1-1-30 (Route<br />
Advance Block Assignment). Idle CO lines are selected and seized in this sequence.<br />
3. When LCR is installed, Local Trunks should be assigned to Trunk Group 1. When a number is dialed that<br />
bypasses LCR, the system accesses Trunk Group 1 and dials the number.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 427
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3-04 Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Yes/No<br />
Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not to allow Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
NO YES<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
CO/PBX<br />
No.<br />
(01~64)<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
2 Press LK3 + G + KDto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX Line Key to change the option.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
0 1 / 0 4 : T R F N O<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
3<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
04<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BCT<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 428 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-8-07 Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection 1<br />
1-8-08 Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2<br />
3-05 Trunk Incoming Answer Mode Selection<br />
3-06 Automatic Tandem Trunk Assignment<br />
5-01 Tie Line Networking Tandem Connection Assignment<br />
Assign YS to connect both trunks via Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer or Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer feature.<br />
� Notes �<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 429
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3-05 Trunk Incoming Answer Mode<br />
Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the incoming answer mode (Automatic<br />
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer, Automated Attendant, or DISA) per outside line.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
NO ASSIGN TANDM TRF A A<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
CO/PBX<br />
No.<br />
(01~64)<br />
0 1 / 0 5 : N O A S S I G N<br />
2 Press LK3 + G + KEto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option for CO/PBX No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.<br />
Setting Data:<br />
�<br />
Line<br />
Key<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
LCD Indication<br />
when Selected<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
LK 1 NO ASSIGN Normal<br />
Definition<br />
LK 2 TANDM TRF Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer<br />
LK 3 A A Automated Attendant/DISA<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
3<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
05<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BCT<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 430 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Refer to individual features in the <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Features and Specifications <strong>Manual</strong>.<br />
� �<br />
KK FA<br />
KK FB<br />
1. Only trunks assigned to TANDM TRF in this Memory Block are set or canceled for Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk<br />
Transfer Mode when an attendant position enters 00 during the set or cancel operation.<br />
Notes<br />
For example:<br />
To set Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Mode from an attendant position:<br />
Press A + + + A .<br />
To cancel Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Mode from an attendant position:<br />
Press A + + + A .<br />
2. Only trunks assigned to AA in this Memory Block are set or canceled for Automated Attendant/DISA Mode when<br />
an attendant position enters 00 during the set or cancel operation.<br />
For example:<br />
To set Automated Attendant/DISA Mode from an attendant position:<br />
Press A + HA + KK + A .<br />
To cancel Automated Attendant/DISA Mode from an attendant position:<br />
Press A + HB + KK + A .<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 431
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3-06 Automatic Tandem Trunk Assignment<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the incoming trunk and outgoing trunk for Automatic<br />
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
(Incoming)<br />
CO/PBX<br />
No.<br />
(01~64)<br />
2 Press LK3 + G + KFto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Enter the outgoing trunk number for incoming CO/PBX No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
0 1 / 0 6 : T A N D C O =<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
3-04 Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Yes/No Selection<br />
3-05 Trunk Incoming Answer Mode Selection<br />
Default Values<br />
Not Specified<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
3<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
06<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AT<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 432 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3-07 CO/PBX Ringing Variation Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify a ringing tone for each CO/PBX line.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
M<br />
(Medium)<br />
L<br />
(Low)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
CO/PBX<br />
No.<br />
(01~64)<br />
H<br />
(High)<br />
2 Press LK3 + G + KGto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the ringing tone for CO/PBX.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Title<br />
0 1 / 0 7 : D S T R I N G = M<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
1-1-28 Distinctive Ringing by <strong>Telephone</strong> or CO Selection<br />
� Notes �<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
1. This Memory Block is not applicable when <strong>Telephone</strong> is selected in Memory Block 1-1-28 (Distinctive Ringing by<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> or CO Selection).<br />
2. High, medium, or low ringing tone applies to incoming outside line calls only.<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
3<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
07<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BCT<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 433
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3-11 CO External Source Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether the Music On Hold source is from the CO or<br />
an external source (EXT SOURCE).<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
CO<br />
CO/PBX<br />
No.<br />
(01~64)<br />
EXT<br />
SOURCE<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK3 + G + AAto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press LK2 to change Music On Hold to an external source for CO/PBX No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
0 1 / 1 1 : C O<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
3-12 CO Hold Memory Selection<br />
� Notes �<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
3<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
11<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BCT<br />
When CO is set for EXT SOURCE and left in a trunk group, that CO is skipped in dialing access of the trunk<br />
group.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 434 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3-12 Trunk-to-MOH Trunk Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the music on hold source for each CO/PBX line.<br />
Display<br />
CO/PBX<br />
No.<br />
(01~64)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK3 + G +AB access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Enter data for CO/PBX No. using the dial pad to assign the music selection.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
0 1 1 2 : H O L D C O 0 0<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-4-17 Automated Attendant Delay Announcement Hold Tone Selection<br />
1-8-09 Music on Hold Pattern Selection<br />
1-8-31 Hold Tone Source Assignment<br />
1-8-32 Hold Internal Tone Volume Selection<br />
3-11 CO External Source Selection<br />
4-66 MOH or Ring Back Tone Selection<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
Default Values<br />
1. When set to 00, the CO gets Music on Hold from the MOH jack on the side of the cabinet.<br />
� Notes �<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
3<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
12<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BCT<br />
00 = Not Assigned for CO/PBX No. 01~64<br />
2. When Memory Block 1-8-31 (Hold Tone Source Assignment) is set to INT, this Memory Block is not used.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 435
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3-14 Tie Line Type Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign the loop supervision to be used for each Trunk<br />
associated with a Tie line.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
2ND DIAL IMMEDIATE DELAY WINK<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Tie/DID<br />
No.<br />
(01~64)<br />
2 Press LK3 + G + ADto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the loop supervision for CO/PBX No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
0 1 / 1 4 : 2 N D D I A L<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
3-92 Trunk (Installed, DP/DTMF) Selection<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
3<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
14<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+ALT<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 436 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
� �<br />
1. Line keys 1~4 identify the following methods of loop supervision:<br />
Notes<br />
1 = Second Dial Tone<br />
2 = Immediate Start<br />
3 = Delay Dial<br />
4 = Wink Start<br />
2. This Memory Block affects T1 channels assigned as Tie lines.<br />
3. When a second dial tone is selected, the distant system provides the dial tone.<br />
4. When Immediate, Delay, or Wink is selected, the local system provides the dial tone.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 437
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3-15 Trunk DTMF Duration/Interdigit<br />
Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the tone duration/interdigit time of dual-tone<br />
multifrequency (DTMF) signals.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
default. Times<br />
60/70 60/80 110/80 160/80 210/80 410/100 610/100 810/190 are in<br />
milliseconds.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
CO/PBX<br />
No.<br />
(01~64)<br />
2 Press LK3 + G + AEto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change tone duration/interdigit time for CO/PBX No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Data<br />
Title Setting Data<br />
No.<br />
0 1 / 1 5 : M F 1 1 0 / 8 0<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
3-92 Trunk (Installed, DP/DTMF) Selection<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
3<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
15<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BCT<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 438 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Notes �<br />
�<br />
1. This is also used for Tie lines.<br />
2. This Memory Block affects T1 Channels assigned as Tie/DID lines. A DTI-U( ) ETU is required.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 439
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3-16 Tie Line Prepause Time Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the time (prepause) before the originating side can<br />
send dial pulse or dual-tone multifrequency (DTMF) to the distant system.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Page 1<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
0<br />
Page 2<br />
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0 11.0 12.0 13.0<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
CO/PBX<br />
No.<br />
(01~64)<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
2 Press LK3 + G + AF to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change prepause time for CO/PBX No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
0 1 / 1 6 : P R E 0 | 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.<br />
C to go to the next page<br />
A to go to the previous page<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
1. Prepause time differs according to the acknowledgment signaling method.<br />
Page<br />
No.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. This Memory Block affects T1 channels assigned as Tie/DID lines.<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
3<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
16<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+ALM<br />
The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
default. Times<br />
are in seconds.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 440 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3-17 Tie Line Answer Detect Time<br />
Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the time before an <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> system answer<br />
(off-hook) is recognized as an answer.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Page 1<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
0<br />
Page 2<br />
130 260 390 520 650 780 910<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
1040 1170 1300 1430 1560 1690 1820 1950<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
CO/PBX<br />
(01~64)<br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK3 + G + AG to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change answer detect time for CO/PBX No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
Setting<br />
Page<br />
Data<br />
0 1 / 1 7 : A N S 5 2 0 | 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.<br />
C to go to the next page<br />
A to go to the previous page<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
1. Answering a call may be impossible if the CO answer detect time is too long.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. This Memory Block affects T1 channels assigned as Tie/DID lines.<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
3<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
17<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+ALM<br />
The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
default. Times<br />
are in<br />
milliseconds.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 441
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3-18 Tie Line Release Detect Time<br />
Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the time before the circuit disconnect detected on<br />
the Tie line on the distant system side is recognized as Tie line release.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Page 1<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
0<br />
Page 2<br />
130 260 390 520 650 780 910<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
1040 1170 1300 1430 1560 1690 1820 1950<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
CO/PBX<br />
No.<br />
(01~64)<br />
Data<br />
Setting<br />
Page<br />
Data<br />
Title No.<br />
0 1 / 1 8 : R L S 5 2 0 | 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK3 + G + AH to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change release detect time for CO/PBX No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.<br />
C to go to the next page<br />
A to go to the previous page<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
3<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
18<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+ALM<br />
The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
default. Times<br />
are in<br />
milliseconds.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 442 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
� �<br />
1. Specify distinguishing circuit release from on-hook, noise, and temporary interruption. Probable situations for Tie<br />
line release detection include:<br />
Notes<br />
Called side hangs up first. The circuit is released 92 ms. + specified time after the other party disconnects<br />
�<br />
the call.<br />
Called side hangs up second. The circuit is released when the specified time has elapsed after the other<br />
�<br />
party hangs up.<br />
Originating side hangs up first. The circuit is released 92 ms. + specified time after the other party hangs<br />
�<br />
up.<br />
Originating side hangs up second. The circuit is released when the specified time has elapsed after the<br />
�<br />
other party hangs up.<br />
2. This Memory Block affects T1 channels assigned as Tie/DID lines. A DTI-U( ) ETU is required.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 443
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3-19 Tie Line/CO/PBX Incoming Signal<br />
Detect Time Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the time after the incoming signal from another<br />
system is detected before the acknowledge signal is sent out.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Page 1 – Wink Start<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
00 (0 ms.)<br />
Page 2<br />
01 (130 ms.) 02 (260 ms.) 03 (390 ms.) 04 (520 ms.) 05 (650 ms.) 06 (780 ms.) 07 (910 ms.)<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
08 (1040 09 (1170 10 (1300 11 (1430 12 (1560 13 (1690 14 (1820 15 (1950<br />
ms.)<br />
Page 1 – Delay<br />
ms.) ms.) ms.) ms.) ms.) ms.) ms.)<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
00 (0 ms.)<br />
Page 2<br />
01 (30 ms.) 02 (60 ms.) 03 (90 ms.) 04 (120 ms.) 05 (150 ms.) 06 (180 ms.) 07 (210 ms.)<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
08 (240 ms.) 09 (270 ms.) 10 (300 ms.) 11 (330 ms.) 12 (360 ms.) 13 (390 ms.) 14 (420 ms.) 15 (450 ms.)<br />
Page 1 – COI<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
00 (50 ms.)<br />
Page 2<br />
01 (100 ms.) 02 (150 ms.) 03 (200 ms.) 04 (250 ms.) 05 (300 ms.) 06 (350 ms.) 07 (400 ms.)<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
08 (450 ms.) 09 (500 ms.) 10 (550 ms.) 11 (600 ms.) 12 (650 ms.) 13 (700 ms.) 14 (750 ms.) 15 (800 ms.)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
CO/PBX<br />
No.<br />
(01~64)<br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
0 1 / 1 9 : I N C 0 4 | 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Page<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK3 + G + AI to access the Memory Block.<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
3<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
19<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BCT<br />
The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
default for each<br />
method.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 444 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change incoming signal detect time for CO/PBX No.<br />
Receiving Side<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.<br />
C to go to the next page<br />
A to go to the previous page<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Incoming Signal Detection<br />
Sending Acknowledgment Signal<br />
3-14 Tie/DID Line Type Assignment<br />
Time<br />
1. For second dial tone and immediate loop supervision, the time is fixed at 30 ms.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. This Memory Block affects T1 channels assigned as Tie/DID lines.<br />
DC Loop Supervision<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 445
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3-20 Tie Line Loop Off-Guard Time<br />
Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign loop off-guard time to prevent noise that could cause<br />
the system to be unable to answer an incoming Tie line.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Page 1<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
0.0<br />
Page 2<br />
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0. 5.0<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0 11.0 12.0 13.0<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
CO/PBX<br />
No.<br />
(01~64)<br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK3 + G + BK to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change loop off-guard time for CO/PBX No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
0 1 / 2 0 : L O O P 2 . 0 | 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Page<br />
No.<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.<br />
C to go to the next page<br />
A to go to the previous page<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
3<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
20<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+ALM<br />
The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
default. Times<br />
are in seconds.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 446 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
� �<br />
1. Assign a loop off-guard time to prevent system malfunction caused by noise when going off-hook to answer a call<br />
from another system on a Tie line call.<br />
Notes<br />
2. The system ignores any noise that is detected during the time specified in this Memory Block.<br />
3. This Memory Block affects T1 channels assigned as Tie/DID lines.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 447
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3-21 Tie Line Length of Wink Signal<br />
Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the time a wink pulse is sent to another system.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Page 1<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
30<br />
Page 2<br />
60 90 120 150 180 210 240<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
270 300 330 360 390 420 450 480<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
CO/PBX<br />
No.<br />
(01~64)<br />
0 1 / 2 1 : W I N K 1 8 0 | 1<br />
2 Press LK3 + G + BA to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change wink-signal time for CO/PBX No.<br />
Receiving Side<br />
Data<br />
Setting<br />
Page<br />
Data<br />
Title No.<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Incoming Signal Detection<br />
� Use the following to enter data:<br />
Wink Pulse Sending<br />
to move the cursor left<br />
L to move the cursor right<br />
J<br />
to enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.<br />
– OR –<br />
K~I<br />
D to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.<br />
C to go to the next page<br />
A to go to the previous page<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
3<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
21<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+ALM<br />
The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
default. Times<br />
are in<br />
milliseconds.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 448 Memory Blocks<br />
Time<br />
DC Loop Supervision
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures (Continued)<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
1. Specify Wink Start in Memory Block 3-14 (Tie Line Type Assignment).<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. This Memory Block affects T1 channels assigned as Tie/DID lines.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 449
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3-22 Tie Line Length of Delay Signal<br />
Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the time a delay pulse is sent to another system.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Page 1<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
0<br />
Page 2<br />
300 600 900 1200 1500 1800 2100<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
2400 2700 3000 3300 3600 3900 4200 4500<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
CO/PBX<br />
No.<br />
(01~64)<br />
0 1 / 2 2 : D E L Y 3 0 0 | 1<br />
2 Press LK3 + G + BB to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change delay signal time for CO/PBX No.<br />
Receiving Side<br />
Data<br />
Setting<br />
Page<br />
Data<br />
Title No.<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
Receiving Signal Detection<br />
Delay Pulse Sending<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.<br />
C to go to the next page<br />
A to go to the previous page<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press G to go back on-line.<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
3<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
22<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+ALM<br />
The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
default. Times<br />
are in<br />
milliseconds.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 450 Memory Blocks<br />
Time<br />
DC Loop Supervision
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
� �<br />
1. Specify Delay loop supervision in Memory Block 3-14 (Tie Line Type Assignment).<br />
Notes<br />
2. This Memory Block affects T1 channels assigned as Tie/DID lines.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 451
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3-24 Tie Line Incoming Interdigit Timeout<br />
Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the time, in seconds, that an address signal is<br />
missing during the incoming call detection process before an error tone is returned to<br />
the other system.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Page 1<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
∞<br />
(No Limit)<br />
Page 2<br />
1s 2s 3s 4s 5s 6s 7s<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
8s 9s 10s 11s 12s 13s 14s 15s<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
CO/PBX<br />
No.<br />
(01~64<br />
Data<br />
Setting<br />
Page<br />
Data<br />
Title No.<br />
0 1 / 2 4 : I N C O M 6 s | 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK3 + G + BD to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change incoming interdigit timeout for CO/PBX No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.<br />
C to go to the next page<br />
A to go to the previous page<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
3<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
24<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+ALM<br />
The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 452 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Notes �<br />
�<br />
1. A timeout occurs when:<br />
A dial pulse is not received within the time specified by this Memory Block after the receiving side detects<br />
�<br />
the off-hook signal.<br />
The next dial pulse is not received within the time specified by this Memory Block after the receiving side<br />
�<br />
detects (receives) a dial pulse.<br />
2. This Memory Block affects T1 channels assigned to Tie/DID lines.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 453
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3-25 Tie Line Wink/Delay Signal Detect<br />
Timeout Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify a maximum time, in seconds, for receiving an<br />
acknowledgment signal from a distant system before sending a busy tone.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Page 1<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
(No Limit<br />
Page 2<br />
1s 2s 3s 4s 5s 6s 7s<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
8s 9s 10s 11s 12s 13s 14s 15s<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
CO/PBX<br />
No.<br />
(01~64)<br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
0 1 / 2 5 : D T E C T 7 s | 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Page<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK3 + G + BE to access the Memory Block.<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
3<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
25<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+ALM<br />
The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 454 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures (Continued)<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change signal detect timeout for CO/PBX No.<br />
Originating Side<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
Sending an Outgoing Signal<br />
Receiving Acknowledgment Signal<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.<br />
C to go to the next page<br />
A to go to the previous page<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
1. When the acknowledgment signal is not received in a programmed time after an outgoing signal is sent to the<br />
other system, a busy tone is sent to the telephone.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. This Memory Block affects T1 channels assigned to Tie/DID lines.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 455<br />
Time<br />
Timeout when the<br />
acknowledgment<br />
signal is not received.
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3-27 Tie Line Dial Tone Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not to send a dial tone to the distant<br />
system.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
NO YS<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
CO/PBX<br />
No.<br />
(01~64)<br />
2 Press LK3 + G + BG to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press Lk1 when you don’t want to send a dial tone to the distant system for CO/PBX No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
0 1 / 2 7 : S D T Y S<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
3-14 Tie Line Type Assignment<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
3<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
27<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+ALT<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 456 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3-28 Tie Line Reorder Tone Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not to send a reorder tone to the<br />
originating station when the number of a distant system is used to originate a call over<br />
a Tie line.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
NO YS<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
CO/PBX<br />
No.<br />
(01~64)<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
0 1 / 2 8 : R O T Y S<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK3 + G + BH to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press LK1 to cancel a reorder tone to the originating system for CO/PBX No.<br />
Originating Side<br />
�<br />
Title<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
8 - 12<br />
Reorder<br />
Tone<br />
Sending<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
<strong>Electra</strong><br />
<strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Distant<br />
System<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
3<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
28<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+ALT<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 457<br />
12<br />
�<br />
1111
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
3-14 Tie Line Type Assignment<br />
This Memory Block affects T1 channels assigned as Tie lines.<br />
� Notes �<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 458 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3-29 Trunk Internal Transmit Pad<br />
Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify a dB volume level for calls originated from the<br />
extensions of a local system to a distant system.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Page 1<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
2<br />
Page 2<br />
4 6 8 12 16 3 -3<br />
LK 1<br />
0<br />
LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
CO/PBX<br />
No.<br />
(01~64)<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
2 Press LK3 + G + BI to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change internal transmit pad for CO/PBX No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
0 1 / 2 9 : P A D I T 8 | 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Page<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.<br />
C to go to the next page<br />
A to go to the previous page<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
3<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
29<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BCT<br />
The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
default. Settings<br />
are in dB.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 459
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
� �<br />
1. The <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> system divides the connections into the following patterns:<br />
Notes<br />
(Specify the sending and receiving levels of each pattern for each of the trunks.)<br />
Pattern A (Intercom Mode)<br />
Sending level<br />
Receiving level<br />
Pattern B (Tandem Mode)<br />
Sending level<br />
Receiving level<br />
Connections established between the intercom stations of the<br />
local system and trunks.<br />
(To be specified in this Memory Block.)<br />
Connections established between two systems, with the local<br />
system as a tandem system.<br />
2. The Memory Block applies to Tie lines, T1, DID, and Basic Rate Interface (BRI) trunks.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 460 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3-30 Trunk Internal Receive Pad Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify a dB volume level for calls coming to extensions of a<br />
local system from a distant system.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Page 1<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
2<br />
Page 2<br />
4 6 8 12 16 3 -3<br />
LK 1<br />
0<br />
LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
CO/PBX<br />
No.<br />
(01~64)<br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
0 1 / 3 0 : P A D I R 8 | 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK3 + G + CK to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change internal receive pad for CO/PBX No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
Setting<br />
Page<br />
Data<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.<br />
C to go to the next page<br />
A to go to the previous page<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
3<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
30<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BCT<br />
The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
default. Settings<br />
are in dB.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 461
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
� �<br />
1. The <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> system divides the connections into the following patterns:<br />
Notes<br />
(Specify the sending and receiving levels of each pattern for each of the trunks.)<br />
Pattern A (Intercom Mode)<br />
Sending level<br />
Receiving level<br />
Pattern B (Tandem Mode)<br />
Sending level<br />
Receiving level<br />
Connections established between the intercom stations of the<br />
local system and trunks.<br />
(To be specified in this Memory Block.)<br />
Connections established between two systems, with the local<br />
system as a tandem system.<br />
2. This Memory Block applies to Tie lines, T1, DID, and Basic Rate Interface (BRI) trunks.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 462 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3-31 Trunk External Transmit Pad<br />
Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify transmit dB volume level for tandem calls between a<br />
local system and two distant systems.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Page 1<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
2<br />
Page 2<br />
4 6 8 12 16 3 -3<br />
LK 1<br />
0<br />
LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
CO/PBX<br />
No.<br />
(01~64)<br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
0 1 / 3 1 : P A D E T 0 | 2<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK3 + G + CA to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change external transmit pad for CO/PBX No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
Setting<br />
Page<br />
Data<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.<br />
C to go to the next page<br />
A to go to the previous page<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
3<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
31<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BCT<br />
The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
default. Settings<br />
are in dB.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 463
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
� �<br />
1. The <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> system divides the connections into the following patterns:<br />
Notes<br />
(Specify the sending and receiving levels of each pattern for each of the trunks.)<br />
Pattern A (Intercom Mode)<br />
Sending level<br />
Receiving level<br />
Pattern B (Tandem Mode)<br />
Sending level<br />
Receiving level<br />
2. This Memory Block applies to Tie lines, T1, DID, and ISDN trunks.<br />
Connections established between the intercom stations of the<br />
local system and trunks.<br />
Connections established between two systems, with the local<br />
system as a tandem system.<br />
(To be specified in this Memory Block.)<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 464 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3-32 Trunk External Receive Pad Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify receive dB volume level for tandem calls between a<br />
local system and two distant systems.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Page 1<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
2<br />
Page 2<br />
4 6 8 12 16 3 -3<br />
LK 1<br />
0<br />
LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
CO/PBX<br />
No.<br />
(01~64)<br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
0 1 / 3 2 : P A D E R 0 | 2<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK3 + G + CB to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change eternal receive pad for CO/PBX No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
Setting<br />
Page<br />
Data<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.<br />
C to go to the next page<br />
A to go to the previous page<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
3<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
32<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BCT<br />
The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
default. Settings<br />
are in dB.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 465
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
� �<br />
1. The <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> system divides the connections into the following patterns:<br />
Notes<br />
(Specify the sending and receiving levels of each pattern for each of the trunks.)<br />
Pattern A (Intercom Mode)<br />
Sending level<br />
Receiving level<br />
Pattern B (Tandem Mode)<br />
Sending level<br />
Receiving level<br />
2. This Memory Block applies to Tie lines, T1, DID, and ISDN trunks.<br />
Connections established between the intercom stations of the<br />
local system and trunks.<br />
Connections established between two systems, with the local<br />
system as a tandem system.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 466 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3-33 Disconnect Recognition Time<br />
Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the minimum time before a disconnected circuit can<br />
be accessed again.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Page 1<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
0<br />
Page 2<br />
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
CO/PBX<br />
No.<br />
(01~64)<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
2 Press LK3 + G + CC to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change disconnect recognition time for CO/PBX No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
0 1 / 3 3 : D I S T 0 . 3 | 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Page<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.<br />
C to go to the next page<br />
A to go to the previous page<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
� Notes �<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
3<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
33<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BCT<br />
The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
default. Times<br />
are in seconds.<br />
When a call origination on a CO/PBX line or Tie line is interrupted or dropped, and an attempt is made to seize<br />
the line again, it must be disconnected and cleared before it can be accessed again.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 467
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3-38 Automated Attendant Message to<br />
Trunk Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign the Automated Attendant Message for each CO/PBX<br />
Trunk. When the Automated Attendant Message is assigned to each CO/PBX Trunk,<br />
the system automatically answers the incoming call and sends an Automated<br />
Attendant Message to the calling party.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
CO/PBX<br />
No.<br />
Data<br />
(01~64) Title<br />
No.<br />
0 1 / 3 8 : A A M S G = 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
2 Press LK3 + G + CHto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Enter data for CO/PBX No. using the dial pad to change the Automated Attendant<br />
message number.<br />
Setting Data: 1~8 Automated Attendant Message 1~8<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto moves the cursor left<br />
Lto moves the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to the next assigned CO/PBX Line No.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
� Notes �<br />
Default Values<br />
Message 1<br />
An Access Code must be dialed from the attendant telephone position to activate this feature.<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
3<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
38<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AU<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 468 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3-40 Automatic Release Signal Detection<br />
Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the signal detection time for release of a CO/PBX<br />
line after a disconnect signal is received from the distant Central Office or PBX.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Page 1<br />
CO/PBX<br />
No.<br />
(01~64)<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
0<br />
Page 2<br />
50 100 150 200 250 300 350<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
400 450 500 550 600 650 700 ∞<br />
(NO limit)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Title<br />
2 Press LK3 + G + DKto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change signal release time for CO/PBX No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
0 1 / 4 0 : R L S T 3 5 0 | 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Page<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.<br />
C to go to the next page<br />
A to go to the previous page<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
3<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
40<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BCT<br />
The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
default. Times<br />
are in<br />
milliseconds.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 469
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3-41 Delay Announcement Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not Delay Announcement is sent to the<br />
calling party for Day and/or Night Mode per CO Port.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
NN<br />
(NO)<br />
YN<br />
(Day)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
CO/PBX<br />
No.<br />
(01~64)<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
NY<br />
(Night)<br />
Title<br />
0 1 / 4 1 : M S G D / N = N N<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
YY<br />
(Both)<br />
2 Press LK3 + G + DAto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to assign the delay announcement for CO/PBX No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Refer to individual features in the <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Features and Specifications <strong>Manual</strong>.<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
3<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
41<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AR<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 470 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3-42 DIT Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign a Day Mode direct trunk termination to an<br />
independent station.<br />
R2500 is required for 5-, 6-, or 7-digit Extension Numbers.<br />
Display (R1700 or lower)<br />
Display (R2000 or higher)<br />
The number displayed after DIT (XXX) is from Memory Block 1-2-34 (Expanded Station Number Assignment) when assigned<br />
�<br />
(R2500 is required).<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
(Incoming)<br />
CO/PBX<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Data<br />
(01~64) Title Setting No.<br />
0 1 / 4 2 : D I T D —<br />
(Incoming)<br />
CO/PBX<br />
No.<br />
(01~64)<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Data<br />
Setting Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
0 1 / 4 2 : D I T X X X<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK3 + G + DBto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Enter data for CO/PBX No. using the dial pad to assign DIT to a station.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto moves the cursor left<br />
Lto moves the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to the next assigned CO/PBX Line No.<br />
Enter the following:<br />
�<br />
Station No. (2-, 3-, or 4-digits 10~8999)<br />
CO Port No. (01~64)<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
Default Values<br />
No Assignment<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
3<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
42<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BCT<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 471
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-1-46 Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-1-47 Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-1-48 Access Code (3-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-2-03 2~7-Digit Station Number Selection<br />
1-2-34 Expanded Station Number Assignment<br />
3-43 ANA Assignment<br />
4-10 Station Number Assignment<br />
1. A trunk can terminate at only one station, but any number of trunks can terminate at the same station.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. When 5-, 6-, or 7-digit Extension Numbers are used, the leading digits are assigned in Memory Block 1-2-34<br />
(Expanded Station Number Assignment) and are displayed in this Memory Block when assigned.<br />
3. When 5-, 6-, or 7-digit Extension Numbers are used, only the last four digits are assigned in this Memory Block.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 472 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3-43 ANA Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign a Night Mode Direct trunk termination to a station.<br />
R2500 is required for 5-, 6-, or 7-digit Extension Numbers.<br />
Display (R1700 or lower)<br />
Display (R2000 or higher)<br />
The number displayed after DIT (XXX) is from Memory Block 1-2-34 (Expanded Station Number Assignment) when assigned<br />
�<br />
(R2500 is required).<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
(Incoming)<br />
CO/PBX<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Data<br />
(01~64) Title Setting No.<br />
0 1 / 4 3 : D I T N —<br />
(Incoming)<br />
CO/PBX<br />
No.<br />
(01~64)<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Data<br />
Setting Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
0 1 / 4 3 : A N A X X X<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK3 + G + DCto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Enter data for CO/PBX No. using the dial pad to assign ANA to a station.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto moves the cursor left<br />
Lto moves the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to the next assigned CO/PBX Line No.<br />
Enter the following:<br />
�<br />
Station No. (2-, 3-, or 4-digits 10~8999)<br />
CO Port No. (01~64)<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Default Values<br />
No Assignment<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
3<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
43<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BCT<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 473
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-1-46 Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-1-47 Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-1-48 Access Code (3-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-2-03 2~7-Digit Station Number Selection<br />
1-2-34 Expanded Station Number Assignment<br />
3-42 DIT Assignment<br />
4-10 Station Number Assignment<br />
1. A trunk can terminate at only one station, but any number of trunks can terminate at the same station.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. When 5-, 6-, or 7-digit Extension Numbers are used, the leading digits are assigned in Memory Block 1-2-34<br />
(Expanded Station Number Assignment) and are displayed in this Memory Block when assigned.<br />
3. When 5-, 6-, or 7-digit Extension Numbers are used, only the last four digits are assigned in this Memory Block.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 474 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3-44 Caller ID Display Assignment for CO/<br />
PBX Line<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign one Multiline Terminal to display ANI/Caller ID<br />
Indication for incoming CO/PBX calls per CO/PBX line.<br />
This Memory Block is used for R1600 and lower. For R1700 or higher, it is no longer<br />
required.<br />
Display<br />
CO/PBX<br />
No.<br />
(01~64)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK3 + G + DDto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Enter data for CO/PBX No. using the dial pad to assign ANI/Caller ID to a station.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto moves the cursor left<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
0 1 / 4 4 : C A L L I D<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Lto moves the cursor right<br />
Tel<br />
No. Port<br />
01~C0<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to the next assigned CO/PBX Line No.<br />
Enter the following:<br />
�<br />
Tel Port No. 01~CO<br />
CO/PBX No. 01~64<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Refer to individual features in the <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Features and Specifications <strong>Manual</strong>.<br />
Default Values<br />
No Assignment<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
3<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
44<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AI<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 475
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
� Notes �<br />
To display ANI/Caller ID Indication for normal incoming CO calls and CAR incoming calls, both Caller ID<br />
Indication and Ring assignment must be Programmed. A maximum of 15 Multiline Terminals can be assigned<br />
system-wide to display ANI/Caller ID for normal incoming CO calls and CAR incoming calls using Memory Block<br />
1-1-78 (Caller ID Display Assignment for System Mode). Another Multiline Terminal can be assigned to display<br />
ANI/Caller ID Indication for normal incoming CO calls, per CO line, using this Memory Block.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 476 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3-45 Live Record Trunk Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify per Trunk whether or not to allow Live Record for<br />
Digital Voice Mail.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
NO YS<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
CO/PBX<br />
No.<br />
(01~64)<br />
2 Press LK3 + G + DEto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press LK2 to assign Live Record for CO/PBX No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
0 1 / 4 5 : L I V E R E C N O<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
1-8-08 Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2<br />
Default Values<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 477<br />
NO<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
3<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
45<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AV
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3-50 ISDN Line SPID Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign the Integrated Services Digital Network Service<br />
Profile Identifier (ISDN SPID) number.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
CO/PBX<br />
No.<br />
(01~64)<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
0 1 / 5 0 :<br />
2 Press LK3 + G + EK to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Enter data for CO/PBX No. using the dial pad to assign ISDN SPID to a station.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto moves the cursor left<br />
Lto moves the cursor right<br />
Data<br />
Setting<br />
digits maximum)<br />
(20<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to the next assigned CO/PBX Line No.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
3<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
50<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AN<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 478 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3-52 ISDN Trunk Directory Number<br />
Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign the Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)<br />
Directory Number.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
CO/PBX<br />
No.<br />
(01~64)<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
0 1 / 5 2 :<br />
2 Press LK3 + G + EB to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Enter data for CO/PBX No. using the dial pad to assign ISDN Directory Number.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto moves the cursor left<br />
Lto moves the cursor right<br />
Data<br />
Setting<br />
digits maximum)<br />
(20<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to the next assigned CO/PBX Line No.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
3<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
52<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AN<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 479
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3-53 Caller Name Indication Selection<br />
General Description<br />
When an Caller ID number is detected, the <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> system can check the<br />
speed dialing buffer for a match. When a name is assigned to a matched number, the<br />
name can be displayed, when allowed by this assignment.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
NO NUM NAM TRK<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
CO/PBX<br />
No.<br />
(01~64)<br />
2 Press LK3 + G + EC to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
0 1 / 5 3 : I S I N D N U M<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.<br />
Settings include:<br />
�<br />
NO Disables caller name display.<br />
NUM Selected when system speed dial buffers are assigned a number; the number is displayed when Caller ID<br />
number matches a speed dial number.<br />
NAM Selected when system speed dial buffers are assigned a name; the name is displayed when it is assigned to a<br />
matched number and Caller ID number matches the speed dial number.<br />
TRK Selected if you want the trunk name or number to be displayed when data is assigned in Memory Block 3-00<br />
(Trunk Name/Number Assignment).<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line after all data is written.<br />
Refer to individual features in the <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Features and Specifications <strong>Manual</strong>.<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
3<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
53<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AI<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 480 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3-59 Automated Attendant Function<br />
Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether the Automated Attendant is to operate in<br />
the Normal DISA Mode or in the Delay Announcement mode.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
NORMAL DELAY<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
CO/PBX<br />
No.<br />
(01~64)<br />
2 Press LK3 + G + EI to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press LK2 to Delay Announcement Mode on CO/PBX No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.<br />
4 Press G to write the selected data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
0 1 / 5 9 : A . A . N O R M A L<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
1-4-18 Automated Attendant Delay Announcement Assignment<br />
1-4-19 Automated Attendant 1st to 2nd Delay Announcement Interval Time Selection<br />
1-4-20 Automated Attendant Delay Announcement Disconnect Time Selection<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
3<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
59<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AU<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 481
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3-61 DIT/ANA Delay Answer Time<br />
Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the time an incoming call rings before being<br />
changed to a DIT/ANA call.<br />
This Memory Block can be adjusted in 1-second intervals (R3000 or higher).<br />
Display (2500 or lower)<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
0s 5s 10s 20s 30s 40s 50s 60s default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
CO/PBX<br />
No.<br />
(01~64)<br />
2 Press LK3 + G + FA to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the applicable line key to change the time an incoming call rings before it is changed to a DIT/ANA call on CO/PBX NO.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
0 1 / 6 1 : D L Y A N S 0 s<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.<br />
4 Press G to write the selected data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Refer to next page for R3000 or higher <strong>Programming</strong> Procedures.<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
3<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
61<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BCT<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 482 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Display (3000 or higher)<br />
CO/PBX<br />
No.<br />
(01~64)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK3 + G + FA to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to enter the Data Setting for Class 1.<br />
Setting Data<br />
00s~99s (e.g., 02s = 2s)<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next memory block.<br />
5 Program the next memory block, or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
3-42 DIT Assignment<br />
3-43 ANA Assignment<br />
Title<br />
0 1 / 6 1 : D L Y A N S 0 0 s<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
3-62 DIT Tenant Assignment<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
� Notes �<br />
Default Values<br />
00s<br />
00s = No Time<br />
1. When the time is set to a value other than 0, call termination is treated as a normal incoming call and DIT<br />
termination is performed after the time elapses. When 0 is selected, DIT call termination is performed<br />
immediately.<br />
2. R3000 or higher is required to adjust this memory block by 1-second intervals.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 483
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3-62 DIT Tenant Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign each Trunk to a Master Tenant for the DIT/ANA to<br />
follow the Day/Night/Weekend mode settings.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
CO/PBX<br />
No.<br />
(01~64)<br />
2 Press LK3 + G + FB to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Select the CO/PBX Line No. and enter the Tenant No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter Tenant No. or CO/PBX No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to the next assigned CO/PBX Line No.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
3-42 DIT Assignment<br />
3-43 ANA Assignment<br />
Title<br />
0 1 / 6 2 : D I T = T N T 0 0<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Tenant<br />
(00~47<br />
Default Values<br />
Tenant 00<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
3<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
62<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BCT<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 484 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3-63 DIT Weekend Mode Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to enable weekend (Holiday) Mode check on Tenant Groups<br />
for incoming DIT calls.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
YS NO<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
CO/PBX<br />
No.<br />
(01~64)<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
0 1 / 6 3 : H O L D I T Y S<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK3 + G + FC to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press LK2 to disable weekend Mode check on Tenant Groups for incoming DIT calls on CO/PBX No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.<br />
4 Press G to write the selected data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
3<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
63<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BCT<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 485
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3-64 DIT Night Mode Delay Answer<br />
Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not the DIT Delay Answer Time applies<br />
to the CO/PBX calls ringing in Night Mode.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
NO YS<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
CO/PBX<br />
No.<br />
(01~64)<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
0 1 / 6 4 : N T M O D N O<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK3 + G + FD to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press LK2 to apply DIT Delay Answer time for incoming DIT calls ringing in night mode on CO/PBX No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.<br />
4 Press G to write the selected data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
3<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
64<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BCT<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 486 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3-65 Hold Tone Automated Attendant<br />
Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the Automated Attendant message that is played to<br />
an extension or DID trunk on an incoming call.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Page 1<br />
CO/PBX<br />
No.<br />
(01~64)<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
NONE<br />
Page 2<br />
MSG 1 MSG 2 MSG 3 MSG 4 MSG 5 MSG 6 MSG 7<br />
LK 1<br />
MSG 8<br />
LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
Setting<br />
Page<br />
Data<br />
0 1 / 6 5 : I N C N O N E | 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK3 + G + FE to access the Memory Block.<br />
The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
3 Press line key to specify the Automated Attendant message to play to an extension or DID trunk on an incoming call to CO/PBX<br />
No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.<br />
C to go to the next page<br />
A to go to the previous page<br />
4 Press G to write the selected data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
3<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
65<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AU<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 487
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-4-11 Automated Attendant Message Day/Night Mode Selection<br />
1-4-17 Automated Attendant Delay Announcement Hold Tone Selection<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 488 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3-67 CO/PBX Ringing Pattern Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the ringing pattern assigned to each CO/PBX line.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Page 1<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
– (None)<br />
Ringing<br />
Pattern A<br />
Ringing<br />
Pattern B<br />
Ringing<br />
Pattern C<br />
Ringing<br />
Pattern D<br />
Ringing<br />
Pattern E<br />
Ringing<br />
Pattern F<br />
Ringing<br />
Pattern G<br />
Page 2<br />
LK 1<br />
Ringing<br />
Pattern H<br />
LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
CO/PBX<br />
No.<br />
(01~64)<br />
2 Press LK3 + G + FG to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press line key to specify the Ringing pattern assigned to CO/PBX No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.<br />
C to go to the next page<br />
A to go to the previous page<br />
4 Press G to write the selected data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
0 1 / 6 7 : C O R N G – | 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Setting<br />
Page<br />
Data<br />
4-57 CO Line Ringing Pattern Priority Selection<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
3<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
67<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BCT<br />
The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 489
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
The Ring Patterns are shown in the table below:<br />
Pattern<br />
A<br />
B<br />
C<br />
D<br />
E<br />
F<br />
G<br />
H<br />
NO No Ring<br />
0s 1s 2s 3s 4s 5s 6s<br />
s= seconds<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 490 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3-69 911 – Cut Through Trunk Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify which trunk or trunks are released when a 911 call is<br />
placed.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
CO/PBX<br />
No.<br />
(01~64)<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
NO YES<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
0 1 / 6 9 : 9 1 1 D R O P N O<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK3 + G + FI to access the Memory Block.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the selected data and display next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Default Values<br />
CO/PBX No. 01~64 = NO<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
3<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
69<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AE<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 491
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
3-03 Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment<br />
3-33 Disconnect Recognition Time Selection<br />
3-91 Trunk Type Selection<br />
1-1-24 PBX/CTX Access Code Assignment I<br />
1-1-25 PBX/CTX Access Code Assignment II<br />
1. When only one trunk is assigned YES, this is the only trunk used for 911-Cut Through.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. The following calls are not used for 911-Cut Through: Receiving Normal Incoming Call, Receiving DIT/ANA Call,<br />
Incoming Automated Attendant, Originating 911 Call, and Receiving ACD Incoming Call.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 492 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3-70 CIC Number Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign the Circuit Identification Code for each voice channel<br />
used for K-CCIS.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
No. CO<br />
(01~64)<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
0 1 / 7 0 : C I C N O 0 0 0<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK3 + G + GK to access the Memory Block.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
Default Values<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
3<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
70<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AW<br />
000 (Not Specified)<br />
CIC Number range: 001~127<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.<br />
3 Press G to write the selected data and display next Memory Block or Memory Block 3-00 CO/PBX 02. After the last CO/<br />
PBX is programmed, CO/PBX 01 is displayed again.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 493
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-1-05 Start Time Selection<br />
1-15-00 K-CCIS Main/Remote Office selection<br />
1-15-01 Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignment<br />
1-15-02 Common Signal Channel Assignment<br />
1-15-03 Originating Point Code Assignment<br />
1-15-04 Destination Point Code Assignment<br />
1-15-05 Destination Point Code Transfer Assignment<br />
1-15-06 Originating Office Code Number Assignment<br />
1-15-07 K-CCIS Message Response Timeout Assignment<br />
1-15-08 Link Reconnect Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-09 K-CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Assignment<br />
1-15-10 Calling Name Display Allow/Deny Selection<br />
CIC Numbers must be assigned consecutively for K-CCIS to operate correctly.<br />
� Notes �<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 494 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3-73 CO Message Waiting Yes/No Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not the CO Message Waiting feature is<br />
allowed per CO/PBX Line.<br />
R2000 or higher is required.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
CO/PBX<br />
No.<br />
(01~64)<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
NO YES<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK3 + G + GC to access the Memory Block.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data option.<br />
Default Values<br />
CO/PBX No. 01~64 = NO<br />
4 Press G to write the selected data and display Memory Block 3-00 CO/PBX 02. After the last CO/PBX is programmed,<br />
CO/PBX 01 is displayed again.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
0 1 / 7 3 : C O M W N O<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
1-8-07 Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection 1<br />
Page 3, LK 2<br />
4-69 CO Message Waiting Indication Assignment<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
3<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
73<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BCT<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 495
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3-77 ISDN-BRI/PRI Directory Number<br />
Checking Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to determine whether or not the BRT/PRT ETU passes the<br />
Directory Number to the CPU when it is received in the ISDN Set Up message.<br />
Enhancement<br />
R4000 or higher and BRT Firmware 2.05 or higher support DID for ISDN-BRI Trunks.<br />
This allows BRI and DID callers with non-matching SPID Numbers to determine whether the<br />
system checks the called party number with the SETUP message and the SPID setup. When this Memory Block is set to<br />
NO, DID calls can be received on BRI trunks and directed according to Memory Block 1-1-22 (DID Digit Conversion<br />
Table).<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
CO/PBX<br />
No.<br />
(01~64)<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
NO YES<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
0 1 / 7 7 : D N C H K N O<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
2 Press LK3 + G + GG to access the Memory Block.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the selected data and display next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Default Values<br />
CO/PBX No. 01~64<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
3<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
77<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AN<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 496 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
3-50 ISDN Line SPID Assignment<br />
3-52 ISDN Trunk Directory Number Assignment<br />
3-91 Trunk Type Selection<br />
1-1-20 DID Digit Length Selection<br />
1-1-21 DID Digit Conversion Assignment<br />
1-1-22 DID Digit Conversion Table<br />
1-1-23 DID Forward Station Number for Busy Station or Undefined Digit<br />
1. R4000 or higher is required to support this Memory Block.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. When YES is selected, the BRT/PRT allows only a Directory Number as assigned in Memory Block 3-52 (ISDN<br />
Trunk Directory Number Assignment).<br />
3. When NO is selected, the BRT/PRT always passes the Directory Number to the CPU.<br />
4. This Memory Block can be used to make the ISDN-BRI trunks into DID when set to YES.<br />
5. When this Memory Block is changed, the ISDN-BRI ETU must be reset.<br />
6. When this Memory Block is changed, from YS to NO or NO to YS, the appropriate BRT ETU must be reset.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 497
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3-90 Polarity Reverse Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to enable a Central Office to Reverse the Polarity to provide an<br />
answer supervision signal. In North America and Canada, this type of answer<br />
supervision is not normally supported by the CO.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
CO/PBX<br />
No.<br />
(01~64)<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
NO YS<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
2 Press LK3 + G + IK to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press LK2 to reverse polarity for an answer supervision signal on CO/PBX No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.<br />
4 Press G to write the selected data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Continue the Memory Block 3-90~3-92 cycle until CO/PBX No. 01 is displayed again.<br />
6 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
0 1 / 9 0 : R V R S N O<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
This Memory Block applies to Loop Start or Ground Start Trunks only.<br />
� Notes �<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
3<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
90<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BCT<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 498 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3-91 Trunk Type Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify an external line as a CO, PBX/CTX, Tie, DID, or<br />
CTX Assume - 9 line.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
CO<br />
PBX<br />
(or CTX)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
CO/PBX<br />
No.<br />
(01~64)<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Trunk<br />
Type<br />
0 1 / 9 1 : C O<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
TIE DID<br />
CTX<br />
(Assume - 9)<br />
2 Press LK3 + G + IA to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press line key to specify trunk type for CO/PBX No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.<br />
4 Press G to write the selected data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
1. This Memory Block affects T1 channels assigned as Tie or DID lines.<br />
� Notes �<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
3<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
91<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BCT<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
2. Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) lines can be assigned as PBX/CTX or CTX Assume - 9. A CTX<br />
Transfer does not work on ISDN lines.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 499
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3-92 Trunk (Installed, DP/DTMF)<br />
Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify an external line as DP (10 pps or 20 pps), DTMF<br />
line, or not connected (NIL).<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
NIL DP 10pps DP 20pps MF<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
CO/PBX<br />
No.<br />
(01~64)<br />
2 Press LK3 + G + IB to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press line key to specify external line as DP or DTMF for CO/PBX No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or CO/PBX No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to the next assigned CO/PBX No.<br />
4 Press G to write the selected data and display the next CO/PBX No. for Memory Block 3-90. After CO/PBX No. 64 is<br />
entered, CO/PBX No. 01 is again displayed on Memory Block 3-90.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
0 1 / 9 2 : M F<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
3-14 Tie Line Type Assignment<br />
4-12 Line Key Selection for <strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
Only Tie lines and Direct Inward Dialing (DID) trunks can use dial pulse on the <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> system. All other<br />
trunks must be set to multifrequency (MF).<br />
� Notes �<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
3<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
92<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BCT<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 500 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-01 CO/PBX Ring Assignment<br />
(Day Mode)<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign incoming CO/PBX calls to ring on Multiline Terminals<br />
in Day Mode.<br />
Display<br />
Settings 1<br />
Tel Port<br />
Number<br />
Tel<br />
Port<br />
No.<br />
(01~CO)<br />
Data<br />
* Title<br />
No.<br />
0 1 / 0 1 : R N G D Y | 0 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Meaning Operation<br />
*A0~A9 100~109 B + 1 for A<br />
*B0~B9 110~119 B + 2 for B<br />
*C0 120 B + 3 for C<br />
Settings 2<br />
Page 1 – Trunks 01~08<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08<br />
Page 2 – Trunks 09~16<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16<br />
Page 3 – Trunks17~24<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24<br />
Page 4 – Trunks 25~32<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32<br />
Page 5 – Trunks 33~40<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40<br />
Page 6 – Trunks 41~48<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48<br />
Trunk<br />
No.<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
4<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
01<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTT<br />
The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 501
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Page 7 – Trunks 49~56<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56<br />
Page 8 – Trunks 57~64<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK4 to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the CO/PBX Line key to select Day ring assignment for Tel Port No.<br />
The LED indication changes to indicate data each time a CO/PBX line key is pressed.<br />
CO/PBX<br />
Line Key LED<br />
Data No ring<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
C to go to the next page<br />
A to go to the previous page<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display Memory Block 4-02.<br />
Default Values<br />
5 After programming Memory Blocks 4-02~4-59, the next sequential Tel Port No. is automatically displayed.<br />
6 Repeat steps 3, 4, and 5 until all Tel Port Nos. are programmed. Tel Port No. 01 is displayed again.<br />
7 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
Off Green Red<br />
Immediate<br />
Ring<br />
Delayed Ring<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120. Refer to Settings 1 to enter ports A0~C0.<br />
� Notes �<br />
CO/PBX lines 01 ~ 08 ring at Tel Port<br />
numbers 01 and 02.<br />
Tel Port numbers 03 ~ 120 do not ring<br />
on any incoming CO/PBX calls.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 502 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-02 CO/PBX Ring Assignment<br />
(Night Mode)<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign incoming CO/PBX calls to ring in Night Mode.<br />
Display<br />
Settings 1<br />
Tel Port<br />
Number<br />
Tel<br />
Port<br />
No.<br />
(01~C0)<br />
Data<br />
* Title<br />
No.<br />
0 1 / 0 2 : R N G N T | 0 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Meaning Operation<br />
*A0~A9 100~109 B + 1 for A<br />
*B0~B9 110~119 B + 2 for B<br />
*C0 120 B + 3 for C<br />
Settings 2<br />
Page 1 – Trunks 01~08<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08<br />
Page 2 – Trunks 09~16<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16<br />
Page 3 – Trunks 17~24<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24<br />
Page 4 – Trunks 25~32)<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32<br />
Page 5 – Trunks 33~40<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40<br />
Trunk<br />
No.<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
4<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
02<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTT<br />
The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 503
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Page 6 – Trunks 41~48<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48<br />
Page 7 – Trunks 49~56)<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56<br />
Page 8 – Trunks 57~64)<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK4 + KB to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the CO/PBX Line key to select night ring assignment for Tel Port No.<br />
The LED indication changes to indicate data each time a CO/PBX line key is pressed.<br />
CO/PBX Line<br />
Key LED<br />
Data No Ring<br />
Off Green Red<br />
Immediate<br />
Ring<br />
Delayed<br />
Ring<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
C to go to the next page<br />
A to go to the previous page<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120. Refer to Settings 1 to enter ports A0~C0.<br />
Default Values<br />
� Notes �<br />
CO/PBX lines 01 ~ 08 ring at Tel Port<br />
numbers 01 and 02.<br />
Tel Port numbers 03 ~ 120 do not ring<br />
on any incoming CO/PBX calls.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 504 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-03 Doorphone Chime Assignment<br />
(Day Mode)<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign up to four doorphones to chime at each station in day<br />
mode.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 Shading shows<br />
the default.<br />
DPH1 DPH2 DPH3 DPH4<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Tel<br />
Port<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
(01~C0) Title<br />
No.<br />
0 1 / 0 3 : D P H D A Y<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK4 + KC to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use LK1~LK4 to assign doorphones 1~4 to chime for Day Mode on Tel Port No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
B + Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109<br />
B + Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119<br />
B + Cto enter C for Port Number 120<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Default Values<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
4<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
03<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTP<br />
Ports 01 and 02 chime for all<br />
doorphones.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 505
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-7-00 Doorphone Assignment<br />
1-7-01 Doorphone Display Time Selection<br />
1-7-04 Doorphone Ringing Pattern Selection<br />
1-7-05 Doorphone Ringing Frequency Selection<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.<br />
� Notes �<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 506 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-04 Doorphone Chime Assignment<br />
(Night Mode)<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign up to four doorphones to chime at each station in<br />
Night Mode.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selections<br />
DPH1 DPH2 DPH3 DPH4<br />
indicate default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Tel<br />
Port<br />
No.<br />
(01~C0)<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
2 Press + KD to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use LK1~LK4 to assign doorphones 1~4 to chime for Night Mode on Tel Port No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lo move the cursor right<br />
Title<br />
0 1 / 0 4 : D P H N I G H T<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
B +Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109<br />
B +Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119<br />
B +Cto enter C for Port Number 120<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Default Values<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
4<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
04<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTP<br />
Ports 01 and 02 chime for all<br />
doorphones.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 507
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-7-00 Doorphone<br />
1-7-01 Doorphone Display Time Selection<br />
1-7-04 Doorphone Ringing Pattern Selection<br />
1-7-05 Doorphone Ring Frequency Selection<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.<br />
� Notes �<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 508 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-07 Code Restriction Class Assignment<br />
(Day Mode)<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify Code Restriction Class per station in Day Mode.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Tel<br />
Port<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
(01~C0) Title<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK4 + KG to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use dial pad to change Day Mode Restriction Class 00 for Tel Port No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
0 1 / 0 7 : C L S D A Y = 0 0<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
B + Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109<br />
B + Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119<br />
B + Cto enter C for Port Number 120<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Refer to Chapter 3 Advanced Applications.<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
(00~15)<br />
Default Values<br />
� Notes �<br />
All Stations Class 00<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
4<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
07<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AC<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 509
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-08 Code Restriction Class Assignment<br />
(Night Mode)<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify Code Restriction Class per station in Night Mode.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Tel<br />
Port<br />
2 Press LK4 + KH to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use dial pad to change Night Mode Restriction Class 00 for Tel Port No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong>.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
(01~C0) Title<br />
No.<br />
0 1 / 0 8 : C L S N T = 0 0<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
B + Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109<br />
B + Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119<br />
B + Cto enter C for Port Number 120<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Refer to Chapter 3 Advanced Applications.<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
(00~15)<br />
Default Values<br />
� Notes �<br />
All Stations Class 00<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
4<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
08<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AC<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 510 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-09 <strong>Telephone</strong> to Tenant Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify Tenant Assignment per station.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Tel<br />
Port<br />
2 Press LK4 + KI to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use dial pad to change telephone to Tenant Assignment for Tel Port No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
B +Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109<br />
B +Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119<br />
B +Cto enter C for Port Number 120<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
(01~COA Title<br />
No.<br />
0 1 / 0 9 : T E N A N T = 0 0<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
2-01 Trunk To Tenant Assignment<br />
2-05 Line Key Selection<br />
2-06 Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode<br />
2-07 System Speed Dial Display Assignment<br />
2-08 ECR Relay to Tenant Assignment<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
(00~47)<br />
Default Values<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
4<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
09<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTT<br />
All <strong>Telephone</strong>s Tenant 00<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 511
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
� �<br />
1. Stations can be assigned to one of 48 Tenant Number (00 ~ 47).<br />
Notes<br />
2. The Call Pickup group is determined by Tenant assignment.<br />
3. <strong>Telephone</strong> ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 512 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-10 Station Number Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign a station number to each telephone.<br />
R2500 is required for 5-, 6-, or 7-digit Extension Numbers.<br />
Display (R1700 or lower)<br />
Tel<br />
Port<br />
Display (R2000 or higher)<br />
The number displayed after the leading digits is from Memory Block 1-2-34 (Expanded Station Number Assignment) when<br />
�<br />
assigned (R2500 is required).<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
No.<br />
(01~C0)<br />
0 1 / 1 0 : S T A - 1 0 0<br />
Tel<br />
Port<br />
No.<br />
(01~C0)<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
Title<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
0 1 / 1 0 : S T A X X X 1 0 0<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
2 Press LK4 + AK to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use dial pad to assign a 2- (10~89), 3- (100~899), 4-digit (1000~8999), or 5~7, 4-digit<br />
(0000~9999) station number for Tel Port No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
B + Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109<br />
B + Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119<br />
B + Cto enter C for Port Number 120<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Default Values<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
4<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
10<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BS<br />
Valid Station Numbers are 100~399.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 513
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-1-46 Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-1-47 Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-1-48 Access Code (3-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-2-03 2~7-Digit Station Number Selection<br />
1-2-24 Expanded Station Number Assignment<br />
1. Station Number Assignment is per station. A station number cannot be assigned to more than one telephone. A<br />
telephone cannot have more than one station number.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. When changing Station Numbers to a different numbering plan perform the following steps in order.<br />
a. Select Station Numbers using Memory Block 1-2-03 (2-,3-, or 4-digit Station Number Selection).<br />
b. Program applicable Access Code in Memory Block 1-1-46 [Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment], 1-1-47<br />
[Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment], or 1-1-48 [Access Code (3-Digit) Assignment].<br />
c. Program all Station Numbers using this Memory Block.<br />
3. <strong>Telephone</strong> ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.<br />
4. When 5-, 6-, or 7-digit Extension Numbers are used, the leading digits are assigned in Memory Block 1-2-34<br />
(Expanded Station Number Assignment) and are displayed in this Memory Block when assigned.<br />
5. When 5-, 6-, or 7-digit Extension Numbers are used, only the last four digits are assigned in this Memory Block.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 514 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-11 Ringing Line Preference Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not each station user can answer<br />
incoming ringing CO/PBX calls by going off-hook.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
NO YS<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Tel<br />
Port<br />
2 Press LK4 + AA to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press CO/PBX LK1 to prevent the Tel Port No. station user from answering incoming ringing CO/PBX calls by going off hook.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
B + Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109<br />
B + Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119<br />
B + Cto enter C for Port Number 120<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
No. Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
(01~C0)<br />
0 1 / 1 1 : R N G P R F Y S<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
4-01 CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)<br />
4-02 CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
4<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
11<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTM<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 515
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
� �<br />
1. <strong>Programming</strong> for this Memory Block applies to Ring Assigned telephones only.<br />
Notes<br />
2. An intercom call cannot be originated after a ring assigned CO/PBX line terminates on the telephone.<br />
3. <strong>Telephone</strong> ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.<br />
4. PS II telephone ports should have ringing line preference set to Yes.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 516 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-12 Line Key Selection for <strong>Telephone</strong><br />
Mode<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign a function to each CO/PBX line key on each<br />
telephone in a tenant specified as <strong>Telephone</strong> Mode in Memory Block 2-05 (Line Key<br />
Selection).<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Page 1<br />
Tel<br />
Port<br />
No.<br />
(01~C0)<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
NON CO FW BNA FW ALL<br />
Call<br />
Appearance<br />
Key<br />
Feature<br />
Access Key<br />
The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 517<br />
TKGP<br />
Route<br />
Advance<br />
Page 2<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
SIE Microphone H SET<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Key Line<br />
No.<br />
Setting<br />
1 Data<br />
6 max.<br />
Page<br />
(01~24)<br />
0 1 / 1 2 : L 0 1 = C O 0 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
SCROLL<br />
(ANI/Caller<br />
ID)<br />
Setting<br />
2 Data<br />
DND<br />
(On/Off)<br />
LOG<br />
(On/Off)<br />
BGM<br />
(On/Off)<br />
2 Press LK4 +AB to access the Memory Block. Verify that Memory Block 2-05 is set to TEL.<br />
ICM<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
4<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
12<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTM
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures (Continued)<br />
3 Press the CO/PBX line key to select a function for Line Key No. 1, and use dial<br />
keys to enter Setting Data 2 if required.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
C to go to the next page, or + to switch to page 2<br />
A to go to the previous page, or = to switch to page 1<br />
B + Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109<br />
B + Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119<br />
B + Cto enter C for Port Number 120<br />
For example, to assign Trunk Group 5 to CO/PBX line key 1, press LK7 to<br />
display the TKGP, and enter 05 using the dial pad.<br />
Setting Data Page 1<br />
Line<br />
Key<br />
Functions<br />
[For each telephone in tenant specified as<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Mode in Memory Block 2-05 (Line<br />
Key Selection)]<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Line Key No.<br />
Setting Data 1<br />
LCD Indication<br />
1 Not Specified NON N/A<br />
Default Values<br />
2 CO/PBX line CO 01~64<br />
3 Call Forward – Busy/No Answer FW BNA N/A<br />
4 Call Forward – All Call FW ALL N/A<br />
5 Call Appearance Block C00~C47<br />
(Call Appearance Block)<br />
6 Feature Access F A 01~16<br />
7 Trunk Group TKGP 01~32<br />
8 Route Advance ADV 01~32<br />
Setting Data Page 2<br />
1<br />
Secondary Incoming Extension, including CAR SIE<br />
2 Microphone MIC N/A<br />
3 Headset H SET N/A<br />
4 Scroll Key for ANI/Caller ID SCROLL N/A<br />
5 Do Not Disturb - Break Mode On/Off DND N/A<br />
6 Log On/Off LOG N/A<br />
7 Background Music On/Off BGM N/A<br />
8 Intercom Key ICM N/A<br />
For Tel 01~CO: LK01~08 Assigned to<br />
CO/PBX lines 01~08.<br />
Setting Data 2<br />
01~24<br />
(Call Appearance Key)<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Port No.<br />
01~99, A0~C0<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 518 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures (Continued)<br />
5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each Line Key assignment. After Line Key No. 24 is programmed, the next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
2-05 Line Key Selection (Tenant Mode)<br />
1. When an <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> system is installed as a Key Function (KF) system, all COs must be assigned to the<br />
line keys. Trunk groups, Route Advance Blocks and Least Cost Routing (LCR) cannot be assigned.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. At system default, line keys 09~24 are not assigned.<br />
3. <strong>Telephone</strong> ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.<br />
4. A minimum of two call appearance keys should be assigned to each PS II.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 519
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-13 CO/PBX Busy Forward Station<br />
Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify up to two telephones to ring when a CO/PBX call<br />
terminates at a busy station.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Tel<br />
Port<br />
No.<br />
(01~C0)<br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK4 + AC to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use dial pad to change data.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
B + Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109.<br />
B + Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119<br />
B + Cto enter C for Port Number 120<br />
Setting Data: Port No. 01 ~ 96<br />
�<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display Forward No. 2.<br />
5 Enter second transfer Port No.<br />
Forward<br />
No.<br />
6 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
7 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Default Values<br />
Not specified<br />
1. When the Multiline Terminal where the forward is initially set (Forward 1) is busy, the call is forwarded to a<br />
second specified station (Forward 2).<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. When all three stations are busy, the first station rings.<br />
1/2<br />
0 1 / 1 3 : F W D 1 =<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
3. <strong>Telephone</strong> ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
4<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
13<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTT<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 520 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-14 Intercom Master Hunt Number<br />
Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not each telephone port number is<br />
designated as an intercom master hunt number.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
NO YS<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Tel<br />
Port<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
(01~C0) Title<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK4 + AD to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change data option.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
B + Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109<br />
B + Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119<br />
B + Cto enter C for Port Number 120<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
0 1 / 1 4 : M S T E R N O<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
4-15 Intercom Master Hunt Number Forward Assignment<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
4<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
14<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTT<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 521
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
� �<br />
1. When YS is assigned, an incoming internal call from another station, Automated Attendant transferred call, or<br />
DIT/ANA/DID/Tie line designated call is forwarded to a station specified in Memory Block 4-15 (Intercom Master<br />
Notes<br />
Hunt Number Forward Assignment) when the line is busy.<br />
2. <strong>Telephone</strong> ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 522 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-15 Intercom Master Hunt Number<br />
Forward Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify a telephone to ring for an incoming call when YS is<br />
specified in Memory Block 4-14 (Intercom Master Hunt Number Selection) and the<br />
Intercom Master Hunt Number line is busy.<br />
R2500 is required for 5-, 6-, or 7-digit Extension Numbers.<br />
Display (R1700 or lower)<br />
Display (R2000 or higher)<br />
The number displayed after the leading digits is from Memory Block 1-2-34 (Expanded Station Number Assignment) when<br />
�<br />
assigned (R2500 is required).<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Tel<br />
Port<br />
No.<br />
(01~C0)<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
0 1 / 1 5 : I C M F W D<br />
Tel<br />
Port<br />
No.<br />
(01~C0)<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
Title<br />
0 1 / 1 5 : S T A X X X<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
2 Press LK4 + AE to access the Memory Block.<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
4<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
15<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTT<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 523
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
3 Use dial pad to enter station number. To set Tel. Port No. to forward station number 300,<br />
enter CKK.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
H to clear data when cursor is at setting data<br />
B + Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109<br />
B + Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119<br />
B + Cto enter C for Port Number 120<br />
Setting data Forward Station Number is one of the following:<br />
�<br />
2 digit (10 ~ 89)<br />
3 digit (100 ~ 899)<br />
4 digit (1000 ~ 8999)<br />
5 digit (X0000 ~ X9999)<br />
6 digit (XX0000 ~ XX9999)<br />
7 digit (XXX0000 ~ XXX9999)<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-1-46 Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-1-47 Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-1-48 Access Code (3-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-2-03 2~7-Digit Station Number Selection<br />
1-2-34 Expanded Station Number Assignment<br />
4-10 Station Number Assignment<br />
4-14 Intercom Master Hunt Number Selection<br />
Default Values<br />
All <strong>Telephone</strong>s Not Specified<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 524 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Notes �<br />
�<br />
1. <strong>Telephone</strong> ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.<br />
2. Example - Assign the following Memory Blocks:<br />
Memory Block 4-14 (Intercom Master Hunt Number Selection)<br />
�<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Port Number 01 ==> YES<br />
All other Port Numbers ==> NO<br />
Memory Block 4-10 (Station Number Assignment<br />
�<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Port Number and related Station Number<br />
Port<br />
No.<br />
Station<br />
No.<br />
01 ==> 100<br />
02 ==> 101<br />
03 ==> 102<br />
04 ==> 103<br />
Memory Block 4-15 (Intercom Master Hunt Number Forward Assignment)<br />
�<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Port Number (Port Number forwards to Station Number)<br />
Port<br />
No.<br />
Station<br />
No.<br />
01 ==> 101<br />
02 ==> 102<br />
03 ==> 103<br />
Incoming to Station,<br />
100<br />
(01)<br />
103<br />
(04)<br />
3. When 5-, 6-, or 7-digit Extension Numbers are used, the leading digits are assigned in Memory Block 1-2-34<br />
(Expanded Station Number Assignment) and are displayed in this Memory Block when assigned.<br />
4. When 5-, 6-, or 7-digit Extension Numbers are used, only the last four digits are assigned in this Memory Block.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 525<br />
(02)<br />
100<br />
(Master)<br />
101<br />
(Busy) FWD (Busy) FWD<br />
FWD<br />
(Busy)<br />
(03)<br />
102
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-17 Station to Class of Service Feature<br />
Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify a class for each Table (1 or 2) to enable/disable<br />
features per station.<br />
Display<br />
Tel<br />
Port<br />
No.<br />
(01~C0)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK4 + AG to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to enter Service Class (00 ~ 15) for Table 1/Table 2.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
B + Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109<br />
B + Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119<br />
B + Cto enter C for Port Number 120<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display Table 2 data.<br />
5 Enter Table 2 Service Class, and press G to write data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Table<br />
No.<br />
0 1 / 1 7 : C L S ( 1 ) = 0 0<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
1-8-07 Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection 1<br />
1-8-08 Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2<br />
1/2<br />
Setting<br />
Service<br />
Class<br />
Default Values<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong><br />
Number<br />
Table<br />
Number<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
4<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
17<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTT<br />
Service<br />
Class<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 526 Memory Blocks<br />
01<br />
02<br />
03 ~ C0<br />
1 ATTN 00<br />
2 STA 00<br />
1 ATTN 00<br />
2 STA 00<br />
1 ATTN 15<br />
2 STA 00
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
� �<br />
1. Table 1 includes features that telephone ports 01 and 02 users are normally allowed to activate. Select any<br />
Class pattern specified in Memory Block 1-8-07 [Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection 1].<br />
Notes<br />
2. Table 2 includes features that all telephones users are normally allowed to activate. Select any Class pattern<br />
specified in Memory Block 1-8-08 [Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2].<br />
3. <strong>Telephone</strong> ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 527
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-18 Station Name Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign names for telephone stations.<br />
R4000 or higher is required to support 16 characters for the Station Name.<br />
Display (R3500 or lower)<br />
Tel<br />
Port<br />
No.<br />
(01~C0)<br />
Display (R4000 or higher)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
0 1 / 1 8 : < ><br />
Tel<br />
Port<br />
No.<br />
(01~C0)<br />
2 Press LK4 + AH to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to enter data.<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
0 1 / 1 8 : S T A N A M E<br />
Setting Data<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
H to clear data when cursor is at setting data<br />
B + Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109<br />
B + Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119<br />
B + Cto enter C for Port Number 120<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Default Values<br />
Not Specified<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
4<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
18<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTT<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 528 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
� �<br />
1. While an internal line is ringing or in use, the station number and name of the other party are displayed.<br />
Notes<br />
2. The name is not displayed when Tone Override, Automatic Callback, or Callback Request is displayed.<br />
3. Only six digits/characters can be used for each name.<br />
4. <strong>Telephone</strong> ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.<br />
5. Refer to Appendix B Character Codes, Section 1 Character Assignment on page B-1 for the procedure for<br />
entering station names using the dial pad instead of the ASCII Character Code Tables.<br />
6. R4000 or higher is required to support 16 characters for the Station Name.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 529
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-19 Trunk Outgoing Restriction<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify per CO/PBX line whether or not to restrict line<br />
seizure for an outgoing call.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Page 1 – Ports 01~08<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08<br />
Page 2 – Ports 09~16<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16<br />
Page 3 – Ports 17~24<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24<br />
Page 4 – Ports 25~32<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32<br />
Page 5 – Ports 33~40<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40<br />
Page 6 – Ports41~48<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48<br />
Page 7 – Ports 49~56<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56<br />
Page 8 – Ports 57~64<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Tel<br />
Port<br />
No. Data<br />
Trunk<br />
No.<br />
Title (01~C0)<br />
0 1 / 1 9 : T R K R S T | 0 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK4 + AI to access the Memory Block.<br />
Default not<br />
assigned.<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
4<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
19<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTT<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 530 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures (Continued)<br />
3 Press the CO/PBX line key corresponding to each CO/PBX line.<br />
The LED indication changes to indicate data each time a CO/PBX line key is pressed.<br />
CO/PBX<br />
Line Key LED<br />
Off On<br />
Data Not Restricted Restricted<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
C to go to the next page<br />
A to go to the previous page<br />
H to clear data when cursor is at setting data position<br />
B + Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109<br />
B + Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119<br />
B + Cto enter C for Port Number 120<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Default Values<br />
Not Restricted<br />
1. A restricted CO/PBX line allows the station user to answer an incoming call or access a held call, but does not<br />
allow a user to originate a CO/PBX call.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. When restricted is specified in this section, the data in Memory Blocks 4-07 [Code Restriction Class Assignment<br />
(Day Mode)] and Memory Block 4-08 [Code Restriction Class Assignment (Night Mode)] is treated as invalid<br />
even if specified.<br />
3. <strong>Telephone</strong> ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.<br />
The shaded selection<br />
is the default.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 531
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-23 Prime Line/Hot Line Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to enable user to access various features when going<br />
off-hook.<br />
Display<br />
Tel<br />
Port<br />
No.<br />
(01~C0)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
0 1 / 2 3 :<br />
2 Press LK4 + BC to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use dial pad to enter telephone number (10 Digits max.) for Tel Port No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
B + Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109.<br />
B + Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119<br />
B + Cto enter C for Port Number 120<br />
B and Jto � input<br />
B andLto input #<br />
Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
4 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Default Values<br />
Not Specified<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
4<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
23<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTT<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 532 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
� �<br />
1. Prime Line function enables a user to seize a specified trunk when the Multiline Terminal goes off-hook. Refer to<br />
function codes 063 and 064 for Memory Blocks 1-1-46 [Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment] and 1-1-47 [Access<br />
Notes<br />
Code (2-Digit) Assignment].<br />
2. To call the specified station number or CO line on Hot Line, go off-hook.<br />
3. When using Prime Line an access code ( A and E ) or ICM key can be used to seize the intercom<br />
(ICM) Dialtone for internal call processing.<br />
4. To use Hot Line Assignment, one of the following must be entered:<br />
� Station Number<br />
� Access Code and Dial Number<br />
� Speed Dial Access Code and Speed Dial Buffer Number<br />
5. Only 10 digits can be assigned.<br />
6. <strong>Telephone</strong> ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 533
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-24 SLT Hookflash Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to either Hold or disconnect the trunk for the Single Line<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> (SLT) hooking operation.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
HOLD DISC<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Tel<br />
Port<br />
No.<br />
(01~C0)<br />
2 Press LK4 + BD to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change data option.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
B + Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109<br />
B + Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119<br />
B + Cto enter C for Port Number 120<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
0 1 / 2 4 : S L T H K H O L D<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-3-02 SLT Hookflash Signal Selection<br />
4-23 Prime Line/Hot Line Assignment<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
4<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
24<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTI<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 534 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
� �<br />
1. This Memory Block affects only Single Line <strong>Telephone</strong> stations assigned Prime Line in Memory Block 4-23<br />
(Prime Line/Hot Line Assignment).<br />
Notes<br />
2. When Prime Line is assigned to an Single Line <strong>Telephone</strong>, hookflash drops the CO and issues intercom (ICM)<br />
dial tone when this Memory Block is set to disconnect.<br />
3. After a Single Line <strong>Telephone</strong> begins to dial out 9 +, hookflash follows Memory Block 1-3-02 (SLT Hookflash<br />
Signal Selection) selection.<br />
4. <strong>Telephone</strong> ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 535
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-26 DISA ID Number Station Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign the Direct Inward System Access (DISA) ID Buffer<br />
Number corresponding to the station port number. The Station Message Detail<br />
Recording (SMDR) printout of the station number identifies the calling party that dialed<br />
the DISA ID number.<br />
Display<br />
Station<br />
Port<br />
No.<br />
(01~C0)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
0 1 / 2 6 : I D N O . = 0 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK4 + BF to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to assign DISA ID Buffer Number 01 to Station Port No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
B + Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109<br />
B + Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119<br />
B + Cto enter C for Port Number 120<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
Default Values<br />
Station Port<br />
Number<br />
� Notes �<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
4<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
26<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BD<br />
DISA ID Buffer<br />
Number<br />
01 01<br />
02 ~ C0 02 ~ C0<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 536 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-28 Multilingual LCD Indication<br />
Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the language displayed on the Multiline Terminal<br />
LCD.<br />
DisplayS<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
JAPA FREN ENG SPAN<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Tel<br />
Port<br />
No.<br />
(01~C0)<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
2 Press LK4 + BH to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change language option for Tel Port No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
0 1 / 2 8 : L A N G U E N G<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
B + Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109<br />
B + Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119<br />
B + Cto enter C for Port Number 120<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.<br />
� Notes �<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
4<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
28<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTM<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 537
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-29 HFU Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to enable/disable per station the built-in Handsfree HFU-U<br />
Unit.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Tel<br />
Port<br />
No.<br />
(01~C0)<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
NO YS<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Table<br />
0 1 / 2 9 : H F U N O<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK4 + BI to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press LK2 if you want to enable the HFU-U Unit for Tel Port No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
B + Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109<br />
B + Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119<br />
B + Cto enter C for Port Number 120<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
� Notes �<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
4<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
29<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTM<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 538 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-30 Hold/Transfer Recall Display<br />
Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to enable/disable the Hold Recall indication on the LCD.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Tel<br />
Port<br />
No.<br />
(01~C0)<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
YS NO<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
0 1 / 3 0 : H L D D S P Y S<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK4 + CK to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press LK2 to disable Hold Recall LCD Indication for Tel Port No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
B + Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109<br />
B + Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119<br />
B + Cto enter C for Port Number 120<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press G to go back on-line.<br />
1. When this Memory Block is assigned YS, HOLD RECALL replaces the Time Display.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. LCD indication of the CO line number is displayed on the upper line of the display when a recall occurs,<br />
regardless of the assignment for this Memory Block.<br />
3. <strong>Telephone</strong> ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
4<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
30<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTM<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 539
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-31 Receiving Internal/All Call Page<br />
Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify per station whether or not an Internal Zone or<br />
Internal All Zone Page is received.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Tel<br />
Port<br />
No.<br />
(01~C0)<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
YS NO<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
0 1 / 3 1 : P A G I N G Y S<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK4 + CA to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press LK2 to disable Internal Zone or Internal All Zone page for Tel Port No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
B + Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109<br />
B + Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119<br />
B + C3 to enter C for Port Number 120<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
1. Internal Emergency All Call Page and Internal Paging by Tenant group override this Memory Block. Refer to<br />
Memory Block 1-1-46 [Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment].<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. <strong>Telephone</strong> ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
4<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
31<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTT<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 540 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-32 Trunk Digit Restriction<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify per port the maximum number of digits that can be<br />
dialed on any outside line.<br />
Display<br />
Tel<br />
Port<br />
No.<br />
(01~C0)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK4 + CB to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to change Setting Data for CO/PBX No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong>.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
0 1 / 3 2 : D G R E S T = 0 0<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
B + Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109<br />
B + Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119<br />
B + Cto enter C for Port Number 120<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Refer to Chapter 3 Advanced Applications.<br />
1. Code Restriction must be assigned before this feature is used.<br />
Default Values<br />
00 (No Limit)<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. Trunk Digit Restriction applies to all CO/PBX lines.<br />
3. Tie Line Code Restriction must be assigned before this feature works on Tie lines.<br />
4. <strong>Telephone</strong> ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
(00~99)<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
4<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
32<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTT<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 541
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-35 Voice Mail/SLT Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not a Voice Mail system is interfaced with<br />
the system for Single Line <strong>Telephone</strong> ports.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Tel<br />
Port<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
NO YS<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
(01~C0) Title<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK4 + CE to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press LK2 to interface Voice Mail with single line telephones for Tel Port No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
0 1 / 3 5 : V M A I L N O<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
B + Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109<br />
B + Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119<br />
B + Cto enter C for Port Number 120<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
7-2 <strong>Telephone</strong> Type Assignment (used for digital voice mail ports)<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
4<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
35<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTI<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 542 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
� �<br />
1. The SLT(1)-U( ) ADP Adapter and the ADA(2)-W Unit do not support Voice Mail.<br />
Notes<br />
2. Only 16 Voice Mail ports are supported by this system.<br />
3. <strong>Telephone</strong> ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 543
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-36 Voice Prompt Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify per port whether or not to allow Voice Prompt.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Tel<br />
Port<br />
No.<br />
(01~C0)<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
NO YS<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK4 + CF to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press LK2 to allow voice prompt for Tel Port No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
0 1 / 3 6 : P R O M P T N O<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
B + Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109<br />
B + Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119<br />
B + Cto enter C for Port Number 120<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Refer to individual features in the <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Features and Specifications <strong>Manual</strong>.<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
� Notes �<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
4<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
36<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTT<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 544 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-37 Extension Line Key Ring Assignment<br />
(Day Mode)<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the day ringing assignment on incoming calls to a<br />
Secondary Incoming Extension (SIE) or a Call Arrival key.<br />
Display<br />
Tel<br />
Port<br />
No.<br />
(01~C0)<br />
Settings<br />
Page 1 – Line Keys 01~08<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8<br />
Page 2 – Line Keys 09~16<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16<br />
Page 3– Line Keys 17~24<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
0 1 / 3 7 : E X T D A Y | 0 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Line<br />
Key<br />
2 Press LK4 + CG to access the Memory Block.<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
4<br />
Default not<br />
assigned.<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
37<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTM<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 545
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
3 Press the Line Key corresponding to ringing required for Tel Port No.<br />
The LED indication changes to indicate data each time a CO/PBX Line Key is<br />
pressed.<br />
CO/PBX<br />
Line Key LED<br />
Data No ring<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
C to go to the next page<br />
A to go to the previous page<br />
B + Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109<br />
B + Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119<br />
B + Cto enter C for Port Number 120<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Off Green Red<br />
Immediate<br />
Ring<br />
1-2-26 Delayed Ringing Time Assignment (ICM)<br />
4-12 Line Key Selection for <strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
1. When Immediate Ring is set, the LED is green.<br />
Default Values<br />
All <strong>Telephone</strong>s: No Ring<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. This Memory Block applies only when an SIE or Call Arrival key is programmed for line key appearance.<br />
3. <strong>Telephone</strong> ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.<br />
Delayed<br />
Ring<br />
The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 546 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-38 Extension Line Key Ring Assignment<br />
(Night Mode)<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the night ringing assignment on incoming calls to a<br />
Secondary Incoming Extension (SIE) or a Call Arrival Key.<br />
Display<br />
Tel<br />
Port<br />
No.<br />
(01~C0)<br />
Settings<br />
Page 1 – Line Keys 01~08<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8<br />
Page 2 – Line Keys 09~16<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16<br />
Page 3 – Line Keys 17~24<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
0 1 / 3 8 : E X T N T | 0 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Line<br />
Key<br />
2 Press LK4 + CH to access the Memory Block.<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
4<br />
Default not<br />
assigned.<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
38<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTM<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 547
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
3 Press the Line Key corresponding to ringing required for Tel Port No.<br />
The LED indication changes to indicate data each time a CO/PBX Line Key is<br />
pressed.<br />
CO/PBX<br />
Line Key LED<br />
Data No ring<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
C to go to the next page<br />
A to go to the previous page<br />
B + Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109<br />
B + Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119<br />
B + Cto enter C for Port Number 120<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Off Green Red<br />
Immediate<br />
Ring<br />
1-2-26 Delayed Ringing Time Assignment (ICM)<br />
4-12 Line Key Selection for <strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
1. When Immediate Ring is set, the LED is green.<br />
Default Values<br />
All <strong>Telephone</strong>s: No Ring<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. This Memory Block applies only when an SIE or Call Arrival key is programmed for line key appearance.<br />
3. <strong>Telephone</strong> ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.<br />
Delayed<br />
Ring<br />
The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 548 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-39 APR Ring Mode Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the ringing mode for a Single Line <strong>Telephone</strong><br />
connected to an AP(R)-R or APR-U Unit.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
NON<br />
(No Ring)<br />
STA<br />
(Station<br />
Number)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Tel<br />
Port<br />
No.<br />
(01~C0)<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
ALL<br />
Title<br />
0 1 / 3 9 : A P R S T A<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK4 + CI to access the Memory Block.<br />
The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
3 Press line key to specify ringing Mode for a single line telephone connected to an APR-U Unit for Tel Port No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
B + Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109<br />
B + Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119<br />
B + Cto enter C for Port Number 120<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
4<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
39<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTM<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 549
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
� �<br />
1. No Ring means that no calls ring at the Single Line Device connected to an AP(R)-R or APR-U Unit.<br />
Notes<br />
2. Station Number ring means that only calls directed to the Multiline Terminal Station Number, ring at the Single<br />
Line Device connected to an AP(R)-R or APR-U Unit.<br />
3. ALL ring means that all calls that ring at the Multiline Terminal also ring at the Single Line Device connected to an<br />
AP(R)-R or APR-U Unit.<br />
4. <strong>Telephone</strong> ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 550 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-40 LCR Class Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify per station the Least Cost Routing (LCR) Class. The<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> system has four Area Code Tables. Each LCR Class can have<br />
different Trunk group access to allow priority levels for the station user. This Memory<br />
Block can be used to specify either the LCR Class or the Automatic Route Selection<br />
(ARS) Class (Tables 1~4) depending on the system configuration.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
0 1 2 3 4<br />
Numbers are<br />
LCR Classes.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Tel<br />
Port<br />
No.<br />
(01~C0)<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
2 Press LK4 + DK to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press line key to specify LCR Class for Tel Port No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
0 1 / 4 0 : L C R C L S = 0<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
B + Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109<br />
B + Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119<br />
B + Cto enter C for Port Number 120<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
4<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
40<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTT<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 551
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
� �<br />
1. LCR Class Selection corresponds to Area Code Tables as follows:<br />
Class 0 No LCR<br />
Notes<br />
Class 1 Use Area Code Table 1<br />
Class 2 Use Area Code Table 2<br />
Class 3 Use Area Code Table 3<br />
Class 4 Use Area Code Table 4<br />
2. Stations cannot be assigned to multiple LCR Classes.<br />
3. The KMM(1.0)U must be installed on the MIFM-U( ) ETU to support this feature.<br />
4. <strong>Telephone</strong> ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 552 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-41 SIE/CAR Ringing Line Preference<br />
Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not to allow Ringing Line Preference (go<br />
off-hook or press Speaker key) on all telephones that are assigned Secondary<br />
Incoming Extension (SIE) and/or Call Arrival keys.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Tel<br />
Port<br />
No.<br />
(01~C0)<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
NO YS<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
0 1 / 4 1 : S – C P R F Y S<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK4 +DA to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press LK1 to disable Ringing Line Preference for SIE or CAR for Tel Port No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
B + Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109<br />
B + Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119<br />
B + Cto enter C for Port Number 120<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
4<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
41<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTM<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 553
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
4-37 Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Day Mode)<br />
4-38 Extension Line Key Ring Assignment (Night Mode)<br />
1. <strong>Telephone</strong> ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. The SIE/CAR must be ringing for this Memory Block to work.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 554 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-42 Call Forward-Busy Immediately/<br />
Delay Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify immediate forward (NO) or delay forward (YS) for an<br />
Incoming CO/PBX call if the station is set for Call Forward – Busy.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Tel<br />
Port<br />
No.<br />
(01~C0)<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
NO YS<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
0 1 / 4 2 : B U S Y F W D Y S<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK4 + DB to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press LK1for immediate forward to a station set to Call Forward – Busy for Tel Port No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
B + Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109<br />
B + Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119<br />
B + Cto enter C for Port Number 120<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
4<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
42<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTT<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 555
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-2-22 Call Forward No Answer Time Selection<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.<br />
� Notes �<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 556 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-43 Station to Call Appearance Block<br />
Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign a Multiline Terminal to a Call Appearance Block.<br />
Display<br />
Tel<br />
Port<br />
No.<br />
(01~C0)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK4 + DC to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to enter Call Appearance Block assignment for Tel Port No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
(00~47)<br />
0 1 / 4 3 : C A P N O 0 0<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
B + Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109<br />
B + Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119<br />
B + Cto enter C for Port Number 120<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Refer to individual features in the <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Features and Specifications <strong>Manual</strong>.<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.<br />
Default Values<br />
All stations are assigned to<br />
Call Appearance Block 00.<br />
� Notes �<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
4<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
43<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTT<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 557
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-44 Caller ID Preset Dial Outgoing CO<br />
Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign the Trunk group, Route Advanced group, or Closed<br />
Numbering group that is seized for ANI/Caller ID Outgoing Calls. Use the ANI/Caller<br />
ID Scroll key to access the ANI/Caller ID to be called.<br />
Display<br />
Tel<br />
Port<br />
No.<br />
(01~C0)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
0 1 / 4 4 :<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK4 + DD to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to enter Trunk Group, Route Advance group, or Closed<br />
Numbering group Access Code to seize for ANI/Caller ID outgoing calls for<br />
Tel Port No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
B + Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109<br />
B + Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119<br />
B + Cto enter C for Port Number 120<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Default Value<br />
Not specified<br />
1. Setting Data is Access Code Assignment in Memory Blocks 1-1-46, 47, 48 [Access Code (1-Digit, 2-Digit, or<br />
3-Digit) Assignment]. For example: Dial 9 (101) → Trunk Group 1.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. Assign the ANI/Caller ID Scroll key using Memory Blocks 2-06 (Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode) or 4-12<br />
(Line Key Selection for <strong>Telephone</strong> Mode).<br />
3. <strong>Telephone</strong> ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120. Use redial +1 for A, redial +2 for B, and redial +3 for C.<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
4<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
44<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AI<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 558 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-46 Live Record Auto Delete Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not live record sessions that are not<br />
addressed by the station user are deleted.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Tel<br />
Port<br />
No.<br />
(01~C0)<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
YS NO<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
0 1 / 4 6 : A U T O D E L N O<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK4 + DF to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press LK2 to delete live record sessions not addressed by the user for Tel Port No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
B + Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109<br />
B + Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119<br />
B + Cto enter C for Port Number 120<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Default Values<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 559<br />
NO<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
4<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
46<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AV
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-47 ISDN Directory Number Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not the directory Number is presented to<br />
the Network when a call is placed from the programmed station.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
YES NO<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Tel<br />
Port<br />
No.<br />
(01~C0)<br />
2 Press LK4 + DG to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
0 1 / 4 7 : C – I D Y E S<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
3-52 ISDN Trunk Directory Number Assignment<br />
3-91 Trunk Type Assignment<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
4-62 ISDN-PRI Directory Number Assignment<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
4<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
47<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AN<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 560 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
BRI:<br />
� Notes �<br />
1. When this Memory Block is set to No, the station placing an outgoing call does not present the programmed<br />
number in Memory Block 3-52 assigned for the BRI Trunks. The Network presents Restricted for the Caller ID<br />
information.<br />
2. When this Memory Block is set to YES, the station placing an outgoing call presents the programmed number in<br />
Memory Block 3-52 assigned for the BRI Trunks. The Network presents the programmed number as Caller ID.<br />
PRI:<br />
1. For ISDN-PRI Calling Party Number (CPN) Presentation from Station, PRT firmware Version 3.50 or higher is<br />
required.<br />
2. When this Memory Block is set to No, and ISDN-PRI is used in CO Mode in Memory Block 3-91, the programmed<br />
number in Memory Block 3-52 is not presented as Caller ID. The Network presents Restricted for the Caller ID<br />
information.<br />
3. When this Memory Block is set to YES, and ISDN-PRI is used in CO Mode in Memory Block 3-91, the<br />
programmed number in Memory Block 3-52 is presented as Caller ID. The Network presents the programmed<br />
number as Caller ID.<br />
4. When this Memory Block is set to No, and ISDN-PRI is used in DID Mode in Memory Block 3-91, the<br />
programmed number in Memory Block 3-52 is not presented as Caller ID.<br />
5. When this Memory Block is set to YES, and ISDN-PRI is used in DID Mode in Memory Block 3-91, the<br />
programmed number in Memory Block 4-62 is presented as Caller ID. The Network presents the programmed<br />
number as Caller ID.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 561
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-49 Caller ID Display for CAR Key<br />
Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign one Multiline Terminal per CAR to display ANI/Caller<br />
ID Indication on incoming CAR calls.<br />
This Memory Block is used for R1600 and lower. For R1700 or higher, it is no longer<br />
required.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
CAR Port<br />
No. Title<br />
No.<br />
0 1 / 4 9 : C A L L I D 0 0<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK4 + DI to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to enter Tel port No for CAR Port No. 01.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
Tel<br />
No. Port<br />
(01~C0)<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
B + Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109<br />
B + Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119<br />
B + Cto enter C for Port Number 120<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Default Value<br />
Not Specified<br />
To display ANI/Caller ID Indication for normal incoming CO calls and CAR incoming calls, both ANI/Caller ID<br />
Indication and Ring assignment must be assigned for the terminal in System <strong>Programming</strong>. A maximum of 15<br />
Multiline Terminals can be assigned system-wide to display caller identification for normal incoming CO calls and<br />
CAR incoming calls using Memory Block 1-1-78 (Caller ID Display Assignment for System Mode). A sixteenth<br />
Multiline Terminal can be assigned to display ANI/Caller ID Indication for CAR incoming calls per CAR using this<br />
Memory Block.<br />
� Notes �<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
4<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
49<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AI<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 562 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-50 Multiline Terminal Type Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign a DTU/DTP or DTH/DTR-32-1 TEL, DTP or<br />
DTH/DTR-32D-1 TEL, or DTU-32D-2 TEL with 16 Line Keys or 24 Line Keys.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
16 24 24A<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Tel<br />
Port<br />
No.<br />
(01~C0)<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
2 Press LK4 + EK to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press LK2 if you want 24 line keys for Tel Port No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
0 1 / 5 0 : M L T T P 1 6<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
B + Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109<br />
B + Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119<br />
B + Cto enter C for Port Number 120<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Default Values<br />
All stations have 16 line keys.<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
4<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
50<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTM<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 563
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Notes �<br />
�<br />
1. <strong>Telephone</strong> ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.<br />
2. Line Key Orientation:<br />
LK = Line Keys<br />
OT = One-Touch keys<br />
DTU/DTP-32-1 TEL or DTP-32D-1 or DTU-32D-2<br />
16 Line Key Mode 24 Line Key Mode<br />
LK1 LK2 LK3 LK4 OT 1 OT 9 LK1 LK2 LK3 LK4 LK17 LK21<br />
LK5 LK6 LK7 LK8 OT 2 OT 10 LK5 LK6 LK7 LK8 LK18 LK22<br />
LK9 LK10 LK11 LK12 OT 3 OT 11 LK9 LK10 LK11 LK12 LK19 LK23<br />
LK13 LK14 LK15 LK16 OT 4 OT 12 LK13 LK14 LK15 LK16 LK20 LK24<br />
OT 5 OT 13 OT 1 OT 5<br />
OT 6 OT 14 OT 2 OT 6<br />
OT 7 OT 15 OT 3 OT 7<br />
OT 8 OT 16 OT 4 OT 8<br />
DTH/DTR-32D-1 TEL<br />
16 Line Key Mode 24 Line Key Mode<br />
LK1 LK2 LK3 LK4 LK5 LK6 LK7 LK8 LK1 LK2 LK3 LK4 LK5 LK6 LK7 LK8<br />
LK9 LK10 LK11 LK12 LK13 LK14 LK15 LK16 LK9 LK10 LK11 LK12 LK13 LK14 LK15 LK16<br />
OT1 OT2 OT3 OT4 OT5 OT6 OT7 OT8 LK17 LK18 LK19 LK20 OT 1 OT 2 OT 3 OT 4<br />
OT9 OT10 OT11 OT12 OT13 OT14 OT15 OT16 LK21 LK22 LK23 LK24 OT 5 OT 6 OT 7 OT 8<br />
24A Line Key Mode<br />
LK1 LK2 LK3 LK4 LK5 LK6 LK7 LK8<br />
LK9 LK10 LK11 LK12 LK13 LK14 LK15 LK16<br />
LK17 LK18 LK19 LK20 LK21 LK22 LK23 LK24<br />
OT 1 OT 2 OT 3 OT 4 OT 5 OT 6 OT 7 OT 8<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 564 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-51 Off-Hook Ringing Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign per station Off-Hook Ringing to the Multiline<br />
Terminal.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Tel<br />
Port<br />
No.<br />
(01~C0)<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
YS NO<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
0 1 / 5 1 : O F F R I N G Y S<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK4 + EA to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press LK2 to disable Off-Hook Ringing for Tel Port No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
B + Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109<br />
B + Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119<br />
B + Cto enter C for Port Number 120<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
Default Values<br />
All Terminals = YS<br />
� Notes �<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
4<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
51<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTM<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 565
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-52 CO/PBX Answer Key Operation<br />
Without Ringing Assignment (Day<br />
Mode)<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not day assignment Answer key<br />
operation uses ringing. When NO is selected, press the Answer key while an incoming<br />
CO line key is flashing to answer the line key call. When YS is selected, the telephone<br />
must be ringing for the Answer Key to answer an incoming CO/PBX call.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Tel<br />
Port<br />
No.<br />
(01~C0)<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
NO YS<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
0 1 / 5 2 : R I N G D Y S<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK4 +EB to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press LK1 to disable ringing for answer key operation for Tel Port No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
B + Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109<br />
B + Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119<br />
B + Cto enter C for Port Number 120<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
4<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
52<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTT<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 566 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Notes �<br />
�<br />
1. <strong>Telephone</strong> ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.<br />
2. Ringing must be assigned in Memory Block 4-01 [CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)] for the YS choice to<br />
work. When ringing is assigned, and NO is assigned here, the telephone does not ring during incoming CO/PBX<br />
calls.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 567
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-53 CO/PBX Answer Key Operation<br />
Without Ringing Assignment<br />
(Night Mode)<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not night assignment Answer key<br />
operation uses ringing. When NO is selected, press the Answer key while an<br />
incoming CO line key is flashing to answer the line key call. When YS is selected, the<br />
telephone must be ringing for the Answer key to answer an incoming CO/PBX call.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Tel<br />
Port<br />
No.<br />
(01~C0)<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
NO YS<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
0 1 / 5 3 : R I N G N Y S<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK4 + EC to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press LK1 to press the answer key while an incoming CO line key is flashing to answer the call for Tel Port No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
B + Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109<br />
B + Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119<br />
B + Cto enter C for Port Number 120<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
4<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
53<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTT<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 568 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Notes �<br />
�<br />
1. <strong>Telephone</strong> ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.<br />
2. Ringing must be assigned in Memory Block 4-02 [CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)] for the YS choice to<br />
work. When ringing is assigned, and NO is assigned here, the telephone does not ring during incoming CO/PBX<br />
calls.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 569
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-54 Enhanced 911 CESID to Station Table<br />
Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify E911 Caller Emergency Service Identification<br />
(CESID).<br />
Display<br />
Tel<br />
Port<br />
No.<br />
(01~C0)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
0 1 / 5 4<br />
2 Press LK4 + ED to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Enter data using dial pad. Enter 7- or 10-digit code plus up to 5-digit extension number (15 digits maximum) for Tel port No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
H to clear data when cursor is at setting data position<br />
B + Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109<br />
B + Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119<br />
B + Cto enter C for Port Number 120<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
4<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
54<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AE<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 570 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-8-43 Enhanced 911 Trunk Assignment<br />
1-8-44 Enhanced 911 Alternate Route Assignment<br />
1-8-45 Enhanced 911 Alternate Route Assignment (Maintenance Busy)<br />
1-8-46 Enhanced 911 Dialing Digit Assignment<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.<br />
� Notes �<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 571
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-55 CO/PBX <strong>Telephone</strong> Ringing Pattern<br />
Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the ringing pattern assigned to each telephone.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Page 1<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
—<br />
(None)<br />
Page 2<br />
Port Tel<br />
No.<br />
(01~CO)<br />
Ringing<br />
Pattern A<br />
Ringing<br />
Pattern B<br />
Ringing<br />
Pattern C<br />
Ringing<br />
Pattern D<br />
Ringing<br />
Pattern E<br />
Ringing<br />
Pattern F<br />
Ringing<br />
Pattern G<br />
LK 1<br />
Ringing<br />
Pattern H<br />
LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
0 1 / 5 5 : C O R N G – | 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK4 + EE to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to select the ringing pattern for Tel Port No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
Setting<br />
Page<br />
Data<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
C to go to the next page<br />
A to go to the previous page<br />
B + Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109<br />
B + Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119<br />
B + Cto enter C for Port Number 120<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
4<br />
The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
55<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTT<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 572 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
4-57 CO Line Ringing Pattern Priority Selection<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Ports A0-C0 are ports 100~120.<br />
The Ring Patterns are shown in the table below:<br />
Pattern<br />
A<br />
B<br />
C<br />
D<br />
E<br />
F<br />
G<br />
H<br />
NO No Ring<br />
� Notes �<br />
s= seconds<br />
0s 1s 2s 3s 4s 5s 6s<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 573
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-56 SMDR <strong>Telephone</strong> Print Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not a call record is printed for the<br />
specified station.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
YES NO<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Port Tel<br />
No.<br />
(01~CO)<br />
2 Press LK4 + EF to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press LK2 to deny call record printing for Tel port No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
B + Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109<br />
B + Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119<br />
B + Cto enter C for Port Number 120<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
0 1 / 5 6 : P R T O U T Y S<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-5-13 Printer Connected Selection<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
� Notes �<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
4<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
56<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AS<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 574 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-57 CO Line Ringing Pattern Priority<br />
Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the priority for station or CO/PBX line ringing.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Port Tel<br />
No.<br />
(01~CO)<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
CO TEL<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
0 1 / 5 7 : R N G P R I C O<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK4 + EG to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
B + Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109<br />
B + Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119<br />
B + Cto enter C for Port Number 120<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
4<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
57<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTT<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 575
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
4-55 CO/PBX <strong>Telephone</strong> Ringing Pattern Selection<br />
3-67 CO/PBX Ringing Pattern Selection<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.<br />
� Notes �<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 576 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-58 Automated Attendant Selection for<br />
DID<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the Automated Attendant message for DID calls.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Page 1<br />
Port Tel<br />
No.<br />
(01~CO)<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
NON<br />
Page 2<br />
AA1 AA2 AA3 AA4 AA5 AA6 AA7<br />
LK 1<br />
AA8<br />
LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK4 +EH to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the line key to specify Automated Attendant priority for Tel port No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
Setting<br />
Page<br />
Data<br />
0 1 / 5 8 : D I D – > N O N | 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
C to go to the next page<br />
A to go to the previous page<br />
B + Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109<br />
B + Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119<br />
B + Cto enter C for Port Number 120<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.<br />
� Notes �<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
4<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
58<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AU<br />
The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 577
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-59 APR/APA Hookflash Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to allow/deny Hookflash for Analog Port Adapter with Ringer<br />
(AP(R)-R/APR-U) or Analog Port Adapter (AP(A)-R/APA-U) without ringer on a<br />
Multiline Terminal.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Page 1<br />
Port Tel<br />
No.<br />
(01~CO)<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
NO YS<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK4 + EI to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the setting data option.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
B + Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109<br />
B + Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119<br />
B + Cto enter C for Port Number 120<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display Memory Block 4-1 for next Tel Port No.<br />
5 Program the next Tel Port No. or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
0 1 / 5 9 : H K F L S H N O<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-1-02 Hookflash Time Selection<br />
1-3-02 SLT Hookflash Signal Selection<br />
4-39 APR Ring Mode Assignment<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
4<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
59<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AU<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 578 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
4-95 DTMF/DP SLT Type Selection<br />
The Single Line <strong>Telephone</strong> operates normally when connected to an AP(R)-R/ APR-U or AP(A)-R/ APA-U.<br />
� Notes �<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 579
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-62 ISDN-PRI Directory Number<br />
Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to provide the station DID Number (CPN, Calling Party<br />
Number) to the Network when placing outgoing calls.<br />
Display<br />
Tel<br />
Port<br />
No.<br />
(01~C0)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
0 1 / 6 2 :<br />
2 Press LK4 + FB to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to enter data.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to the next TEL port number<br />
H to clear data<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display Memory Block 4-01.<br />
5 Program Memory Block 4-01 or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
3-52 ISDN Trunk Directory Number Assignment<br />
3-91 Trunk Type Assignment<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
4-47 ISDN Directory Number Selection<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
4<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
62<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AN<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 580 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Notes �<br />
�<br />
1. A maximum of 13 digits is allowed.<br />
2. Hyphens/dashes are not allowed when entering the directory number.<br />
3. This Memory Block supports only trunks assigned as DID in Memory Block 3-91.<br />
4. When using CO Line Mode, Memory Block 3-52 is used to assign the directory number for ISDN-PRI.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 581
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-64 Code Restriction Class (without<br />
Authorization Code) Day Mode<br />
Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the Code Restriction Class per station in Day Mode<br />
when Forced Account Code/Authorization Code is set in Memory Block 1-8-08 [Class<br />
of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2] and a call is made without using a Forced<br />
Account Code/Authorization Code.<br />
Display<br />
Port Tel<br />
No.<br />
(01~CO)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
0 1 / 6 4 : C L S D A Y = 1 5<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK4 + FD to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to change Day Mode Restriction Class for Tel port No.<br />
� Use the following to enter data:<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
to move the cursor left<br />
L to move the cursor right<br />
J<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
B + Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109<br />
B + Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~11<br />
B + Cto enter C for Port Number 120<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Default Value<br />
All Stations Class 15<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
4<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
64<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AC<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 582 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-1-46<br />
1-1-47<br />
1-1-48<br />
Access Code(1,2,3-Digit) Assignment<br />
Function 146 – Forced Account Code/Authorization Code<br />
Function 147 – Forced Account Code/Authorization Code Access<br />
1-8-07 Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection 1<br />
Page 2, LK 8 – Forced Account Code/Authorization Code <strong>Programming</strong><br />
1-8-08 Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2<br />
Page 5, LK 1 – Forced Account Code/Authorization Code<br />
Page 6, LK 3 – Unverified for Forced Account Code/Authorization Code<br />
1-8-27 Forced Account Code/Authorization Code Length Assignment<br />
4-07 Code Restriction Class Assignment (Day Mode)<br />
4-08 Code Restriction Class Assignment (Night Mode)<br />
4-17 Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment<br />
4-65 Code Restriction Class (without authorization code) Night Mode Assignment<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.<br />
� Notes �<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 583
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-65 Code Restriction Class (without<br />
Authorization Code) Night Mode<br />
Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the Code Restriction Class per station in Night Mode<br />
when Forced Account Code/Authorization Code is set in Memory Block 1-8-08 [Class<br />
of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2] and a call is made without using a Forced<br />
Account Code/Authorization Code.<br />
Display<br />
Port Tel<br />
No.<br />
(01~CO)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
0 1 / 6 5 : C L S N T = 1 5<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK4 + FE to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to change Night Mode Restriction Class for Tel port No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
K~Ito enter Restriction Class or Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
B + Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109<br />
B + Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119<br />
B + Cto enter C for Port Number 120<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Default Value<br />
All Stations Class 15<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
4<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
65<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AC<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 584 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-1-46<br />
1-1-47<br />
1-1-48<br />
Access Code(1,2,3-Digit) Assignment<br />
Function 146 – Forced Account Code/Authorization Code<br />
Function 147 – Forced Account Code/Authorization Code Access<br />
1-8-07 Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection 1<br />
Page 2, LK 8 – Forced Account Code/Authorization Code <strong>Programming</strong><br />
1-8-08 Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2<br />
Page 5, LK 1 – Forced Account Code/Authorization Code<br />
Page 6, LK 3 – Unverified for Forced Account Code/Authorization Code<br />
1-8-27 Forced Account Code/Authorization Code Length Assignment<br />
4-07 Code Restriction Class Assignment (Day Mode)<br />
4-08 Code Restriction Class Assignment (Night Mode)<br />
4-17 Station to Class of Service Feature Assignment<br />
4-64 Code Restriction Class (without authorization code) Day Mode Assignment<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.<br />
� Notes �<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 585
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-66 MOH or Ring Back Tone Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign MOH or Ring Back Tone for the outside party when a<br />
trunk call is placed on hold by the Transfer key on a Multiline Terminal, hook flash from<br />
a Single Line <strong>Telephone</strong>, or the Transfer or Hold key at a PSII station.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Page 1<br />
Port Tel<br />
No.<br />
(01~CO)<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
MOH RBT<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
0 1 / 6 6 : H O L D M O H<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK4 + FF to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the setting data option.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
K~Ito enter Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
B + Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109<br />
B + Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119<br />
B + Cto enter C for Port Number 120<br />
4 Press G to write the data and advance to the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
4<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
66<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTT<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 586 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-8-09 Music on Hold Pattern Selection<br />
1-8-31 Hold Tone Source Assignment<br />
1-8-32 Hold Internal Tone Volume Selection<br />
3-11 CO External Source Selection<br />
3-12 Trunk-to-MOH Trunk Assignment<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.<br />
� Notes �<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 587
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-67 IP Station Number Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign a station number for each IP telephone supported by<br />
the IPCA( )-U( ) ETU.<br />
System Software R2500 is required.<br />
Display<br />
Port Tel<br />
No.<br />
(01~CO)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
0 1 / 6 7 : I P I C M<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK4 + FG to access the Memory Block.<br />
� 3 Use dial pad to assign a 2- (10~89), 3- (100~899) or 4-digit (1000~8999) station number for each Tel Port No.:<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
B + Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109<br />
B + Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119<br />
B + Cto enter C for Port Number 120<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
4<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
67<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTT<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 588 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
7-1 Card Interface Slot Assignment<br />
1-1-46 Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment<br />
Function 001<br />
1-1-47 Access Code (2-Digit) Assignment<br />
Function 001<br />
1-1-48 Access Code (3-Digit) Assignment<br />
Function 001<br />
1-2-03 2~7-Digit Station Number Selection<br />
1-2-04 Call Arrival Key Block Assignment<br />
1-2-21 PS <strong>Telephone</strong> Block Assignment<br />
1-2-32 IP <strong>Telephone</strong> Block Assignment<br />
1-2-33 IP <strong>Telephone</strong> Block Assignment Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-2-34 Expanded Station Number Assignment<br />
4-07 Code Restriction Class Assignment (Day Mode)<br />
4-08 Code Restriction Class Assignment (Night Mode)<br />
4-10 Station Number Assignment<br />
4-40 LCR Class Selection<br />
4-54 Enhanced 911 CESID to Station Table Assignment<br />
4-56 SMDR <strong>Telephone</strong> Print Selection<br />
1. The <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Basic port package allows up to 30 IP <strong>Telephone</strong>s to be installed using dedicated ports<br />
73~104.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. The maximum station port capacity for the <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Expanded port package is reduced by the number of<br />
IPC IP <strong>Telephone</strong>s assigned by this Memory Block in groups of four.<br />
3. The <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Expanded port package allows a maximum of 120 ports to be shared by station ports (ESI,<br />
SLI, OPX, FMS/VMS, etc. ), Call Arrival Keys, PS <strong>Telephone</strong>s, and IP <strong>Telephone</strong>s. When 32 station ports are<br />
being used as IP <strong>Telephone</strong>s, 88 Station ports remain for use by the <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Legacy system.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 589
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-68 LCD Line Key – Name Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign a name to each LCD Line Key of the<br />
DTH/DTR-16LD-1 <strong>Telephone</strong>. Up to eight characters can be assigned.<br />
Display<br />
Port Tel<br />
(01~CO)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK4 + FH to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to change Line key number or name.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter Name, Line key number or Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
B + Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109<br />
B + Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119<br />
B + Cto enter C for Port Number 120<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Line key and name.<br />
Default Value<br />
LK01~08: C0 01~08<br />
5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each Line key assignment. After Line key 16 is programmed, the next Tel Port No. is displayed. When<br />
you want to program less than 16 keys, after the last Line key to program, press D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
After all Tel Ports are assigned, the next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
6 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
0 1 / 6 8 : L K 0 1 N A M E<br />
Setting Data<br />
< C O 0 1 ><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Key Line<br />
Title<br />
01~16<br />
7-2 <strong>Telephone</strong> Type Assignment<br />
4-12 Line Key Selection for <strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
4<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
68<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTT<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 590 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Notes �<br />
�<br />
1. <strong>Telephone</strong> Ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.<br />
2. The name can be entered using the dial pad. Follow the procedures in Appendix B Character Codes.<br />
3. The default names listed in the table below are assigned based on the line key type from Memory Block 4-12<br />
(Line Key Selection for <strong>Telephone</strong> Mode).<br />
LK Assign Default Note<br />
NON (not assigned) All Blank<br />
CO Outside Lines CO^xx xx=Port 01~64<br />
Call Forward – Busy/No Answer CFB<br />
Call Forward – All Calls CFA<br />
Call Appearance Keys (CAP) CAPxx-yy<br />
xx=Block 00~47<br />
yy=Key 01~24<br />
Programmable One-Touch Keys FA xx xx=key 01~24<br />
Trunk Group TKGP^xx xx=Trunk Group 01~32<br />
Route Advance Group ADV^xx xx=Group 01~16<br />
SIE including CAR SIE^xxx xxx=Port No. 01~99, AO~CO<br />
Microphone MIC<br />
Headset On/Off Key HSET<br />
Scroll Key for Caller ID indication SCROLL<br />
Do Not Disturb On/Off DND<br />
Log On/Off LOG<br />
BGM On/Off BGM<br />
Intercom Key ICM<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 591
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-69 CO Message Waiting Indication<br />
Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign the CO Message Waiting Indication to Line Keys<br />
assigned for direct CO/PBX appearances in Memory Block 4-12 (Line Key Selection<br />
for <strong>Telephone</strong> Mode) per line key per station.<br />
R2000 or higher is required.<br />
Display<br />
Port Tel<br />
No.<br />
(01~CO)<br />
Settings<br />
Page 1 Line Keys 01~08<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8<br />
Page 2 Line Keys 09~16<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 default not<br />
assigned.<br />
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16<br />
Page 3 Line Keys 17~24<br />
Data<br />
Title Line Key<br />
No.<br />
0 1 / 6 9 : C O M W | O 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
4<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
69<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTT<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 592 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK4 + FI to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the Line Key corresponding to CO Message Waiting Indication required for Tel Port No.<br />
The LED indication changes to indicate data each time a CO/PBX Line Key is pressed:<br />
Off Not assigned<br />
On Red: Assigned<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
C to go to the next page<br />
A to go to the previous page<br />
B + Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109<br />
B + Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119<br />
B + Cto enter C for Port Number 120<br />
4 Press G to write the data and advance to the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-8-07 Class of Service (Attendant) Feature Selection 1<br />
Page 3, LK 2<br />
3-73 CO Message Waiting Yes/No Selection<br />
This assignment is valid for Multiline Terminals only.<br />
� Notes �<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 593
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-70 LCD Line Key – Name Assignment<br />
(Station Add-On Console)<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign a name to each Station Add-On Console. Up to<br />
eight characters can be assigned per line key.<br />
R4000 or higher is required to support the Add-On Console.<br />
Display<br />
Port Tel<br />
No.<br />
(01~CO)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
0 1 / 7 0 : D S 0 1 N A M E 5<br />
< ><br />
Setting Data<br />
No LK<br />
Name<br />
01~16<br />
2 Press LK4 + GK to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to change line key number or name.<br />
� Use the following to enter data:<br />
to move the cursor left<br />
L to move the cursor right<br />
J<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
B + Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109<br />
B + Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~11<br />
B + Cto enter C for Port Number 120<br />
4 Use dial pad to enter characters for each line key.<br />
5 Press G to write the data and display the next line key and name.<br />
6 Repeat step 4 for each line key assignment. After Line Key 16 is programmed, the<br />
next Memory Block is displayed. For less than 16 line keys, after the last line key<br />
to be programmed, press D to go to next Tel. Port No.<br />
7 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Default Value<br />
LK01~16: Blank<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
4<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
70<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTM<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 594 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
7-2 <strong>Telephone</strong> Type Assignment<br />
4-50 Multiline Terminal Type Selection<br />
1. <strong>Telephone</strong> Ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. The name can be entered using the dial pad. Follow the procedure in Appendix B Character Codes.<br />
3. Maximum of 120 Station Add-On Consoles.<br />
4. The Station Add-On Console cannot be connected to a 32-button terminal.<br />
5. The Station Add-On Console can be used only for DSS/BLF keys. COs cannot be assigned to the Station<br />
Add-On Console.<br />
6. When using the Station Add-On Console, Memory Block 4-50 (Multiline Terminal Type Selection) should be<br />
assigned as a 16-button terminal for the ports that have the Station Add-On Console connected.<br />
7. The Station Add-On Console can be connected only to a –X Terminal or higher.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 595
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-71 Station to Timer Class of Service<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the Timer Class of Service per station.<br />
R3000 or higher is required.<br />
Port Tel<br />
No.<br />
(01~CO)<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
0 1 / 7 1 : T M R C L S 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK4 + GA to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to change Station to Timer Class of Service.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
1~4<br />
K~Ito enter Restriction Class or Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
B + Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109<br />
B + Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119<br />
B + Cto enter C for Port Number 120<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Timer Class of Service.<br />
5 Program the next Timer Class of Service or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Default Value<br />
Tel Ports 1 & 2 = Class 1<br />
All other ports = Class 2<br />
CO/PBX Line Mode<br />
4<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
71<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AC<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 596 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-1-03 Hold Recall Time Selection (Non-Exclusive Hold)<br />
1-1-05 Start Time Selection<br />
1-1-07 Tie Line Delay Ringing Time Selection<br />
1-1-12 Station Transfer/Camp-On Recall Time Selection<br />
1-1-37 Trunk Queuing Timeout Selection<br />
1-1-63 Hold Recall Time Selection (Exclusive)<br />
1-2-00 Internal Paging Timeout Selection<br />
1-2-02 Automatic Callback Release Time Selection<br />
1-2-22 Call Forward – No Answer Time Selection<br />
1-2-23 System Call Park Recall Time Selection<br />
1-4-02 Automated Attendant Transfer Delayed Ringing Time Selection<br />
1-7-06 External Paging Timeout Selection<br />
1. <strong>Telephone</strong> Ports 1 and 2 are in Station to Timer Class of Service, Class 1 by default. All other ports are in Station<br />
to Timer Class of Service, Class 2 by default.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. When a system is upgraded from R2500 or below, the related Memory Blocks above and the following are reset<br />
to the default value during the upgrade process:<br />
1-1-06 CO/PBX Incoming Ringing Alarm Time Selection<br />
1-1-81 ISDN Dial Interval Time Selection<br />
1-3-03 First Digit PBR Release Time Selection<br />
1-4-01 Automated Attendant First Digit PBR Release Time Selection<br />
1-4-03 Automated Attendant No Answer Disconnect Time Selection<br />
1-7-01 Doorphone Display Time Selection<br />
3. <strong>Telephone</strong> Ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 597
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-90 SLT Data Line Security Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify NORMAL or DATA position for a Single Line<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> (SLT).<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Tel<br />
Port<br />
No.<br />
(01~C0)<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
NORMAL DATA<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
2 Press LK4 + IK to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press LK2 to select DATA for Single Line <strong>Telephone</strong>s for Tel Port No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
B +Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109<br />
B +Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119<br />
B +Cto enter C for Port Number 120<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program Memory Blocks 4-91~4-95. The next Tel Port No. is displayed.<br />
Default Values<br />
Ports 01~CO = NO<br />
6 Repeat Steps 3, 4, and 5, for all Tel Port Nos. Tel Port No. 01 is displayed again for Memory Block 4-90.<br />
7 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
0 1 / 9 0 : S L T N O R M A L<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
4<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
90<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTT<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 598 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
� �<br />
1. When connecting SLT/Voice Mail, assign NORMAL. When connecting Fax/Modem, assign DATA.<br />
Notes<br />
2. When Multiline Terminal is assigned for Data Line Security, Tone Override and Call Alert Notification tones are<br />
not heard from the handset; however, the tone is still sent and heard from the speaker when off-hook.<br />
3. Data Line Security denies a station from barging in, even if Barge-In is allowed in Class of Service.<br />
4. When this Memory Block is set to DATA, the Voice Override tone is not heard when doing a Voice Over Split.<br />
5. <strong>Telephone</strong> ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 599
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-91 <strong>Telephone</strong> Ringing Variation<br />
Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign a Low, Medium, or High ringing tone frequency when<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> is specified in Memory Block 1-1-28 (Distinctive Ringing by <strong>Telephone</strong> or<br />
CO Selection).<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Tel<br />
Port<br />
No.<br />
(01~C0)<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
M L H<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK4 + IA to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the line Key to select ringing frequency for Tel Port No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
B + Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109<br />
B + Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119<br />
B + Cto enter C for Port Number 120<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Title<br />
0 1 / 9 1 : R N G T O N E = M<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-1-28 Distinctive Ringing by <strong>Telephone</strong> or CO Selection<br />
3-07 CO/PBX Ringing Variation Selection<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
4<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
91<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTM<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 600 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
� �<br />
1. This Memory Block is applicable for telephones selected in Memory Block 1-1-28 (Distinctive Ringing by<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> or CO Selection).<br />
Notes<br />
2. Selected ringing tone (H, M or L) applies to incoming outside line calls only.<br />
3. <strong>Telephone</strong> ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 601
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-92 Receiving Volume Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether receiving volume is returned to normal<br />
(DOWN) or kept as is (UP) on a call after hanging up.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Tel<br />
Port<br />
No.<br />
(01~C0)<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
DOWN UP<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
2 Press LK4 + IB to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press LK2 to keep volume UP after hanging up a call.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
0 1 / 9 2 : R C V D O W N<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
B + Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109<br />
B + Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119<br />
B + Cto enter C for Port Number 120<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
When UP is assigned in this Memory Block, and a user sets the handset volume to maximum, the volume is reset<br />
to a level to meet FCC standard when the user hangs up.<br />
� Notes �<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
4<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
92<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTT<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 602 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-93 Internal Zone Paging Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign stations as Internal page zones.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Tel<br />
Port<br />
No.<br />
(01~C0)<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
NO A B C<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
0 1 / 9 3 : Z O N E N O<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK4 + IC to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to select internal page zone for Tel Port No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
B + Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109<br />
B + Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119<br />
B + Cto enter C for Port Number 120<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
4<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
93<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTM<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 603
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
1. Specify one zone:<br />
All Internal Zones: Paged by dialing 51<br />
Zone A: Paged by dialing 52<br />
Zone B: Paged by dialing 53<br />
Zone C: Paged by dialing 54<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. <strong>Telephone</strong>s can be assigned to No Zone. All Internal Zones page the telephone unless No Page Receive is<br />
assigned in Memory Block 4-31 (Receiving Internal/All Call Page Selection).<br />
3. All Internal Zones pages all of the idle Multiline Terminals.<br />
4. <strong>Telephone</strong> ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 604 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-94 3-Minute Alarm Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify per station whether or not a warning tone is<br />
generated at 3-minute intervals during an outgoing or incoming CO/PBX call.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
NO YS<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Tel<br />
Port<br />
No.<br />
(01~C0)<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
0 1 / 9 4 : 3 m A L M N O<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK4 + ID to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press LK2 to generate a three-minute warning tone during a call for Tel port No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
B + Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109<br />
B + Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119<br />
B + Cto enter C for Port Number 120<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
1. A 1-second (approximately) warning signal sounds every three minutes during CO/PBX calls.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. The alarm tone is heard through the terminal speaker only.<br />
3. When the built-in speakerphone is used for handsfree, the warning signal is not used.<br />
4. <strong>Telephone</strong> ports A0~C0 are ports 100~120.<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
4<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
94<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTM<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 605
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4-95 DTMF/DP SLT Type Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify per port whether Dial Pulse or Dual-Tone<br />
Multifrequency (MF) Single Line <strong>Telephone</strong> is connected to the system.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Tel<br />
Port<br />
No.<br />
(01~C0)<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
DP MF<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
2 Press LK4 + IE to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press LK1 to specify Dial Pulse for single line telephones connected to the system.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
0 1 / 9 5 : S L T = M F<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data or Tel Port No.<br />
– OR –<br />
D to go to next assigned Tel Port No.<br />
B + Ato enter A for Port Numbers 100~109<br />
B + Bto enter B for Port Numbers 110~119<br />
B + Cto enter C for Port Number 120<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Tel Port No. for Memory Block 4-90.<br />
5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for all Tel Port Nos. Tel Port No. 01 for Memory Block 4-90 is displayed.<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
4<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
95<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BTI<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 606 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
5-00 Digit Add/Del for Tie Line Networking<br />
Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the number of digits to add/delete from the<br />
telephone number sent from a distant system over Tie lines or from DID lines. The<br />
digits enable the system to determine whether a call is directed to the local system or<br />
to a distant system. Refer to Notes.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Trunk<br />
No.<br />
Group<br />
(01~32)<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
0 1 / 0 0 : A D D / D E L 0 0 0<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK5 to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to enter the data.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
�<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data<br />
D to go to the next Trunk Group No.<br />
Setting Data:<br />
000: No Addition or Deletion<br />
001~009: [1]~[9] Add<br />
010: [0] Digit Add<br />
100~199: [00]~[99} Add<br />
201: 1-Digit Delete<br />
202: 2-Digit Delete<br />
301~309: 1-Digit Delete and 1~9 Add<br />
310: 1-Digit Delete and 0 Add<br />
400~499: 1-Digit Delete and 00~99 Add<br />
501~509: 2-Digit Delete and 1 ~ 9 Add<br />
510: 2-Digit Delete and 0 Add<br />
600~699: 2-Digit Delete and 00 ~99 Add<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display Memory Block 5-01.<br />
5 After Memory Blocks 5-01~5-03 are programmed, the next Trunk Group No. is displayed on Memory Block 5-00.<br />
6 Program all Trunk Group Nos. Trunk Group No. 01 is displayed again.<br />
Trunk Group Mode<br />
5<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
00<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+ALN<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 607
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
7 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-1-46 Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment<br />
3-03 Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment<br />
1. This Memory Block applies only when two or more systems are connected by Tie lines or when the systems are<br />
connected by a DID line.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. When the call is intended for another system, the Tie line is directed to send the number again.<br />
3. At default, DID lines are not assigned to a Trunk group.<br />
4. This Memory Block affects T1 channels assigned as Tie/DID lines.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 608 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
5-01 Tie Line Networking Tandem<br />
Connection Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not Trunk groups connected to the<br />
system allow incoming Trunk groups to be connected to outgoing Trunk groups for<br />
tandem connections.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Page 1<br />
(Incoming)<br />
Group<br />
Trunk<br />
No.<br />
(01~32)<br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
0 1 / 0 1 : T A N D E M | 0 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Trunk<br />
Group<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
01<br />
Page 2<br />
02 03 04 05 06 07 08<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
09<br />
Page 3<br />
10 11 12 13 14 15 16<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
17<br />
Page 4<br />
18 19 20 21 22 23 24<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32<br />
Trunk Group Mode<br />
5<br />
The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
01<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+ALN<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 609
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK5 + G + KA .<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option. Operation data includes:<br />
CO/PBX<br />
Line LED<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
C to go to the next page<br />
A to go to the previous page<br />
D to go to the next Trunk Group No.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
Off On<br />
Data No Yes<br />
3-03 Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment<br />
4-09 <strong>Telephone</strong> to Tenant Assignment<br />
The shaded<br />
selection is<br />
the default.<br />
Tandem connection of Trunk Group-to-Trunk Group must be specified separately.<br />
� Notes �<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 610 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
5-02 8-Digit Matching Table to Trunk<br />
Group Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign each Trunk group to the 8-Digit Matching Tables.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Page 1<br />
Trunk<br />
No.<br />
Group<br />
(01~32)<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
Table 00<br />
Page 2<br />
Table 01 Table 02 Table 03 Table 04 Table 05 Table 06 Table 07<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
Table 08 Table 09 Table 10 Table 11 Table 12 Table 13 Table 14 Table 15<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK5 + G + KB to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the data option.<br />
Operation data includes:<br />
CO/PBX<br />
Line LED<br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
C to go to the next page<br />
A to go to the previous page<br />
D to go to the next Trunk Group No.<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Memory Block.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong>.<br />
Title<br />
0 1 / 0 2 : 8 D G – T R K G | 1<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Off On<br />
Data Disabled Enabled<br />
Refer to Chapter 3 Advanced Applications.<br />
Page<br />
No.<br />
The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
Trunk Group Mode<br />
5<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
02<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AC<br />
All are enabled<br />
at default.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 611
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
5-03 OCC Table to Trunk Group<br />
Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign each of the 16 OCC Tables to each Trunk group.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
Page 1<br />
Group<br />
Trunk<br />
No.<br />
(01~32)<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
Table 00<br />
Page 2<br />
Table 01 Table 02 Table 03 Table 04 Table 05 Table 06 Table 07<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8<br />
Table 08 Table 09 Table 10 Table 11 Table 12 Table 13 Table 14 Table 15<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK5 + G + KC to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to enter the data. Operation data includes:<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
C to go to the next page<br />
A to go to the previous page<br />
D to go to the next Trunk Group No.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
0 1 / 0 3 : O C C - T R K G | 1<br />
CO/PBX<br />
Line LED<br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Off On<br />
4 Press G to write the data and display the next Trunk Group No. for Memory Block 5-00.<br />
Refer to Chapter 3 Advanced Applications.<br />
Page<br />
No.<br />
Data Disabled Enabled<br />
The shaded selection is<br />
the default.<br />
Default Values<br />
Use all tables.<br />
Trunk Group Mode<br />
5<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
03<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AC<br />
All are enabled.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 612 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
5-04 LCR Class to Trunk Group Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block per trunk group to specify the Least Cost Routing (LCR)/<br />
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Class. For systems connected using K-CCIS, the<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> can analyze incoming telephone numbers received from a distant system<br />
and use the LCR/ARS assignments to route the call to its desired destination.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
selection is the<br />
0 1 2 3 4<br />
default.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Trunk<br />
Group<br />
(01~32)<br />
2 Press LK5 + G +KDto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
0 1 / 0 4 : C L A S S 0<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
3-70 CIC Number Assignment<br />
1-1-05 Start Time Selection<br />
1-1-46~48 Access Code (1-, 2- or 3-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-15-00 K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection<br />
1-15-01 Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignment<br />
1-15-02 Common Signal Channel Assignment<br />
1-15-03 Originating Point Code Assignment<br />
1-15-04 Destination Point Code Assignment<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
1-15-05 Destination Point Code Transfer Assignment<br />
1-15-06 Originating Office Code Number Assignment<br />
Trunk Group Mode<br />
5<br />
Submode<br />
Data No.<br />
04<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AW<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 613
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong> (Continued)<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-15-07 K-CCIS Message Response Timeout Assignment<br />
1-15-08 Link Reconnect Allow/Deny Selection<br />
1-15-09 K-CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Assignment<br />
1-15-10 Calling Name Display Allow/Deny Selection<br />
5-05 Common Signaling Channel Route Selection<br />
Refer to the <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Key-Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (K-CCIS) <strong>Manual</strong> for details.<br />
� Notes �<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 614 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
5-05 Common Signaling Channel Route<br />
Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the Common Signaling Channel for each voice trunk<br />
group used for K-CCIS.<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Trunk<br />
Group<br />
(01~32)<br />
2 Press LK5+ G + KE to access the Memory Block.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move cursor left<br />
Lto move cursor right<br />
K~ Ito enter numeric data<br />
3 Press G to write the data.<br />
4 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
0 1 / 0 5 : C C H C H 0<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
3-70 CIC Number Assignment<br />
1-1-05 Start Time Selection<br />
1-1-46~48 Access Code (1-, 2- or 3-Digit) Assignment<br />
1-15-00 K-CCIS Main/Remote Office Selection<br />
1-15-01 Common Signal Channel Data Speed Assignment<br />
1-15-02 Common Signal Channel Assignment<br />
1-15-03 Originating Point Code Assignment<br />
1-15-04 Destination Point Code Assignment<br />
1-15-05 Destination Point Code Transfer Assignment<br />
1-15-06 Originating Office Code Number Assignment<br />
1-15-07 K-CCIS Message Response Time Assignment<br />
1-15-08 Link Reconnect Allow/Deny Selection<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
Default Values:<br />
0 (Not Assigned)<br />
CCH: 1~4<br />
Trunk Group Mode<br />
5<br />
Submode<br />
Data No.<br />
05<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+AW<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 615
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-15-09 K-CCIS Maximum Call Forwarding Hop Assignment<br />
1-15-10 Calling Name Display Allow/Deny Selection<br />
5-4 LCR Class to Trunk Group Selection<br />
This Memory Block is used to assign the voice channels to the Common Channel. When the voice channels<br />
trunk group is set at 0, K-CCIS does not operate correctly.<br />
� Notes �<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 616 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
5-06 Trunk Group Outgoing Priority<br />
Selection<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign the Outgoing Priority for trunk access to each Trunk<br />
Group. This is normally used with a Tie Line or K-CCIS network to reverse the search<br />
order and reduce call collisions during trunk seizure.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
H → L<br />
High to Low<br />
L → H<br />
Low to High<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Trunk<br />
Group<br />
(01~32)<br />
2 Press LK5 + G +KFto access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Press the corresponding CO/PBX line key to change the Setting Data option.<br />
4 Press G to write the data. The next Memory Block is displayed.<br />
5 Program the next Memory Block or press E to go back on-line.<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Data<br />
No.<br />
Title<br />
0 1 / 0 6 : P R I O R . H > L<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
1-1-46~48 Access Code (1-, 2- or 3-Digit) Assignment<br />
Function 201~232 – Route Advance Block 01~32<br />
Function 401~416 – Closed Number Block 01~32<br />
Function 601~604 – ARS Table 1~4<br />
1-1-30 Route Advance Block Assignment<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
1-1-49 Networking Trunk Group/Route Advance Assignment<br />
1-14-04 ARS Trunk Group to Route Number Assignment<br />
� Notes �<br />
Trunk Group Mode<br />
5<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
Submode<br />
Data No.<br />
06<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+ALN<br />
This Memory Block should not be assigned (use default) for trunk groups with trunks belonging to an IAD(8)-U( )<br />
ETU used with IP (K-CCIS) or IP (K-CCIS) to NEAX (Point-to-Multipoint).<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 617
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 618 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
6-2 Tenant Mode Copy Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to enable copying data from one tenant to another tenant or<br />
multiple consecutive tenants.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Title<br />
Example: To copy data of Tenant 00 to Tenant 05~07:<br />
1. Enter the original Tenant No. Using the dial pad, press KK.<br />
2. Press G .<br />
T N A T – – ><br />
2 Press LK6 + LK2 to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Enter the tenant to be copied.<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data<br />
H to clear all data when placed at cursor position<br />
T N A T 0 0 – – ><br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
– – > T N A T –<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Copy Mode<br />
6<br />
Tenant<br />
2<br />
Data No.<br />
—<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 619
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3. Enter the beginning of the tenant (00~47) range to be copied to. Using the dial pad, press KE.<br />
4. Enter the end of the tenant (00~47) range to be copied to. Using the dial pad, press KG.<br />
5. Press G .<br />
– – > T N A T 0 5 –<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
– – > T N A T 0 5 – 0 7<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 620 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
6-3 CO Line Mode Copy Assignment<br />
Use this Memory Block to enable copying data from one CO/PBX line to another CO/<br />
PBX line or multiple consecutive CO/PBX lines.<br />
Display<br />
Title<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK6 + LK3 to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Enter the CO/PBX line to be copied.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data<br />
H to clear all data when placed at cursor position<br />
Example: To copy data of CO/PBX line 01 to CO/PBX line 05~07:<br />
1. Enter the original CO/PBX No. Using the dial pad, press KA.<br />
2. Press G .<br />
Original<br />
No.<br />
CO/PBX<br />
(01~64)<br />
C O – – ><br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
C O 0 1 – – ><br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
– – > C O –<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Copy Mode<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 621<br />
6<br />
CO/PBX Tenant<br />
3<br />
Data No. No.<br />
—
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3. Enter the beginning of the CO/PBX (02~64) range to be copied to. Using the dial pad, press KE.<br />
4. Enter the end of the CO/PBX (02~64) range to be copied to. Using the dial pad, press KG.<br />
5. Press G .<br />
– – > C O 0 5 –<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
– – > C O 0 5 – 0 7<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 622 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
6-4 <strong>Telephone</strong> Mode Copy Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to enable copying data from one telephone port to another<br />
telephone port or multiple consecutive telephone ports.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Title<br />
Example: To copy data of telephone port 01 to telephone ports 20~30:<br />
1. Enter the original Tel. No. Using the dial pad, pressKA.<br />
2. Press G .<br />
Original<br />
Port No.<br />
Tel<br />
(01~CO)<br />
T E L – – ><br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK6 + LK4 to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Enter the Tel. Port No. to be copied.<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data<br />
H to clear all data when placed at cursor position<br />
T E L 0 1 – – ><br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
– – > T E L –<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Copy Mode<br />
6<br />
Tenant<br />
4<br />
Data No.<br />
—<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 623
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3. Enter the beginning of the Tel. Port No. (01~C0) range to be copied to. Using the dial pad, press BK.<br />
4. Enter the end of the Tel. Port No. (01~C0) range to be copied to. Using the dial pad, press CK.<br />
5. Press G .<br />
– – > T E L 2 0 –<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
– – > T E L 2 0 – 3 0<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 624 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
6-5 Trunk Group Mode Copy Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to enable copying data from one Trunk group to another Trunk<br />
group or multiple consecutive Trunk groups.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Title<br />
Example: To copy data of Trunk Group 01 to Trunk Groups 10~14:<br />
1. Enter the original Trunk Group. Using the dial pad, press KA.<br />
2. Press G .<br />
Original<br />
Group No.<br />
Trunk<br />
(01~32)<br />
T R K G P – – ><br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK6 + LK5 to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Enter the Trunk group to be copied.<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data<br />
H to clear all data when placed at cursor position<br />
T R K G P 0 1 – – ><br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
3. Enter the Trunk Group. Using the dial pad, press AK~ AD.<br />
– – > T R K G P –<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Copy Mode<br />
6<br />
Tenant<br />
5<br />
Data No.<br />
—<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 625
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4. Enter the Start Trunk Group No. (01~32). Using the dial pad, press AK.<br />
5. Enter the End Trunk Group (01~32). Using the dial pad, press AD.<br />
6. Press G .<br />
– – > T R K G P 1 0 –<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
– – > T R K G P 1 0 – 1 4<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 626 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
7-1 Card Interface Slot Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the installed ETU.<br />
Display<br />
Port Number for COI 4, TLI, DID, SLI 4, OPX, DPH, VRS, VMS 2/4 ETU<br />
Page<br />
No.<br />
Cabinet<br />
No.<br />
1~3<br />
Port Number for COI 8, TLI, DID, ESI 8, SLI 8, BRT<br />
Page<br />
No.<br />
Cabinet<br />
No.<br />
1~3<br />
Port Number for ESIB 16 ETU<br />
Page<br />
No.<br />
Cabinet<br />
No.<br />
1~3<br />
Upper<br />
Slot<br />
No.<br />
1 0 9 : N O N<br />
1 0 1 : C O I 4 = 0 1<br />
Lower<br />
Slot<br />
No.<br />
Port Number for DTI or PRT<br />
Page<br />
No.<br />
Cabinet<br />
No.<br />
1~3<br />
Upper<br />
Slot<br />
No.<br />
Lower<br />
Slot<br />
No.<br />
Unit Name<br />
Unit Name<br />
No. Port<br />
of 4 1st<br />
No. Port<br />
of 4 1st<br />
1 0 9 : = 0 5<br />
1 0 1 : E S I 8 = 0 1<br />
Upper<br />
Slot<br />
No.<br />
No. Port<br />
of 4 1st<br />
No. Port<br />
of 8 1st<br />
5 : = 0 9<br />
1 0 1 : E S I B 1 6 = 0 1<br />
Lower<br />
Slot<br />
No.<br />
Unit Name<br />
No. Port<br />
of 8 1st<br />
6 0 1 0 5 0 9 1 3 1 7 2 4<br />
1 0 1 : D T I 2 4 = 0 1<br />
Lower<br />
Slot<br />
No.<br />
Nos.<br />
Port<br />
of 4 1st<br />
Unit Name<br />
Board No.<br />
ETU Mode<br />
7<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 627<br />
Slot<br />
1<br />
Data No.<br />
—<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BS
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
2 Press LK7 + LK1 to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the Line key to enter Setting Data:<br />
Line<br />
Key<br />
Setting Data Page 1 LCD Indication<br />
1 NON<br />
2<br />
3<br />
COI(4)-U( ) or<br />
COIB(4)-U( ) (in COI Mode)<br />
COI(8)-U( ) or<br />
COIB(8)-U( ) (in COI Mode)<br />
4 NON<br />
5<br />
6<br />
COID(4)-U( ) or<br />
COIB(4)-U( )(COID Mode)<br />
COID(8)-U( ) or<br />
COIB(4)-U( )(COID Mode)<br />
COI 4<br />
COI 8<br />
COID 4<br />
COID 8<br />
7 TLI(2)-U( ) TLI<br />
8 DID(4)-U( ) DID<br />
Line<br />
Key<br />
Setting Data Page 3 LCD Indication<br />
1 VRS(4)-U( ) VRS<br />
2 NON<br />
3<br />
4<br />
VMS(2)/(4)/FMS(2)/(4)-U( )/<br />
CMS(2)/(4)-U( )<br />
FMS/VMS/CTI/IVR/VP/<br />
ACD+(8)-U( )<br />
VMS 4<br />
VMS 8<br />
5 BRT(4)-U( ) BRT<br />
6 NON<br />
7 NON<br />
8<br />
MIFM-U10/20 or<br />
SPE(M)-U( )(R3000 or<br />
higher)<br />
MIFM<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 628 Memory Blocks<br />
Line<br />
Key<br />
Setting Data Page 2 LCD Indication<br />
1 ESI(8)-U( ) ESI 8<br />
2<br />
3<br />
NON<br />
SLI(8)/CNF(8)-U()<br />
SLI 8<br />
4 OPX(2)-U( ) OPX<br />
5<br />
6<br />
VDH2(8)-U( )<br />
(Refer to Note 7)<br />
DPH(4)-U( )<br />
VDH<br />
DPH<br />
7 PBR( )-U( ) PBR<br />
8 ECR-U( ) ECR<br />
Line<br />
Key<br />
Setting Data Page 4 LCD Indication<br />
1 MIFA-U( ) MIFA<br />
2<br />
3<br />
CCH(4)-U( )<br />
NON<br />
4 NON<br />
5 NON<br />
6 NON<br />
7<br />
8<br />
BSU(2)-U( )<br />
SLI(4)-U( )<br />
CCH<br />
BSU 2<br />
SLI 4
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
4 Use the Line key to enter Setting Data:<br />
Line<br />
Key<br />
1<br />
2<br />
3<br />
4<br />
Setting Data Page 5 LCD Indication<br />
ESIB(8)-U( )<br />
(R3000 or higher)<br />
ESIE(8)-U( )<br />
(R3000 or higher)<br />
MG(8)-U( )<br />
(R2500 or higher)<br />
HUB(8)-U( )<br />
(R1500 or higher)<br />
5 NON<br />
6 NON<br />
7 NON<br />
8 NON<br />
Line<br />
Key<br />
1<br />
2<br />
3<br />
4<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data<br />
C to go to the next page<br />
A to go to the previous page<br />
ESIB8<br />
ESIB16<br />
MG<br />
HUB<br />
Setting Data Page 7 LCD Indication<br />
PRT(1)-U( )<br />
PRT(1)-U( )<br />
PRT(1)-U( )<br />
PRT(1)-U( )<br />
PRT4<br />
PRT8<br />
PRT12<br />
PRT16<br />
5 PRT(1)-U( ) PRT20<br />
6 PRT(1)-U( ) PRT24<br />
7 NON<br />
8 NON<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 629<br />
Line<br />
Key<br />
1<br />
2<br />
3<br />
4<br />
Setting Data Page 6 LCD Indication<br />
DTI-U( )<br />
DTI-U( )<br />
DTI-U( )<br />
DTI-U( )<br />
DTI4<br />
DTI8<br />
DTI12<br />
DTI16<br />
5 DTI-U( ) DTI20<br />
6 DTI-U( ) DTI24<br />
7 NON<br />
8 NON<br />
Line<br />
Key<br />
1<br />
2<br />
3<br />
4<br />
5<br />
Setting Data Page 8 LCD Indication<br />
BSU 4M (R4000 or higher)<br />
BSU 2S (R4000 or higher)<br />
BSU 6S (R4000 or higher)<br />
NON<br />
6 NON<br />
7 NON<br />
8 NON<br />
BSU 4M<br />
BSU 2S<br />
BSU 6S
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
5 Press G to write the data.<br />
6 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
KSU Power-Based ETU Quantity Limitations<br />
The following charts indicate the maximum number of specific ETU combinations in each KSU that are restricted by<br />
power limitations of the KSU.<br />
For System without <strong>Elite</strong>Mail VP/CTI or CTI ETU loaded with Q-Master application<br />
NO. of ESI(8)<br />
ETUs �<br />
NO. of<br />
ESI Ports<br />
Either<br />
<strong>Elite</strong>Mail VP/CTI<br />
Maximum NO. of<br />
ACD+/CMS/FMS/VMP/<br />
VMS/IPC/MG/IVR/IPT/<br />
IAD/SLI/OPX/BSU(4M)/<br />
BSU(2S)/BSU(6S) or<br />
DID ETUs<br />
Other ETUs<br />
10 80 0 2 No Limitation<br />
9 72 0 2 No Limitation<br />
8 64 0 3 No Limitation<br />
7 56 0 4 No Limitation<br />
6 48 0 5 No Limitation<br />
5 40 0 5 No Limitation<br />
4 32 0 6 No Limitation<br />
3 24 0 6 No Limitation<br />
2 16 0 7 No Limitation<br />
1 8 0 7 No Limitation<br />
The number of 8-port ESI ETUs installed including ESI(8)-U( ), ESIB(8)-U( ), or ESIE(8)-U( ) ETU.<br />
�<br />
When the SPE(M)-U( ) ETU or the MIFM-U20 ETU (with Ethernet option installed) is installed in<br />
�<br />
the AP slot, the HUB(8)-U( ) ETU or <strong>Elite</strong> Mail CIT/VP must be installed in a different cabinet.<br />
� Only one CTI ETU can be installed in a KSU (<strong>Elite</strong>Mail, VP, or Q-Master).<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 630 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
For System with <strong>Elite</strong>Mail VP/CTI or CTI ETU loaded with Q-Master application<br />
NO. of ESI(8)<br />
ETUs �<br />
NO. of<br />
ESI Ports<br />
Either<br />
<strong>Elite</strong>Mail VP/CTI<br />
Maximum NO. of<br />
ACD+/CMS/FMS/VMP/<br />
VMS/IPC/MG/IVR/IPT/<br />
IAD/SLI/OPX/BSU(4M)/<br />
BSU(2S)/BSU(6S) or<br />
DID ETUs<br />
Other ETUs<br />
9 72 1 0 No Limitation<br />
8 64 1 0 No Limitation<br />
7 56 1 1 No Limitation<br />
6 48 1 2 No Limitation<br />
5 40 1 2 No Limitation<br />
4 32 1 3 No Limitation<br />
3 24 1 4 No Limitation<br />
2 16 1 4 No Limitation<br />
1 8 1 5 No Limitation<br />
The number of 8-port ESI ETUs installed including ESI(8)-U( ), ESIB(8)-U( ), or ESIE(8)-U( ) ETU.<br />
�<br />
When the SPE(M)-U( ) ETU or the MIFM-U20 ETU (with Ethernet option installed) is installed in<br />
�<br />
the AP slot, the HUB(8)-U( ) ETU or <strong>Elite</strong> Mail CIT/VP must be installed in a different cabinet.<br />
� Only one CTI ETU can be installed in a KSU (<strong>Elite</strong>Mail, VP, or Q-Master).<br />
Table 2-2 Card Interface Slot Assignment<br />
ETU Port Type<br />
Slot Availability<br />
ISA IF1, IF2 IF3~IF8<br />
ACD(8)-U( ) Station – X X<br />
BRT(4)-U( ) CO/PBX – X X<br />
BSU(2)-U( ) BSU – X X<br />
BSU(4M)-U20 BSU – X X<br />
BSU(2S)-U(20 BSU – 1st or 2nd slot left of<br />
BSU(4M) ETU.<br />
BSU(6S)-U20 BSU – 1st or 2nd slot left of<br />
BSU(4M) ETU.<br />
CCH(4)-U( ) CCH – X X<br />
CMS(2)/(4)-U( ) Station – X X<br />
COI(4)-U( )/COIB(4)-U( ) CO/PBX Line – X X<br />
COI(8)-U( )/COIB(8)-U( ) CO/PBX Line – X X<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 631
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
COID(4)-U( )/COIB(4)-U( ) CO/PBX Line – X X<br />
COID(8)-U( )/COIB(8)-U( ) CO/PBX Line – X X<br />
CTI(4)/(8)/(12)/(16)-U( ) Station – X (3) X (3)<br />
DID(4)-U( ) CO/PBX Line – X X<br />
DPH(4)-U( ) Doorphone – X X<br />
DTI-U( ) CO/PBX Line – X X<br />
ECR-U( ) ECR – X X<br />
ESI(8)-U( ) Station – X X<br />
ESIB(8)-U( ) Station – X X<br />
ESIB(8)-U( ) with<br />
ESIE(8)-U( )<br />
Station) – X X<br />
EXPT(2)-U( ) CO/PBX Line – X (2) –<br />
FMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) Station – X X<br />
HUB(8)-U( ) HUB – X (3) X (3)<br />
MG(8)-U( ) CO/PBX Line – X X<br />
MIFA-U( ) MIFA X (1) X (1) –<br />
MIFM-U10, MIFM-U20,<br />
SPE(M)-( )<br />
Table 2-2 Card Interface Slot Assignment (Continued)<br />
ETU Port Type<br />
Slot Availability<br />
ISA IF1, IF2 IF3~IF8<br />
MIFM X (1) X (1) –<br />
OPX(2)-U( ) Station – X X<br />
PBR( )-U( ) PBR – X X<br />
PRT(1)-U( ) CO/PBX Line – X X<br />
SLI(4)-U( ) Station – X X<br />
SLI(8)-U( )/CNF(8)-U( ) Station – X X<br />
TLI(2)-U( ) CO/PBX Line – X X<br />
VDH2(8)-U( ) Station – X X<br />
VMS(2)/(4)/(8)-U( ) Station – X X<br />
VP(4)/(8)/(12)/(16)-U( ) Station – X (3) X (3)<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 632 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
VRS(4)-U( ) VRS – X X<br />
X Compatible<br />
– Not Compatible<br />
1 Cabinet 1 only<br />
2 Cabinet 1, Slot 1 only of second, third, or fourth system<br />
3 The VP/CTI (12)/(16)-U( ) ETU requires two physical slots.<br />
4 The CTP(16) requires only one IF Slot.<br />
1. ETU interface cards are assigned automatically during initial power up.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. ESI(8)-U( ) ETU with ports 01 and 02 cannot be changed.<br />
3. When ETU system capacity is exceeded, ERROR is displayed on the LCD, and the Transfer key cannot be used<br />
to write data.<br />
4. When changing an interface slot assignment to a different ETU, use the following procedure:<br />
a. Remove the ETU installed in the slot.<br />
� Power off ACD(8), VoIP, VMS, IPCA, or FMS ETU before removing it.<br />
b. Program the slot for new ETU in this Memory Block.<br />
c. Install the new ETU.<br />
Table 2-2 Card Interface Slot Assignment (Continued)<br />
ETU Port Type<br />
Slot Availability<br />
ISA IF1, IF2 IF3~IF8<br />
5. VMS(2)/FMS(2)-U( ) ETU must be assigned as a VMS(4)/FMS(4)-U( ) ETU.<br />
6. Eight BSU(2)-U( ) ETUs can be installed in the EXP <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong>. Only three can be installed in the Basic<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong>.<br />
7. Page 2, LK 5 is used for indication only. The VDH2(8)-U( ) ETU cannot be assigned.<br />
8. Refer to <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Features and Specifications <strong>Manual</strong>, Universal Slots, for maximum capacities.<br />
9. When the SLIB(4)-U10 ETU is initially installed, pressing RESET may be necessary for proper functionality.<br />
10. When the MG(8)-U( ) ETU is installed in a Basic Port Package, trunk ports 17~24 are dedicated for this ETU.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 633
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
M.B. Number Memory Block Name<br />
7-3-00 MIF(ACD) Assignment<br />
7-3-01 MIF(LCR) Assignment<br />
7-3-02 MIF(SMDR) Assignment<br />
7-3-03 MIF(UCD) Assignment<br />
7-3-04 MIF(Caller ID) Assignment<br />
1-2-04 Call Arrival Key Block Assignment<br />
1-2-21 PS <strong>Telephone</strong> Block Assignment<br />
1-2-32 IP <strong>Telephone</strong> Block Assignment<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 634 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
7-2 <strong>Telephone</strong> Type Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the device that is connected to an ESI port.<br />
Display<br />
Settings<br />
ESI<br />
No. Port<br />
(01~CO)<br />
LK 1 LK 2 LK 3 LK 4 LK 5 LK 6 LK 7 LK 8 The shaded<br />
NON TEL CONSOL SLT ADP<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
0 1 : T E L<br />
Related <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK7 + LK2 to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 To change data, press the corresponding CO/PBX line key.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
D to go to next assigned ESl Port No. or cycle back to 1.<br />
4 Press G to write the data.<br />
5 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
DIGITAL<br />
VM<br />
Refer to individual features in the <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Features and Specifications <strong>Manual</strong>.<br />
1. Only Multiline Terminals can be assigned to ports 01 and 02.<br />
MSG<br />
BOARD<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. A maximum of four Attendant Add-On Consoles can be installed in the system.<br />
3. A maximum of eight SLT(1)-U( ) ADP adapters can be installed in the system.<br />
4. A maximum of 32 Digital Voice Mail ports are available.<br />
selection is the<br />
default.<br />
5. When assigning SLT adapters or Digital Voice Mail ports, Memory Block 4-10 (Station Number Assignment) must<br />
be reassigned also.<br />
6. The D term Cordless II, D term Cordless Lite, or D term Cordless Handset Terminal uses TEL selection.<br />
7. A maximum of eight basic Message Display Boards and 40 expansion boards are available.<br />
ETU Mode<br />
7<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong><br />
2<br />
Data No.<br />
—<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BS<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 635
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
7-3-00 MIF (ACD) Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to enable the Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) function of the<br />
MIFA-U( ) ETU.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK7 + LK3 to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to enter data.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data<br />
Setting Data: 00, 01, 02<br />
�<br />
4 Press G to write the data.<br />
5 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
0 0 : A C D M I F = 0 0<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
The ACD feature requires a KMA(1.0)U to be installed on the MIFA-U( ) ETU.<br />
Default Values<br />
� Notes �<br />
No Assignment (00)<br />
ETU Mode<br />
7<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 636 Memory Blocks<br />
MIF<br />
3<br />
Data No.<br />
00<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BS
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
7-3-01 MIF (LCR) Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to enable the Least Cost Routing (LCR) function of the<br />
MIFM-U10/20 ETU and the SPE(M)-U( ) ETU.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK7 + LK3 +JA to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to enter data.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data<br />
Setting Data: 00, 01, 02<br />
�<br />
4 Press G to write the data.<br />
5 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
0 1 : L C R M I F = 0 0<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
1. The LCR feature requires a KMM(1.0)U to be installed on the MIFM-U10 ETU.<br />
Default Value<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. The LCR feature requires a KMM-U20 to be installed on the MIFM-U20 ETU.<br />
No Assignment (00)<br />
ETU Mode<br />
7<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 637<br />
MIF<br />
3<br />
Data No.<br />
01<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BS
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
7-3-02 MIF (SMDR) Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to enable the Station Message Detail Reporting (SMDR)<br />
function on the MIFM-U( ) ETU or the SPE(M)-U( ) ETU.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK7 + LK3 + JB to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to enter data.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data<br />
Setting Data: 00, 01, 02<br />
�<br />
4 Press G to write the data.<br />
5 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
0 2 : S M D R M I F = 0 0<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Default Values<br />
No Assignment (00)<br />
ETU Mode<br />
7<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 638 Memory Blocks<br />
MIF<br />
3<br />
Data No.<br />
02<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BS
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
7-3-03 MIF (UCD) Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to enable the Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) function on the<br />
MIFA-U( ) ETU.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
Title Setting Data<br />
No.<br />
0 3 : U C D M I F = 0 0<br />
2 Press LK7 + LK3 + JC to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to enter data.<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Use the following are used when entering data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data<br />
Setting Data: 00, 01, 02<br />
�<br />
4 Press G to write the data.<br />
5 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
Default Values<br />
No Assignment (00)<br />
ETU Mode<br />
7<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 639<br />
MIF<br />
3<br />
Data No.<br />
03<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BS
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
7-3-04 MIF (Caller ID) Assignment<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to enable the ANI/Caller ID scrolling or outdial function on the<br />
MIFM-U10/20 ETU or the SPE(M)-U( ) ETU. Basic Caller ID works without an<br />
MIFM-U( ) ETU installed.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Data<br />
Title<br />
No.<br />
2 Press LK7 + LK3 + JD to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Use the dial pad to enter data.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
K~Ito enter numeric data<br />
Setting Data: 00, 01, 02<br />
�<br />
4 Press G to write the data.<br />
5 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
Setting<br />
Data<br />
0 4 : C L A S S M I F = 0 0<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
Default Values<br />
� Notes �<br />
No Function (00)<br />
1. ANI/Caller ID scrolling and outdial must have the KMM(1.0)U installed on the MIFM-U10 ETU.<br />
2. ANI/Caller ID scrolling and outdial must have the KMM-U20 installed on the MIFM-U20 ETU.<br />
ETU Mode<br />
7<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 640 Memory Blocks<br />
MIF<br />
3<br />
Data No.<br />
04<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BS
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
8-1 ROM Version Confirmation<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to confirm the ETU firmware version without removing the card<br />
from the KSU.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
S P 0 1 6<br />
1 - 0 1 : M I F M = 1 . 0 0<br />
Cab.<br />
No.<br />
1~3<br />
Lower<br />
Slot:<br />
01~0C<br />
Unit Name<br />
2 Press LK8 + LK1 to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 Enter data using the Dial Pad.<br />
Use the following to enter data:<br />
�<br />
Jto move the cursor left<br />
Lto move the cursor right<br />
= Cabinet No. 1~3, Lower Slot No 1~8<br />
I = Slot Number A<br />
A~H<br />
= Slot Number B<br />
C = Slot Number C<br />
K<br />
4 Press G to advance to the next lower Slot No.<br />
5 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
Version<br />
Special Mode<br />
8<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 641<br />
ROM<br />
1<br />
Data No.
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
8-2 System Speed Dial Memory Clear<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to clear all System Speed Dial programming.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Before using this procedure, understand completely the affect of erasing all<br />
System Speed Dial buffers in the system.<br />
Title<br />
C L R S Y S S P D ?<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK8 + LK2 to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 The system display indicates CLR SYS SPD?, and the first four CO/PBX lines light red.<br />
R R R R<br />
4 Press HAHIto enter the fixed password.<br />
�<br />
WWWW<br />
When each number of the password is being entered, the applicable top line CO/PBX LED changes from red to green.<br />
G R R R<br />
=WWWW<br />
H<br />
G G R R<br />
=WWWW<br />
A<br />
G G G R<br />
=WWWW<br />
H<br />
G G G G<br />
5 Press G to write the data.<br />
I =WWWW<br />
6 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
Special Mode<br />
8<br />
Spd-Clr-Sys<br />
2<br />
Data No.<br />
—<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BE<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 642 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
8-3 Station Speed Dial Memory Clear<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to clear the the Station Speed Dial memories of all<br />
programmed Speed Dial numbers.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Before using this procedure, understand completely the affect of erasing all<br />
System Speed Dial buffers in the system.<br />
Title<br />
C L R T E L S P D ?<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK8 + LK3 to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 The system display indicates CLR SYS SPD?, and the first four CO/PBX lines light red.<br />
R R R R<br />
4 Press HBIIto enter the fixed password.<br />
Special Mode<br />
8<br />
Spd-Clr-Sys<br />
3<br />
Data No.<br />
—<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+BE<br />
�<br />
WWWW<br />
When each number of the password is being entered, the applicable top line CO/PBX LED changes from red to green.<br />
G R R R<br />
=WWWW<br />
H<br />
G G R R<br />
=WWWW<br />
A<br />
G G G R<br />
=WWWW<br />
H<br />
G G G G<br />
I =WWWW<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 643
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
5 Press G to write the data.<br />
6 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 644 Memory Blocks
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
8-8 Second Initialization<br />
General Description<br />
Use this Memory Block to initialize all the system hardware. All system software and<br />
user programming are retained after the Second Initialization.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Go off-line.<br />
Title<br />
1 1 : 0 8 A M<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
2 Press LK8 + LK8 to access the Memory Block.<br />
3 When the system display prompt indicates CPU RESET?, the first four CO/PBX lines light red.<br />
4 Press HHKKto enter the fixed password.<br />
WWWW<br />
� When each number of the password is being entered, the applicable top line CO/PBX LED changes from red to green.<br />
=WWW<br />
H<br />
H<br />
W<br />
=WWW<br />
K<br />
W<br />
W<br />
=WWW<br />
=WWW<br />
K W<br />
5 Press G to begin the initialization process.<br />
6 Press E to go back on-line.<br />
Special Mode<br />
8<br />
CO Line<br />
8<br />
Data No.<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
�+CI<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 2 - 645
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
General Description<br />
Clock/Calendar Setting<br />
This Memory Block is used to set the time and date displayed on the Multiline<br />
Terminals. Clock/Calendar must be set on a port 01 or port 02 assigned terminal.<br />
Display<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> Procedures<br />
1 Press A .<br />
2 Dial I.<br />
3 Dial L.<br />
4 Dial current time (e.g. KC:BI).<br />
5 Press C to toggle AM/PM.<br />
6 Press H to advance to the calendar.<br />
7 Press C to select the day of the week.<br />
8 Dial L to move the cursor to the day of the month setting.<br />
9 Enter the date using the dial pad (K~I).<br />
10 Press C to select the month.<br />
11 Dial L to move the cursor to the year setting.<br />
12 Enter the last two digits of the year using the dial pad (K~I).<br />
13 Press A .<br />
1 1 : 0 8 A M<br />
T I M E D I S P L A Y<br />
1. This operation must be performed at port 01, or port 02 only.<br />
� Notes �<br />
2. The Clock/Calendar cannot be set using PC <strong>Programming</strong>.<br />
3. To set the time only, press A after Step 5.<br />
System Mode<br />
—<br />
Submode<br />
—<br />
Data No.<br />
—<br />
PC <strong>Programming</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2 - 646 Memory Blocks
Advanced Applications Chapter 3<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
SECTION 1 CODE RESTRICTION<br />
1.1 General<br />
The <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> system provides an advanced method of restricting<br />
outgoing calls based on the first eight digits dialed. Code Restriction denies<br />
placement of outside calls based on Trunk groups and accommodates equal<br />
access to an other common carrier (OCC). This eliminates unauthorized calls<br />
and configures system calling functions 66.0 to provide cost control.<br />
System <strong>Programming</strong> has 16 Code Restrictions Classes. Class 00 is fixed and<br />
allows free dialing. Class 15 is fixed and denies all outside calls. Classes<br />
01~14 are programmable in system software. Stations are assigned per<br />
station to a Code Restriction Class. A separate Day Mode and Night Mode<br />
station to Code Restriction Class assignment is available.<br />
1.2 Default Assignments<br />
All stations are assigned to Code Restriction Class 00 for both Day and Night<br />
Mode to allow free dialing.<br />
Code Restriction Classes are set up with the following restrictions to provide<br />
the most common Code Restriction requirements and simplify Code<br />
Restriction programming.<br />
Class 01: Deny: 0 and 1 + calls<br />
Class 02: Deny: 0 and 1 + calls Allow: 1-800, 888, 877 calls<br />
Class 03: Deny: 0, 1 +, and 976 calls Allow: 1-800, 888, 877 calls<br />
Class 04: Deny: 1 + calls Allow: 1-800, 888, 877 calls<br />
Class 05~14: Allow: 911 calls only<br />
All OCC calls are denied for Code Restriction Classes 01~14.<br />
System Speed Dial buffers override Code Restriction Classes 01~14.<br />
Code Restriction is not applied to Tie lines.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 3 - 1
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
When Station Lockout is set at a station, the station is outgoing restricted.<br />
Digit Restriction is not assigned.<br />
� Refer to Section 1.5 Code Restriction Tables (Default Values).<br />
1.3 Memory Blocks<br />
The following related Memory Blocks are used when assigning Code<br />
Restriction.<br />
Memory<br />
Title Block<br />
Trunk to Tenant Assignment...................................................2-01<br />
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment......................................... 3-03<br />
Trunk Type Selection..............................................................3-91<br />
PBX/CTX Access Code Assignment I.................................1-1-24<br />
PBX/CTX Access Code Assignment II................................1-1-25<br />
OCC Table Assignment.......................................................1-1-67<br />
OCC Table to Trunk Group Assignment.................................5-03<br />
8-Digit Matching Table to OCC Table Assignment.............. 1-1-68<br />
8-Digit Matching Table to Normal Dial Assignment............. 1-1-66<br />
8-Digit Matching Table to Trunk Group Assignment............... 5-02<br />
8-Digit Matching Table Assignment.....................................1-1-60<br />
8-Digit Matching Table to Class Assignment.......................1-1-61<br />
Code Restriction Class Allow/Deny Assignment.................1-1-65<br />
System Speed Dial Restriction by Tenant........................... 1-1-18<br />
System Speed Dial Override by Class Selection................ 1-1-62<br />
Tie Line Code Restriction Assignment................................ 1-1-69<br />
Code Restriction Class Assignment When Lockout is Set..1-1-70<br />
CO Feature Codes Service for Code Restriction................ 1-1-82<br />
Trunk Digit Restriction............................................................ 4-32<br />
Code Restriction Class Assignment (Day Mode)................... 4-07<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3 - 2 Advanced Applications
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Code Restriction Class Assignment (Night Mode)................. 4-08<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> to Tenant Assignment........................................... 4-09<br />
Station To Class of Service Feature Assignment................... 4-17<br />
1.4 Memory Block Description<br />
1.4.1 General<br />
This section describes the function of the Memory Blocks directly<br />
related to Code Restriction. Some Memory Blocks from the previous<br />
list are not described here but are included because of their effect on<br />
Code Restriction (e.g., Trunk to Tenant Assignment). Code<br />
Restriction is based on Trunk group and consideration should be<br />
given to this Memory Block because stations are assigned to a<br />
tenant, and trunks are assigned to a Trunk group.<br />
1.4.2 OCC Assignment/Operation<br />
OCC Table Assignment (Memory Block 1-1-67)<br />
This Memory Block allows an OCC Access Code (maximum of eight<br />
digits) to be assigned. System <strong>Programming</strong> has 16 OCC Tables<br />
(01~16). Each table can have one OCC Access Code assigned.<br />
OCC Table to Trunk Group Assignment (Memory Block 5-03)<br />
This Memory Block assigns Trunk groups to the OCC Tables. Any<br />
combination of Trunk groups can be assigned to the OCC Tables.<br />
8-Digit Matching Table to OCC Table Assignment (Memory Block<br />
1-1-68)<br />
This Memory Block assigns the 8-Digit Matching Table to the OCC<br />
Tables. Any combination of 8-Digit Matching Tables can be assigned<br />
to the OCC Tables.<br />
OCC Operation<br />
When a restricted station user dials an OCC Access Code, the<br />
system searches the OCC Tables for a match. When no match is<br />
found, the user is allowed free dialing. When a match is found, the<br />
system monitors the eight digits dialed and searches the 8-Digit<br />
Matching Tables assigned to the OCC Table. The system searches<br />
only the 8-Digit Matching Tables assigned to the Code Restriction<br />
Class the station is assigned to and has the Trunk group assigned to<br />
it for the in-use trunk the station is on. When the interdigit time of the<br />
dialing party exceeds 10 seconds while the station user is dialing on<br />
an outside line, and the system is searching the assigned tables, the<br />
system automatically drops the call.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 3 - 3
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
1.4.3 8-Digit Matching Table Assignment/Operation<br />
8-Digit Matching Table to Normal Dial Assignment (Memory Block<br />
1-1-66)<br />
This Memory Block assigns the 8-Digit Matching Table to be Used or<br />
Unused for non-OCC calls. When an 8-Digit Matching Table is<br />
assigned as Unused, the table is used only for OCC calls. There are<br />
16, 8-Digit Matching Tables (00~15) in System <strong>Programming</strong>. Each<br />
table is independently assigned to be Used or Unused.<br />
8-Digit Matching Table to Trunk Group Assignment (Memory Block<br />
5-02)<br />
This Memory Block assigns Trunk groups to the 8-Digit Matching<br />
Tables. Any combination of Trunk groups can be assigned to the<br />
8-Digit Matching Tables.<br />
8-Digit Matching Table Assignment (Memory Block 1-1-60)<br />
This Memory Block assigns the 8-Digit Matching Tables. Each<br />
8-Digit Matching Table can have 16, 8-digit entries. To cover the<br />
many possible combinations (without listing each individual number),<br />
code restriction letters can be used in place of digits. The code<br />
restriction letters used and their numerical values are as follows:<br />
X = 0~9, �, and #<br />
P = 0 and 1<br />
N = 2~9<br />
When 1X is entered in a table, and the table is assigned as a deny<br />
table in the 8-Digit Matching Table to Class Assignment, any 1 + any<br />
digit call is denied When the table is used. Using X, P, and N<br />
accommodates several combinations with just one entry.<br />
� The Trunk Access Code should not be placed in the 8-Digit Matching<br />
Table. Code Restriction starts after a trunk is seized.<br />
8-Digit Matching Table to Class Assignment (Memory Block 1-1-61)<br />
This Memory Block assigns the 8-Digit Matching Tables to the Code<br />
Restriction Classes. The 8-Digit Matching Tables are also assigned<br />
as Allow/Deny Tables in this Memory Block.<br />
Any combination of 8-Digit Matching Tables (Allow, Deny, or Not<br />
Used) can be assigned to Code Restriction Classes 01~14. Classes<br />
00 and 15 are fixed and are nonprogrammable.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3 - 4 Advanced Applications
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Code Restriction Class Allow/Deny Selection (Memory Block 1-1-65)<br />
This Memory Block assigns the Code Restriction Classes (01~14) as<br />
Allow or Deny. This assignment is used when there is no match or<br />
when there is an overlap (duplicate numbers in tables with opposite<br />
Allow/Deny assignments) of numbers in the 8-Digit Matching Tables.<br />
8-Digit Matching Table Operations<br />
The 8-Digit Matching Tables are used to restrict specific or all OCC<br />
calls and non-OCC calls. To understand the relationship of the<br />
8-Digit Matching Tables with OCC calls, refer to Section 6.4.2 - OCC<br />
Assignment/Operation.<br />
When a restricted station user makes a non-OCC call, the system<br />
monitors the first eight digits dialed and searches the 8-Digit<br />
Matching Tales assigned for Used in Memory Block 1-1-66 (8-Digit<br />
Matching Table to Normal Dial Assignment). The system searches<br />
only the 8-Digit Matching Tables assigned to the Code Restriction<br />
Class the station is assigned to and has the Trunk group assigned to<br />
it for the in-use trunk the station is on.<br />
When a match is found, the system looks at the 8-Digit Matching<br />
Table to Class Assignment for the Allow or Deny Assignment. When<br />
the table is assigned as Allow, the call is allowed. When the table is<br />
assigned as Deny, the call is denied.<br />
When a match is not found or a duplicate match is made with<br />
opposite Allow/Deny Assignments, the system looks at the class<br />
Allow/Deny Assignment. When the class is assigned as Allow, the<br />
call is allowed. When the Class is assigned as Deny, the call is<br />
denied. When the interdigit time of the dialing party exceeds 10<br />
seconds while the station user is dialing on an outside line, and the<br />
system is searching the assigned tables, the system automatically<br />
drops the call.<br />
1.4.4 System Speed Dial Override by Class Selection (Memory Block<br />
1-1-62)<br />
This Memory Block allows System Speed Dial buffers to override or<br />
not override Code Restriction. Each Code Restriction Class (01~14)<br />
is assigned as Allow or Deny.<br />
1.4.5 Tie Line Code Restriction Assignment (Memory Block 1-1-69)<br />
This Memory Block assigns system-wide Code Restriction to be<br />
used or not used for calls made on a Tie line.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 3 - 5
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
1.4.6 Code Restriction Class Assignment when Lockout is Set (Memory<br />
Block 1-1-70)<br />
This Memory Block assigns the Code Restriction Class to be used<br />
when Station Lockout (Outgoing) is set at a station. Station Lockout<br />
can be set by the Attendant or from any station when allowed in<br />
System <strong>Programming</strong>.<br />
1.4.7 CO Feature Code Service For Code Restriction (Memory Block<br />
1-1-82)<br />
This Memory Block assigns feature codes per system. A station user<br />
can dial these codes as the leading digits of a telephone number.<br />
The <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> ignores these digits and applies code restriction to<br />
the remaining digits. The codes are sent to the CO as the leading<br />
digits on permitted code restriction calls.<br />
1.4.8 Trunk Digit Restriction Assignment (Memory Block 4-32)<br />
This Memory Block specifies, per station, the maximum number of<br />
digits that can be dialed from any outside line.<br />
1.4.9 Code Restriction Class Assignment (Day Mode) (Memory Block<br />
4-07)<br />
This Memory Block specifies, per station, the Code Restriction Class<br />
used when the system or a station that is assigned to a tenant is in<br />
the Day Mode.<br />
1.4.10 Code Restriction Class Assignment (Night Mode) (Memory Block<br />
4-08)<br />
This Memory Block specifies, per station, the Code Restriction Class<br />
used when the system or a station that is assigned to a tenant is in<br />
the Night Mode.<br />
1.5 Code Restriction Tables (Default Values)<br />
1.5.1 OCC Tables with Default Values<br />
The following Memory Blocks are displayed:<br />
OCC Table Assignment (1-1-67)<br />
OCC Table to Trunk Group Assignment (5-03)<br />
8-Digit Matching Table to OCC Table Assignment (1-1-68)<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3 - 6 Advanced Applications
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Memory Block (1-1-67)<br />
Table 01<br />
Memory Block (5-03) Trunk Group 01~32<br />
Memory Block (1-1-68)<br />
Memory Block (1-1-67)<br />
Table 05<br />
Memory Block (5-03) Trunk Group 01~32<br />
Memory Block (1-1-68)<br />
Memory Block (1-1-67)<br />
Table 09<br />
Memory Block (5-03) Trunk Group 01~32<br />
Memory Block (1-1-68)<br />
Memory Block (1-1-67)<br />
Table 13<br />
Memory Block (5-03) Trunk Group 01~32<br />
Memory Block (1-1-68)<br />
Table 02<br />
Trunk Group<br />
01~32<br />
Table 06<br />
Trunk Group<br />
01~32<br />
Table 10<br />
Trunk Group<br />
01~32<br />
Table 14<br />
Trunk Group<br />
01~32<br />
Table 03<br />
Trunk Group<br />
01~32<br />
Table 07<br />
Trunk Group<br />
01~32<br />
Table 11<br />
Trunk Group<br />
01~32<br />
Table 15<br />
Trunk Group<br />
01~32<br />
Table 04<br />
Trunk Group<br />
01~32<br />
Table 08<br />
Trunk Group<br />
01~32<br />
Table 12<br />
Trunk Group<br />
01~32<br />
Table 16<br />
1 0 1 0 X X X<br />
Trunk Group 0~32<br />
Continued on next page.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 3 - 7
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Memory Block (1-1-66)<br />
Memory Block (5-02)<br />
1.5.2 8-Digit Matching Tables with Default Values<br />
The following Memory Blocks are displayed:<br />
8-Digit Matching Table to Normal Dial Assignment (1-1-66)<br />
8-Digit Matching Table to Trunk Group Assignment (5-02)<br />
8-Digit Matching Table Assignment (1-1-60)<br />
The following designations are used in these tables:<br />
Table 00 Table 01 Table 02 Table 03<br />
Use Table Use Table Use Table Use Table<br />
Trunk Group 01~32 Trunk Group 01~32 Trunk Group 01~32 Trunk Group 01~32<br />
Memory Block (1-1-60) 00 9 1 1 00 00 00<br />
Note: X = 0~9, �, #<br />
P = 0,1<br />
N = 2~9<br />
01 01 01 01<br />
02 02 02 02<br />
03 03 03 03<br />
04 04 04 04<br />
05 05 05 05<br />
06 06 06 06<br />
07 07 07 07<br />
08 08 08 08<br />
09 09 09 09<br />
10 10 10 10<br />
11 11 11 11<br />
12 12 12 12<br />
13 13 13 13<br />
14 14 14 14<br />
15 15 15 15<br />
Continued on next page.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3 - 8 Advanced Applications
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Memory Block (1-1-66)<br />
Memory Block (5-02)<br />
8-Digit Matching Table to Normal Dial Assignment (1-1-66)<br />
8-Digit Matching Table to Trunk Group Assignment (5-02)<br />
8-Digit Matching Table Assignment (1-1-60)<br />
Table 04 Table 05 Table 06 Table 07<br />
Use Table Use Table Use Table Use Table<br />
Trunk Group 01~32 Trunk Group 01~32 Trunk Group 01~32 Trunk Group 01~32<br />
Memory Block (1-1-60) 00 00 00 00<br />
Note: X = 0~9, �, #<br />
P = 0,1<br />
N = 2~9<br />
01 01 01 01<br />
02 02 02 02<br />
03 03 03 03<br />
04 04 04 04<br />
05 05 05 05<br />
06 06 06 06<br />
07 07 07 07<br />
08 08 08 08<br />
09 09 09 09<br />
10 10 10 10<br />
11 11 11 11<br />
12 12 12 12<br />
13 13 13 13<br />
14 14 14 14<br />
15 15 15 15<br />
Continued on next page.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 3 - 9
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Memory Block (1-1-66)<br />
Memory Block (5-02)<br />
8-Digit Matching Table to Normal Dial Assignment (1-1-66)<br />
8-Digit Matching Table to Trunk Group Assignment (5-02)<br />
8-Digit Matching Table Assignment (1-1-60)<br />
Table 08 Table 09 Table 10 Table 11<br />
Use Table Use Table Use Table Use Table<br />
Trunk Group 01~32 Trunk Group 01~32 Trunk Group 01~32 Trunk Group 01~32<br />
Memory Block (1-1-60) 00 00 00 00 0<br />
Note: X = 0~9, �, #<br />
P = 0,1<br />
N = 2~9<br />
01 01 01 01<br />
02 02 02 02<br />
03 03 03 03<br />
04 04 04 04<br />
05 05 05 05<br />
06 06 06 06<br />
07 07 07 07<br />
08 08 08 08<br />
09 09 09 09<br />
10 10 10 10<br />
11 11 11 11<br />
12 12 12 12<br />
13 13 13 13<br />
14 14 14 14<br />
15 15 15 15<br />
Continued on next page.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3 - 10 Advanced Applications
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Memory Block (1-1-66)<br />
Memory Block (5-02)<br />
8-Digit Matching Table to Normal Dial Assignment (1-1-66)<br />
8-Digit Matching Table to Trunk Group Assignment (5-02)<br />
8-Digit Matching Table Assignment (1-1-60)<br />
Table 12 Table 13 Table 14 Table 15<br />
Use Table Use Table Use Table Unused Table<br />
Trunk Group 01~32 Trunk Group 01~32 Trunk Group 01~32 Trunk Group 01~32<br />
Memory Block (1-1-60) 00 9 7 6 00 1 8 0 0 00 1 X 00 X<br />
Note: X = 0~9, �, #<br />
P = 0,1<br />
N = 2~9<br />
01 01 1888 01 01<br />
02 02 1877 02 02<br />
03 03 03 03<br />
04 04 04 04<br />
05 05 05 05<br />
06 06 06 06<br />
07 07 07 07<br />
08 08 08 08<br />
09 09 09 09<br />
10 10 10 10<br />
11 11 11 11<br />
12 12 12 12<br />
13 13 13 13<br />
14 14 14 14<br />
15 15 15 15<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 3 - 11
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
8-Digit<br />
Matching<br />
Table to<br />
Class<br />
Assignment<br />
Note: A = Allow<br />
D = Deny<br />
Blank = Not used<br />
8-Digit Matching Tables with Default Values<br />
The following designations are used in this table:<br />
8-Digit Matching Table to Class Assignment (1-1-61)<br />
Class Allow/Deny Selection (1-1-65)<br />
8-Digit Matching Table Class<br />
Allow/Deny<br />
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 Assignment<br />
Class 01 A D D D Allow<br />
Class 02 A D A D D Allow<br />
Class 03 A D D A D D Allow<br />
Class 04 A A D D Allow<br />
Class 05 A Deny<br />
Class 06 A Deny<br />
Class 07 A Deny<br />
Class 08 A Deny<br />
Class 09 A Deny<br />
Class 10 A Deny<br />
Class 11 A Deny<br />
Class 12 A Deny<br />
Class 13 A Deny<br />
Class 14 A Deny<br />
1.6 Code Restriction Algorithm<br />
The following chart identifies how the system checks for and processes Code<br />
Restriction assignments.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3 - 12 Advanced Applications
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Yes<br />
Allow User<br />
Free Dialing<br />
Search CO Feature<br />
Code Service for Code<br />
Restriction for dialed<br />
number.<br />
CO Feature Code<br />
Service for Code<br />
Restriction<br />
M.B. 1-1-82<br />
No Match<br />
Is M.B. 1-1-82<br />
assigned?<br />
No<br />
Code Restriction starts<br />
from first dialed number.<br />
Class 00<br />
No<br />
Code Restriction starts<br />
with next dialed number.<br />
Match<br />
User Accesses a<br />
CO/PBX Line<br />
Code<br />
Restriction Class<br />
(Day, Night)<br />
M. B. 4-07<br />
and 4-08<br />
Is line<br />
Assigned as<br />
PBX?<br />
M. B. 3-91<br />
Allow User<br />
to Dial 1<br />
Digit<br />
0, 2~9<br />
1st Digit<br />
Search Only 8-Digit Matching Tables<br />
Assigned for Trunk Group Being Used<br />
M. B. 5-02<br />
1<br />
Class 01 ~ 14<br />
User<br />
Dials PBX<br />
Access Code<br />
M. B. 1-1-25<br />
or M. B. 1-1-26<br />
No Match<br />
OCC Table Found<br />
Assignment<br />
M. B. 1-1-67<br />
Allow User<br />
Free Dialing<br />
Allow User<br />
to Dial 1<br />
Digit<br />
2nd Digit<br />
Allow User<br />
to Dial up to<br />
6 More<br />
Digits<br />
Search OCC<br />
Tables From<br />
Tables 01~16<br />
Allow User<br />
Free Dialing<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 3 - 13<br />
Yes<br />
Search Only 8-Digit Matching Tables<br />
Assigned To Class Assignment<br />
M. B. 1-1-61<br />
Search Only 8-Digit Matching Tables<br />
Assigned To Normal Dial<br />
M. B. 1-1-66<br />
Yes<br />
Search Only 8-Digit Matching Table<br />
From Table 00~15 After Each Digit For<br />
the First 8 Digits<br />
1<br />
* 67 Dialed<br />
Class 15<br />
1~9<br />
Disconnect<br />
Issue Error<br />
2<br />
No<br />
Match Found<br />
0
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Allow User<br />
Free Dialing<br />
Allow User<br />
Free Dialing<br />
Match Found Allow<br />
Table (Note 1)<br />
Match Found Allow<br />
Table (Note 1)<br />
1 2<br />
8-Digit<br />
Matching Table 00<br />
M. B. 1-1-60<br />
8-Digit<br />
Matching Table 15<br />
M. B. 1-1-60<br />
Match Found Deny<br />
Table (Note 1)<br />
Match Found Deny<br />
Table (Note 1)<br />
No Perfect Match Found or Duplicate<br />
Match in Opposite Tables<br />
CRC<br />
Allow Allow/Deny<br />
Selection<br />
M. B. 1-1-65<br />
Deny<br />
Search 8-Digit Matching<br />
Table From Table 00~15<br />
After Each Digit Entered<br />
For First 8 Digits<br />
Search Only 8-digit<br />
Matching Tables<br />
Assigned To Class<br />
Assignment M. B. 1-1-61<br />
Search Only 8-Digit<br />
Matching Tables<br />
Assigned to OCC Table<br />
M. B. 1-1-68<br />
Search Only 8-digit<br />
Matching Tables<br />
Assigned For Trunk<br />
Group Being Used<br />
M. B. 5-02<br />
Disconnect<br />
Issue Error<br />
Disconnect<br />
Issue Error<br />
Note 1: Tables are assigned as Allow or Deny in the 8-Digit Matching Table to Class Assignment<br />
(Memory Block 1-1-61).<br />
Note 2: When the interdigit time duration of the dialing party exceeds 10 seconds while the Code<br />
Restriction Tables are being searched, the system automatically drops the call.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3 - 14 Advanced Applications
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
SECTION 2 AUTOMATIC ROUTE SELECTION<br />
2.1 General<br />
Route Selection is automatically directed by user-specified conditions.<br />
Four Least Cost Routing (LCR) tables are provided for user-specified data that<br />
can be used to select a single route.<br />
User can delete digits from or add digits to a user specified dialing number to<br />
use ARS to originate the call with LCR.<br />
2.2 Memory Blocks<br />
The following related Memory Blocks are used when assigning ARS.<br />
Memory<br />
Title Block<br />
Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment..................................... 1-1-46<br />
Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2....................1-8-08<br />
ARS Allow/Deny Selection................................................ 1-14-00<br />
ARS Dialing Assignment................................................... 1-14-01<br />
ARS Dial Allow/Deny Selection.........................................1-14-02<br />
ARS Route Table Number Assignment............................. 1-14-03<br />
ARS Trunk Group to Route Number Assignment..............1-14-04<br />
ARS Digit Delete Assignment........................................... 1-14-05<br />
ARS Digit Add Assignment............................................... 1-14-06<br />
ARS Max Digit Assignment ............................................... 1-14-07<br />
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment......................................... 3-03<br />
Trunk Type Selection..............................................................3-91<br />
LCR Class Selection.............................................................. 4-40<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 3 - 15
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2.3 Memory Block Description<br />
2.3.1 Access Code (1-Digit) Assignment (Memory Block 1-1-46)<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign Trunk Group Access code for LCR.<br />
Default: Dial 9 Function number 101<br />
2.3.2 Class of Service (Station) Feature Selection 2 (Memory Block<br />
1-8-08)<br />
Use this Memory Block to allow/deny LCR Bypass (Page 3, LK4) for<br />
Trunk Groups 02~32).<br />
Default: Deny<br />
Use this Memory Block to allow/deny ARS Overflow (Page 6, LK1) to<br />
trunk group 01 when programmed route is busy.<br />
Default: Deny<br />
2.3.3 ARS Allow/Deny Selection (Memory Block 1-14-00)<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not to Allow ARS to<br />
function system wide.<br />
Default: NO<br />
2.3.4 ARS Dialing Assignment (Memory Block 1-14-01)<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign a dialing plan to one of four LCR<br />
tables. A maximum of 128 (up to 8 digits) dialing combinations are<br />
possible for each table.<br />
Default: Not Assigned<br />
2.3.5 ARS Dial Allow/Deny Selection (Memory Block 1-14-02)<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not to Allow digits that<br />
are entered in the ARS dialing assignment to be routed using the<br />
ARS feature.<br />
Default: YES<br />
2.3.6 ARS Route Table Number Assignment (Memory Block 1-14-03)<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign each ARS Dialing Assignment to<br />
an ARS Route Assignment (01~32).<br />
Default: 00 (Not used)<br />
2.3.7 ARS Trunk Group to Route Number Assignment (Memory Block<br />
1-14-04)<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether a Trunk Group (TKGP) or<br />
Route Advance Group (RAB) is used by each ARS route number.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3 - 16 Advanced Applications
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Trunk Group 1 origination (NORMAL) is used in the USA. When the<br />
call is not originated by pressing the line key or by dialing an access<br />
code of Trunk Group 1, and the LCR Class assignment is 0, the call<br />
is originated as is.<br />
Default: NORMAL<br />
2.3.8 ARS Digit Delete Assignment (Memory Block 1-14-05)<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify number of digits (00~10) from the<br />
first digit that are deleted from the route assignment.<br />
Default: 00 (None)<br />
2.3.9 ARS Digit Add Assignment (Memory Block 1-14-06)<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify a maximum of 10 digits to add to<br />
the route assignment.<br />
Default: Not Assigned<br />
2.3.10 ARS Max Digit Assignment (Memory Block 1-14-07)<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the number of digits to be collected<br />
by the system before the message is sent to the network.<br />
Default: Not Specified<br />
2.3.11 Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment (Memory Block 3-03)<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign a Trunk Group number to each CO/<br />
PBX line.<br />
Default: CO/PBX lines 01~08 in Trunk group 1<br />
2.3.12 Trunk Type Selection (Memory Block 3-91)<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify an external line as CO, PBX,TIE,<br />
DID or CTX.<br />
Default: CO<br />
2.3.13 LCR Class Selection (Memory Block 4-40)<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the LCR/ARS class for each<br />
station. The class number is the number of the Area Code Table<br />
used. Stations cannot have multiple classes. Four area code tables<br />
are provided. The MIFM-U( ) ETU with attached KMM(1.0)U must be<br />
installed to support this feature.<br />
Default: Class 0 (No LCR)<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 3 - 17
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
2.4 ARS Operation Example<br />
TEL100 dials 1-9727517645, seizes trunk 8, and sends 1010288<br />
9727517645.<br />
1. Program the following values, if necessary:<br />
�<br />
�<br />
1-1-46 9 (Trunk Group 1)<br />
1-8-08 Page 3, LK4 (Deny)<br />
�<br />
�<br />
1-14-00 YS<br />
1-14-01 1:1972751<br />
�<br />
�<br />
1-14-02 YS<br />
1-14-03 Table 1, Route 01<br />
�<br />
�<br />
1-14-04 TKGP 04<br />
1-14-05 01 Digit<br />
�<br />
�<br />
1-14-06 1010288<br />
3-03 CO lines 01, 02 to TKGP 1<br />
CO lines 03, 04 to TKGP 2<br />
CO lines 05, 06to TKGP 3<br />
CO lines 07, 08 to TKGP 4<br />
�<br />
�<br />
3-91 Assign trunks 01~08 for CO<br />
4-40 TEL 100 assigned to class 1<br />
2. Press E .<br />
Dial tone is heard.<br />
Speaker key is on red, and the top display shows:<br />
100 →( ).<br />
3. Dial<br />
LCR Dial tone is heard.<br />
I.<br />
The top display shows: LCR<br />
Dial AIGBGE.<br />
4. No dial tone.<br />
The LCD top display shows: 197275<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3 - 18 Advanced Applications
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
5. Dial<br />
CO8 Line key is green<br />
A.<br />
The LCD top display shows: 1972751<br />
6. Dial<br />
Ringback Tone is heard.<br />
GFDE.<br />
The LCD top display shows: 19727517645<br />
7. When you go Off-hook to converse, E goes off, and display changes<br />
to call time and Clock/Calendar.<br />
8. The system actually dialed 1010288 9727517645 on CO8 of Trunk<br />
Group 4 after the route was selected.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 3 - 19
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
LCR/ARS<br />
MB 4-40<br />
1<br />
2<br />
3<br />
4<br />
Table Value<br />
LCR Class<br />
Dial Combinations<br />
Route<br />
TKGP<br />
RAB<br />
Delete digits<br />
Add digits<br />
2.5 Service Conditions<br />
1~4<br />
01~128<br />
01~32<br />
01~32<br />
01~32<br />
Up to 10<br />
Up to 10<br />
Built-in ARS provides a system with four tables to allow route selection, and a<br />
single route table to select a Trunk Group or Route Advance Block and<br />
provide digit control.<br />
From<br />
Deny<br />
CPU MB 1-14-00<br />
Allow<br />
MIFM LCR Originate<br />
Class<br />
Route MB1-14-04<br />
01 NORMAL<br />
02 TKGP<br />
03 RAB<br />
04 N/A<br />
· ·<br />
32 TKGP<br />
TKGP/RAB Assignment<br />
Dial MB1-14-01<br />
01 1X<br />
02 NX<br />
03 1-800<br />
04 1-900<br />
· ·<br />
· ·<br />
· ·<br />
128 1-800<br />
Dialing Combinations<br />
To TKGP 01 as dialed<br />
To TKGP 01~32<br />
To RAB 01~32<br />
To TKGP 01<br />
YES<br />
Allow ARS<br />
Figure 3-1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) System Data Flow<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3 - 20 Advanced Applications<br />
END<br />
MB1-14-02<br />
YES<br />
YES<br />
YES<br />
NO<br />
·<br />
Route MB1-14-05<br />
01 00~10<br />
02 00~10<br />
03 00~10<br />
04 10<br />
05 00~10<br />
06 00~10<br />
07 00~10<br />
· ·<br />
· ·<br />
· ·<br />
32 00~10<br />
Delete Digits<br />
MB1-14-03<br />
01<br />
02<br />
03<br />
04<br />
·<br />
32<br />
Route Number<br />
Seize Trunk and Dial<br />
Route MB1-14-06<br />
01 1010288<br />
02 Max 10 digits<br />
03 Max 10 digits<br />
04 Max 10 digits<br />
05 Max 10 digits<br />
06 Max 10 digits<br />
07 Max 10 digits<br />
· ·<br />
· ·<br />
· ·<br />
32 Max 10 digits<br />
Add Digits
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Table<br />
1~4<br />
Table 3-1 Automatic Route Selection to Route Number Assignment<br />
Dialing<br />
Combination<br />
01<br />
02<br />
03<br />
04<br />
05<br />
06<br />
07<br />
08<br />
09<br />
10<br />
11<br />
12<br />
13<br />
14<br />
15<br />
16<br />
17<br />
18<br />
19<br />
20<br />
21<br />
22<br />
23<br />
24<br />
25<br />
26<br />
27<br />
28<br />
29<br />
Digits (Max. 8)<br />
Memory Block<br />
1-14-01<br />
Allow/Deny<br />
M.B. 1-14-02<br />
Route<br />
Number<br />
M.B. 1-14-03<br />
(01~32)<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 3 - 21
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Table 3-1 Automatic Route Selection to Route Number Assignment (Continued)<br />
Table<br />
1~4<br />
Dialing<br />
Combination<br />
30<br />
31<br />
32<br />
33<br />
34<br />
35<br />
36<br />
37<br />
38<br />
39<br />
40<br />
41<br />
42<br />
43<br />
44<br />
45<br />
46<br />
47<br />
48<br />
49<br />
50<br />
51<br />
52<br />
53<br />
54<br />
55<br />
56<br />
57<br />
58<br />
Digits (Max. 8)<br />
Memory Block<br />
1-14-01<br />
Allow/Deny<br />
M.B. 1-14-02<br />
Route<br />
Number<br />
M.B. 1-14-03<br />
(01~32)<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3 - 22 Advanced Applications
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Table 3-1 Automatic Route Selection to Route Number Assignment (Continued)<br />
Table<br />
1~4<br />
Dialing<br />
Combination<br />
59<br />
60<br />
61<br />
62<br />
63<br />
64<br />
65<br />
66<br />
67<br />
68<br />
69<br />
70<br />
71<br />
72<br />
73<br />
74<br />
75<br />
76<br />
77<br />
78<br />
79<br />
80<br />
81<br />
82<br />
83<br />
84<br />
85<br />
86<br />
87<br />
Digits (Max. 8)<br />
Memory Block<br />
1-14-01<br />
Allow/Deny<br />
M.B. 1-14-02<br />
Route<br />
Number<br />
M.B. 1-14-03<br />
(01~32)<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 3 - 23
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Table 3-1 Automatic Route Selection to Route Number Assignment (Continued)<br />
Table<br />
1~4<br />
Dialing<br />
Combination<br />
88<br />
89<br />
90<br />
91<br />
92<br />
93<br />
94<br />
95<br />
96<br />
97<br />
98<br />
99<br />
100<br />
101<br />
102<br />
103<br />
104<br />
105<br />
106<br />
107<br />
108<br />
109<br />
110<br />
111<br />
112<br />
113<br />
114<br />
115<br />
116<br />
Digits (Max. 8)<br />
Memory Block<br />
1-14-01<br />
Allow/Deny<br />
M.B. 1-14-02<br />
Route<br />
Number<br />
M.B. 1-14-03<br />
(01~32)<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3 - 24 Advanced Applications
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Table 3-1 Automatic Route Selection to Route Number Assignment (Continued)<br />
Table<br />
1~4<br />
Dialing<br />
Combination<br />
117<br />
118<br />
119<br />
120<br />
121<br />
122<br />
123<br />
124<br />
125<br />
126<br />
127<br />
128<br />
Table 3-2 Route Number to Trunk Group/RAB Selection and Digit Control<br />
Route Number<br />
M.B. 1-14-03<br />
01<br />
02<br />
03<br />
04<br />
05<br />
06<br />
07<br />
08<br />
09<br />
10<br />
11<br />
12<br />
NORMAL,<br />
TKGP (01~32),<br />
or RAB (01~32)<br />
M.B.1-14-04<br />
Digits (Max. 8)<br />
Memory Block<br />
1-14-01<br />
Delete Digits<br />
(00~10)<br />
M.B. 1-14-05<br />
Allow/Deny<br />
M.B. 1-14-02<br />
Route<br />
Number<br />
M.B. 1-14-03<br />
(01~32)<br />
Add Digits (10 Max.)<br />
M.B. 1-14-06<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 3 - 25
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Table 3-2 Route Number to Trunk Group/RAB Selection and Digit Control (Continued)<br />
Route Number<br />
M.B. 1-14-03<br />
13<br />
14<br />
15<br />
16<br />
17<br />
18<br />
19<br />
20<br />
21<br />
22<br />
23<br />
24<br />
25<br />
26<br />
27<br />
28<br />
29<br />
30<br />
31<br />
32<br />
NORMAL,<br />
TKGP (01~32),<br />
or RAB (01~32)<br />
M.B.1-14-04<br />
Delete Digits<br />
(00~10)<br />
M.B. 1-14-05<br />
Add Digits (10 Max.)<br />
M.B. 1-14-06<br />
A single route is specified for each registered dialing number.<br />
�<br />
When Memory Block 1-14-00 is set to allow, ARS functions<br />
�<br />
even with the MIFM-U( ) ETU installed, but LCR using the<br />
MIFM-U( ) ETU is disabled.<br />
The MIFM-U( ) ETU is required for charge display to function.<br />
�<br />
The ARS dialing numbers are checked according to the<br />
�<br />
following priorities:<br />
Complete table match<br />
Allow/Deny in the order 0~9, �, # or P/N or X<br />
Data sorted in the order 0~9, �, # or P/N or X.<br />
� The program cannot detect 1+; it must be entered in the table.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3 - 26 Advanced Applications
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
2.6 ARS Flowcharts<br />
� Numbers affected by code restriction using Memory Block<br />
1-1-82 (CO Feature Code Service for Code Restriction.), need<br />
not be specified as 8-digit dialing numbers in the ARS table<br />
because they are automatically excluded from ARS.<br />
NORMAL origination in USA is Trunk Group 1.<br />
�<br />
When a dialing number is not subjected to ARS, it is either<br />
�<br />
originated according to the LCR bypass specification or busy.<br />
� When ARS begins checking a received number, a 10-second<br />
timer is set. When timeout occurs, ARS ends and normal<br />
origination is performed.<br />
The flowcharts show how origination by Trunk Group 1 is determined.<br />
When the call is not originated by pressing a line key or dialing a Trunk Group<br />
1 access code and the LCR Class is 0, the call is originated as is.<br />
When LCR Class 1, 2, 3, or 4 is selected the call is originated according to<br />
bypass specifications in the class of service and becomes busy.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 3 - 27
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Start<br />
MB<br />
1-14-00<br />
Allow/Deny<br />
MB 4-40<br />
LCR Class<br />
Selection<br />
Code<br />
Restriction Assigned<br />
MB 1-1-82<br />
1<br />
Allow<br />
1~4<br />
Automatic Route Selection Flowcharts<br />
Deny<br />
0<br />
If Digits Match,<br />
Continue<br />
MIFM LCR Originate<br />
Trunk Group 1 Originated<br />
by Dialing<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3 - 28 Advanced Applications<br />
2
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
1<br />
ARS Table Dial<br />
Check - Refer to<br />
Service Conditions<br />
Match Dial?<br />
Yes<br />
Check ARS<br />
Allow/Deny<br />
M.B. 1-14-02<br />
Allow?<br />
Route Number<br />
to TKGP/RAB<br />
Check<br />
Which TKGP or<br />
RAB?<br />
3<br />
Yes<br />
TKGP 01~32<br />
RAB 01~32<br />
No<br />
No<br />
No Call<br />
Busy<br />
Memory Block 1-14-03<br />
Memory Block 1-14-04<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 3 - 29<br />
4<br />
LCR ByPass?<br />
M.B. 1-8-08<br />
Busy<br />
2<br />
Deny<br />
Allow<br />
Trunk Group 1<br />
Originate<br />
2
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3<br />
TKGP/RAB<br />
meets condition?<br />
Digit<br />
Add/Del<br />
Seize Trunk<br />
and Dial<br />
END<br />
Yes<br />
No<br />
MB 1-14-05<br />
MB 1-14-06<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3 - 30 Advanced Applications<br />
4<br />
2
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
SECTION 3 ISDN-PRI CALL BY CALL<br />
3.1 General<br />
Call by Call Service allows multiple services to share a PRI line.<br />
When a call is originated or terminated, an Information Element (IE) called the<br />
Network Specified Facility (NSF) is added to the SETUP message to identify<br />
the service associated with the call.<br />
The number of Simulated Facility Groups (SFGs) that can be simultaneously<br />
used for each service must be restricted. The total number of SFGs must be<br />
less than the number of PRI channels. The SFGs are determined when<br />
contracting with the network. The network determines whether calls that<br />
exceed the restriction are rejected or diverted. For outgoing calls, the KTS<br />
counts the number of calls in progress per group, and rejects excess calls.<br />
For Call by Call to operate, the number of B channels used for PRI must be<br />
specified using Memory Block 1-13-00 (PRT Channel Assignment), and Call<br />
by Call service must be assigned to each PRT using Memory Block 1-13-03<br />
(Call by Call Service Selection).<br />
3.2 Memory Blocks<br />
The following related Memory Blocks are used when assigning Call by Call.<br />
Memory<br />
Title Block<br />
DID Digit Length Selection.................................................. 1-1-20<br />
DID Digit Conversion Assignment.......................................1-1-21<br />
DID Digit Conversion Table................................................. 1-1-22<br />
DID Forward Station Number for Busy Station<br />
or Undefined Digit............................................................... 1-1-23<br />
Access Code (1~3 Digit) Assignment........................... 1-1-46~48<br />
Route Advance Block Assignment...................................... 1-1-30<br />
ISDN DTMF Duration/Interdigit Selection........................... 1-1-80<br />
ISDN / K-CCIS Interval Time Selection............................... 1-1-81<br />
SLT or Automated Attendant/DISA to CPU PBR Selection.1-8-01<br />
PBR Receive Level Assignment for<br />
Automated Attendant/DISA................................................. 1-8-02<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 3 - 31
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Master Clock Selection....................................................... 1-8-33<br />
Trunk to Tenant Assignment...................................................2-01<br />
Line Key Selection..................................................................2-05<br />
Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode.......................................2-06<br />
Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment......................................... 3-03<br />
Trunk Incoming Answer Mode Selection................................ 3-05<br />
Automatic Release Signal Detection Selection...................... 3-40<br />
DIT Assignment......................................................................3-42<br />
ANA Assignment.................................................................... 3-43<br />
ISDN Trunk Directory Number Assignment............................3-52<br />
Caller Name Indication Selection........................................... 3-53<br />
Trunk Type Selection..............................................................3-91<br />
Trunk (Installed, DP/DTMF) Selection....................................3-92<br />
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)..................................4-01<br />
CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)................................4-02<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> to Tenant Assignment........................................... 4-09<br />
Line key Selection for <strong>Telephone</strong> Mode................................. 4-12<br />
Station to Call Appearance Block Assignment....................... 4-43<br />
Multiline Terminal Type Selection........................................... 4-50<br />
PRT Channel Assignment.................................................1-13-00<br />
Call by Call Service Selection........................................... 1-13-03<br />
Call by Call Type of Number Assignment..........................1-10-02<br />
Call by Call Numbering Plan ID Assignment.....................1-10-03<br />
Call by call Type of Network ID Assignment..................... 1-10-00<br />
Call by Call ID Plan Assignment....................................... 1-10-01<br />
Call by Call Network ID Assignment................................. 1-10-04<br />
Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Service).. 1-10-05<br />
Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Feature).. 1-10-06<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3 - 32 Advanced Applications
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Call by Call Service Parameter Assignment..................... 1-10-07<br />
Call by Call Max Digit Assignment.................................... 1-10-08<br />
Call by Call Simulated Facility Group Assignment............ 1-10-09<br />
Call by Call Outgoing SFG Assignment............................ 1-10-20<br />
Call by Call Outgoing/Incoming SFG Assignment.............1-10-21<br />
Call by Call Incoming Type Selection................................1-10-22<br />
3.3 Memory Block Description<br />
3.3.1 DID Digit Length Selection (Memory Block 1-1-20)<br />
Use this Memory Block to define the number of DID digits.<br />
Default: 3<br />
3.3.2 DID Digit Conversion Assignment (Memory Block 1-1-21)<br />
Use this Memory Block to enable the DID Digit Conversion table.<br />
Default: NO<br />
3.3.3 DID Digit Conversion Table (Memory Block 1-1-22)<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign DID numbers to ring at station<br />
numbers, closed number (plus outgoing digits), or tenant number.<br />
Default: Not Specified<br />
3.3.4 DID Forward Station Number for Busy Station or Undefined Digit<br />
(Memory Block 1-1-23)<br />
Use this Memory Block when the DID conversion Table is enabled to<br />
define where digits are routed when undefined or the station is busy.<br />
Default: NON (Not Assigned)<br />
3.3.5 Access Code (1-, 2-, or 3-Digit) Assignment (Memory Block<br />
1-1-46~48)<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign access codes or station numbers.<br />
Function 080 [Outgoing (CO only) Access in same Tenant] default<br />
Not Specified, Function 101(Trunk Group 01) default is 9, and<br />
Function 201~232 (Route Advance Blocks 1~32) default is none<br />
specified.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 3 - 33
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3.3.6 Route Advance Block Assignment (Memory Block 1-1-30)<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign priority levels to each Trunk Group<br />
assigned in a Route Advance Block.<br />
Default: All Blocks 00<br />
3.3.7 ISDN DTMF Duration/Interdigit Selection (Memory Block 1-1-80)<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify tone duration and interdigit time of<br />
DTMF signals for ISDN trunks.<br />
Default: 100/70 milliseconds<br />
3.3.8 ISDN / K-CCIS Interval Time Selection (Memory Block 1-1-81)<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify time between digits dialed.<br />
Default: 4s<br />
3.3.9 SLT or Automated Attendant/DISA to CPU PBR Selection (Memory<br />
Block 1-8-01)<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether the PBR circuits in the<br />
CPU are for Single Line <strong>Telephone</strong>s or Automated Attendant/DISA.<br />
Default: SLT<br />
3.3.10 PBR Receive Level Assignment for Automated Attendant/DISA<br />
(Memory Block 1-8-02)<br />
Use this Memory Block to Specify the receiving level at the<br />
Automated Attendant /DISA.<br />
Default: 03 (-36 dBm)<br />
3.3.11 Master Clock Selection (Memory Block 1-8-33)<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign the source for synchronization of<br />
the clocking for DTI-U( ), PRT(1)-U( ), or BRT(4)-U( ) ETU.<br />
Default: 0 (Not assigned)<br />
3.3.12 Trunk to Tenant Assignment (Memory Block 2-01)<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign CO/PBX lines to tenants.<br />
Default: CO/PBX lines 01~64 are assigned<br />
3.3.13 Line Key Selection (Memory Block 2-05)<br />
Use this Memory Block to select Tenant mode or <strong>Telephone</strong> Mode<br />
line key assignment for each tenant.<br />
Default: TEL<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3 - 34 Advanced Applications
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
3.3.14 Line Key Selection for Tenant Mode (Memory Block 2-06)<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign functions to each telephone line<br />
key for Tenant Mode.<br />
Default: Tenant 00, Line keys 01~08 are assigned to CO/PBX.<br />
Tenants 01~47 are unassigned)<br />
3.3.15 Trunk-to-Trunk Group Assignment (Memory Block 3-03)<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign a Trunk Group number to each<br />
CO/PBX line.<br />
Default: Lines 01~08 assigned to Trunk Group 01<br />
Lines 09~64 assigned to Trunk Group 00<br />
All Tie Lines assigned to Trunk Group 02<br />
All DID lines assigned to Trunk Group 00<br />
3.3.16 Trunk Incoming Answer Mode Selection (Memory Block 3-05)<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify the incoming answer mode per<br />
outside line as NO ASSIGN (Normal), TANDM TRF (automatic<br />
trunk-to-trunk transfer), or AA (Automated Attendant/DISA).<br />
Default: NO ASSIGN<br />
3.3.17 Automatic Release Signal Detection Selection (Memory Block 3-40)<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify signal detection time for release of<br />
a CO/PBX line after a disconnect signal is received from the Central<br />
Office or PBX.<br />
Default: 350 (milliseconds)<br />
3.3.18 DIT Assignment (Memory Block 3-42)<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign a Day Mode direct-trunk<br />
termination to an independent station.<br />
Default: Blank (No Assignment)<br />
3.3.19 ANA Assignment (Memory Block 3-43)<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign a Night Mode direct-trunk<br />
termination to an independent station.<br />
Default: Blank (No Assignment)<br />
3.3.20 ISDN Trunk Directory Number Assignment (Memory Block 3-52)<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign ISDN Directory Number.<br />
Default: Blank (Not Specified)<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 3 - 35
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3.3.21 Line Key Selection (Memory Block 3-53)<br />
Use this Memory Block to check the speed dialing buffer for a match<br />
when a Caller ID Number is detected. When a name is assigned to a<br />
matched number, it can be displayed when Line key 3 (NAM) is<br />
selected.<br />
Default: NUM<br />
3.3.22 Trunk Type Selection (Memory Block 3-91)<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify an external line as CO, PBX (or<br />
CTX), TIE, DID, or CTX (Assume 9).<br />
Default: CO<br />
3.3.23 Trunk (Installed, DP/DTMF) Selection (Memory Block 3-92)<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify an external line as NIL (Not<br />
connected), DP 10 pps, DP 20 pps, or MF (DTMF).<br />
Default: MF<br />
3.3.24 CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode) (Memory Block 4-01)<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign incoming CO/PBX calls to ring on<br />
Multiline Terminals in the Day mode.<br />
Default: Lines 01~08 ring at telephone ports 01 and 02<br />
3.3.25 CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode) (Memory Block 4-02)<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign incoming CO/PBX calls to ring on<br />
Multiline Terminals in the Night mode.<br />
Default: Lines 01~08 ring at telephone ports 01 and 02<br />
3.3.26 <strong>Telephone</strong> to Tenant Assignment (Memory Block 4-09)<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify Tenant assignment per station.<br />
Default: All telephones assigned to Tenant 00<br />
3.3.27 Line Key Selection for <strong>Telephone</strong> Mode (Memory Block 4-12)<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign functions to each CO/PBX line key<br />
on each tenant assigned to telephone mode.<br />
Default: Line keys 01~08 are assigned as CO/PBX lines 01~08 for all<br />
telephones.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3 - 36 Advanced Applications
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
3.3.28 Station to Call Appearance Block Assignment (Memory Block 4-43)<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign a multiline Terminal to a Call<br />
Appearance Block.<br />
Default: All stations are assigned to CAP Block 00<br />
3.3.29 Multiline Terminal Type Selection (Memory Block 4-50)<br />
Use this memory Block to select the Multiline Terminal type.<br />
Default: 16 Line Keys<br />
3.3.30 PRT Channel Assignment (Memory Block 1-13-00)<br />
Use this Memory Block to assign B channels for PRI.<br />
Default: 24<br />
3.3.31 Call by Call Service Selection (Memory Block 1-13-03)<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether (YS) or not (NO) Call by<br />
Call is specified per PRT line.<br />
Default: NO<br />
3.3.32 Call by Call Type of Number Assignment (Memory Block 1-10-02)<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify a TN for each Route Advance<br />
Block (RAB) as 0 (Unknown), 1 (International), 2 (National), 3<br />
(Network Specific), or 4 (Subscriber or local).<br />
Default: 0 for all RABs<br />
3.3.33 Call by Call Numbering Plan ID Assignment (Memory Block 1-10-03)<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify Numbering Plan ID (NPI) for each<br />
RAB as 00 (Unknown), 1 (ISDN/Telephony), 2 (Reserved), 3 (Data,<br />
in the future), or 9 (Private).<br />
Default: 0 for all RABs<br />
3.3.34 Call by Call Type of Network ID Assignment (Memory Block 1-10-00)<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify Type of Network ID (TNI) for each<br />
RAB as 0,1 (Reserved), 2 (National Network), 3~7 (Reserved).<br />
The Network ID (Memory Block 1-10-04) must be assigned.<br />
Default: 2 for all RABs<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 3 - 37
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3.3.35 Call by Call ID Plan Assignment (Memory Block 1-10-01)<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify Network ID Plan (NIP) for each<br />
RAB as 0 (Reserved), 1 (Interexchange Carrier), 2~15 (Reserved).<br />
The Network ID (Memory Block 1-10-04) must be assigned.<br />
Default: 1 for all RABs<br />
3.3.36 Call by Call Network ID Assignment (Memory Block 1-10-04)<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify Network ID (NID) for each RAB.<br />
Default: All RABs are unspecified<br />
3.3.37 Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Service) (Memory<br />
Block 1-10-05)<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify Facility Coding Value (Service) for<br />
each RAB as specified by the Memory Block table.<br />
Default: All blocks 00 (None)<br />
3.3.38 Call by Call Facility Coding Value Assignment (Feature) (Memory<br />
Block 1-10-06)<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify Facility Coding Value (Feature) for<br />
each RAB as specified by the Memory Block table.<br />
Default: All blocks 00 (None)<br />
3.3.39 Call by Call Service Parameter Assignment (Memory Block1-10-07)<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify Call Service Parameter for each<br />
RAB as specified by the Memory Block table.<br />
Default: All RABS 0-000<br />
3.3.40 Call by Call Max Digit Assignment (Memory Block 1-10-08)<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify Max Digit for each RAB.<br />
Default: All RABs 00 (No Limit)<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3 - 38 Advanced Applications
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
3.3.41 Call by Call Simulated Facility Group Assignment (Memory Block<br />
1-10-09)<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify a Simulated Facility Group (01~16)<br />
to control SFGs of each facility for each RAB.<br />
Default: All RABs 00 (None)<br />
SFGs for FX can be defined per FX Facility Group for incoming,<br />
outgoing, and Incoming/outgoing calls using an FX Facility Group.<br />
SFGs for Tie Trunks can be defined per Tie Trunk Facility Group for<br />
incoming, outgoing, and Incoming/outgoing calls using a Tie Trunk<br />
Facility Group.<br />
SFGs for OUTWATS can be defined for outgoing calls per individual<br />
OUTWATS service. For IntraLATA and banded OUTWATS, an SFG<br />
is assigned to each band. For InterLATA OUTWATS, an SFG is<br />
assigned to each IC.<br />
SFGs for INWATS can be defined for incoming calls per INWATS<br />
called DN.<br />
3.3.42 Call by Call Outgoing SFG Assignment (Memory Block 1-10-20)<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify an outgoing SFG for each SFG<br />
specified by Memory Block 1-10-09.<br />
Default: 99<br />
3.3.43 Call by Call Outgoing/Incoming SFG Assignment (Memory Block<br />
1-10-21)<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify an Outgoing or Incoming SFG for<br />
each SFG specified by Memory Block 1-10-09. The incoming SFG<br />
is controlled by the network.<br />
Default: 99<br />
3.3.44 Call by Call Incoming Type Selection (Memory Block 1-10-22)<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify an Incoming Call Type for each<br />
SFG specified by Memory Block 1-10-09 as either CO (Normal) or<br />
DID.<br />
Default: DID<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 3 - 39
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3.4 Call by Call (CBC) <strong>Programming</strong> (LCR PC Software V2.0 or Higher)<br />
3.4.1 The International/Operator Table<br />
This table has a page for each LCR Class (1~4) that contains fixed<br />
dialing patterns that can be assigned to that Class.<br />
Two routes can be assigned and arranged in priority. PRT<br />
�<br />
should have higher priority.<br />
Trunk Group or Route Advance Blocks are specified in<br />
�<br />
TG/RAB.<br />
Delete digits specifies the number of digits to delete from the<br />
�<br />
first dial when using PRT.<br />
� PreDigits controls whether digits that are specified in pre-digit<br />
tables are dialed before the International or Operator code.<br />
When TG/RAB is not assigned, outgoing calls cannot be made.<br />
�<br />
International or Operator Table Example<br />
LCR Class<br />
1~4<br />
Class1<br />
3.4.2 The OCC Table<br />
Dial Priority TG/RAB Delete<br />
Digits<br />
PreDigits<br />
Add/Not Add<br />
0- 1 RAB 09 1 Not Add<br />
2 None None Not Add<br />
00 1 RAB 10 2 Not Add<br />
2 None None Not Add<br />
010 1 RAB 11 3 Not Add<br />
2 None None Not Add<br />
011 1 RAB 12 3 Not Add<br />
2 None None Not Add<br />
01N 1 RAB 13 2 Not Add<br />
2 None None Not Add<br />
ON 1 RAB 14 1 Not Add<br />
(N = 2~9) 2 None None Not Add<br />
This Table has 16 pages (called Table 1~Table 16) that are required<br />
for each of the LCR Classes for a total of 64 tables with fixed dialing<br />
patterns.<br />
Dial means following the OCC dial.<br />
�<br />
Two routes can be assigned and arranged in priority. PRT<br />
�<br />
should have higher priority.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3 - 40 Advanced Applications
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Trunk Group or Route Advance Blocks are specified in TG/<br />
�<br />
RAB.<br />
Delete digits specifies the number of digits to delete from the<br />
�<br />
first dial when using PRT.<br />
� PreDigits controls whether digits that are specified in pre-digit<br />
tables are dialed before the International or Operator code.<br />
When TG/RAB is not assigned, outgoing calls cannot be made.<br />
�<br />
When an unassigned OCC number is dialed, route selection is<br />
�<br />
bypassed.<br />
Tables (64)<br />
01~16 for<br />
each Class<br />
Table 1<br />
OCC Table Example<br />
OCC Dial Dial Priority TG/RAB Delete<br />
Digits<br />
101XXX<br />
X<br />
(X = 0~9)<br />
1010288<br />
3.4.3 Operator Call Time Out Table Example<br />
This table specifies a timeout (0~9 seconds) that is used to<br />
distinguish between 0 and 00 of an Operator Call.<br />
PreDigits<br />
Add/Not<br />
Add<br />
0- 1 RAB 15 8 Not Add<br />
2 None Not Add<br />
00 1 RAB 16 9 Not Add<br />
2 None Not Add<br />
011 1 RAB 3 10 Not Add<br />
2 None Not Add<br />
0N 1 RAB 4 10 Not Add<br />
2 None Not Add<br />
1N 1 RAB 5 10 Not Add<br />
(N = 2~9) 2 None Not Add<br />
NX 1 RAB 6 9 Not Add<br />
(X = 0~9) 2 None Not Add<br />
# 1 RAB 7 8 Not Add<br />
2 None Not Add<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 3 - 41
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
The MIFM-U( ) ETU refers to this table when the first digit dialed is 0<br />
or when 0 follows the OCC Dial.<br />
3.5 Least Cost Routing (LCR) <strong>Programming</strong><br />
Refer to the <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Least Cost Routing <strong>Manual</strong>.<br />
3.6 Operating Procedures Example<br />
Ensure that the following items are assigned or registered:<br />
Memory Block Setting<br />
7-1 S1 MIFM<br />
S2 ESITEL01~08<br />
S4 PRTCO 01~24<br />
S7 COICO 25~32<br />
1-1-20 4 Digits<br />
1-1-21 YS<br />
1-1-22 DID number: 2000, Station number:100<br />
1-1-30 Set all 32 RABs at 02 with number 1 priority<br />
1-1-46 Set dial 9 to function 101 (Trunk Group 1)<br />
1-1-81 4s<br />
1-8-08 Page 3, LK4 [LCR Bypass (Trunk Groups 2~32)] to<br />
Allow<br />
Page4, LK1 (LCR Recall) to deny<br />
1-13-03 PRT01 to YS<br />
Operator Call Time Out Table<br />
Default SettingsOperator Call Time Out<br />
4 sec<br />
2-01 Co lines 01~23, 25~32 assigned to Tenant 00<br />
3-03 Co lines 01~23 assigned to TKGP02<br />
Co lines 25~32 assigned to TKGP03<br />
3-91 Co lines 01~23 set to DID<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3 - 42 Advanced Applications
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
3-92 Co line 24 set to NIL (Not installed)<br />
4-12 TEL ports 01, 02 (Ext. 100,101), LK01~23, C<br />
(CAP)01~23<br />
4-40 Set TEL ports 01, 02 (Ext. 100,101) to CLS 1<br />
4-50 24 Line Keys<br />
1-10-20 Group 01 to 08 MEGACOM (AT&T)<br />
Group 02 to 05 MEGACOM800 (AT&T)<br />
Group 03 to 02 MultiQuest (AT&T)<br />
Group 04 to 02 Tie (Nortel)<br />
Group 05 to 02 FX (Nortel)<br />
Group 06 to 01 ACCUNET (AT&T)<br />
(Future)<br />
Group 07 to 03 OUTWATS (Nortel)<br />
Group 08~16 to 99 (default)<br />
1-10-21 Group 01 to 10 MEGACOM (AT&T)<br />
Group 02 to 05 MEGACOM800 (AT&T)<br />
Group 03 to 02 MultiQuest (AT&T)<br />
Group 04 to 03 Tie (Nortel)<br />
Group 05 to 03 FX (Nortel)<br />
Group 06 to 01 ACCUNET (AT&T)<br />
(Future)<br />
Group 07 to 03 OUTWATS (Nortel)<br />
Group 08~16 to 99 (default)<br />
1-10-22 SFG05 to CO<br />
Other SFGs remain in DID<br />
3-42 Set CO 01~23 to TEL 101<br />
3-43 CO 01~23 unassigned<br />
Call by Call Memory Block Data Table (Example Only)<br />
Refer to the Memory Block Data table.<br />
AT&T and Nortel are mixed in this example even though in reality this is<br />
�<br />
impossible.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 3 - 43
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
R<br />
A<br />
B<br />
TN<br />
(02)<br />
NPI<br />
(03)<br />
TNI<br />
(00)<br />
3.7 Dialing Examples<br />
3.7.1 Dial 9 (Trunk access code) 1-212-752-5000<br />
LCR search sequence: Area Code:212 → Route Adv 01 → Route 01<br />
→ RAB 01→ TG 02 → CO 23.<br />
Operation:<br />
Table 3-3 Memory Block Data<br />
NIP<br />
(01)<br />
1. Go off-hook, and listen for ICM dial tone.<br />
The Terminal LCD shows 100 →.<br />
2. Dial the Trunk Access Code (I).<br />
The KSU generates an LCR Dial Tone.<br />
The Terminal LCD shows LCR.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
NID<br />
(04)<br />
FCVS<br />
(1-10-05)<br />
3 - 44 Advanced Applications<br />
FCVF<br />
(06)<br />
SP<br />
(07)<br />
MAX<br />
DIGIT<br />
(08)<br />
�<br />
01 2 1 None None None 03 (AT&T) 00<br />
0:00<br />
0<br />
11 01<br />
Values in ( ) are the last two digits of Call by Call Memory Blocks (e.g. 1-10-0X).<br />
02 4 1 None None None 03 (AT&T) 00<br />
03 2 1 2 1 0288 03 (AT&T) 00<br />
04 2 1 None None None 02 (AT&T) 00<br />
05 2 1 None None None 16 (AT&T) 00<br />
06 0 0 None None None<br />
07 0 0 None None None<br />
04 0r 19<br />
Nortel<br />
05 0r 20<br />
Nortel<br />
08 1 1 2 1 3333 03 (AT&T) 00<br />
09 0 0 None None None 03 (AT&T) 05<br />
0:00<br />
0<br />
0:00<br />
0<br />
0:00<br />
0<br />
0:00<br />
0<br />
SFG<br />
(09)<br />
10 01<br />
11 01<br />
11 02<br />
11 03<br />
00 001 11 04<br />
00 100 11 05<br />
0:00<br />
0<br />
0:00<br />
0<br />
0 01<br />
1 N/A
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
3. Dial A.<br />
Dial tone stops.<br />
The Terminal LCD shows 1.<br />
4. Dial BABGEB.<br />
CAP LEDs 00 and 01 light green.<br />
The Terminal LCD shows 1212752.<br />
5. Dial EKKK.<br />
LEDs remain On.<br />
Ring Back Tone is generated.<br />
The Terminal LCD shows 12127527000.<br />
SETUP is sent to the Network.<br />
SETUP Message<br />
CPN NSF<br />
RAB TN NPI TNI NIP NID<br />
F/S<br />
FCV<br />
Service FCV Feature FCV<br />
01 2(N) 1 212-752-5000 None None None S MEGACOM None<br />
6. PRT is connected.<br />
LEDs remain On.<br />
Conversation starts.<br />
7. The Terminal LCD displays the elapsed time for the call.<br />
3.7.2 Dial 9 (Trunk access code) 214-222-5000<br />
LCR search sequence: Area Code:214 → Route Adv 02 → Route 02<br />
→ RAB 02→ TG 02 → CO 23.<br />
Operation:<br />
1. Go off-hook, and listen for ICM dial tone.<br />
The Terminal LCD shows 100 →.<br />
2. Dial the Trunk Access Code (I).<br />
The KSU generates an LCR Dial Tone.<br />
The Terminal LCD shows LCR.<br />
3. Dial BAD.<br />
Dial tone stops.<br />
Service<br />
Parameter<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 3 - 45
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
The Terminal LCD shows 214.<br />
CAP LEDs 00 and 01 light green.<br />
SFG 1 counter increments by 1.<br />
4. Dial BBBEKKK.<br />
LEDs remain On.<br />
Ring Back Tone is generated.<br />
The Terminal LCD shows 2142227000.<br />
SETUP is sent to the Network.<br />
SETUP Message<br />
CPN NSF<br />
RAB TN NPI TNI NIP NID<br />
F/S<br />
FCV<br />
Service FCV Feature FCV<br />
02 4(N) 1 214-222-5000 None None None S MEGACOM None<br />
5. PRT is connected.<br />
LEDs remain On.<br />
Conversation starts.<br />
6. The Terminal LCD displays the elapsed time for the call.<br />
3.7.3 Dial 9-1-333-444-5000<br />
LCR search sequence: Area Code:333 → Route Adv 03 → Route 03<br />
→ RAB 03→ TG 02 → CO 23.<br />
SETUP Message<br />
CPN NSF<br />
RAB TN NPI TNI NIP NID<br />
F/S<br />
FCV<br />
Service FCV Feature FCV<br />
03 2(N) 1 333-444-5000 2 1 0288 S MEGACOM None<br />
3.7.4 Dial 9-1-800-777-5000<br />
LCR search sequence: Area Code:800 → Route Adv 04 → Route 04<br />
→ RAB 04→ TG 02 → CO 23.<br />
SETUP Message<br />
CPN NSF<br />
RAB TN NPI TNI NIP NID<br />
04 2(N) 1 800-777-5000 None None None S<br />
Service<br />
Parameter<br />
Service<br />
Parameter<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3 - 46 Advanced Applications<br />
F/S<br />
FCV<br />
Service FCV Feature FCV<br />
MEGACOM<br />
800<br />
None<br />
Service<br />
Parameter
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
3.7.5 Dial 9-1-913-381-6000<br />
LCR search sequence: Area Code:800 → Route Adv 04 → Route 04<br />
→ RAB 04→ TG 02 → CO 23.<br />
SETUP Message<br />
CPN NSF<br />
RAB TN NPI TNI NIP NID<br />
F/S<br />
FCV<br />
Service FCV Feature FCV<br />
05 2(N) 1 913-381-6000 None None None S MultiQuest None<br />
3.7.6 Dial 9-011-81 (Country Code)1-471-82-1111<br />
LCR search sequence: Dial 011 of International/Operator Table 1→<br />
RAB 08→ TG 02 → CO 23.<br />
SETUP Message<br />
CPN NSF<br />
RAB TN NPI TNI NIP NID<br />
08 1(l) 1<br />
81-471-82-<br />
1111<br />
3.7.7 Outgoing Tie Line Service – Detour to Analog Trunk when Simulated<br />
Facility Group (SFG) Busy<br />
Dial I-EKK-BBB-CCCC.<br />
LCR search sequence: LCR Dial → Route Adv 01 → Route 01 (first<br />
priority) → RAB 01 → SFG 01 → Outgoing SFG=08 (overflow) →<br />
Route 040 (2nd priority) → TG 03 → CO 32.<br />
SETUP Message<br />
3.7.8 Outgoing FX service – Dial 9-1 +500-222-3333<br />
LCR search sequence: Area Code 555→ Route Adv 07 → Route<br />
07→ RAB 07→ TG 02 → CO 23.<br />
SETUP Message<br />
CPN NSF<br />
Service<br />
Parameter<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 3 - 47<br />
F/S<br />
FCV<br />
Service FCV Feature FCV<br />
2 1 3333 S MEGACOM None<br />
CPN NSF<br />
RAB TN NPI TNI NIP NID<br />
F/S<br />
FCV<br />
Service FCV Feature FCV<br />
Service<br />
Parameter<br />
Service<br />
Parameter<br />
06 0(U) 0(U) 500-222-3333 None None None S Tie None 001<br />
RAB TN NPI TNI NIP NID<br />
F/S<br />
FCV<br />
Service FCV Feature FCV<br />
Service<br />
Parameter<br />
07 0(U) 0(U) 500-222-3333 None None None S FX None 100
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3.7.9 Local Operator Call – Dial 9 +0<br />
LCR search sequence: Dial 0 of International/Operator Table 1→<br />
RAB 09→ TG 02 → CO 23.<br />
SETUP Message<br />
CPN NSF<br />
RAB TN NPI TNI NIP NID<br />
3.8 Service Conditions<br />
The following service conditions apply.<br />
� The <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> supports the AT&T 5ESS-2000 switch, Software<br />
release 5E12 or later using the National ISDN PRI version only.<br />
Caller ID is displayed as with normal CO calls.<br />
�<br />
LCR is necessary for Call by Call origination.<br />
�<br />
� For an outgoing call to an external line, dialed digits are sent collectively<br />
when the specified ISDN interdigit dialing interval (MB 1-1-81, ISDN/<br />
K-CCIS Interval Time Selection, 4 sec default) from the last digit expires.<br />
When a digit is not dialed after seizure of the external line before the<br />
interdigit interval times out, the external line is released and a Busy Tone<br />
is generated.<br />
� When Call forward Off-premise is assigned, MB 4-47 (ISDN Directory<br />
Number Selection) follows the specification at the TEL to which the call<br />
is forwarded.<br />
No tandem connection is allowed in Tie Trunk Mode.<br />
�<br />
For PRI trunks, CO or DID type should be assigned using MB 3-91<br />
�<br />
(Trunk Type Selection).<br />
� When PRT is used as an outgoing trunk on Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk<br />
transfer, Caller ID follows the MB 3-52 (ISDN Trunk Directory Number<br />
selection) setting. When allowed, Caller ID is sent to the network.<br />
For an incoming call, the lowest numbered channel in the PRT trunk is<br />
�<br />
used.<br />
� Call by Call does not follow Tenant Day/Night Mode switching.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3 - 48 Advanced Applications<br />
F/S<br />
FCV<br />
09 0(U) 0(U) No Digits None None None S MEGACOM<br />
Service FCV Feature FCV<br />
Operator<br />
(Local)<br />
Service<br />
Parameter<br />
None
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
� When bypassing LCR for CBC, press a line key assigned for RAB or Dial<br />
the RAB access code to access the RAB. Using LCR requires dialing<br />
1+NXX+NXX+XXXX. Pressing the RAB line key requires dialing<br />
NXX+NXX+XXXX. The greater of the two should be registered in MB<br />
1-10-08 (Call by Call Max Digit Assignment).<br />
LCR should be assigned to delete the 1. It should not be sent to the<br />
�<br />
network.<br />
� The system sends the number dialed to the network by the earliest<br />
occurrence of the following. Either the Max digits assigned by MB<br />
1-10-08 (Call by Call Max Digit Assignment) are reached or the ISDN<br />
Dial Interval Time assigned by Memory Block 1-1-81 (ISDN /K-CCIS<br />
Interval Time Selection) expires.<br />
� An incoming call is regarded as DID, but if called party information is not<br />
sent as for FX, it is regarded as a normal incoming call. Day/Night Ring,<br />
using Memory Block 4-01[CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Day Mode)]/<br />
Memory Block 4-02[CO/PBX Ring Assignment (Night Mode)], or DIT/<br />
ANA, using Memory Block 3-61 (DIT/ANA Delay Answer Time<br />
Selection), must be set for all COs.<br />
� CBC parameters can be set to all assigned values. When an unused<br />
value is set, outgoing calls may not process properly.<br />
� The Type of Network ID (TNI), Network ID Plan (NIP) and Network ID<br />
(NID) are mutually related. When NID is not registered, TNI, NIP, and<br />
NID are not sent. When NID is registered, the registered values for NIP<br />
and TNI are sent.<br />
Main Software controls the incoming SFG as follows:<br />
�<br />
The Facility Coded Value (FCV), NID, and Service parameters are<br />
extracted from the NSF-IE.<br />
The RAB based CBC values are searched for a match.<br />
When a match is found, the assigned SFG value for the RAB is<br />
used.<br />
When a match is not found, software uses SFG value of 16.<br />
When an incoming call indication is received, and the call is<br />
processed, the counter for incoming calls is incremented by one.<br />
When an outgoing call is processed, the counter for incoming calls<br />
is incremented by one.<br />
When the call is terminated before sending a SETUP message to<br />
the network, the outgoing call is canceled and the call counter is<br />
decreased by one.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 3 - 49
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
When incoming and outgoing calls are processed simultaneously<br />
the incoming call has priority. A collision error between<br />
simultaneous SETUP messages is generated, and the outgoing<br />
call gets a busy signal.<br />
� The Incoming/outgoing (IC/OG) SFG must be equal to or greater than<br />
the outgoing (OG) SFG. When not, In many cases, the <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong><br />
system does not accept an incoming call.<br />
� When Operator Call Time Out Table is set to 0 in LCR <strong>Programming</strong>, the<br />
operator call requiring more than 1 digit cannot be used. When 0 + any<br />
digits is stored in speed dial, the system sends the call as 0 Call<br />
(operator) only.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3 - 50 Advanced Applications
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
No Match<br />
Software selects<br />
SFG 16<br />
3.9 Call by Call (CBC) Termination Flowchart<br />
The flowchart shows how Call by Call incoming calls are terminated.<br />
Incoming<br />
Call Type<br />
Voice<br />
CBC?<br />
MB 1-13-03<br />
Yes<br />
SFG<br />
MB 1-10-01~08<br />
Data Match<br />
Incoming Type<br />
MB 1-10-22<br />
CO<br />
CBC Call Termination Flowchart<br />
Others<br />
No<br />
DID<br />
Trunk Type<br />
MB 3-91<br />
Called Party<br />
Number<br />
(CPN)?<br />
Incoming Reject<br />
#88: Incompatible<br />
Destination<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 3 - 51<br />
DID<br />
Yes<br />
Digit Add/Del for Tie Line<br />
Networking (MB 5-00)<br />
Digit Conversion Table<br />
MB 1-1-22<br />
DID/DIT (also Call Alert)<br />
CO<br />
No<br />
Yes<br />
DIT/ANA<br />
Assigned?<br />
MB 3-42,3-43<br />
No<br />
Normal Incoming, A.A., Auto<br />
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
SECTION 4 HUB(8) VLAN AND QOS CONFIGURATION<br />
4.1 General<br />
The HUB(8)-U( ) ETU is an optional Ethernet Interface for the <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
KSU that supports eight Ethernet ports with status and activity indicators. A<br />
HUB is a switching Point for data that comes together from individual ports. A<br />
switch determines the port where the data should be forwarded and regulates<br />
transmission. This ETU is an efficient platform when multiple ETUs that<br />
require Ethernet connection are installed in the <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> KSU. One<br />
port can be a source port and another port can be a target port to mirror the<br />
source and monitor data traffic.<br />
4.2 Memory Block Descriptions<br />
Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection (Memory Block 1-16-00)<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not Auto Negotiation is enabled<br />
for each port of the HUB(8)-U( ) ETU. When No is selected, Memory Block<br />
1-16-01 (Port Speed Selection 10/100 Base -T) and Memory Block 1-16-02<br />
(Port Duplex Mode Selection) are used. When equipment with auto<br />
negotiation function is connected to a port, ensure that the YS is set for this<br />
Memory Block.<br />
Port Speed Selection – 10/100 Base-T (Memory Block 1-16-01)<br />
When Memory Block 1-16-00 (Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection) is set to<br />
NO, use this Memory Block to specify the Ethernet port speed as 10 Mbps or<br />
100 Mbps for each port of each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU.<br />
Port Duplex Mode Selection (Memory Block 1-16-02)<br />
When Memory Block 1-16-00 (Auto Negotiation Yes/No Selection) is set to<br />
NO, use this Memory Block to specify duplex mode (HALF or FULL) for each<br />
port of each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU.<br />
MDI/MDIX Mode Selection (Memory Block 1-16-03)<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify an MDI/MDIX mode for each port of each<br />
HUB(8)-U( ) ETU.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3 - 52 Advanced Applications
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
VLAN Mode Selection (Memory Block 1-16-04)<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not IEEE 802.1q VLAN Tagging<br />
is enabled for each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU. This Memory Block must also be<br />
enabled to use IEEE 802.p Priority. Priority options can be enabled in<br />
Memory Block 1-16-06 (Port Based Priority Selection), Memory Block 1-16-07<br />
(High Priority RX Tag Threshold), Memory Block 1-16-08 (High Priority TX<br />
Tag Assignment), and Memory Block 1-16-09 (Low Priority TX Tag<br />
Assignment).<br />
Default VLAN ID Tag Insertion Assignment (Memory Block 1-16-05)<br />
Use this Memory Block to insert VLAN ID tagging to data frames from network<br />
devices that cannot insert VLAN tags. When data without a VLAN tag is<br />
transmitted by the device on the port, a tag is inserted with the VLAN ID<br />
assigned by this Memory Block.<br />
Port Based Priority Selection (Memory Block 1-16-06)<br />
Use this memory block to specify how frames, reaching the ingress port<br />
without VLAN tags are marked for queuing internally in the HUB(8). The<br />
HUB(8) has two queues: High Priority and Low Priority. When the frame<br />
reaches the egress port, settings for Memory Blocks 1-16-08 (for High Priority<br />
frames) and 1-16-09 (for Low Priority frames) for the egress port are used to<br />
convert the low or high priority queue to a VLAN tag priority (0~7). Set to NO<br />
(default), this Memory block does not mark frames for either queue; Memory<br />
Block 1-16-07 then determines the priority queue for where the frame is sent.<br />
High Priority RX Tag Threshold (Memory Block 1-16-07)<br />
The HUB(8) has two queues: High Priority and Low Priority. When Memory<br />
Block 1-16-06 is set to NO, and the priority of the VLAN tag is equal to or<br />
greater than the setting in this block, the tag is queued for high priority.<br />
Otherwise, it is queued for low priority. When it is transmitted out the egress<br />
port of the HUB(8), it retains its original VLAN tag priority value.<br />
High Priority TX Tag Assignment (Memory Block 1-16-08)<br />
For frames marked at the ingress port by Memory Block 1-16-06 as High<br />
Priority, this memory block setting on the egress port assigns a value (0 ~7) to<br />
the priority field of the VLAN tag. The default is 7.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 3 - 53
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Low Priority TX Tag Assignment (Memory Block 1-16-09)<br />
For frames marked at the ingress port by Memory Block 1-16-06 as Low<br />
Priority, this memory block setting on the egress port assigns a value (0 ~7) to<br />
the priority field of the VLAN tag. The default is 0.<br />
Port Mirroring Selection (Memory Block 1-16-10)<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not Port Mirroring is enabled for<br />
each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU. The source port and the target port must be members<br />
of the same VLAN(s).<br />
Mirroring Source Port Assignment (Memory Block 1-16-11)<br />
When Port Mirroring is enabled in Memory Block 1-16-10 (Port Mirroring<br />
Selection), use this Memory Block to specify a port with data to be monitored<br />
on another port specified by Memory Block 1-16-12 (Mirroring Target Port<br />
Assignment) for each HUB(8) -U( ) ETU. The source port and target port<br />
must be in the same VLAN(s).<br />
Mirroring Target Port Assignment (Memory Block 1-16-12)<br />
When Port Mirroring is enabled in Memory Block 1-16-10 (Port Mirroring<br />
Selection), use this Memory Block to specify a target port that monitors frames<br />
transmitted on the source port specified by Memory Block 1-16-11 (Mirroring<br />
Source Port Assignment) for each HUB(8) -U( ) ETU. The source port and<br />
target port must be in the same VLAN(s).<br />
VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment (Memory Block 1-16-13)<br />
Use this Memory Block to create a list of valid VLAN IDs to be recognized by<br />
the HUB(8)-U( ) ETU.<br />
Port VLAN Group Membership (Memory Block 1-16-14)<br />
Use this Memory Block to create a list of accepted VLANs for each port.<br />
When Memory Block 1-16-04 (VLAN Mode Selection) is set to YS, each port<br />
accepts frames tagged with VLAN IDs only when the port is programmed as a<br />
member of that VLAN Group. Frames without VLAN tags are also permitted.<br />
When Port Mirroring is used, the source and target ports must be members of<br />
the same VLAN(s).<br />
VLAN Tag Insertion Selection (Memory Block 1-16-15)<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not the port should insert VLAN<br />
tags in frames transmitted on this port. When this Memory Block is set to NO,<br />
tags are deleted from frames of the same VLAN Group transmitted on this<br />
port.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3 - 54 Advanced Applications
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Flow Control for Full Duplex Selection (Memory Block 1-16-16)<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not Full duplex IEEE802.3x Flow<br />
Control is enabled for each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU port.<br />
Back Pressure for Half Duplex (Memory Block 1-16-17)<br />
Use this Memory Block to specify whether or not half-duplex Back Pressure<br />
Flow Control is enabled for each HUB(8)-U( ) ETU port.<br />
4.3 Quality of Service Configuration with VLANs<br />
Quality of Service (QoS) is a means of giving priority to time-sensitive network<br />
voice or video traffic. Diffserv and another router-based queuing method<br />
(layer 3 of the OSI model) do not solve the problem of network congestion on<br />
the LAN. Networks for voice and video should use switching hubs instead of<br />
dumb hubs. The HUB(8) ETU is a layer 2 switch that supports the IEEE<br />
802.1p standard for QoS for IEEE 802.1q standard VLANs.<br />
Figure 3-2 Quality of Service Configuration<br />
VLANs may be implemented for reasons other than QoS such as reducing<br />
broadcast traffic on the network, security, or managing multiple paths to a<br />
destination. Using Voice over IP (VoIP), QoS is yet another reason to<br />
implement VLANs. Congestion may occur on the LAN typically on the trunk<br />
connecting the Ethernet switches, between switches and routers, or on the<br />
backplane of a switch-supporting network-intensive application (e.g., imaging<br />
or video).<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 3 - 55
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
When a network incorporates VLANs, the designer must remember that for a<br />
device on one VLAN to communicate with a device on another VLAN, all<br />
traffic between VLANs must travel across a router or a switch with built-in<br />
layer 3 routing ability. Layer 3 routing is slower than layer 2 switching and can<br />
be a potential traffic bottleneck on the network. Therefore, it is logical to<br />
create a VLAN for voice traffic only.<br />
By enabling layer 2 QoS in the LAN, voice and other time-sensitive traffic can<br />
be given priority when the network is congested.<br />
A workgroup may have all PCs in VLAN 200 and all IP telephone terminals in<br />
VLAN 100, even when PCs are typically connected to the second Ethernet<br />
port on the IP telephone terminals. The port on an Ethernet switch supporting<br />
both the IP telephone and the PC must be configured to allow traffic from both<br />
VLAN 100 and VLAN 200. NEC IP terminals have two Ethernet connections<br />
that can be assigned to different VLANs and QoS priorities.<br />
The IEEE 802.1q VLANs insert a 4-byte tag in the Ethernet frame that<br />
includes both the VLAN Identifier (1~4095) and the user_priority (0~7) field<br />
that is used to assign traffic to a priority queue.<br />
The HUB(8) has high and low priority queues. With Memory Block 1-16-06 set<br />
to NO (default), Memory Block 1-16-07 is used to determine which queue a<br />
frame is assigned, based on the frame IEEE 802.1p priority.<br />
For port-based priority, Memory Block 1-16-06 determines which queue a<br />
frame is assigned, based on the port it enters. When an untagged frame<br />
leaves the HUB(8) ETU, it is assigned a priority based on the assigned queue<br />
and the corresponding memory block for the port it leaves: 1-16-08 for<br />
high-priority queue frames or 1-16-09 for low-priority queue frames.<br />
IEEE 802.1q VLAN tags should be sent only to equipment that supports IEEE<br />
802.1q/p. The insertion of an additional 4 bytes likely can create frames that<br />
are larger than the normal Ethernet maximum frame size. Equipment that<br />
does not support, IEEE 802.1q/p likely cannot respond to frames with tags.<br />
Using Memory Block 1-16-15, the HUB(8) can be configured to send tagged<br />
frames only to those devices that support tags.<br />
4.4 Port Based Priority Example<br />
In this example, the HUB(8) is set up to support 2 VLANs:<br />
VLAN Membership<br />
�<br />
VLAN 100 (black) – voice traffic for IP telephones A, B, and C,<br />
plus the IPC and MG ETUs.<br />
Vlan 200 (grey) – data traffic of PCs A, B, and C.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3 - 56 Advanced Applications
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
<strong>Programming</strong>:<br />
� Priority<br />
MB 1-16-04 VLAN Mode Selection<br />
YS<br />
Voice traffic is set for high priority and programmed on the IP<br />
terminals using a priority level of 5.<br />
Data traffic is generally set for a priority of 0.<br />
MB 1-16-05 Default VLAN IDTag Insertion<br />
Refer to Table 1.<br />
MB 1-16-06 Port Based Priority Selection<br />
Refer to Table 3.<br />
MB 1-16-07 High Priority RX Tag Threshold<br />
Refer to Table 3.<br />
MB 1-16-08 High Priority TX Tag Assignment<br />
Refer to Table 3.<br />
MB 1-16-09 Low Priority TX Tag Assignment<br />
Refer to Table 3.<br />
MB 1-16-13 VLAN Group to VLAN ID Assignment<br />
Refer to Table 2.<br />
MB 1-16-14 Port VLAN Group Membership<br />
Refer to Table 2.<br />
MB 1-16-15 VLAN Tag Insertion Selection<br />
Refer to Table 2.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 3 - 57
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Ports 1, 5, and 7<br />
�<br />
IP telephone programming tags voice traffic on VLAN 100, and the PC on<br />
port 1 is attached to an IP telephone with a PC port set for VLAN 200.<br />
Port 2 �<br />
Not Used.<br />
Figure 3-3 Physical Layout and Default VLAN IDs<br />
Port 3 �<br />
PC requires default VLAN ID setting of 200, because it may not be able to<br />
tag traffic.<br />
Ports 4 and 6<br />
�<br />
VoIP cards without native ability to tag traffic.<br />
Port 8 �<br />
Ethernet switch with native VLAN tagging abilities enabled.<br />
MB 1-16-05 Default VLAN<br />
ID Tag Insertion Assignment<br />
Port 8 0001<br />
(any)<br />
Port 7 0001<br />
(any)<br />
Port 6 0100<br />
Port 5 0001<br />
(any)<br />
Port 4 0100<br />
Port 3 0200<br />
Port 2 0001<br />
Port 1 0001<br />
(any)<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3 - 58 Advanced Applications
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
VLAN Group 1 carries traffic marked VLAN ID = 100.<br />
VLAN Group 2 carries traffic marked VLAN ID = 200.<br />
Port 1 �<br />
In IP terminal programming, both the IP terminal and PC are configured for<br />
VLAN tagging: IP terminal on VLAN 100, PC on VLAN 200. Traffic from<br />
both VLAN 100 and VLAN 200 must be permitted to go through port 1.<br />
VLAN tags should be inserted for each.<br />
Port 2 �<br />
Not Used<br />
Figure 3-4 VLAN Settings<br />
Port 3 �<br />
PC is a member of VLAN 200 but does not support VLAN tag insertion. The<br />
PC does not respond to VLAN-tagged traffic.<br />
Port 4 �<br />
MG(8) ETU, <strong>Elite</strong> VoIP ETU that does not support VLAN tags on VLAN 100.<br />
Port 5 �<br />
IP terminal with VLAN tagging support on VLAN 100.<br />
Port 6 �<br />
IPC ETU, ELite VoIP ETU that does not support VLAN tags on VLAN 100.<br />
Port 7 �<br />
IP terminal with VLAN tagging support on VLAN 100.<br />
Depicts Memory Blocks<br />
Settings:<br />
1-16-13 VLAN Group to<br />
VLAN ID Assignment<br />
1-16-14 Port VLAN<br />
Group Membership<br />
1-16-15 VLAN Tag<br />
Insertion Selection<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 3 - 59
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Port 8 �<br />
Ethernet Switch that has IEEE 802.1q/p support enabled and is configured<br />
to carry traffic for both VLAN 100 and VLAN 200.<br />
Port 1 �<br />
In IP terminal programming, the IP terminal is configured for priority 5, and<br />
the PC is configured for priority 0.<br />
Port 2 �<br />
Not Used.<br />
Figure 3-5 Port Priority Settings<br />
Depicts Memory Blocks<br />
Settings:<br />
1-16-06 Port Based<br />
Priority Selection<br />
1-16-07 High Priority<br />
RX Tag<br />
1-16-08 High Priority<br />
TX Tag<br />
1-16-09 Low Priority TX<br />
Tag<br />
Port 3 �<br />
The PC does not support VLAN tagging, so port-based priority could be<br />
used.<br />
Port 4 �<br />
Traffic from the MG(8) is set for High Priority queue in MB 1-16-06.<br />
Port 5 �<br />
In IP terminal programming, the IP terminal is configured for priority 5.<br />
Port 6 �<br />
Traffic from the IPC is set for High Priority queue in MB 1-16-06.<br />
Port 7 �<br />
In IP terminal programming, the IP terminal is configured for priority 5.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3 - 60 Advanced Applications
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
� Port 8<br />
The Ethernet switch carries traffic already marked with VLAN tags with<br />
priorities. The threshold set on the HUB(8) ETU in MB 1-16-07 is priority 4.<br />
Priority 0~3 traffic from the Ethernet Switch goes to the Low Priority queue<br />
of the HUB(8), and priority 4~7 goes to the High Priority queue. For traffic<br />
from ports configured for port-based priority that exit port 1, the Low Priority<br />
queue traffic is marked priority 0, and the High Priority queue traffic (from<br />
the MG(8) on port 4 and the IPC on port 6) is marked priority 4. The<br />
Ethernet switch is configured for special handling of priority 4 traffic and<br />
priority 5 traffic for the IP telephones off the HUB(8) on its adjoining port.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> 3 - 61
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
3 - 62 Advanced Applications
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Function Time Chart Appendix A<br />
SECTION 1 TIME CHART<br />
Time<br />
Pause Time<br />
Selection<br />
DP Interdigit Time<br />
Selection<br />
Hookflash Time<br />
Selection<br />
Hold Recall Time<br />
Selection<br />
(Non-Exclusive<br />
Hold)<br />
Automatic Redial<br />
Time Selection<br />
Start Time<br />
Selection<br />
The chart on the following pages provides a list of times that can be programmed in<br />
the system. The information is listed numerically by Memory Block number. A brief<br />
definition and Minimum, Default, and Maximum values are given for each time.<br />
Memory<br />
Block<br />
Table A-1 Function Time Chart<br />
Definition<br />
1-1-00 Time when no signal is being<br />
sent to a CO/PBX line.<br />
1-1-01 Minimum time between dialing<br />
signals in Dial Pulse dialing.<br />
1-1-02 Timing of a CO/PBX hookflash<br />
from the Recall key of a<br />
Multiline Terminal or a Single<br />
Line <strong>Telephone</strong> to the CO/PBX<br />
line.<br />
1-1-03* The time before a held CO/PBX<br />
line recalls the station that put<br />
that line on hold.<br />
1-1-04 Defines the redial timing<br />
parameters when automatic<br />
redial is set to a busy CO/PBX<br />
number.<br />
1-1-05* The time after dialing before<br />
the system starts the elapsed<br />
Call Time.<br />
Value<br />
Minimum Default Maximum<br />
1.0s 3.0s 3.0s<br />
A B B<br />
20ms 600ms 5.0s<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> A - 1<br />
25s<br />
000s<br />
(No Limit)<br />
Table 1 001<br />
Table 2 001<br />
Table 3 001<br />
2s<br />
00s<br />
(No Limit)<br />
25s<br />
060s<br />
030<br />
060<br />
002<br />
10s<br />
02s<br />
∞<br />
255s<br />
050 sec.<br />
100 sec.<br />
015<br />
Attempts<br />
70s<br />
99s
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Time<br />
CO/PBX Incoming<br />
Ringing Alarm Time<br />
Selection<br />
Tie Line Delay<br />
Ringing Time<br />
Selection<br />
Station Transfer/<br />
Camp-On Recall<br />
Time Selection<br />
Trunk Queuing<br />
Timeout Selection<br />
CO/PBX Prepause<br />
Time Selection<br />
Hold Recall Time<br />
Selection<br />
(Exclusive)<br />
First Delay<br />
Announcement<br />
Start Time<br />
Selection<br />
First to Second<br />
Delay<br />
Announcement<br />
Interval Time<br />
Selection<br />
Second Delay<br />
Announcement<br />
Repeat Interval<br />
Time Selection<br />
Memory<br />
Block<br />
Table A-1 Function Time Chart (Continued)<br />
Definition<br />
1-1-06* The time after an incoming<br />
CO/PBX call is detected before<br />
the ringing tone changes to a<br />
different ringing tone level<br />
when the call is not answered.<br />
1-1-07* The time between when a<br />
telephone rings (accessed by a<br />
ringing call in the Tie/DID line)<br />
and calls can start ringing at<br />
other assigned stations when it<br />
is not answered.<br />
1-1-12* The time before a ring<br />
transferred call recalls to the<br />
station that transferred the call.<br />
1-1-37* The time a station with Trunk<br />
Queue set rings before the<br />
queue is automatically<br />
canceled.<br />
1-1-57 The time before dialed digits<br />
are sent over a CO/PBX line<br />
after the line is seized.<br />
1-1-63* The time (minutes) for<br />
Exclusive Hold Recall. No limit<br />
disables this feature.<br />
1-1-71 The time (seconds) between<br />
receiving an incoming CO call<br />
and sending the First Delay<br />
Announcement to the caller.<br />
1-1-73 The time (seconds) between<br />
the end of the First Delay<br />
Announcement and the<br />
beginning of the second<br />
Second Delay Announcement.<br />
1-1-75 The time (seconds) to repeat<br />
the Second Delay<br />
Announcement.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
A - 2 Function Time Chart<br />
10s<br />
000s<br />
(No Limit)<br />
10s<br />
000s<br />
(No Limit)<br />
25s<br />
000s<br />
(No Limit)<br />
10s<br />
00s<br />
(No Limit)<br />
∞<br />
000s<br />
∞<br />
000s<br />
45s<br />
060s<br />
10s<br />
10s<br />
∞<br />
255s<br />
∞<br />
255s<br />
∞<br />
999s<br />
60s<br />
99s<br />
NON 1s 13s<br />
0.5<br />
000s<br />
(No Limit)<br />
Value<br />
Minimum Default Maximum<br />
1.0<br />
060s<br />
∞<br />
999s<br />
00 20 60<br />
00 20 ∞<br />
0 20 ∞
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Time<br />
Delayed Ringing<br />
Time Assignment<br />
(CO)<br />
ISDN DTMF<br />
Duration/Interdigit<br />
Selection<br />
ISDN / K-CCIS<br />
Interval Time<br />
Selection<br />
Internal Paging<br />
Timeout Selection<br />
Automatic Callback<br />
Release Time<br />
Selection<br />
Call Forward - No<br />
Answer Time<br />
Selection<br />
System Call Park<br />
Recall Time<br />
Selection<br />
Delayed Ringing<br />
Time Assignment<br />
(ICM)<br />
PS Out of Area<br />
Time Assignment<br />
Bounce Protect<br />
Time Selection<br />
First Digit PBR<br />
Release Time<br />
Selection<br />
Memory<br />
Block<br />
Table A-1 Function Time Chart (Continued)<br />
Definition<br />
1-1-77 The time for delayed ringing on<br />
incoming outside line calls.<br />
1-1-80 The tone duration/interdigit<br />
time (milliseconds) of DTMF<br />
signals.<br />
1-1-81* The time between each digit<br />
dialed.<br />
00s 15s 99s<br />
70/60 100/70 900/200<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> A - 3<br />
2s<br />
01s<br />
1-2-00* The time allowed for paging. 90s<br />
000s<br />
(No Limit)<br />
1-2-02* Time allowed before Automatic<br />
Callback is automatically<br />
canceled.<br />
1-2-22* The time before ICM or Trunk<br />
calls are forwarded when there<br />
is no answer.<br />
1-2-23* Time (minutes) before a parked<br />
call recalls to the station that<br />
parked the call.<br />
1-2-26 The delayed ringing time on<br />
incoming internal calls.<br />
1-2-30 The retry time when PS is Out<br />
of Area.<br />
1-3-01 The time for detecting a valid<br />
off-hook that is long enough to<br />
prevent unintentional bounce<br />
as an off-hook indication from a<br />
Single Line <strong>Telephone</strong> or Voice<br />
Mail System.<br />
1-3-03* The time that a receiver is<br />
connected when a DTMF<br />
Single Line <strong>Telephone</strong> user is<br />
dialing.<br />
30s<br />
00m<br />
(No Limit)<br />
4s<br />
01s<br />
0.5<br />
001s<br />
4s<br />
04s<br />
90s<br />
090s<br />
30m<br />
30m<br />
12s<br />
12s<br />
1.0<br />
060s<br />
32s<br />
99s<br />
∞<br />
255s<br />
30m<br />
99m<br />
60s<br />
99s<br />
10.0<br />
999s<br />
00 10s 99<br />
00 08s 99<br />
0ms 300ms 1500ms<br />
10s<br />
01s<br />
Value<br />
Minimum Default Maximum<br />
10s<br />
10s<br />
60s<br />
99s
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Time<br />
Hookflash Start<br />
Time Selection<br />
Hookflash End<br />
Time Selection<br />
Voice Mail DTMF<br />
Delay Time<br />
Selection<br />
Voice Mail<br />
Disconnect Time<br />
Selection<br />
Voice Mail DTMF<br />
Duration/Interdigit<br />
Time Selection<br />
Tandem Transfer<br />
Automatic<br />
Disconnect Time<br />
Selection<br />
Automated<br />
Attendant First Digit<br />
PBR Release Time<br />
Selection<br />
Automated<br />
Attendant Transfer<br />
Delayed Ringing<br />
Time Selection<br />
Automated<br />
Attendant No<br />
Answer Disconnect<br />
Time Selection<br />
Automated<br />
Attendant Answer<br />
Delay Time<br />
Assignment<br />
Memory<br />
Block<br />
Table A-1 Function Time Chart (Continued)<br />
Definition<br />
1-3-05 The minimum hookflash time<br />
(milliseconds) for a Single Line<br />
<strong>Telephone</strong> or Voice Mail<br />
System before a valid<br />
hookflash is detected.<br />
1-3-06 The maximum hookflash time<br />
from a Single Line <strong>Telephone</strong><br />
to receive a second dial tone<br />
(HST = Hookflash Start Time).<br />
1-3-08 The delay time before DTMF<br />
tones are sent from the VMI<br />
port.<br />
1-3-09 The time a disconnect signal is<br />
sent to Voice Mail equipment.<br />
1-3-10 The DTMF duration/interdigit<br />
time (milliseconds) for voice<br />
mail.<br />
1-4-00 The maximum time (minutes)<br />
before the system automatic<br />
disconnects a Trunk-to-Trunk<br />
connection.<br />
1-4-01* The time a PBR circuit remains<br />
connected after the Automated<br />
Attendant message is played<br />
when a call comes in through<br />
an Automated Attendant trunk.<br />
1-4-02* The time a call rings at the<br />
destination before the<br />
Automated Attendant rings a<br />
predetermined station.<br />
1-4-03* The time the Automated<br />
Attendant rings a station before<br />
automatic disconnect.<br />
1-4-13 The time before the Automated<br />
Attendant answers an incoming<br />
CO/PBX call.<br />
40 290 790<br />
00<br />
(HST + 0<br />
ms.)<br />
07<br />
(HST + 700<br />
ms.)<br />
15<br />
(HST +<br />
1500 ms.)<br />
0s 1s 8s<br />
0.5s 1.5s 3.5s<br />
60/70 110/80 810/190<br />
000 060 999<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
A - 4 Function Time Chart<br />
5s<br />
01s<br />
10s<br />
00s<br />
(No Limit)<br />
1m<br />
001s<br />
Value<br />
Minimum Default Maximum<br />
20s<br />
20s<br />
∞<br />
00s<br />
2m<br />
120s<br />
60s<br />
99s<br />
∞<br />
99s<br />
4m<br />
255s<br />
00s 04s 99s
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Time<br />
Automated<br />
Attendant 1 st to 2 nd<br />
Delay<br />
Announcement<br />
Interval Time<br />
Selection<br />
Automated<br />
Attendant Delay<br />
Announcement<br />
Disconnect Time<br />
Selection<br />
SMDR Valid Call<br />
Time Assignment<br />
Doorphone Display<br />
Time Selection<br />
External Paging<br />
Timeout Selection<br />
External Speaker<br />
Chime Start Time<br />
Selection<br />
PBR Interdigit<br />
Release Time<br />
Selection<br />
System Refresh<br />
Time Assignment<br />
VRS Message<br />
Recording Time<br />
Selection<br />
Memory<br />
Block<br />
Table A-1 Function Time Chart (Continued)<br />
Definition<br />
1-4-19 The time between Automated<br />
Attendant Delay<br />
Announcement messages.<br />
1-4-20 The time the Automated<br />
Attendant rings the stations<br />
before disconnecting the caller.<br />
1-5-25 The Minimum call time of an<br />
outside call before the system<br />
provides an SMDR report (Set<br />
from 0~99 seconds in<br />
10-second increments).<br />
1-7-01* The time a doorphone call<br />
signals a station before it times<br />
out.<br />
1-7-06* The time (minutes) before an<br />
external paging is automatically<br />
disconnected.<br />
1-7-09 The delay time (milliseconds)<br />
between when an external<br />
paging code is dialed and when<br />
the paging alert tone is<br />
provided.<br />
1-8-10 The interdigit release time for<br />
the PBR.<br />
1-8-11 The system refresh time during<br />
idle periods.<br />
1-8-12 The recording time and number<br />
of messages for each VRS<br />
channel.<br />
ACD Hunt Time 1-8-40 The time for hunting among<br />
ACD/UCD agents that do not<br />
answer a call.<br />
0s 4m 20m<br />
0s 30s 20m<br />
000s 040s 099s<br />
(10-second<br />
increments)<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> A - 5<br />
10s<br />
01s<br />
0.5<br />
000s<br />
(No Limit)<br />
Value<br />
Minimum Default Maximum<br />
10s<br />
10s<br />
5.0<br />
300s<br />
90s<br />
99s<br />
∞<br />
999s<br />
000 700 1500<br />
3s 7s 10s<br />
NON 4H 24H<br />
15s x16 15s x16 120s x2<br />
10s 10s ∞
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Time<br />
ACD/UCD Overflow<br />
Time Selection<br />
Centralized BLF<br />
Send Time<br />
Assignment<br />
Trunk DTMF<br />
Duration/Interdigit<br />
Selection<br />
Tie Line Prepause<br />
Time Selection<br />
Tie Line Answer<br />
Detect Time<br />
Selection<br />
Tie Line Release<br />
Detect Time<br />
Selection<br />
Tie Line/CO/PBX<br />
Incoming Signal<br />
Detect Time<br />
Selection<br />
Tie Line Loop<br />
Off-Guard Time<br />
Selection<br />
Tie Line Length of<br />
Wink Signal<br />
Selection<br />
Memory<br />
Block<br />
Table A-1 Function Time Chart (Continued)<br />
Definition<br />
1-12-02 The maximum time (seconds) a<br />
waiting ACD/UCD call remains<br />
at an ACD/UCD group before<br />
overflowing to a specified<br />
Station or Station Hunt group.<br />
1-15-17 The time (seconds) for sending<br />
BLF information across the<br />
K-CCIS Network.<br />
3-15 The tone duration/interdigit<br />
time (milliseconds) of DTMF<br />
signals.<br />
3-16 The prepause time (seconds)<br />
when the originating side can<br />
send dial pulse or DTMF to a<br />
distant system.<br />
3-17 The time (milliseconds)<br />
between when the receiving<br />
system answers and the time<br />
when it is recognized as an<br />
answer.<br />
3-18 The time (milliseconds)<br />
between when the circuit<br />
disconnection is detected on<br />
the Tie line on the distant<br />
system side and when it is<br />
recognized as Tie Line<br />
Release.<br />
3-19 The time (milliseconds)<br />
between when an incoming<br />
signal is detected from another<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> system and the<br />
acknowledgment signal is sent<br />
(Expressed as Wink Start/<br />
Delay/COI).<br />
3-20 Off-guard time (seconds) to<br />
prevent noise that may cause<br />
the system to be unable to<br />
answer an incoming Tie line.<br />
3-21 The time (milliseconds) of a<br />
Wink pulse that is sent to<br />
another <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> system.<br />
10 60 ∞<br />
4 4 16<br />
60/70 110/80 810/190<br />
0 0 13.0<br />
0 520 1950<br />
0 520 1950<br />
0/0/50<br />
00 (LK 1)<br />
Value<br />
Minimum Default Maximum<br />
390/90/200<br />
03 (LK 4)<br />
1950/450/<br />
800<br />
15 (LK 8)<br />
0.0 2.0 13.0<br />
30 180 480<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
A - 6 Function Time Chart
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
Time<br />
Tie Line Length of<br />
Delay Signal<br />
Selection<br />
Tie Line Incoming<br />
Interdigit Timeout<br />
Selection<br />
Tie Line Wink/Delay<br />
Signal Detect<br />
Timeout Selection<br />
Disconnect<br />
Recognition Time<br />
Selection<br />
Automatic Release<br />
Signal Detection<br />
Selection<br />
DIT/ANA Delay<br />
Answer Time<br />
Selection<br />
Memory<br />
Block<br />
Table A-1 Function Time Chart (Continued)<br />
Definition<br />
3-22 The time (milliseconds) a delay<br />
pulse is sent to another system.<br />
3-24 The maximum time an address<br />
signal is missing during<br />
incoming call detection before<br />
an error tone is returned to the<br />
other system.<br />
3-25 The maximum time for<br />
receiving an acknowledgment<br />
signal from a distant system<br />
before sending a busy tone.<br />
3-33 The minimum time (seconds)<br />
before a disconnected circuit<br />
can be accessed again.<br />
3-40 The Signal detection time<br />
(milliseconds) for CO/PBX line<br />
release after a disconnect<br />
signal is received from the<br />
distant CO or PBX.<br />
3-61* The time an incoming CO/PBX<br />
call rings before changing to a<br />
DIT/ANA call.<br />
0 300 4500<br />
1s 6s ∞<br />
1s 7s ∞<br />
0 0.3 1.5<br />
0 350 ∞<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> A - 7<br />
0s<br />
00s<br />
(No Time)<br />
Value<br />
Minimum Default Maximum<br />
* With R3000 or higher, these Memory Blocks have changes in Minimum, Default, or Maximum values<br />
that are indicated by bold figures<br />
0s<br />
00s<br />
60s<br />
99s
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
A - 8 Function Time Chart
Character Codes Appendix B<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
SECTION 1 CHARACTER ASSIGNMENT<br />
1.1 Character Code Tables<br />
The character code tables are used when entering some functions provided<br />
with the <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> system.<br />
Characters can be entered using the dial pad instead of the Character Code<br />
Tables. Refer to 1.2 Dial Pad Character Assignment.<br />
� Codes 166~221 and 250~252 are used for Japanese characters only.<br />
Character Code Character Code Character Code<br />
BLANK 032 @ 064 \ 096<br />
! 033 A 065 a 097<br />
|| 034 B 066 b 098<br />
# 035 C 067 c 099<br />
$ 036 D 068 d 100<br />
% 037 E 069 e 101<br />
& 038 F 070 f 102<br />
‘ 039 G 071 g 103<br />
( 040 H 072 h 104<br />
) 041 I 073 i 105<br />
* 042 J 074 j 106<br />
+ 043 K 075 k 107<br />
, 044 L 076 l 108<br />
— 045 M 077 m 109<br />
– 046 N 078 n 110<br />
/ 047 O 079 o 111<br />
0 048 P 080 p 112<br />
1 049 Q 081 q 113<br />
2 050 R 082 r 114<br />
3 051 S 083 s 115<br />
4 052 T 084 t 116<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> B - 1
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Character Code Character Code Character Code<br />
5 053 U 085 u 117<br />
6 054 V 086 v 118<br />
7 055 W 087 w 119<br />
8 056 X 088 x 120<br />
9 057 Y 089 y 121<br />
: 058 Z 090 z 122<br />
; 059 [ 091 { 123<br />
< 060 ¥ 092 | 124<br />
= 061 ] 093 } 125<br />
> 062 ^ 094 Æ 126<br />
? 063 _ 095 ¨ 127<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
B - 2 Character Codes
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> B - 3
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
1.2 Dial Pad Character Assignment<br />
Refer to the applicable table and procedure example.<br />
Table B-1 System Data Input<br />
Press 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Redial<br />
1 st<br />
2 nd<br />
3 rd<br />
4 th<br />
5 th<br />
6 th<br />
7 th<br />
8 th<br />
9 th<br />
10 th<br />
11 th<br />
1 A D G J M P T W � 0<br />
@ B E H K N Q U X ! +<br />
[ C F I L O R V Y “ ,<br />
¥ a d g j m S t Z # -<br />
] b e h k n p u w $ .<br />
^ c f i l o q v x % /<br />
2 3 4 5 6 r 8 y & :<br />
/ To A To D To G To J To M s To T z | ;<br />
{ 7 9 ( <<br />
| To P To W ) =<br />
} To 0 ><br />
12 th � ?<br />
13 th � To �<br />
14 th<br />
To 1<br />
� Used to move cursor to left.<br />
# Used to move cursor to right.<br />
Hold Space (MB3-00) Data Clear (except MB3-00)<br />
1.2.1 Trunk Name or Number Assignment Example<br />
1. Enter Program Mode.<br />
Display shows PROGRAM MODE.<br />
2. Press LK3.<br />
Display shows 01/_.<br />
3. Press LK2.<br />
Display still shows 01/_.<br />
4. Press KK.<br />
Display shows 01/N_.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
B - 4 Character Codes
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong> Document Revision 4<br />
5. Press CC.<br />
Display shows 01/NE_.<br />
6. Press BBB.<br />
Display shows 01/NEC_.<br />
7. Press G .<br />
Display shows 01/02:OUT&IN.<br />
Table B-2 Speed Dial Name Input<br />
Press 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 � #<br />
1 st<br />
2 nd<br />
3 rd<br />
4 th<br />
5 th<br />
6 th<br />
7 th<br />
8 th<br />
9 th<br />
10 th<br />
11 th<br />
1 A D G J M P T W 0 � Space<br />
@ B E H K N Q U X ! +<br />
[ C F I L O R V Y “ ,<br />
¥ a d g j m S t Z # -<br />
] b e h k n p u w $ .<br />
^ c f i l o q v x % /<br />
2 3 4 5 6 r 8 y & :<br />
/ To A To D To G To J To M s To T z � ;<br />
{ 7 9 ( <<br />
| To P To W ) =<br />
} To 0 ><br />
12 th � ?<br />
13 th � To �<br />
14 th<br />
To 1<br />
Conf Clear and 1 character back from the cursor.<br />
1.2.2 Enter Speed Dial Name<br />
1. Press inactive A .<br />
Display is blank.<br />
2. Press B .<br />
Display shows:_.<br />
3. KK.<br />
Press<br />
Display shows 00:_.<br />
4. I. Press<br />
Display shows 00:0:_.<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> B - 5
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
5. ABCDE.<br />
Press<br />
Display shows 00:0:12345_.<br />
6. Press H .<br />
Display shows 00=_.<br />
7. Press FF.<br />
Display shows 00=N_.<br />
8. CC.<br />
Press<br />
Display shows 00=NE_.<br />
9. BBB.<br />
Press<br />
Display shows 00=NEC_.<br />
10. B. Press<br />
Display shows 00=NECA_.<br />
11. F. Press<br />
Display shows 00=NECAM_.<br />
12. Press A .<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
B - 6 Character Codes
Display Abbreviations Appendix C<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Abbreviations found in the display are defined in below.<br />
Table C-1 Abbreviations used in Multiline Terminal Displays<br />
ADD/DEL : Addition/Deletion DESG : Designation<br />
AL : All DGT : Digit<br />
ALM : Alarm DISP : Display<br />
ANS : Answer DISTM : Disconnection Recognition<br />
Time<br />
ANSWR : Answer DIVERT : Diversion<br />
ASSGN : Assignment DLY : Delay Signal Time<br />
AUT : Automatic DP : Dial Pulse<br />
AUTANS : Autoanswer DSS : Direct Station Selection<br />
BLANK : Service Class DY : Day Mode<br />
BNCE : Bounce FLSH : Flash<br />
BTN : Button GUARD : Outgoing Guard Time<br />
CAL : Call H : High<br />
CANCLD : Canceled HR : Hour<br />
CKT : Circuit ICM : Intercom (Extension)<br />
CNF : Confirmation IMDT : Immediate<br />
CL : Class IN : Incoming<br />
CLD : CO Line Display INC : Incoming Signal Detection Time<br />
Assignment<br />
CLR : Clear INDV : Individual<br />
CLS : Class INTRPT : Interruption<br />
CONN : Connection L : Low<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
<strong>Programming</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> C - 1
Document Revision 4 <strong>Electra</strong> <strong>Elite</strong> <strong>IPK</strong><br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Table C-1 Abbreviations used in Multiline Terminal Displays (Continued)<br />
LCD : Liquid Crystal Display PBX : Private Branch Exchange<br />
LN : Line PRE : Prepause Time Selection<br />
LOOP : Loop Off-Guard Assignment PRNT : Print<br />
LNR/SPD : Last Number/Speed Dial PTRN : Pattern<br />
M : Medium PV : Tie Line<br />
MAN : <strong>Manual</strong> PVT : Tie Line<br />
MF : Dual-Tone Multifrequency<br />
(DTMF)<br />
PWRFAIL : Power Failure<br />
MIN : Minimum RCV : Receiving<br />
MOH : Music On Hold RINGTONE : Ringing Tone<br />
MSTR : Master RCVR : Receiver<br />
NUM : Number RES : Restriction<br />
NT : Night Mode RLY : Relay<br />
OUT : Outgoing RNGTONE : Ringing Tone<br />
OG TM : Outgoing Time OUt Assignment RT : Route<br />
OV : Over RT ADV : Route Advance Block<br />
PAD AT : PAD Pattern A Transmission<br />
Assignment<br />
PAD AR : PAD Pattern A Receiving<br />
Assignment<br />
PAD BT : PAD Pattern B Transmission<br />
Assignment<br />
PAD BR : PAD Pattern B Receiving<br />
Assignment<br />
RVS : Reversal<br />
SDT : Second Dial Tone Assignment<br />
SEND : Transmission<br />
SEL : Selection<br />
PBR : Pushbutton Signal Receiver SLT : Single Line <strong>Telephone</strong><br />
SPD : Speed Dial TMR : Timer<br />
ST : Start TRNS : Transfer<br />
TEL : <strong>Telephone</strong> TRK : Trunk<br />
TERM : Terminating TRK GP : Trunk Group<br />
TMD : Timed WDSD : Wink/Delay Signal Detection<br />
Timeout<br />
___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
C - 2 Display Abbreviations
PROGRAMMING MANUAL<br />
NEC Unified Solutions, Inc.<br />
Document Revision 4<br />
(Release 4000/4500)